ALDINE INDEPENDANT SCHOOL DISTRICT AISD LANE …...general description: project name: aisd lane...

PROJECT MANUALFOR

AISD LANE SCHOOL RENOVATIONALDINE INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT

OWNER:ALDINE INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT 14910 ALDINE WESTFIELD ROADHOUSTON, TEXAS 77032

ARCHITECT:MORRIS ARCHITECTS, A HUITT ZOLLARS COMPANY1001 FANNIN STREET, SUITE 4040HOUSTON, TEXAS 77002

ISSUE FOR BID - 04/21/2016

ARCHITECT CIVIL ENGINEER

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT MEP ENGINEER04/21/2016

ALDI

NE W

ESTF

IELD

RD

ALDINE MEADOWS RD ALDINE MEADOWS RD

SAM HOUSTON PKWY E - TEXAS 8 BELTWAY

FRANK RD MORA

LES

RD

MORALES RD

SWAN RD

ALDINE BENDER RDALDINE BENDER RDMAYRA ST

MADGE ST

MARCIA ST

MATILDA ST

ALDI

NE W

ESTF

IELD

RD

MELISSA ST

BUSCHONG ST

INTERDRIVEW

GREENSBAYOUSITE

SECTION

GRADE/EARTH

CMU

BRICK

PRECAST CONCRETE

CAST/CUT STONE

NATURAL STONE

STEEL

ALUMINUM

BRASS/BRONZE

CONT. WOOD BLOCKING

GRAVEL

SAND

CONCRETE

DISCONT. WOOD SHIM

FINISHED WOOD

PLYWOOD

SPRAYED FIREPROOFING

BATT/BLANKET/ACOUS INSULATON

RIGID INSULATION

ROOF DECK INSULATION

EXTERIOR PLASTER & LATH

GYPSUM SHEATHING

GYPSUM WALLBOARD

BACKER ROD & SEALANT

ACOUS. CEILING

PLASITIC LAMINATE

CERAMIC/QUARRY TILE

JOINT FILLER

CARPET

GLASS/MIRROR

OR

ELEVATION

OR

NORTH ARROW

01/A-1.10

ENLARGE FLOOR PLAN REFERENCE

01A-7.20

ENLARGE DETAIL REFERENCE

01A-3.00

BUILDING SECTION

01A-3.20

WALL SECTION

01A-4.00

DETAIL SECTION

EXTERIOR ELEVATION

INTERIOR ELEVATION

11 3/4"

5"

DIMENSIONS

MATCHLINE

1 REVISION NUMBER & AFFECTED AREA

EXISTING ELEVATION

WINDOW TYPE

LEVEL NAME

0' - 0"VERTICAL ELEVATION

EX: 152' - 6"

NEW ELEVATION152' - 6"

A31

PARTITIONDESIGNATION

HOURLY "FIRERESISTIVE RATING"

22

ROOM NAME ROOM NAME & NUMBERINDENTIFICATION

PARTITION TYPERE: PARTITION SHEETS A-5.10 & A-5.11

1001A DOOR/OPENING IDENTIFICATION

1001

EXIT SIGN w/ CHEVRON(DIRECTIONAL ARROWS)

FLUORESCENTLIGHT FIXTURE

INCANDESCENTLIGHT FIXTURE

SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION

01A-4.00

OR

01A-2.00

01/A-1.13

01/A-1.14

09111.A02 -METAL STUDFRAMING

SPECIFICATIONSECTION

DESCRIPTION

KEYNOTE

N

01/A2.00 290

249

45

45

N LOOP W FWY

INTE

RSTA

TE

HARDYTOLL RD

TEXAS 8 BELTWAY

NSAM

HOUSTONPKW

YE

330

PASADENA FWY

225

E LO

OP F

WY

OLD SPANISH TRAIL

S LOOP W FWY

S MAIN ST

SAM HOUSTON PWKY

8

1876

6

1093

HWY 290

WESTPARK TOLLWAY

SOUTHWEST FWY

59

610

WES

T LO

OP S

E SA

M HO

USTO

N PK

WY

S

S SAM HOUSTON PKWY E

35

288

521359

GRANDPKW

Y

WESTHEIMER PKWYFRY RD

FRY

RD

HWY 9

9

FRY

RD FM 1960 RD W

CYPRESS CREEK PKWYFM 1960 RD E

WILL CLAYTON PKWY

NORTHWEST FWY

N SAM HOUSTON PWKY W

SYNO

TT R

D

I-10KATY FWY

99

BEAUMONT HWY

45

45

90

90

I-10

146

SITE69

GENERAL DESCRIPTION:

PROJECT NAME: AISD LANE SCHOOLPROJECT LOCATION: HOUSTON, TEXAS

APPLICABLE CODES:HARRIS COUNTY BUILDING CODE (HCBC) -

2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE WITH AMENDMENTS (EFFECTIVE MARCH 1, 2015)2012 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE WITH AMENDMENTS (EFFECTIVE MARCH 1, 2015)2012 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE - 2012 IECC CLIMATE ZONE 2A*TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS (TAS) 2012 - EABPRJB5819982

BUILDING DESCRIPTION:4,261 SF, SINGLE-STORY EDUCATION FACILITY. FACILITY SERVES A SPECIAL NEEDSPOPULATION

REQUIREMENTS BASED ON OCCUPANCY / CONSTRUCTION TYPE:OCCUPANCY GROUP:GROUP E - EDUCATION (303.1) NON-SPRINKLEREDMIXED OCCUPANCY SEPARATION: 0-HR; MIXED USE, NON-SEPARATED(SECTION 508.3.3 & TABLE 508.4)

TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION:TYPE V-B (TABLE 601), NON-SPRINKLERED

ALLOWABLE FLOOR AREA:MAXIMUM: 9,500 FEET (SEC 507.4)EXISTING FLOOR AREA PROVIDED: 4,261SF

MAX HEIGHT IN STORIES:ALLOWABLE: 1 STORY (TABLE 503, SEC. 504.2)EXISTING: 1 STORY

MAX HEIGHT IN FEET:ALLOWABLE: 40 FEET (TABLES 503/504.2)EXISTING: 18 FEET TOTAL HEIGHT

FIRE- RESISTANCE RATING REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS, TYPE V B:

STRUCTURAL FRAME: 0 HOUR (TABLE 601)EXTERIOR BEARING WALLS: 0 HOUR (TABLE 601)INTERIOR BEARING WALLS: 0 HOUR (TABLE 601)EXTERIOR NON-BEARING WALLS:0 HOUR (TABLE 601)INTERIOR NON-BEARING WALLS: 0 HOUR (TABLE 601)FLOOR CONSTRUCTION: 0 HOUR (TABLE 601)ROOFS - CEILING / ROOFS: 0 HOUR (TABLE 601)EXTERIOR DOORS AND WINDOWS:0 HOUR (TABLE 716.6)

PARAPETS:REQUIRED: NO (SECTION 705.11)MIN HEIGHT: N/A

PENTHOUSE: NONE

OCCUPANCY

OCCUPANCY LOAD FACTORS (TABLE 1004.1.2 ):EDUCATION (E): 1 OCCUPANT / 20 GROSS SF

NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS:GROSS AREA / OCCUPANCY LOAD FACTOR = NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS4,261 GSF / 20 GSF = 213 OCCUPANTS

IF DETAIL TITLE IS CLOUDED,ENTIRE DETAIL IS REVISED

IF SHEET NUMBER IS CLOUDED ,SHEET IS ADDED OR RENUMBERED

IF SHEET TITLE IS CLOUDED,ENTIRE SHEET IS REVISED

C

S

E

E

I

T ER

SREG

EN

R

A N BA R

D A

T

HICT

E

T

TA

S

E5 8 9 5

O F T E

XAS

D

Drawing Number

Project Number

Drawing Name

Issue

DescriptionDateNo.

Scale:

1001 Fannin Street, Suite 4040 | Houston, TX 77002 USAPhone 713.622.1180 | Fax 713.622.7021

www.morris-hz.com

MORRIS ARCHITECTSARCHITECT

Project Name

Project Team

04/21/2016

C:\U

sers\

lavell

.fish\ D

ocum

e nts\

AIS D

Lane

Scho

olRe

nova

tion_

lavell

.fish. r

vt4/2

6 /201

611:0

1:33 A

M

As indicated

LANE SCHOOL RENOVATION2001 ALDINE BENDER ROAD HOUSTONTX 77032

APRIL 21, 2016

R305675.01

PROJECTINFORMATION,ABBREVIATIONS,SYMBOLS & LEGEND

G0.01

ALDINE INDEPENDANT SCHOOL DISTRICTOWNER

STANLEY SPURLING & HAMILTON, INC.CIVIL ENGINEER

STANTON ENGINEERING GROUPMEP ENGINEER

M2L ASSOCIATES, INC.LANDSCAPE CONSULTANT

1 : 9600VICINITY MAP 04

STOR STORAGESTRUCT STRUCTURE/STRUCTURALS/AD SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSERSUSP SUSPENDEDSW SWITCHSYN SYNTHETIC

TKBD TACKBOARDTEL TELEPHONETTC TELEPHONE TERMINAL

CABINETTV TELEVISIONTEMP TEMPEREDTRZO TERRAZZOTCOC TEXTURE COATING ON

CONCRETETHK THICK(NESS)THRES THRESHOLDTOC TOP OF CURBTOS TOP OF STEELTOSS TOP OF STRUCTURAL

SLABTRANS TRANSFORMERT TREADTYP TYPICAL

UL UNDERWRITERSLABORATORY

UofC UNIVERSITY OFCALIFORNIA

UNO UNLESS NOTEDOTHERWISE

UR URINAL

VAC VACUUMVERT VERTICALVEST VESTIBULEVCT VINYL COMPOSITE TILEVWC VINYL WALLCOVERING

WH WALL HUNGWC WATER CLOSETWR WATER RESISTANTWP WATERPROOF(ING)WT WEIGHTWWF WELD WIRE FABRICWF WIDE FLANGEW WIDTHWDW WINDOWW/ WITHW/I WITHINW/O WITHOUTWD WOODW.P. WORK POINTWI WROUGHT IRON

& ANDANGLE

@ ATCENTERLINE

[ CHANNEL/ PER

PLATEROUND/DIAMETERSQUARE

GR GRADE/GRADINGGMP GUARANTEED MAXIMUM

PRICEGD GUARDGYP. GYPSUM

HDCP HANDICAPPEDHDW HARDWAREHDWD HARDWOODHD HEADHVAC HEATING/VENTILATING/AIR

CONDITIONINGH HEIGHTHC HOLLOW COREHM HOLLOW METALHORIZ HORIZONTALHP HORSEPOWERHB HOSE BIBBHR HOURHYD HYDRANT

INCAND INCANDESCENTIN INCHINCL INCLUDEINFO INFORMATIONID INSIDE DIAMETERIPS INSIDE PIPE SIZEINSUL INSULATION/INSULATINGINT INTERIOR

JAN JANITORJT JOINTJST JOIST

LAM LAMINATE(D)LAV LAVATORYLH LEFT HANDLGTH LENGTHLV LEVELLT LIGHTLWT LIGHTWEIGHTLWC LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETELIN LINEARLL LIVE LOAD

MACH MACHINEMAINT MAINTENANCEMH MANHOLEMFR MANUFACTURERMAS MASONRYMO MASONRY OPENINGMATL MATERIALMAX MAXIMUMMECH MECHANICALMEP MECHANICAL,

ELECTRICAL, PLUMBINGMEMB MEMBRANEMTL METALML METAL LATHMIN MINIMUMMISC MISCELLANEOUSMR MOISTURE RESISTANTMTD MOUNTEDMTG MOUNTINGMULL MULLION

NRC NOISE REDUCTIONCOEFFICIENT

NOM NOMINALNIC NOT IN CONTRACTNTS NOT TO SCALENO. or # NUMBER

OFF OFFICEOC ON CENTER(S)OPNG OPENINGOP OPERABLE PARTITIONOPP OPPOSITEOPH OPPOSITE HANDO/A OUTSIDE AIROD OUTSIDE DIAMETEROA OVERALLORD OVERFLOW ROOF DRAINOH OVERHEADOFCI OWNER FURNISHED,

CONTRACTOR INSTALLEDOFOI OWNER FURNISHED,

OWNER INSTALLED

PTD PAINTEDPR PAIRPNL PANELPRKG PARKINGPART PARTITIONPVMT PAVEMENTPVG PAVINGPERF PERFORATEDPLAST PLASTERPLAS PLASTICPLBG PLUMBINGPLWD PLYWOODPOL POLISHEDPVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDEPCT PORCELAIN CERAMIC TILEPCP PORTLAND CEMENT

PLASTERPCF POUNDS PER CUBIC

FOOT/FEETPSF POUNDS PER SQUARE

FOOT/FEETPSI POUNDS PER SQUARE

INCHP/C PRECASTPFP PREFINISHED PANELP.L. PROPERTY LINE

QTY QUANTITYQT QUARRY TILE

RAD RADIUSRECEP RECEPTACLERECEPT RECEPTIONREC RECESSEDRECOM RECOMMENDATIONRE: REFER TORCP REFLECTED CEILING PLANREG REGULATIONREINF REINFORCEDREBAR REINFORCING BARREQD REQUIREDRES RESILIENTRET RETURNR/A RETURN AIRR/AG RETURN AIR GRILLEREV REVISIONRH RIGHT HANDROW RIGHT OF WAYR RISERRD ROOF DRAINRFG ROOFINGRM ROOM

SCHED SCHEDULESECT SECTIONSHTHG SHEATHINGSHT SHEETSHLV SHELVES/SHELVINGSIM SIMILARSC SOLID CORESTC SOUND TRANSMISSION

COEFFICIENTSPEC SPECIFICATIONSQ SQUARESF SQUARE FOOT/FEETSTAB STABILIZE(D)SSTL STAINLESS STEELSTD STANDARDSTA STATIONSTL STEEL

AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOORAP ACCESS PANELACOUS ACOUSTICALADJ ADJACENTADJUST ADJUSTABLEAGG AGGREGATEA/C AIR CONDITIONINGAHU AIR HANDLING UNITALT ALTERNATEALUM ALUMINUMAB ANCHOR BOLTANOD ANODIZEDAPPROX APPROXIMATELYARCH ARCHITECT(URAL)ASPH ASPHALTATN ATTENUATION /

ATTENUATINGAV AUDIO VISUALAUTO AUTOMATICAUX AUXILIARYAVE AVENUEAVG AVERAGE

B-B BACK TO BACKB&B BALLED AND BURLAPPEDBSMT BASEMENTBM BEAMBRG BEARINGB.M. BENCH MARKBTW BETWEENBLK BLOCKBLKG BLOCKINGBD. BOARDB/F BOTH FACESBOT BOTTOMBRKT BRACKETBLDG BUILDINGBUR BUILT UP ROOF(ING)

CAB CABINETC.O. CASED OPENINGCSMT CASEMENTCIP CAST IN PLACECI PIPE CAST IRON PIPECB CATCH BASINCLG CEILINGCEM CEMENTCTR CENTERC-C CENTER TO CENTERCT CERAMIC TILECKBD CHALKBOARDCLR CLEAR(ANCE)CCTV CLOSED CIRCUIT

TELEVISIONCL CLOSETCFMF COLD FORMED METAL

FRAMINGCOL COLUMNCOMP COMPOSITIONCOMPRES COMPRESSIBLECONC CONCRETECMU CONCRETE MASONRY

UNITCOND CONDITIONCONF CONFERENCECONST CONSTRUCTIONCONT CONTINUOUSCONTR CONTRACTORCFCI CONTRACTOR

FURNISHED,CONTRACTOR INSTALLED

CJ CONTROL JOINTCG CORNER GUARDCORR CORRIDORCORRU CORRUGATEDCNTR COUNTERCTSK COUNTERSINKCU FT CUBIC FOOT/FEETCU YD CUBIC YARDC CURB

DMPFG DAMP PROOFINGDL DEAD LOADDEFL DEFLECTIOND DEPTHDTL DETAILDIAG DIAGONALDIA DIAMETERDIM DIMENSIONDISC DISCONNECTDISP DISPENSERDR DOORDBL DOUBLEDN DOWNDS DOWNSPOUTDWG DRAWINGDF DRINKING FOUNTAINDWC DRYWALL FURRING

CHANNEL

EA EACHEW EACH WAYESR ELASTIC SHEET ROOFINGELAS ELASTIC/ELASTOMERICEWC ELECTRIC WATER

COOLEREWH ELECTRIC WATER HEATERELEC ELECTRICALEL ELEVATIONELEV ELEVATOREMER EMERGENCYEQ EQUALEQUIP EQUIPMENTEXH EXHAUST(E) / EXIST EXISTINGEXPAN EXPANSIONEJ EXPANSION JOINTEP EXPLOSION PROOFEXP EXPOSEDEXT EXTERIOREFOB EXTERIOR FACE OF

BUILDING

FM FACTORY MUTUALFCU FAN COIL UNITFIN FINISH/FINISHEDFA FIRE ALARMFC FIRE CODEFEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER

CABINETFHC FIRE HOSE CABINETFH FIRE HYDRANTFVC FIRE VALVE CABINETFRPF FIREPROOFFIXT FIXTUREFLSHG FLASHINGF.P.W. FLOOD PROTECTIONFLR FLOORFD FLOOR DRAINFLRG FLOORINGFL FLOW LINEFLUOR FLUORESCENTFSEC FOOD SERVICE

EQUIPMENTCONTRACTOR

FT FOOT/FEETFTG FOOTINGFS FULL SIZEFURN FURNISH(ED)FURR FURRED/FURRING

GA GAGEGAL GALLONGALV GALVANIZEDGI GALVANIZED IRONGEN GENERALGC GENERAL CONTRACTORGL GLASS/GLAZING

21N/AABBREVIATIONS 1" = 1'-0"MATERIAL INDICATIONS 16 1 1/2" = 1'-0"SYMBOLS LEGEND 11

1 : 8000LOCATION MAP 03

12" = 1'-0"CODE ANALYSIS 01

1 1/2" = 1'-0"SHEET REVISION CLOUD LEGEND 10

1 04/01/2016 ISSUE FOR PERMIT2 04/15/2016 ISSUE FOR 100% CD REVIEW3 04/21/2016 IISUE FOR BID

Lane School Renovation TABLE OF CONTENTSAldine Independent School District DOCUMENT 00 0110MA No. R305675.01 SBA-16105

DOCUMENT 00 0110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

Document 00 0101 Project Title PageDocument 00 0110 Table of Contents

AVAILABLE INFORMATION

Document 00 3132 Geotechnical Data

PROCUREMENT AND BIDDING REQUIREMENTS

Document 00 1116 Notice to ProposersDocument 00 2113 Instructions to ProposersDocument 00 4113 Competitive Sealed Proposal FormDocument 00 4516 Proposer QualificationsDocument 00 4518 Subcontractor Qualifications

CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

Document 00 5213 Form of AgreementDocument 00 7201 General Conditions of the Contract for ConstructionDocument 00 8000 Supplementary Conditions to the Contract for Construction

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01 1100 Summary of WorkSection 01 2513 Product Substitution ProceduresSection 01 2613 Request for Information (RFI)Section 01 2614 Request for Information FormSection 01 3119 Project MeetingsSection 01 3200 Construction Progress DocumentationSection 01 3300 Submittal ProceduresSection 01 4200 Reference Standards and DefinitionsSection 01 4529 Testing Laboratory ServicesSection 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and ControlsSection 01 6000 Product RequirementsSection 01 7329 Cutting and PatchingSection 01 7410 Cleaning UpSection 01 7700 Closeout Procedures

DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION

Section 02 4116 Demolition

DIVISIONS 3 THRU 5 CONCRETE

No Sections Required

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 0110-1


DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITE

Section 06 1000 Rough CarpentrySection 06 2200 Finish Carpentry and Millwork

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07 5900 Membrane Roof PatchingSection 07 9200 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 8 OPENINGS

Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal FramesSection 08 1423 Plastic Faced Wood DoorsSection 08 3113 Access Doors and PanelsSection 08 7100 Door Hardware

DIVISION 9 FINISHES

Section 09 2900 Gypsum BoardSection 09 3000 TilingSection 09 5100 Acoustical CeilingsSection 09 6500 Resilient FlooringSection 09 6800 CarpetingSection 09 9100 Painting and Coating

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

Section 10 2813 Toilet AccessoriesSection 10 7326 Aluminum Walkway Coverings

DIVISIONS 11 THRU 21


DIVISION 22 PLUMBING

Section 22 00 00 General Plumbing RequirementsSection 22 05 00 Common Work Results For PlumbingSection 22 07 00 Plumbing InsulationSection 22 11 00 Building Water DistributionSection 22 13 00 Building Sanitary SewerageSection 22 16 00 Building Natural Gas Piping Section 22 42 00 Commercial Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 23 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

Section 23 00 00 General HVAC RequirementsSection 23 07 00 HVAC InsulationSection 23 09 23 Direct Digital Control System for HVACSection 23 31 00 HVAC Ducts and CasingsSection 23 33 00 Air Duct AccessoriesSection 23 34 00 HVAC FansSection 23 37 13 Air Outlets and InletsSection 23 74 16 Packaged Rooftop Units

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 0110-2


DIVISIONS 24 AND 25


DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL

Section 26 00 00 General Electrical RequirementsSection 26 05 00 Common Work Results for ElectricalSection 26 09 23 Lighting Control DevicesSection 26 09 43 Lighting Control EquipmentSection 26 24 00 Switchboards and PanelboardsSection 26 27 26 Wiring DevicesSection 26 28 00 Low-voltage Circuit Protective DevicesSection 26 51 00 Interior LightingSection 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS

Section 27 10 00 Structured CablingSection 27 11 00 Equipment Room FittingsSection 27 15 00 Horizontal CablingSection 27 16 00 Connecting Cords, Devices and AdaptersSection 27 41 00 Integrated Audio Video Systems and EquipmentSection 27 51 23 Intercommunications and Program Systems

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

Section 28 20 00 CCTV Surveillance SystemSection 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm

DIVISIONS 29 AND 30


DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK

Section 311000 Site ClearingSection 312000 Earth Moving

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

Section 320190 Landscape MaintenanceSection 321216 Asphalt PavingSection 32 3113 Chain Link Fences and GatesSection 329450 General Use CompostSection 329500 Tree Preservation

DIVISION 33 UTILITIES

Section 334100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 0110-3

Lane School Renovation NOTICE TO PROPOSERSAldine Independent School District DOCUMENT 00 0116MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

DOCUMENT 00 0116 - NOTICE TO PROPOSERS

Proposals will be received for the following project:

Lane School Renovation for

Aldine Independent School District

Proposals will be received by the Owner until 2:00 pm CDST, May 17, 2016, at the following location:

ALDINE INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICTADMINISTRATION BUILDING BOARD ROOM2520 W. W. Thorne DriveHouston, Texas 77032

Proposals will be publicly opened and read aloud. All proposals received after the closing time will bereturned to the Proposer unopened.

Drawings and specifications may be obtained from the Aldine Independent School District AdministrationAnnex at 1617 Lauder Road, Houston, Texas 77039. Proposers may also obtain additional proposaldocuments from Aldine I.S.D. website. Proposal documents will be available athttp://www.aldine.k12.tx.us/cms/main.

Pre-proposal meeting will be held on Tuesday, May 4, 2016, at 2:00 p.m. CDST at the Lane School, 2001Aldine Bender Road, Houston, TX 77032, unless notified otherwise. Additional site visits will be discussedat the meeting. All interested Proposers are encouraged to attend.

Aldine Independent School District reserves the right to reject any/and all proposers or to waive any andall formalities in the proposal process. Selection criteria and additional proposal information are publishedin the Project Manual. Each Proposer shall submit data in regard to his qualifications as a Contractorindependently of proposal, if required.

END OF DOCUMENT 00 0116

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 0116-1

Intentionally Blank

Lane School Renovation INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS Aldine Independent School District DOCUMENT 00 2113 MA No. R305675.01 SBA-16105

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-1

DOCUMENT 00 2113 - INSTRUCTIONS TO PROPOSERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RECEIPT AND OPENING OF PROPOSALS: The Board of Trustees, of the Aldine Independent School District (hereinafter called the "Owner"), invites Competitive Sealed Proposals from Bidders on the form attached hereto, for different portions of the work which shall include the furnishing of all labor, material, and equipment necessary to complete those portions the work. Proposals will be received by the Owner at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Proposals and at Owner's office publicly opened and read aloud. The envelopes containing the Proposals must be sealed, addressed to the President, Board of Trustees, Aldine Independent School District, Administration Building, 2520 W. W. Thorne Blvd., Houston, Harris County, Texas. The words "COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL" Proposal No. and the name of the project shall be clearly printed in large letters on the envelope. The name of this project to be printed on the envelope is "Lane School Renovation". The Owner may consider informal any Proposal not prepared and submitted in accordance with the provisions hereof and may waive any and all informalities, reject any and all Proposals or accept any Proposal deemed advantageous to the Owner. Any Proposal may be withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time for the opening of Proposals or authorized postponement thereof, but may not then be resubmitted. Any Proposal received after the time and date specified above shall not be considered. No Proposer may withdraw a Proposal or modify a Proposal within thirty (30) days after the actual date of the opening thereof. 1.2 QUALIFIED PROPOSERS Each Contractor desiring to bid this project shall furnish Contractor’s information, references and evidence satisfactory to the owner that has sufficient means and experience in the types of work required ensuring quality and timely completion of work in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. 1.3 PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL: Each Proposal must be submitted on the prescribed form, in duplicate. All blank spaces for Proposal prices must be filled in, in ink or typewritten, in both words and figures. The signature must be in longhand, and the completed form shall be without alterations or erasures. Proposal price and any alternate proposal price must appear on the AISD proposal form. Where Proposer is a corporation, include the name of the state of incorporation and the legal signatures of two officers authorized to bind the corporation to a contract. Each Proposal must be submitted in a sealed envelope as detailed above. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the Proposal must be enclosed in another envelope addressed as specified on the Proposal Form. Oral, telegraphic, or telephonic proposals or modifications will not be considered.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-2

1.4 BIDDING DOCUMENTS: Drawings and specifications may be obtained from the Owner as indicated in Notice to Proposers. A refundable deposit check will be required for each. Upon return of complete sets of Drawings and Specifications, in good order, within ten (10) days after bid date, deposit will be refunded. 1.5 BID SECURITY: Each Proposal must be accompanied by certified check of the Proposer, or a bid bond (prepared on A.I.A. Document A-310, duly executed by the Proposer as principal), in the amount of 5% of the total Proposal for any Proposal exceeding $25,000.00. Such checks or bid bonds will be returned promptly after the Owner and the successful Proposer have executed the Contract, or if no award has been made within 30 days after the date of the openings of Proposals, upon demand of the Proposer at any time thereafter, so long as he has not been notified of the acceptance of his Proposal. 1.6 TIME AND COMPLETION OF WORK: Proposer must agree to commence work on or before a date to be specified on the Owner/Contractor Agreement form and to fully complete the Project within the number of calendar days indicated on the Proposal Form or by such date agreed upon prior to execution of the contract. 1.7 CONDITIONS OF WORK: Each Proposer must inform himself fully of the conditions relating to the construction of the Project and the employment of labor thereon. Failure to do so will not relieve the Successful Proposer of his obligations to furnish all material and labor necessary to carry out the provision of the Contract. The Contractor, in carrying out his work must employ such methods or means as will not cause any interruption of or interference with the work of any other contractor, and the normal routine of the school. 1.8 ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS: No interpretation of the meaning of the Drawings, Specifications or other pre-bid documents will be made to any Proposer orally. All issued Addenda to the drawings and specifications are to be incorporated into the work as part of the drawings and specifications. The receipt of all Addenda shall be acknowledged on the proposal form. Every request for interpretation of documents should be in writing addressed to Morris Architects, a Huitt-Zollars Company, 1001 Fannin Street, Suite 4040, Houston, Texas, 77002, and must be received at least five days prior to the date set for the opening of Proposals. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda to the Drawings and Specifications issued by the Owner. Failure of any Proposer to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such Proposer from any obligation of the complete Contract Documents. All addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-3

1.9 SUBSTITUTION OF PRODUCTS When a specific manufacturer, trade name or material is specified or indicated in the Documents, it is to establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Written requests for substitutions shall be presented to the Architect in compliance with Section 01 2513 – Product Substitution Procedures. 1.10 SECURITY FOR FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT: For contract amounts over $25,000.00, the Contractor shall furnish a surety bond or bonds as security for faithful performance of this Contract and for the payment of all persons performing labor on the project under this Contract and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract as specified in the General Conditions included herein. The surety on such bond or bonds shall be a duly authorized surety company acceptable to the Owner. Contractor shall provide an affidavit showing proof that his bonding company meets the following criteria:

1. The Bonding Company must be domiciled in the United States. 2. The Bonding Company must be licensed in the State of Texas. 3. The Bonding Company must meet Owner's approval.

In addition to the above, the Bonding Company shall furnish to the Owner a current financial statement when requested by the Owner. 1.11 LAWS AND REGULATIONS: All applicable State Laws, municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over the project are considered as included in the Contact Documents and project requirements. 1.12 OBLIGATION OF PROPOSERS: Before submitting a proposal, proposers shall carefully examine the Drawings and Specifications and related documents, visit the site(s) of the Work and fully inform themselves as to all existing conditions and limitations, and shall include in the Proposal a sum to cover the cost of all items included in the scope of the portion(s) of the work Proposal. The Successful Proposer shall be allowed no extra compensation for any items of work not anticipated which may have been determined by such review of the documents and site visits. The Subcontractors shall check and verify all dimensions shown on the drawings and shall report any discrepancies to the Owner before proceeding with any work or the ordering of any material. The Subcontractors shall verify all measurements at the sites and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and the dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Owner before proceeding with the Work.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-4

1.13 PAYMENTS: The basis of payments on the contact will be as set forth in the Agreement. This Agreement will provide for monthly payments equivalent to ninety-five percent (95%) of the value of work performed within that month, and of the value of materials stored at the jobsite up to the first day of that month, providing the estimate is supplied to the Owner so that it is received by the time as required. 1.14 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR PROPOSERS: Each Contractor desiring to submit a Proposal this project shall furnish evidence satisfactory to the Owner that he has sufficient means and experience in the types of work required to insure completion of the Work in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Proposal if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, a Proposer fails to satisfy the Owner that the Proposer is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. The Owner shall have the right to take such steps as may be necessary to determine the ability of the Proposer to perform the work and the Proposer shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as may be reasonably required. In addition to the general reservations of the right to reject any and all Proposals, the Owner specifically reserves the right to reject any Proposal of any Proposer who has previously failed to properly perform a contract of a similar nature, or to complete in a reasonable time, or who has not paid his just bills or otherwise disregarded his obligations to other subcontractors, materialmen or employees. In determining the lowest responsible Proposer, the following considerations in addition to those above mentioned will be taken into account. Whether the Proposer (a) maintains a permanent place of business; (b) has adequate financial status to meet the obligations incident to the work; and (c) has appropriate technical experience. As time is essential in the execution of this Contract, the Owner reserves the right to award the Contract to the Proposer of proven ability to expedite work rather than to the low Proposers. 1.15 RECEIPT OF PROPOSALS: Competitive Sealed Proposals for the work described below in accordance with Proposal Documents and addenda as may be issued prior to date of proposal opening will be received by the Aldine Independent School District (AISD), Board of Trustees c/o the Facility Planning & Construction Department, at 2520 W. W. Thorne Blvd., Houston, Texas 77032. All submittals must be signed in, dated and time stamped by a designated representative. AISD must receive Competitive Sealed Proposals, as follows:

1. The monetary sealed proposals and required supplemental documents (PART 1), must be submitted no later than exactly 2:00 P.M., CDST, TUE, May 17, 2016. Two originals of the proposal must be submitted.

2. The Proposer's Technical Qualifications (PART 2), the Contractor Information and

Experience Statement (AIA Document A305) and three (3) most recent references of similar projects shall be submitted no later than 2:00 P.M., TUE, May 17, 2016.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-5

3. The proposed Subcontractor's Technical Qualifications (PART 3) delivered at 2:00 P.M. CDST, WED, May 18, 2016. Each copy of the submittal must be contained within a single three ring binder, appropriately divided into sections and tabbed.

4. Questions pertaining to the project and requests for product approvals will be received until 5:00 P.M., THU, May 11, 2016.

5. The last Addendum for the project will be issued by 5:00 P.M., FRI, May 13, 2016.

6. The Sealed Proposals will be publicly opened approximately 2:00 P.M., TUE, May 17, 2016 and the names of the proposer and the monetary proposals read aloud at:

The ALDINE ISD, 2520 W. W. THORNE BLVD., HOUSTON, TEXAS 77032

After receiving all parts of the Proposals, the evaluation will be made by AISD administrators and the Architecture and Engineering (A/E) team, evaluating and ranking each Proposal, Qualification statement, and information submitted, based on the published selection criteria. The AISD Board of Trustees will consider the Proposal that offers the best value to AISD, as recommended through the ranking evaluation established using a maximum one hundred (100) point scoring system. The final decision–making authority on the proposals rests with the Board of Trustees. Decision–making authority has not been delegated to any person or entity other than the Board. The recommendation, based on an evaluation and ranking of each proposal submitted in relation to the selection criteria will be presented to the Board of Trustees for award of the contract for construction. Presentation of the evaluation recommendation is scheduled to occur during the Board of Trustees meeting on TUE, June 14, 2016. The Board agrees that if the Contract is awarded, it will be awarded to the Proposer offering the best value to AISD. The Board of Trustees is not bound to accept the lowest priced Proposal, if that Proposal is judged not to be the best value for AISD as determined by the Board. The Board reserves the right to accept or reject any/or all proposals and to waive any informalities. If the District determines that there are an insufficient number of proposers, then the proposal date may be extended by not more than 14 business days. Aldine ISD reserves the right to accept or reject any/or all bids or to make awards as they appear to be advantageous to the district and to waive any and all informalities. The Proposer, by submitting the Proposal, hereby agrees to indemnify the Aldine Independent School District, their evaluators and their agents on all acts relating to the Proposal Evaluation. SCOPE OF WORK: The Scope of Work includes the demolition of an existing two story building of approximately 18, 000 sf; the demolition also includes the adjacent parking lot of approximately 10,000 sf; 350 lineal feet of sidewalk and 215 lineal feet of sidewalk canopy. New site work includes the protection of existing trees, the construction of a new parking lot, the resurfacing of an existing parking lot, site utilities and new sidewalk canopies and new fencing.

The building remodeling includes the interior renovation in a portion of Building A of approximately 800 sf involving demolition, new architectural, electrical and minor mechanical work. The remodeling also include interior renovation in Building B of approximately 3,5000 sf involving demolition, new architectural, electrical, mechanical and plumbing work.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-6

INFORMATION AND PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS: Project plans and specifications may be viewed on the Aldine ISD web site at http://www.aldine.k12.tx.us/cms/main

Project Name LANE SCHOOL RENOVATION

Project Street Address 2001 ALDINE BENDER ROAD HOUSTON, TEXAS 77032

Estimated Approximate Construction Cost (Range) $900,000.00 To $1,100,000.00

1. QUALIFIED PROPOSERS

A. Proposals will be accepted from qualified General Contractors only for the entire scope of work described in the Contract Documents. As a prerequisite to a Proposer’s qualifying for the award of contract on this work, the Proposer must provide a Prequalification’s package containing the Proposer's Technical Qualifications (PART 2), the Contractor Information and Experience Statement (AIA Document A305), as well as provide three (3) most recent references of similar projects with current/ verified phone number, current/ verified fax number for references of Owner and Architect. The A305 forms may be obtained from the office of the Houston Chapter of the American Institute of Architects (A.I.A.), 315 Capitol, Suite 120, and Houston, Texas 77002. All Prequalification submittals must be signed in, dated and time stamped by a designated representative.

B. Proposals will be accepted from qualified General Contractors who have continuously maintained an office within the State of Texas for not less than five (5) years and constructed a project of similar scope, complexity, value, use and size to the project as described in the Contract.

2. AGREEMENT OF PROPOSAL SUBMITTAL A. The undersigned, as a designated representative of the proposer, declares such

Proposer is the only entity, as principal, with any interest in this Proposal and the Proposal is made without collusion with any other entity.

B. The proposer affirms that the form of Contract, Instructions for Competitive Sealed Proposals, Supplemental Instructions for Competitive Sealed Proposal, Addenda, selection criteria, weighting/scoring system, estimated budget, Specifications and the Drawings pertaining to this Proposal have been examined and the Proposer has also examined the locations, conditions and classes of materials for the proposed Work and agrees to provide all necessary machinery, tools, apparatus and construction means to accomplish the Work described in the Contract Documents in the manner prescribed.

C. The proposer agrees the quantities of Work to be performed and materials to be furnished may be increased or decreased as may be considered necessary, in the sole opinion of AISD's Representative, to complete the Work as planned and contemplated. Adjustment for changes in Work will be in accordance with the General Conditions.

D. Proposal amounts must be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern.

http://www.aldine.k12.tx.us/cms/main


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-7

3. WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSALS A. A Proposal may be withdrawn only upon request by the proposer or his duly authorized

representative, provided such request is received by the Owner at the place designated for receipt of Proposals and prior to the time fixed for the opening of Proposals.

B. No Proposal may be withdrawn after the time fixed for the opening of Proposals for a period of 60 days.

4. AWARD OF CONTRACT A. The proposer to whom the award of a Contract is made will be promptly notified

following Board approval. If a proposer, (1). Withdraws his Proposal within 60 days after the date and time fixed for the

opening of Proposals in the Advertisement for Proposals, or, (2). Fails or refuses to execute the Agreement, or other required forms within ten

(10) days after the same are presented to him for signature, or (3). Fails or refuses to furnish properly executed Performance and Payment

Bonds, if required, and certification of required insurance upon the execution of the Agreement.

(4). The Owner may award the Work to another Proposer or may re-solicit the contract.

B. The Proposal Bond is forfeited if Proposal is withdrawn after the Proposal opening, or Contract Documents are not executed in accordance with the above requirements.

C. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any/or all bids and to waive any informalities. If the District determines that there are an insufficient number of bidders, then the bid date may be extended by not more than 14 days.

5. NOTICE TO PROCEED A. The Contractor shall not commence the Work under this Contract until execution of the

Notice To Proceed duly signed by the Owner’s representative.

6. COLLUSION, LITIGATION, DEFAULT, COMPETENCY, AND CONFLICT OF INTEREST A. By completing and submitting a Proposal, the proposer agrees to comply with the

requirements of the following paragraph. A proposer who subsequently does not agree to comply with these requirements may automatically disqualify himself from Proposal or receiving award of Contract on the project.

B. The responses to the items of the Contractor’s Qualification Statement will be used in evaluation of the Proposals on the project. Proposer may be disqualified and their proposals not considered for any of the following specific reasons. (1). Reason for believing collusion exists among Proposer’s. (2). Reasonable grounds for believing that any proposer plans to submit more than

one proposal for the work contemplated. (3). The proposer being interested in any litigation against the Board. (4). The proposer being in arrears on any existing contract with AISD or having


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-8

defaulted on a previous contract with AISD. (5). Lack of competency as revealed by the financial statement, experience and

Equipment questionnaires, or omission of required proposal submittals. (6). Uncompleted work which, in the judgment of the Board, will prevent or hinder

the prompt completion of this Work, if awarded. (7). Other information or circumstance that establishes reasonable grounds for

belief that the proposer is not a “responsible proposer”.

7. CONTRACT ACCEPTANCE A. By entering into a contract with AISD, the proposer agrees that:

(1). Work on the project will begin upon receipt of the Notice to Proceed. (2). Contractor will participate as a team member in cooperation with the

Architect/Engineer and Owner. (3). The Work will not interfere with normal instructional and learning programs of

the school. (4). The Contractor will assign competent superintendents, full time to each

project, and that superintendent shall be maintained on the project for the duration of the project, subject only to his continuous employment

(5). The Contractor will furnish and pay for bonds as follows:

a. Projects less than $25,000: No bonds are required

b. Projects over $25,000 Payment and Performance Bonds are required

(6). Contractor will carry and keep in full force for the duration of the project, insurance coverage for builder’s risk, workman’s compensation, comprehensive general liability, and automobile liability as required by the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract

(7). Contractor will certify that the contractor provides workman’s compensation insurance coverage for each employee of the contractor employed on the project and contractor shall provide a certificate from each subcontractor certifying that the subcontractor provides workman’s compensation insurance coverage for each employee of the subcontractor employed on the project.

(8). Contractor agrees to a Proposal by all applicable rules and regulations including all requirements as set out in 28 TAC Rule 110.110 and any amendments thereto.

8. ULTIMATE CORPORATE OWNERSHIP A. In the specific document of this section, enter the address of the proposer's place of

business and, if applicable, the name and address of the proposer's ultimate parent company or majority owner.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-9

9. BASE PRICE AMOUNT A. Total amount for the furnishing of all labor, materials, services, equipment and

appliances required in conjunction with and properly incidental to all Work, for construction of the project in conformance with the terms and condition set out in the Contract Documents, Drawings and Specifications.

B. Base Price Amount shall include an Owner’s contingency of $50,000. Owner’s contingency can only be used with prior approval from the owner or a designated representative.

10. PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION DURATION A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a construction schedule for the Project in

accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 1 of the Contract Documents. No time extensions will be allowed under this contract due to late deliveries, or changes in the Work that do not affect the critical path schedule of the project. The Contractor may propose to complete the project earlier than the Owner’s Maximum Project Duration or Scheduled Date of Substantial Completion.

11. TECHNICAL PROPOSAL – PROPOSER QUALIFICATIONS A. Proposer must provide technical information about their company, to allow the owner, to

thoroughly evaluate the proposer’s qualifications to perform the work described in the proposal documents. This information will include general, historical, experience, safety, quality control, and financial information.

12. LIST OF MAJOR SUB-CONTRACTORS A. Proposer must provide a list of major sub-contractors proposed for this agreement as

identified below. The evaluation of the capabilities and reputation of the major sub-contractors is an important component of the evaluation, scoring and award process. AISD considers the identification of sub-contractors in this section to coincide with the proposer’s price for the work. However, AISD will reserve the right to evaluate, approve, or reject (and require the proposer to use the sub-contractors below) any substitutions or changes to the sub-contractors named below at that time.

13. PROPOSAL FORM EXECUTION A. Contractor shall provide all requested forms, and information.

B. DO NOT SUBMIT REQUESTED FORMS OR REQUESTED INFORMATION THAT ARE LEFT BLANK. 1. SUBMISSION OF INCOMPLETE, OR BLANK FORMS AND REQUESTED

INFORMATION WILL HAVE A NEGATIVE EFFECT ON THE EVALUATION AND RANKING PROCESS. FAILURE TO COMPLETE ALL PORTIONS OF THIS PROPOSAL FORM MAY CAUSE THE ENTIRE PROPOSAL TO BE REJECTED.

14. GENERAL A. In accordance with Sec. 44.039, Texas Education Code, the Board of Trustees of AISD is

requesting Competitive Sealed Proposals (CSP) from general construction contractors. B. All data submitted with a Proposal, except as noted herein, is deemed to be a part of the

terms and conditions of the Contract.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-10

C. AISD shall provide, under separate contract the following services: 1. Environmental abatement construction contractor(s) 2. Testing of construction materials and systems 3. HVAC Testing and Balancing Services 4. Geotechnical and site surveying

D. Contractor attendance is recommended at the pre-proposal conference and site tour. Contractors are required to sign-in prior to commencement of the pre-proposal conference.

15. RECEIPT OF PROPOSALS A. Proposals will be received at the time, place and under conditions set forth in the

published Request for Competitive Sealed Proposals (RFCSP). B. Proposal documents are obtainable from the A/E under conditions set forth in the

RFCSP.

16. INFORMATION INQUIRIES A. Project plans and specifications may be viewed Aldine ISD web site at

http://www.aldine.k12.tx.us/cms/main. B. All correspondence and communication during the proposal and selection process shall

be directed to the A/E:

C. See "Supplemental Instructions for Competitive Sealed Proposals" for information inquiries regarding the technical aspects of the Drawings and Specifications.

17. DISCREPANCIES AND INTERPRETATIONS A. Proposer must notify the A/E in writing, no later than five (5) business days prior to

the scheduled Proposal opening date, if discrepancies, ambiguities or omissions are found in the Proposal documents, or if further information or interpretation is desired.

B. Answers to inquiries will be provided in writing to all proposers in addenda form. All provisions and requirements of such addenda will supersede or modify affected portions of the Proposal documents. All addenda will be incorporated into and bound with the Contract Documents. No other explanation or interpretation will be considered binding.

18. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Submit the Proposal sealed in an envelope or sealed package of sufficient size to

hold all of the copies of the Proposal documents. B. Provide a properly formatted label on the exterior of the Proposal envelope or

package providing the proposer’s identification including Lane School Renovation, Morris Architects, project #R305675.01, due date, and time.

C. Submit the Proposal “guaranty” in a standard-size envelope affixed to the outside of the Proposal envelope or package.

D. If the Proposal is submitted by mail, place the envelope in a mailing envelope addressed per Supplemental Instructions for Competitive Sealed Proposals. Delivery of the Proposal prior to the advertised time set for the Proposal opening is the responsibility of the proposer.

http://www.aldine.k12.tx.us/cms/main


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-11

19. PREPARATION OF COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL A. The Proposal must be based on conditions at the project site, the project Drawings and

Specifications and any addenda issued. B. The Proposal, Part I, must be completed by hand and authoritatively executed in BLUE ink

and submitted on the Proposal form furnished by A\E C. If the Proposal Qualifications form does not provide sufficient space to adequately respond

to a question, the proposer should attach additional 8 1/2" X 11" white paper sheets as required, referencing the page and question numbers to which the response pertains.

D. A Proposal showing omissions, alterations, conditions, or carrying riders or other qualifiers, which modify the Proposal form, may be rejected as irregular.

E. Tabbed dividers should separate the various sections of parts 1, 2 and 3. The tabs must identify the sections by name rather than simply a number or alphabet.

F. If the proposer chooses to issue a "No Response" (N/R) to a question on the Proposal, an explanation of this action is required. Failure to do so may be viewed by AISD as incomplete and may subject the entire Proposal to rejection.

G. Facsimile submissions or modifications are not allowed. H. Proposals received after the advertised time for the Proposal opening will be ineligible and

will be returned unopened. After all Proposals are publicly opened, but before they are read aloud, they will be examined by the presiding official to determine if they are complete, in proper form and properly signed. If an error or omission is discovered and classified by the presiding official as a technicality that AISD has reserved the right to waive, the proposer's representative may be permitted to make the appropriate correction. Any such correction will be announced and explained to the others present at the Proposal opening. A Proposal, which is not and cannot be made legible for consideration under this procedure, will not be read, nor will the Proposal prices be revealed.

I. The proposer will receive no compensation or reimbursement of expenses incurred in the preparation of this Proposal.

J. AISD reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals.

20. PUBLIC INFORMATION AND NOTICE OF CONFIDENTIALITY A. AISD considers all Proposal information, documentation and supporting materials

submitted in response to this RFCSP to be non-confidential and/or non-proprietary in nature, and therefore, shall be subject to the public disclosure under the Texas Public Information Act (Texas Government Code, Sec. 552.001, et seq.) after the award of the contract.

B. The Proposer must identify and designate those portions of their technical Proposal, which contain trade secrets or other proprietary data. If the Proposal includes such data, the proposer shall:

1. Mark the cover sheet of the Technical Proposal with the following phrase: "This Proposal includes data that shall not be disclosed outside AISD and the A/E design team and shall not be duplicated, used or disclosed in whole or in part for any purpose other than to evaluate this Proposal."

2. Mark each sheet and the specific data on that sheet that the proposer wishes to restrict with the following phrase: "Use or disclosure of this specifically marked


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-12

data is subject to the restrictions regarding confidentiality cited on the cover sheet of this Proposal."

21. PROPOSAL GUARANTY A. A certified or cashier's check on a State or National Bank or a Proposal bond on AISD

Form or Proposal Bond, from a Surety authorized to transact business in the State of Texas, in the amount of not less than five percent (5%) of the greatest total amount of the proposed contract amount, payable without recourse to the order of the Board of Trustees, must accompany the Proposal as a guarantee that, if awarded the Contract, the proposer will promptly enter into and execute the Contract and Performance and Payment Bonds on the forms provided. The Proposal or Proposal Bond must be accompanied by a properly dated and executed Power of Attorney with a live Surety seal on each document. Failure to do so will constitute an irregular Proposal which may be rejected. Use of a Surety company's bond form is not acceptable and will cause the Proposal to be rejected.

B. Should the successful proposer fail to execute the Contract and Bonds within fifteen (15) days after the date of transmittal of the Contract Documents for execution, the Proposal Guaranty becomes the property of AISD, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages.

C. Proposal guaranties of all proposers will be retained until after the Contract and Bonds have been executed.

22. OWNERSHIP OF THE COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL A. Submitted Proposals, documentation and supporting materials shall become the property

of AISD. B. After award or rejection action by AISD, the proposer's financial statement and other

information that has been properly identified and marked in accordance with Paragraph 22.0, of this RFCSP entitled "Public Information and Confidentiality" will be returned to the proposer as expeditiously as possible.

23. SITE INVESTIGATION A. It is the responsibility of each proposer to examine the project site, existing improvements

and adjacent property and be familiar with existing conditions before submission of a Proposal.

B. After investigating the project site and comparing the Drawings and Specifications with the existing conditions, the proposer should immediately notify the A/E in accordance with paragraph 19.0, of these Instructions for Competitive Sealed Proposals of any conditions for which requirements are not clear; or about which there is any question regarding the extent of the Work involved.

C. Should the successful proposer fail to make the required investigation and should a question arise after award of contract as to the extent of the Work involved in any particular case, after receiving recommendations from the A/E, AISD will make the interpretation of the Contract Documents.

24. EVALUATION AND CONTRACT AWARD PROCESS A. Proposals will be opened publicly to identify the names of the proposer and their

respective proposed contract amount. Other contents of the Proposals will be afforded security sufficient to preclude disclosure of the contents prior to award.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-13

B. The proposal evaluators will evaluate the Proposals. The criteria for evaluation and selection of the successful proposer for this award, will be based upon the factors listed below:

25. AISD SELECTION CRITERIA AND WEIGHTING

CRITERIA WEIGHTED AMOUNT OF 100 Points

ORIGINAL EXPLANATION OF CRITERIA

QUANTITATIVE CRITERIA

Contract Amount 30.00 pts

Proposed Construction Contract Amount

Proposed Duration (Days) 5.00 pts Proposed Construction Contract Time

Subtotal 35.00 pts

QUALITATIVE CRITERIA

Overall Reputation of the Contractor; References; Schedule/Record of On-Time Completion; Claims & Litigation 15.00 pts

Overall reputation of the proposer. Reference responses from project owners and A/E are on similar educational or institutional projects. Budget; Schedule; Reporting/Communications; Responsiveness. Past experience on other projects in bringing the appropriate resources (personnel & equipment) to assure project completion by contract target end dates. Record of claims incidences, and litigation experiences over the past five (5) years. AISD’s personal past experience with proposer.

Overall Reputation of the Primary Sub-Contractors; References; Schedule/Record of On-Time Completion; Claims & Litigation 15.00 pts

Overall reputation of the proposer. Reference responses from project owners and A/E are on similar educational or institutional projects. Budget; Schedule; Reporting/Communications; Responsiveness. Past experience on other projects in bringing the appropriate resources (personnel & equipment) to assure project completion by contract target end dates. Record of claims incidences, and litigation experiences over the past five (5) years. Additional consideration will be given for major sub contractors who are located within the State of Texas.

Relevant Experience 10.00 pts Successful experience in the delivery of projects of similar scope, scale, complexity and type.

Safety Record 5.00 pts

Safety program and record. Familiarity with and demonstrated cooperation in a "Controlled Insurance Program". Safety policy, WC Modifier, Drug/Alcohol Policy.

Contractor's Demonstrated Understanding of the Proposed Methodology; Quality and Feasibility of

5.00 pts

Quality and clarity of proposer's management work plan including schedule, construction work during work hours, logistics/phasing plan, understanding of the work, and sensitivity to ongoing school operations.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-14

Alternative Methodologies

Proposed Personnel 5.00 pts Qualifications of the proposed personnel to be assigned to this project. Level of commitment to deliver the personnel named.

Available Bonding Capacity and Ability to Deliver the Project Given Current Workload

5.00 pts

Single project limit; aggregate limit; outstanding bonds; Demonstrated ability of contractor to assemble the resources to deliver the project on time.

Financial Resources & Stability 5.00 pts Financial stability and condition of the Proposer; Years in

business; 2 years audited financial statements; current ratio.

Subtotal 65.00 pts

Total 100.0 pts

After opening the Proposals, the proposal evaluators will evaluate and rank each Proposal with respect to the published selection criteria described under Sub-paragraph 26.0 and 27.0. After opening and ranking, an award may be made on the basis of the initially submitted Proposal, without discussion, clarification or modification, or AISD may discuss with the selected proposer, offers for cost adjustment and other elements of the Proposal. Other than the data read at the Proposal opening, AISD shall not disclose any information derived from the Proposals submitted by competing Proposers in conducting such discussions.

A. If AISD determines that it is unable to reach a satisfactory agreement with the best value proposer, AISD will terminate discussions with that proposer. AISD will then proceed with negotiations with each successive proposer from the Best Value Group as they appear in the order of cost ranking until an agreement is reached, or until AISD has rejected all Proposals. If an agreement cannot be reached from the Best Value Group, then negotiations will proceed with each successive proposer based on original ranking. After termination of discussions with any proposer, Owner will not resume discussions with that proposer.

B. Immediately following AISD's approval of the order of ranking of proposers and AISD's contract award action, the proposer will be notified by electronic mail, telegraphic or facsimile message.

C. The award or rejection action regarding this Proposal is at the sole discretion of AISD and AISD makes no warranty regarding this Proposal that a contract will be awarded to any proposer.

D. AISD agrees that if the Contract is awarded, it will be awarded to the Proposer offering the best value to AISD.

E. AISD is not bound to accept the lowest priced Proposal, if that Proposal is judged not to be the best value for AISD, as determined by AISD.

F. The Proposer by submitting the Proposal hereby agrees to indemnify the Aldine Independent School District, their evaluators and their agents on all acts relating to the Proposal Evaluation.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-15

26. AISD Selection of Best Value Proposer The evaluators will identify the three (3) highest scoring value proposers. All of these proposers become a part of the Best Value Group. The Best Value Proposer will be selected from this group based solely on the lowest overall price (base price plus all alternatives)

27. Criminal Background Checks For Contractor's Employees Prior to commencing any work on this project, Proposer will certify, on the form provided in the Program Manuel, that for each employee of Proposer who will have direct contact with students, the Prosper has obtained, as required by Texas Education Code Section 22.0834:

(a) National criminal history record information from a law enforcement or criminal justice agency for each employee of Prosper hired before January 01, 2015.

(b) National criminal history record information from the Texas Department of Safety for each employee of Proposer hired on or after January 01, 2015. Any employee that will have direct contact with students must have not have been convicted of an offense identified in Texas Education Code Section 22.085

28. MANAGEMENT PLAN

1. Staffing Approach a. Provide a summary staffing chart for the entire scope of this project, which identifies

the anticipated start, and finish dates for Project Manager, Superintendent and, if applicable, Assistant Superintendent with a total number of man-months planned per person.

b. Provide resumes for key personnel (including resumes for the key personnel from

your construction team) the proposer intends to staff for the entire scope of this project. Describe clearly the current assignment for named staff including project name, client name and anticipated project completion date.

c. Identify the primary contact (Project Manager) for the project day-to-day interface during construction of the entire scope of this project.

2. Management Plan

a. Describe your management plan and project methodology including discussion of the following:

i. Items you will address in pre-construction planning ii. Approach to site logistics and staging iii. Phasing and Sequencing of Work

b. Proposed utilization of work forces in the evenings, weekends, holidays, and summer breaks

i. Safety strategies ii. Procurement iii. Cost Accounting and Reporting (Cost Control System) iv. Document Control System

c. Describe methods for coordinating submittals with the architect/engineer. d. Describe whether or not your Proposer and sub-contractors have computer aided

design systems or building integration modeling. If you or your sub-contractors utilize CAD or BIM, describe if you will utilize those systems for preparation of and coordination of shop drawings.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 2113-16

3. Proposed Construction Schedule

Provide a bar chart schedule depicting how you anticipate delivering the project in the time frame outlined by our team.

END OF SECTION 00 2113

Lane School Renovation GEOTECHNICAL DATAAldine Independent School District DOCUMENT 00 3132MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

DOCUMENT 00 3132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL:

A. Geotechnical Investigation Report has been prepared by the firm of HTS, Inc. ConsultantsThis report is identified as “Geotechnical Investigation Proposed Parking Lot PavementImprovements, Lane School, 2001 Aldine Bender Road, Houston, Texas, HTS ProjectNo. 16-S-156, dated March 15, 2016, prepared for:

Aldine Independent School District 1617 Lauder Road Houston, Texas 77039

B. A copy of the report is attached and shall be referred to for a complete description of theconditions at the site. 1. This report was obtained only for the Owner's use in foundation and parking area

design and is not a part of the Contract Documents. The report and log of boringsis available for the Contractor's information, but is not a warranty of thesubsurface conditions. The Contractor may use the report at his own risk.

2. Make no deviations from the recommendations of the Geotechnical InvestigationReport and the requirements of the Contract Documents without specific andwritten approval of the Owner or Architect.

C. The Contractor shall review the applicable portions of Geotechnical Investigation Reportand the technical sections of this Project Manual. The Architect shall be notified of anydiscrepancies immediately. In the event of a conflict between the applicable portions ofthe Geotechnical Investigation Report and the technical sections, the stricter requirementshall govern.

D. The Contractor shall visit the site and acquaint himself with site conditions. Prior tobidding, the Contractor may make his own subsurface investigation to satisfy himself withsite and subsurface conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF DOCUMENT

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 3132-1

Intentionally Blank

Lane School Renovation COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL FORM Aldine Independent School District DOCUMENT 00 4113 MA No. R305675.01 SBA-16101

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4113-1

DOCUMENT 00 4113 – COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL FORM This form shall be completed and submitted in duplicate by all Proposers. Forms that are incomplete or illegible may be declared invalid. Submitted by: Date: Telephone No. PROJECT: Lane School Renovation Aldine Independent School District

Project No. R305675.01

TO: Board of Trustees Aldine Independent School District Administration Building 2520 W. W. Thorne Blvd. Houston, Texas 77032

We, the undersigned, propose to enter into a Contract with Aldine Independent School District to provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, bonds, insurance, permits, services and incidentals necessary for the designated Contractor work of this project in accordance with the Contract Documents, for the lump sum(s) set forth in this Proposal. We have carefully reviewed and understand the documents entitled Notice to Proposers, Instructions to Proposers, the Drawings and Specifications, examined the site in detail, and have acquainted ourselves with the existing and anticipated conditions that might affect the Work, and accept the Drawings and Specifications as being satisfactory and adequate for the construction of the Work. The undersigned declares that the only person’s or parties’ interest in this Proposal as principals, are those named herein, and agrees to the following:

1. Hold Proposal open for acceptance 60 days. 2. Accept right of Owner to reject any or all bids, to waive formalities and to accept the

Proposal which Owner considers most advantageous and provides the best value to the Owner.

3. Enter into and execute the contract, if awarded, for the Base Bid. 4. Complete work in accordance with the Contract Documents within the stipulated

contract time. 5. By signing, the undersigned affirms that, to the best of his knowledge, the Proposal

has been arrived at independently and is made without collusion with any other person, firm or corporation to obtain information or gain any favoritism that would in any way limit competition or give an unfair advantage over respondents in the award of this bid.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4113-2

We understand that if our Proposal is accepted, a Contract will be prepared in accordance with Standard Form Agreement, Between Owner and Contractor, AIA Document A101, and that we will successfully complete the Work, and provide insurance as required by these documents and furnish certificates of insurance for worker’s compensation in accordance with State law. We will provide a Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bond each in the full amount of the Contract as stated in the Contract Documents for contract amounts of $25,000.00 and over. This bid includes the cost of insurance and bonds. ADDENDA We hereby acknowledge receipt of Addenda No. _______________, Addenda No. _______________, Addenda No. _______________, Addenda No. _______________, and have included their provisions in this Proposal. BID SECURITY We attach a certified or cashier’s check on a State or National Bank, or a Bid Bond as Bid Security in the sum of five percent (5%) of the amount of the Bid; the bond executed by:

____________________________________________________________ Surety

____________________________________________________ Attorney-in-Fact

_____________________________________________________________ Agent COMPLETION If awarded the Contract for Construction, we agree to begin work within seven (7) calendar days after written Notice to Proceed, and to substantially complete all work within ________ calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. In accordance with the Notice to Proposers, the undersigned agrees to complete all subcontractor work required for the following bid proposal no. and specification sections. Bid Proposal No._________________(as identified In Notice to Proposers), including work described in the following specification sections and delineated in the Drawings. SECTION NO. SECTION TITLE _______________________ _______________________________ _______________________ _______________________________ _______________________ _______________________________ _______________________ _______________________________ _______________________ _______________________________ _______________________ _______________________________ _______________________ _______________________________


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4113-3

BASE BID $ ___________________________________________________________________ (Amount written in words) $ ___________________________________________________________________ (Amount in figures) Type of Organization _______________________________________________________________________ (Corporation, Partnership, Individual) Authorized Signature: ________________________________________ Title: ________________________________________ Name of Contracting Firm: ________________________________________ Street Address: ________________________________________ City: ________________________________________ State: ________________________________________ Zip Code: ________________________________________ Phone No.: ________________________________________ Date: ________________________________________ Seal (If Bidder is Corporation) WITNESS:___________________________________ END OF DOCUMENT 00 4113 ATTACHMENTS AS FOLLOWS ARE REQUIRED


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4113-4

EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER STATEMENT

LANE SCHOOL RENOVATION

Submitted to: Aldine Independent School District 1617 Lauder Rd, Houston, TX 77039

Date:

Company Name:

P. O. Box:

Street A ddress:

City: State: Zip C ode:

The Aldine Independent School District can do business only with those contractors and vendors who are Equal Opportunity Employers and requires that this form be completed and submitted with the Proposal Form in order for the proposal to be considered responsive at the time the proposal is submitted.

1. Name of Owner or President: ______________________

Phone:

2. Current total employment: No. of males:

No. of females:

3. Of the total number of persons currently employed, please provide the following

race or ethnic breakdown:

No. of whites: No. of Hispanics: ______

No. of African-Americans:

No of other minorities: 4. Do you advertise as an equal opportunity employer? No

Yes

5. Do you have a written nondiscriminatory policy on employment? Yes No 6. Has this policy been circulated throughout your organization? Yes No 7. Name and title of the person to contact should any questions arise.

Name Title Phone

Contractors that have previously submitted an Equal Opportunity Employer Statement and/or an Equal Opportunity Employer Affidavit are nonetheless required to complete these forms, provide updated information and submit it with the Bid.

END OF DOCUMENT


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4113-5

AFFIDAVIT OF EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYMENT

Aldine Independent School District’s Equal Opportunity Employment Statement:

Aldine Independent School District is an equal opportunity employer that does not discriminate in employment on the basis of age, sex, race, religion, national origin, disabilities, or on the basis of the employee's exercise of constitutional rights.

By submission of this Proposal or Bid, the undersigned certifies that:

The party that made the foregoing Proposal; that such party as Bidder does not and shall not discriminate against any employee or Bidder for employment because of race, religion, color, sex or national origin, disabilities, or on the basis of the employee's exercise of constitutional rights. If awarded the Proposal and contract under this Proposal, said party shall take affirmative action to insure that Bidders are employed and that employees are treated, during employment, without regard to their race, religion, color, sex or national origin, disabilities, or on the basis of the employee's exercise of constitutional rights. If successful as the lowest and best Bidder under the foregoing Proposal this party shall post non-discrimination notices in conspicuous places available to employees and Bidders for employment setting forth the provision of this affidavit.

Authorized Agent (Print Name) Date

Signature

Company Name

Company Address

City State Zip

STATE OF TEXAS

COUNTY OF HARRIS Sworn to and subscribed before me at _______________________, Texas this the _______ day of

___________________, 20_____, A.D.

Notary Public in and for Harris, County, Texas


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4113-6

CERTIFICATE OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES Applicable to Contracts, Subcontracts, and Agreements with Applicants who are themselves performing Federally assisted construction contracts, exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clause. By the submission of this Proposal, the Proposer, Offeror, Applicant, or Subcontractor certifies that he does not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. He certifies further that he will not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments and that he will not permit his employees to perform their services at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. The Proposer, Offeror, Applicant, or Subcontractor agrees that a breach of this Certification is a violation of the Equal Opportunity Clause in this proposed contract. As used in this Certification, the term “segregated facilities” means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation and housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, creed, color, or national origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. He further agrees that (except where he has obtained identical certifications from proposed Subcontractors for specific time periods) he will obtain identical certification from proposed Subcontractors prior to the award of Subcontracts exceeding $10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clause; that he will retain such certifications in his files; and that he will forward the following notice to such proposed Subcontractors (except where the proposed Subcontractors have submitted identical certifications for specific time periods): NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTORS OF REQUIREMENT FOR CERTIFICATIONS OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES A Certification of Non-segregated Facilities, as required by the May 9, 1967, Order (32 F.R. 7439, May 19, 1967) or elimination of segregated facilities, by the Secretary of Labor, must be submitted prior to the award of a Subcontract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity Clause. The Certification may be submitted either for each Subcontract or for all Subcontracts during a period (i.e. quarterly, semi-annually, or annually).

NOTE: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18U .S.C. 1001.

Name of Company

By

Title


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4113-7

STATE OF TEXAS

COUNTY OF HARRIS Sworn to and subscribed before me at _______________________, Texas this the _______ day of ___________________, 20_____, A.D.

Notary Public in and for Harris, County, Texas


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4113-8

FELONY CONVICTION NOTIFICATION State of Texas Legislature Senate Bill No. 1, Section 44.034, Notification of Criminal History, Subsection (a), states “a person or business entity that enters into a contract with a school district must give advance notice to the district if the person or owner or operator of the business entity has been convicted of a felony.” The notice must include a general description of the conduct resulting in the conviction of a felony. Subsection (b) states “a school district may terminate a contract with a person or business entity if the district determines that the person or business entity failed to give notice as required by Subsection (a) or misrepresented the conduct resulting in the conviction. The district must compensate the person or business entity for services performed before the termination of the contract.”

This notice is not required of a publicly held corporation.

I, the undersigned for the Proposer named below, certify that the information concerning notification of felony convictions has been reviewed by me and the following information furnished is true to the best of my knowledge.

Name of Vendor ____________

Name of Authorized Company Official (Printed) _____________________________________________________

A. My Proposer is a publicly held corporation: therefore, this reporting is not applicable.

Signature of Authorized Company Official __________________________ Date _____________________

B. My Proposer is not owned nor operated by anyone who has been convicted of a felony.

Signature of Authorized Company Official __________________________ Date _____________________

C. My Proposer is owned or operated by the following individual(s) who has/have been convicted of a felony:

Name of Individuals(s): ___________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

Details of Conviction(s): __________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________ Signature of Authorized Company Official Date


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4113-9

AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION

By submission of this Proposal or Bid, the undersigned certifies that:

The Proposal or bid has been independently arrived at without collusion with any other proposer or with any other competitor;

A. This Proposal or bid has not been knowingly disclosed and will not be knowingly disclosed, to any other proposer or competitor or potential competitor, prior to the opening of the Proposals, or bids for this project;

B. No attempt has been or will be made to induce any other person, partnership or corporation to submit or not submit a Proposal or bid;

C. The undersigned certifies that he is fully informed regarding the accuracy of the statements contained in this certification, and that the penalties herein are applicable to the proposer as well as to any person signing in his behalf.

Authorized Agent (Print Name) Date

Signature

Company Name

Company Address

City State Zip

Intentionally Blank

Lane School Renovation COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL- Aldine Independent School District PROPOSER QUALIFICATIONS MA No. R305675.01 DOCUMENT 00 4516 SBA-16101

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4516-1

DOCUMENT 00 4516 – COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL - PROPOSER QUALIFICATIONS PROPOSER'S QUALIFICATIONS (Proposer Name) (Address) (City/State/Zip Code) ITEMS I THROUGH VI TO BE SUBMITTED AS PROPOSERS’ QUALIFICATIONS General Contractor's Name: Address: City, State, Zip: Telephone No.: Fax No.: State Comptroller Vendor Identification Number:

I. HISTORY 1. Corporation Partnership Sole Proprietorship Joint Venture

State of Incorporation:

2. In continuous business since:

Remarks (if required):

3. List other fully staffed offices or fully staffed branch offices of your organization:

Name Branch Manager Telephone Number

4. Check box (es) corresponding to the nature of your business:

La rge Bus ine s s (100 or more employe e s )

S ma ll Bus ine s s (fe we r tha n 100 e mploye e s )

Othe r (De fine )


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4516-2

5. Has your organization ever defaulted or failed to complete any work awarded?

___Yes ___ No

If yes, stipulate where and why:

6. Has your organization ever paid liquidated damages or a penalty for failure to complete a

contract on time? Yes No

If yes, stipulate where and why:

7. Has your organization continuously maintained an office in the State of Texas for not less

than Five (5) years? Yes No

II. EXPERIENCE 1. Contractor normally performs % of the work with own forces.

(List Trades)

2. Contractor proposes to perform % of the work for this project with own forces.

(List Trades)

3. List major construction projects your organization has in-progress using the format below:

(Include as an attachment identified by item and sub-item.)

a. Name and Location of Project:

Contract Amount:

Percent Complete: _______________

Projected Completion Date: _________

Owner Reference Contact:

Name/Telephone/Address


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4516-3

A/E Reference Contact:


b. Provide a statement addressing your ability to meet the staffing requirements of these

projects as well as the contract.

4. Total number and dollar amount of contracts currently in progress:

Number $

5. Largest single contract amount currently in process: $

Project Name:

Projected Completion Date:

6. Volume of work completed over last three years:

Year 1 $

Year 2 $

Year 3 $

7. List major construction projects your organization has completed in the last five years with

completion dates and references of similar size, scope and price. Other projects of particular

significance may also be listed. (Include as an attachment identified by item and sub-item.)

Name and Location of Project:

Contract Amount:

Percent Complete:

Projected Completion Date:


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4516-4

Owner Reference Contact:


A/E Reference Contact:

Name/Telephone/Address:

8. List pending claims and/or litigation at time of submitting Proposal. (Show project name,

owner and summary explanation.)

III. SAFETY PROGRAM

1. List your organization's Workers Compensation Experience Modification Rate (EMR) for the

last three years, as obtained from your insurance agent.

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

2. Complete matrix for the three past years, as obtained from OSHA No. 200 Log:

Description Yr 1 Yr 2 Yr 3

Number of injuries and illnesses

Number of lost time accidents

Number of recordable cases

Number of fatalities

Number of employee direct hire fixed hours worked

(round to 1,000's)


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4516-5

3. Are regular project safety meetings held for Field Supervisor(s)?

Yes No

If yes, frequency: Weekly Bi-monthly Monthly As Needed

4. Are project safety inspections conducted? Yes No

If yes, who performs inspection?

How often?

5. Does organization have a written safety program? Yes No

If yes, provide a copy. It will become a compliance document upon contract award.

6. Does your organization have a safety orientation program for new employees?

Ye s No

For employees promoted to Field Supervisor? Ye s No

If yes, does your Supervisor Safety Program include instructions on the following?

Yes No

Safety work practices

Tool box safety meetings

First aid procedures

Accident investigation

Fire protection

New worker's orientation

IV. QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM

1. Submit a complete quality control program that will become compliance document upon

contract award.

2. This plan should address all aspects of quality control including responsibility for surveillance

work, acceptance, rejection, documentation and resolution of deficiencies, trend analysis and

corrective action and interface with Owner's

Inspectors.


Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4516-6

V. FINANCIAL

1. Attach the following:

Audited Financial Statement for past two (2) years, including profit and loss statements and

other supporting schedules. If the last audited statement is over 12 months old, include the

most current un-audited statement.

Surety Company: __________________________________________

Number of years with the current surety company:

___________________________________________________________________

Surety’s AM Best Rating: ________ Date of Texas Registration: ______________

Agent:

2. Total Bonding Capacity:

Limit per project: Unencumbered bonding capacity:


Lane School Renovation COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL- Aldine Independent School District SUBCONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS MA No. R305675.01 DOCUMENT 00 4518 SBA-16101

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4518-1

DOCUMENT 00 4518 - SUBCONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS SUBCONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS (Proposer Name) (Address) (City/State/Zip Code) VII. PROJECT TEAM: SUBCONTRACTORS

1.0 The following major Subcontractors and Suppliers are identified as members of this project

team. In the order listed, prepare an individual submittal providing all information requested

under Section 2.0 for each proposed subcontractor or supplier.

1.1 Site Utilities Subcontractor 1.4 Electrical Subcontractor

1.2 Demolition Subcontractor 1.5 Plumbing Subcontractor

1.3 Mechanical Subcontractor 1.6 Landscape Subcontractor

2.0 (Subcontractor/Supplier Category)

2.1

(Subcontractor Supplier/Installation Subcontractor)

2.2 Have you previously worked together? Ye s No

If yes, Name project(s):

Volume of Work completed in last three years:

Year 1 $

Year 2 $

Year 3 $

2.3 List major construction projects this subcontractor has completed in the last three years

using the following format. Other projects of particular significance may also be listed.

2.3a Owner Reference Contact:


Lane School Renovation COMPETITIVE SEALED PROPOSAL- Aldine Independent School District SUBCONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATIONS MA No. R305675.01 DOCUMENT 00 4518 SBA-16101

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 4518-2

2.3b A/E Reference Contact:

Name/Telephone/Address:

2.4 Certification:

I hereby certify that all forgoing statements contained herein are true and correct

Name of Organization:

By:

Title:

Date:

VIII. POSSIBLE COST REDUCTION ITEMS:

1. The proposer shall submit to AISD possible cost reduction items to be taken into

consideration prior to awarding a construction contract: Proposer may include this listing as a

referenced attachment, if additional space is needed.


Lane School Renovation FORM OF AGREEMENTAldine Independent School District DOCUMENT 00 5213MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

DOCUMENT 00 5213 - FORM OF AGREEMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 FORM OF AGREEMENT:

A. The following form of Owner/Contractor Agreement shall be used for Project:1. AIA Document A101, "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and

Contractor, Stipulated Sum."




Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 5213-1

Lane School Renovation GENERAL CONDITIONSAldine Independent School District DOCUMENT 00 7201MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

DOCUMENT 00 7201 - GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

“The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,” AIA Document A201, dated 2007, Articles 1through 14, Sixteenth Edition, of the American Institute of Architects, is hereby made a part of thesedocuments to the same extent as if herein written out in full.

The Contractor is hereby specifically directed, as a condition of the Contract, to obtain the necessarynumber of copies of AIA Document A201, to acquaint himself with Articles contained therein and to notifyand apprise all subcontractors, suppliers and any other parties to the Contract or individuals or agenciesengaged on the Work as to its contents.

No contractual adjustments shall be due or become exigent as a result of failure on the part of theContractor to fully acquaint himself and all other parties to the Contract with the conditions of DocumentsA201.




Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 00 7201-1

Intentionally Blank

Lane School Renovation SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT Aldine Independent School District FOR CONSTRUCTION MA No. R305675.01 DOCUMENT 00 8000

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-1

DOCUMENT 00 8000 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION The following supplements modify the “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction”, AIA Document A201, Sixteenth Edition, 2007. The portions of the General Conditions not modified, supplemented or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions shall remain in effect. As appropriate, for purposes of this Request for Proposal, the term “Bid” shall mean “Proposal” and the term “Bidder” shall mean “Offer or Proposer”, wherever they appear in the Construction Documents. ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT 1.1.3 THE WORK 1.1.4 THE PROJECT 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER Add the Subparagraphs 1.1.9 and 1.1.10 as follows:

1.1.9 NAMES OF PARTIES

The following definitions apply to parties named in the Contract Documents:

.1 Owner: Aldine Independent School District 14910 Aldine Westfield Road Houston, TX 77032 Phone: 281.985.6373 Fax:281.442.6716

.2 Architect: Dean Barnes Morris Architects, a Huitt Zollars Company 1001 Fannin Street, Suite 4040 Houston, TX 77002

Phone: 713.622.1180 Fax: 713.622.7021

.3 Consulting Engineers: Stanley, Spurling & Hamilton, Inc. (Structural Engineer) 3301 Edloe Street, Suite 200 (Civil Engineer) Houston, TX 77027 Phone: 713-776-9433 Fax: 713-776-2439

.4 Consulting Engineers: Stanton Engineering Group (Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing) 16225 Park Ten Place Suite 810 Houston, TX 77084 Phone: 281-945-4545 Fax: 281-945-4549

lavell.fish

Rectangle


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-2

.5 Landscape Consultant: M2L Associates, Inc. 8955 Katy Freeway, Suite 300 Houston, TX 77024 Phone: 713. 722-8897

1.1.10 BIDDING DOCUMENTS

Bidding documents consist of all documents bound into or referenced in the Project Manual, the Drawings, and Addenda related thereto. The Project Manual contains the Bidding Requirements, Sample Forms, Conditions of the Contract, the Specifications and a list of Drawings and Schedules, some of which are bound into the Project Manual (Other Drawings and Schedules are bound separately). 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Add Subparagraph 1.2.1.1 as follows:

1.2.1.1 “In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, interpretations will be based on the following priorities.

.1 The Agreement

.2 Addenda, with those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date

.3 Supplemental Conditions

.4 The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

.5 Specifications

.6 Drawings

In the case of an inconsistency between the Drawings and Specifications or within either Document, not clarified by an Addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be included in the Bid. Clarifications of the inconsistency will be accomplished with the Contractor after award of Contract and, if necessary, an appropriate reduction in the contract will be accomplished by Change Order. Figures given on Drawings govern scale measurements. Large scale Drawings take precedence over small scale Drawings. Written word takes precedence over numbers. Handwritten documents take precedence over typewritten documents. Existing conditions take precedence over Drawings and Specifications for dimensions and shall be verified by the Contractor. The Contractor proceeds at his own risk if conflicts or discrepancies are not resolved prior to the execution of all Work. Add Paragraph 1.7 as follows: 1.7 MISCELLANEOUS OTHER DEFINITIONS 1.7.1 ABBREVIATIONS

N.I.C. Not in Contract. Indicating work not required to be done by this Contractor under this agreement.

ACI AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE ADA AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT OF 1990 ADAAG AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES FOR

BUILDINGS & FACILITIES AIA AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS AIEE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS AISC AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION AISI AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE ANSI AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE ASA AMERICAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION ASTM AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS AWSC AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY CODE


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-3

FS FEDERAL SPECIFICATION OFCI Owner Furnished Contractor Installed OFOI Owner Furnished Owner Installed NBS NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS NEC NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE SPR SIMPLIFIED PRACTICE RECOMMENDATION TAS TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS UL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. 1.7.2 ADDENDA, ADDENDUM

Documents issued by the Architect prior to execution of the Owner Contractor Agreement that modify or clarify the Bidding Documents. All addenda become a part of the Contract Documents. 1.7.3 ALTERNATE BID(S)

A separate amount stated on the Bid Form that, if accepted by the Owner, will be added to or deducted from the Base Bid. If accepted, the work that corresponds to the alternate bid will become part of the agreement between Owner and Contractor. Alternate bids shall remain valid for the same period of time as the Base Bid after receipt of bids, regardless if an Owner Contractor Agreement has been executed, unless indicated otherwise herein. 1.7.4 APPROVED, APPROVED EQUIVALENT, APPROVED EQUAL, OR EQUAL

The terms Approved, Approved Equivalent, Approved Equal, and Or Equal, relate to the substitution of products or systems approved in writing by the Architect. Refer to Paragraph 3.19, Substitution of Products and Systems, for procedures that must be followed after award of contract. The substitution procedure process to be followed prior to receipt of bids is described in the Instructions to Bidders, Section 01630. 1.7.5 BASE BID

The Contractor’s bid for the Work, not including any Alternates. 1.7.6 CONTRACT TIME

The period of time including Anticipated Weather Days which is established in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. This period of time is subject to authorized adjustments for Unanticipated Weather Days and other Calendar Day extensions of time as enumerated in the Contract Documents. 1.7.7 DATE OF AGREEMENT

The date the Owner formally awards a Contract for Construction of the Work. This date will be inserted in the first page of the Agreement Between Owner and Contractor and shall be referenced in Performance Bond and Payment Bond forms. See also Date of Commencement of Work. 1.7.8 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK

The date of written Notice to Proceed is delivered to the Contractor. This date constitutes day zero (0) of the stated Contract Time. 1.7.9 DATE OF FINAL COMPLETION

The end of construction. See AIA Document A201, paragraph 9.10.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-4

1.7.10 DAY

The following days are referenced in the documents: .1 Calendar Days: The days of the Gregorian Calendar. The Contract Time is established in

Calendar Days. Extensions of time granted for Regular Work Days lost, if any, will be converted to Calendar Days.

.2 Holidays: The days officially recognized by the construction industry in this area as a holiday; normally limited to the observance days of New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and the day after, and Christmas Day.

.3 Regular Work Days: All calendar days except holidays, Saturdays, and Sundays. Requests for extensions of time shall be requested on the basis of Regular Work Days, and those days, if approved, will be converted to calendar days by multiplying by a factor of one and four-tenths (1.4).

.4 Anticipated Weather Days: An allowance of Regular Work Days established as probable days lost due to weather delays; said allowance to be included in the Contractor’s proposed Completion Time on his Bid Form.

.5 Weather Days: Regular Work Days when rain, flooding, snow, unusually high winds, excessively wet grounds, or similar circumstances prevent progress on major portions of the Work. The Contractor will be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time for the net additional time, if any, which result from deducting the amount of Anticipated Weather Days from the total amount of Weather Days.

.6 Net Weather Days: The difference in working days between Anticipated Weather Days and Weather Days.

.7 National Weather Bureau reports will be used as a standard for evaluation of excessive weather days claims.

1.7.11 NOTICE TO PROCEED

A notice that may be given by the Owner to the Contractor that directs the Contractor to start the Work. It may also establish the Date of Commencement of the Work. 1.7.12 PROVIDE

Whenever the word “provide” is used in these documents, it shall mean the same as “furnish and install”. 1.7.13 PUNCH LIST

A comprehensive list prepared by the Contractor prior to Substantial Completion to establish all items to be completed or corrected; this list may be supplemented by the Architect or Owner. See AIA Document A201, Paragraph 9.8.

1.7.14 UNIT PRICES A cost for a unit of work as described in the Contract Documents. The Owner may add or deduct Unit Price work at the amounts stated on the Bid Form and such amounts shall not be subject to additional mark up by the Contractor or his subcontractors. ARTICLE 2 – OWNER 2.1 GENERAL Delete the text of Subparagraph 2.1.1 in its entirety and substitute the following:

2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. All parties understand that only the Board of Trustees for the Owner acting as a body corporate has the expressed authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval of authorization. Except as otherwise provided in subparagraph


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-5

4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative. Delete Subparagraph 2.1.2 in its entirety. Add Paragraph 2.5 as follows:

2.5 OWNER’S RIGHT TO OCCUPY THE PROJECT 2.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to occupy or use without prejudice to the right of either party, any completed or largely completed portions of the project, notwithstanding the time completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired. Such occupancy and use shall not constitute acceptance of any work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2.5.2 If such prior use delays the completion of the Project, the Contractor shall be entitled to extension of time, claim for which shall be made in writing with supporting data attached. 2.5.3 Refer to Article 11, Insurance and Bonds, regarding property insurance requirements in the event of such occupancy. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACTOR

3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR (a) Add the following to the end of Subparagraph 3.2.1:

3.2.1 “The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized, or reasonably should have recognized, such error, inconsistency or omission and failed to report it to the Architect.”

(b) Add the following phrase after the words “discovered by” in Subparagraph 3.2.2: “or reasonably should have recognized”

In Subparagraph 3.2.3 delete the first sentence and add the following after the word “recognized” in the last sentence: “or reasonably should have recognized” Add Subparagraphs 3.2.4, 3.2.5, 3.2.6 and 3.2.7 as follows:

3.2.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation for the “rework portion” of any additional work caused by his failure to carefully study and compare the contract documents prior to execution of the work. 3.2.5 The Contractor shall make reasonable attempt to interpret the Contract Documents before asking the Architect for assistance in interpretation. The Contractor shall not ask the Architect for observation of work prior to the Contractor’s field superintendent’s personal inspection of the work and his determination that the work complies with the Contract Documents. 3.2.6 If, in the opinion of the Architect, the Contractor does not make a reasonable effort to comply with the above requirements of the Contract Documents and this causes the Architect or his Consultants to expend an unreasonable amount of time in the discharge of the duties imposed on him by the Contract Documents, then the Contractor shall bear the cost of compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such failure. The Architect will give the Contractor prior notice of intent to bill for additional services related to Articles 3.2.5, 3.2.6, and 3.12 before additional services are performed.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-6

3.2.7 If the Contractor has knowledge that any of the products or systems specified will perform in a manner that will limit the Contractor’s ability to satisfactorily perform the work or to honor his Warranty, he shall promptly notify the Architect in writing, providing substantiation for his position. Any necessary changes, including substitutions of materials, shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

Delete the text of Subparagraph 3.3.1 in its entirety and substitute the following:

3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skills and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the job site safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the job site safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any resulting loss or damage, but only to the extent the Owner would be responsible for any such losses or damages under state and/or federal law. Add Subparagraph 3.3.4 as follows:

3.3.4 “Contractor shall execute the Work in a good and workmanlike manner, continuously and diligently in accordance with generally accepted standards of construction management and practice for construction of projects similar to the Project, using qualified, careful and efficient workers and in conformity with the provisions of the Contract and the other Contract Documents.” 3.5 WARRANTY Add Subparagraphs 3.5.1, 3.5.2, 3.5.3 and 3.5.4 as follows:

3.5.1 In the event of failure of a specified product, either during construction or the warranty period, the Contractor shall take appropriate measures with the manufacturer of the product to assure correction or replacement of the defective products. 3.5.2 Refer to General Contractor Warranty and Subcontractor Warranty forms included under Section 01700, Construction Contract Close Out that will be required prior to final payment. 3.5.3 Approximately eleven months after Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall accompany the Owner and Architect on an end of the one-year Warranty period reinspection of the Project. The Contractor shall correct additional deficiencies observed or reported. 3.5.4 All warranty requests will be handled in a manner consistent with the nature and severity of the request, i.e. an emergency request as defined by the potential to harm, endanger, damage or destroy property will be responded to immediately. 3.6 TAXES Add Subparagraph 3.6.1 as follows:

3.6.1 In accordance with Section 151.311 of the Texas Tax Code, the Owner is exempt from all sales tax on the purchase of tangible personal property under Section 151.309 of the Texas Tax Code. The Owner will issue certificates of Exemption from sales tax on tangible personal property furnished by the Contractor on this School construction project. The Contractor shall issue Certificates of Resale to their


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-7

subcontractors and suppliers in order to avoid payment of any sales tax on materials incorporated into this project. Failure of the Contractor to issue Certificates of Resale to the subcontractors and suppliers shall make the Contractor responsible for absorbing the tax. Refer to Section 151.311 of the Texas Tax Code for the definition of tangible personal property. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES At Subparagraph 3.7.1, add the following subparagraphs:

.1 The Owner shall pay directly to the governing authority the cost of all permanent property utility assessments and similar utility connection charges.

.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for all City and County Building Permits, Inspection Fees and Plan Checking Fees; temporary utility charges, tap charges, and water meter charges and any other similar fees assessed by jurisdictional authorities having control over this Project.

.3 The Owner shall pay fees payable to the Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR) for document review relative to the Elimination of Architectural Barriers Act and the Architect will submit the documents to the TDLR for review and approval.

3.8 ALLOWANCES In Subparagraph 3.8.1 delete the part of the second sentence beginning with “but”.

Delete Paragraph 3.8.3 in its entirety substitute the following: 3.8.3 “Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected in a reasonable period of time by the Owner to avoid delays in the Work (Provided that if a decision is needed to avoid delay, Contractor shall notify Architect and Construction manager in a writing sufficiently in advance of needed date to allow reasonable time for selections to be made).

3.9 SUPERINTENDENT

Add Subparagraph 3.9.2 as follows:

3.9.4 The Superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed except with the consent of the Architect, unless the Superintendent leaves the employment of the Contractor. No increase in Contract Time or Contract Sum shall be allowed in the event the Owner or Architects object to any nominated superintendent 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Add the following to the end of Subparagraph 3.10.1:

“The format and detail of the schedules shall be in keeping with the size and complexity of the Project. The schedule and any updates of it shall be subject to approval of the Owner”. Delete Subparagraph 3.10.2 in its entirety and replace with the following:

The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Architect’s and Owner approval, a schedule of submittals, which is coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule and allows the Architect and Owner reasonable time to review submittals. Add Subparagraph 3.10.4 as follows:

3.10.4 “The process of approving Contractor’s schedules and updates to Contractor’s schedule shall not constitute a warranty by the Owner that any non- Contractor milestones or activities will occur as set out on Contractor’s schedule. Approval of a Contractor’s schedule does not constitute a commitment by the Owner to furnish any Owner-furnished information or material any earlier than Owner would otherwise be


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-8

obligated to furnish that information or material under the Contract Documents. Failure of the Work to proceed in the sequence scheduled by Contractor shall not alone serve as the basis for a Claim for additional compensation or time. In the event there is interference with the Work, which is beyond its control, Contractor shall attempt to reschedule the Work in a manner that will hold resulting additional time and cost to a minimum. The construction schedule shall be in a detailed format satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect and shall also:

.1 provide a graphic representation of all activities and events that will occur during performance of Work;

.2 identify each phase of construction and occupancy; and

.3 set forth dates that are critical in ensuring the timely and orderly completion of the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents hereinafter referred to as Milestone Dates).


3.10.5 “The Owner’s need for delivery of completed Work, or portions thereof, is largely controlled by the necessities of the school calendar and operations of school programs within the calendar year. Their needs are reflected in scheduled completion dates and milestone dates set out in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall perform the work in such a way as to not interfere with school operations and the importance of meeting milestones and completion dates is not exclusive. The contractor acknowledges and agrees that if these dates are not met, there may be a relaxation in the needed delivery dates because of the school calendar. When it appears to not be the fault of the Contractor, Contractor will develop with PISD, Construction Manager and Architect a plan and a budget under the Change Order provision of the Contract Documents to delays, or suspending or otherwise slowing the Work to efficiently take advantage of any relaxation in Owner’s need for the completed Work”. Add Subparagraph 3.10.6 as follows:

3.10.6 “The Owner shall have the right to reschedule the time of day for the performance of any part of the Work that may interfere with the operation of the Owner’s premises or any tenants or invitees thereof. The Contractor shall, upon the Owner’s request, reschedule any portion of the Work affecting operation of the premises during hours when the premises are not in operation. Any rescheduling of performance of the Work under this Subparagraph 3.10.6 may be grounds for an extension of the Contract Time, if permitted under Subparagraph 8.3.1, and an equitable adjustments in the Contract Sum , if : (1) the performance of the Work was properly scheduled by the Contractor in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, (2) such rescheduling is required for the convenience of the Owner and is not attributable to any act of omission of Contractor, and (3) if Owner agrees to the Contract Sum adjustment prior to any rescheduling”. 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE Add Subparagraph 3.11.1 as follows:

3.11.1 The Contractor shall post all Addenda on Construction Documents prior to commencing work in the site. 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES At Subparagraph 3.12.5, add the following sentence:

If, in the opinion of the Architect, the Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are incomplete, indicate an inadequate understanding of the work covered by the submittals, or indicate a lack of study and review by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect, the submittals will be returned, unchecked, to the Contractor for correction of these three deficiencies and subsequent resubmittal. Additional service charges as outlined in 3.2.6 may be charged by the Architect in this event.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-9

Add Subparagraphs 3.12.11 and 3.12.12 as follows:

3.12.11 The Contractor shall submit complete Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents to the Architect at least 30 days prior to the date the Contractor needs the reviewed submittals returned. Where colors are to be selected by the Architect, submit all Samples in adequate time to allow the Architect to prepare a complete selection schedule. In general, all submittals requiring color selection shall be submitted to the Architect within four weeks of the date of the contact for construction. 3.12.12 The Contractor shall submit the number of copies of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals which the Contractor and his subcontractors need for their use plus two additional sets for the Architect and one additional set for each of the Architect’s consultants involved with the particular section of work. Where shop drawings are involved, submit one high quality reproducible transparency and one opaque print of the shop drawing for the Architect plus one additional opaque print for each of the Architect’s consultants involved with the particular section of work. The reproducible transparency will be marked by the Architect and/or his consultants and returned to the Contractor for his use, distribution, correction or resubmittal as required. The Architect and his consultants will retain the marked up prints. After final review and correction of the submittal, the Contractor shall send two corrected sets to the Architect, and one to the Architect’s consultants involved with the particular section of work. 3.13 USE OF SITE Add the following to the end of Subparagraph 3.13:

3.13 “When the Work is to be performed at an existing school location, Contractor shall schedule and perform the Work in a manner that does not compromise the safety to school, students, facility and staff and does not unreasonably disrupt or interfere with the continuing normal routine of the school. If a School Operations Parameters Statement is a part of the Contract Documents, Contractor will comply with its terms, at no increase in price.” Add Subparagraph 3.13.1 as follows:

3.13.1 “Only materials and equipment which are to be used directly in the Work shall be brought to and stored on the Project site by the Contractor. After equipment is no longer required for the Work, it shall be promptly removed from the Project site. Protection of construction material and equipment stored at the Project site from weather, theft, damage and all other adversity is solely the responsibility of the Contractor.” Add Subparagraph 3.13.3 as follows:

3.13.3 “The Contractor and any entity for whom the Contractor is responsible shall not erect any sign on the Project site without the prior written consent of the Owner.” Add Subparagraph 3.13.3 as follows:

3.13.3 “ Contractor shall ensure that the Work, at all times, is performed in a manner that affords reasonable access, both vehicular and pedestrian, to the site of the Work and all adjacent areas. The Work shall be performed, to the fullest extent reasonably possible, in such a manner that public areas adjacent to the site of the Work shall be free from all debris, building materials and equipment likely to cause hazardous conditions. Without limitation of any other provision on the Contract Documents, Contractor shall use its best efforts to minimize any interference with the occupancy or beneficial use of:

.1 any area and buildings adjacent to the site or the Work or

.2 the Building in the event of partial occupancy.” Add Subparagraph 3.13.4 as follows:

3.13.4 “Without prior approval of the Owner, the Contractor shall not permit any workers to use any existing facilities at the Project site, including, without limitation, lavatories, toilets, entrance, and parking areas other than those designated by the Owner. Without limitation of any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall use its best efforts to comply with all rules and regulations promulgated


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-10

by the Owner in connection with the use and occupancy of the Project site and the Building, as amended from time to time.” 3.15 CLEAN UP Add Subparagraph 3.15.3 as follows:

3.15.3 Prior to the Architect’s inspection for Substantial Completion the Contractor shall clean exterior and interior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains, and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition; replace air filters in mechanical equipment; clean roof, gutters, and downspouts; remove obstructions and flush debris from drainage systems; clean site; sweep paved areas and rake clean other surfaces; remove trash and surplus materials from the site. ARTICLE 3.18 - INDEMNIFICATION Delete the text of Subparagraph 3.18.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law and to the extent claims, damages, losses or expenses are not covered by Project Management Protective Liability insurance purchased by the Contractor in accordance with paragraph 11.3, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner and the agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to, attorney’s fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to the party or persons described in this paragraph 3.18. Add Paragraphs 3.19, 3.20, 3.21 and 3.22 as follows:

3.19 SUBSTITUTIONS OF PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS, “OR EQUAL” BRANDS 3.19.1 The materials, products, and the systems covered by these specifications have been selected as a standard because of quality, particular suitability, or record of satisfactory performance. It is not intended to preclude the use of equivalent or better materials, products, or systems provided that it meets the requirements of the particular project and have been approved in an addendum as a substitution prior to the submission of bids. If prior written approval in an addendum has not been obtained, it will be assumed that the Bid is based upon the materials, products, and systems described in the Bidding Documents and no substitutions will be permitted, except as provided hereinafter. 3.19.2 If, after award of contract, the Contractor or one of his Subcontractors or Suppliers determines that any of the products or systems specified will perform in a manner that will limit the Contractor’s ability to satisfactorily perform the work or to honor the Warranty, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect, in writing, providing detailed substantiation for his position. Any changes deemed necessary by the Owner and Architect, including substitution of materials and change in Contract Sum, either upward or downward, if any, shall be accompanied by appropriate Modification. 3.19.3 Substitution requests shall be submitted on the forms included herein and in accordance with the process established in Section 01630, Product Options and Substitutions. 3.20 RECORD DRAWINGS 3.20.1 At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit one complete set of blue lines showing all changes and routing of utilities made during construction, excluding Architect made CAD changes, to


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-11

the Architect. Drafting shall be legible to the Architects satisfaction. The Contractor shall pay for the cost of the required recording/drafting. The record set shall be kept up to date on a daily bases and the Architect shall review its status at the project meetings. The Architect shall furnish the Contractor with a blueline set at contract award which shall have all Addenda incorporated. The owner will pay for the printing of the blueline set. The Architect will incorporate any record information into the construction (CAD) documents and provide the owner with an electronic copy of the record information on the Construction documents that have all bid, and construction changes incorporated. The cost for incorporating the record information into the CD will be paid for by the owner. The Architect will transmit the electronic CD to the owner with a copy of the transmittal to the Construction Manager. 3.21 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 3.21.1 No employee used in this construction may be paid less than the minimum wage rate provided in Article 5159d, Vernon’s Civil Statutes, Annotated, Revised 1995 and The Texas Minimum Wage Act of 1970. Refer to Document 00 8310, Wage Scale. 3.22 ANTITRUST VIOLATIONS 3.22.1 To permit the Owner to recover damages suffered in antitrust violations, the Owner-Contractor Agreement shall include the following wording, “Contractor hereby assigns to Owner any and all claims for overcharges associated with this Contract which arise under the antitrust laws of the United States, 15 U.S.C.A., Section 1 et.seq. (1973)”. The Contractor shall include this provision in his agreements with each Subcontractor and Supplier. Each Subcontractor shall include such provisions in agreements with Sub-Subcontractors and Suppliers. ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT Delete the text of Subparagraph 4.2.2 in its entirety and substitute the following:

4.2.2 The Architect, as a representative of the Owner, will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor’s operations (1) to become generally familiar with and keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will be required to make on-site inspections as necessary to keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work and as necessary to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Delete the text of Subparagraph 4.2.6 in its entirety and substitute the following:

4.2.6 The Architect shall have authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. The Architect shall be required to promptly notify the Owner of any non-conforming Work and shall reject such non-conforming Work unless the Owner objects to the rejection in writing within twenty-four (24) hours of such notification. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. Performance of any additional inspection or testing, which would result in additional cost to the Owner, shall require advance notice to and approval of the Owner. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith, either to exercise or not exercise such authority, shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Sub-contractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-12

ARTICLE 5 – SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK Delete Subparagraph 5.2.1 in its entirety and replace it with the following:

5.2.1 As soon as practicable after Award of the Contract, but no later than 10 days prior to the submittal date for the Contractor’s first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner and Architect, in writing, the names of the persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of the Work. Where Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors have been listed in the Specifications or in an Addendum as an approved Subcontractor the proposed entity shall be one of those firms listed, unless agreement has been reached to accept a proposed Substitute Subcontractor as listed on the Bid Form. Regarding proposed persons or entities to perform portions of the Work where no approved Subcontractors have been listed or approved by Addendum, the Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. Failure of the Contractor to submit the subject names in a timely manner will delay processing of the Contractor’s Application for Payment. Delete Subparagraph 5.2.2 in its entirety and replace it with the following:

5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to which the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. At Subparagraph 5.2.4, add the following sentence:

Prior to such change the Contractor shall notify the Architect of his intent and reasons for such proposed changes. Add Subparagraph 5.2.5 as follows:

5.2.5 The Contractor shall submit the list of proposed Subcontractors on AIA Document G805. ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 CHANGE ORDERS Delete the text of Subparagraph 7.1.2 in its entirety and substitute the following:

7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner’s Board of Trustees, Contractor and Architect; a construction change directive requires agreement by the Owner or the Owner’s representative and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 7.1.3 as follows:

7.1.3 “Except as permitted in Paragraph 7.3, a change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time shall be accomplished only by Change Order.” Add Subparagraph 7.1.4 as follows:

7.1.4 “The Contractor, upon receipt of written notification by the Architect of a proposed item of change in the Work, shall prepare within 14 calendar days a Change Proposal in such form or forms as directed by the Architect.”

.1 Each separate Change Proposal shall be numbered consecutively and shall include materials, cost, labor costs, fees, overhead and profit. The Proposal shall specify all cost related to the proposed Change in the Work, including any disruption or impact on performance.

.2 The Subcontractor’s itemized accounting shall be included with the Change Proposal;


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-13

.3 If a change Proposal is returned to the Contractor for additional information or if the scope of the proposed change in the Work is modified by additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contractor shall revise the Change Proposal accordingly and resubmit the revised Change Proposal to the Architect and the Construction Manager;

.4 A revised Change Proposal shall be the original Change Proposal number suffixed by the letter “R” to designate a revision in the original Change Proposal. If additional revisions to a revised Change Proposal are necessary, each subsequent revision shall be identified by an appropriate numeral suffix immediately following the “R” suffix;

.5 Upon written approval of a Change Proposal by Owner, the Architect and the Construction Manager, the Architect will prepare a Change Order authorizing such change in the Work; and

.6 The Contractor shall request extensions of Contract Time due to changes in the Work only at the time of submitting its Change Proposal. Contractor’s failure to do so shall represent a waiver of any right to request a time extension.

ARTICLE 8 – TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS Delete Subparagraph 8.1.2 in its entirety and replace it with the following:

8.1.2 Unless agreed otherwise, the date inserted on the Agreement form and the Date of Commencement of the Work shall be as follows:

.1 The date inserted on the first page of the Agreement form will be the date the Owner formally awards the Contract. As soon as feasible after receipt of Bids, the Architect will present Agreement forms to the Contractor for his review and signature; the Contractor will be allowed a maximum of ten (10) days from the date the prepared Agreements are presented to him to 1) obtain the required bond forms and insurance certificates and 2) return the executed Agreements and supporting documents to the Architect for transmittal to the Owner for his final review and execution.

.2 The Date of Commencement of the Work: Refer to subparagraph 1.7.8. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME Delete Subparagraph 8.3.1 in its entirety and replace it with the following:

8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act of neglect of the Owner or the Architect, or by an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delays in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, Net Weather Days, or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify the delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect and Owner may determine.

Add Subparagraphs 8.3.4, 8.3.5, 8.3.6 and 8.3.7 as follows:

8.3.4 Extensions of time granted for causes described herein will be granted on the basis of 1.4 Calendar Days extension for each Regular Working Day lost, except as modified by the provisions contained herein related to Anticipated Inclement Weather days. 8.3.5 Each Proposer shall include in his proposed Contract Time an allowance of Anticipated Inclement Weather Days in accordance with the following schedule: Number of Anticipated Inclement Weather Days to be included in Bid Completion Time (These are regular working days)

January 3 April 2 July 4 October 3 February 4 May 5 August 4 November 5 March 4 June 6 September 4 December 4


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-14

8.3.6 Weather Days shall be as described in subparagraph 1.7.10.5 If such situations occur in more than the number of Anticipated Inclement Weather Days included in the Bid Completion Time and if those additional days prevent the Contractor from performing critical portions of the scheduled Work, extensions of time caused by inclement weather may be requested as enumerated hereinafter. 8.3.7 At the beginning of each month the Contractor shall submit a monthly status report showing 1) the scheduled number of Anticipated Inclement Weather Days for the particular month, 2) the actual Weather Days requested, and 3) the Net Weather Days (plus, minus, or no change). At times deemed appropriate by the Architect or when requested in writing by the Contractor, the Contract Time will be adjusted by Change Order if the total of Net Weather Days is substantially greater than 0. If the Contractor fails to submit said monthly status report it will be assumed that none of the Anticipated Inclement Weather Days were used for that month and they shall accumulate for possible future offset against Net Weather Days; however, if at the end of the project all Anticipated Inclement Weather Days have not been used, the Contract Completion Time will not be reduced. An example of the monthly schedule to be submitted is as follows:

Weather Days (Regular)

Month Anticipated Actual Requested Net January 3 8 5 February 4 0 -4 March 4 2 -2 April 2 2 0 May 5 7 2 June 6 10 4 TOTALS 24 29 5

Using this example (and assuming that all requested days were approved), there were 5 Net Weather Days (regular working days) for the first six months of the project and the extension of Contract Time would be 7 calendar days (5 working days x 1.4 = 7 calendar days). ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

In Subparagraph 9.3.1.1 delete the phrase “or by interim determinations of the Architect”.

Delete Subparagraph 9.3.2 in its entirety and replace it with the following:

9.3.2 Payments will be made on account of materials or equipment that is suitably stored at some off site location meeting the following conditions:

.1 The Owner and Surety must agree to the location in writing.

.2 The location must be a bonded warehouse.

.3 Surety must agree, in writing, to each request for payment.

.4 The Contractor must bear the cost of the Owner’s and Architect’s expenses related to visiting the off site location.

Payments for materials or equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon submission by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials or equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, including applicable insurance (naming the Owner as insured) and transportation to the site for those materials and equipment stored off the site. Under no circumstances will the Owner reimburse the Contractor for down payments, deposits, or other advance payments for materials or equipment.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-15


9.3.4 The Contractor shall submit requests for payment in quadruplicate, using AIA Document G702, Application and Certificate of Payment, as the cover sheet. Continuation sheets showing in detail the amounts requested, etc., shall be submitted using AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet, or a computerized version of these documents previously approved for use. The information provided on the continuation sheets in the Description of the Work and Scheduled Values columns shall match the corresponding information shown on the approved Schedule of Values (refer to Document 00820). All blank spaces on AIA Document G702, Application and Certificate of Payment, must be completed and the signatures of the Contractor and Notary Public shall be original on each form. By submitting his application for payment, the Contractor certifies that the individual signing the application is authorized to do so. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS Delete Subparagraph 9.6.1 in its entirety and replace it with the following:

9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment; the Owner shall make progress payments in accordance with the following subparagraph that shall be inserted as Article 5, Progress Payments, in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, AIA Document A101, 2007 Edition. Based upon the applications for payment and supporting documents submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and certification of the amount payable by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided in the Contract Documents for the period ending the last day of the month as follows:

.1 Not later than twenty-five (25) days following the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment, ninety-five percent (95%) of the portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to labor, materials, and equipment incorporated in the Work and ninety-five percent (95%) of the portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment suitably stored at the site or at some other location agreed upon in writing (subject to the conditions listed in Article 9.3.2 of the Supplementary Conditions to the Contract for Construction), for the period covered by the Application for Payment, less the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner.

.2 Upon Substantial Completion of the entire Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to ninety-five percent (95%) of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Architect shall determine for all incomplete Work and unsettled claims as provided in the Contract Documents.

At Subparagraph 9.6.2 add the following sentence after the first sentence:

More specifically, if only five percent (5%) retainage is withheld by the Owner on payments to the Contractor, then the Contractor shall withhold only five percent (5%) retainage on payments to subcontractors; and subcontractors shall withhold only five percent (5%) retainage on payments to sub-subcontractors. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT

Delete Subparagraph in its entirety and replace with the following:

“If the Owner does not pay Contractor any payment which is due and owing under this Contract and which has been certified by the Architect and the Construction Manager within thirty (30) days of the date when it is due, then the Contractor may, upon ten (10) additional days’ written notice, stop the Work until payment of amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately, and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable cost of shutdown, delay and start-up.” 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Add Subparagraphs 9.8.6 and 9.8.7 as follows:

9.8.6 In order for the project or a major portion thereof to be considered substantially complete, the following conditions must be met:


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-16

.1 All inspections by governmental authorities having jurisdiction over the project must have been finalized, any remedial work required by those authorities must have been completed, and Certificates of Occupancy and similar governmental approval forms must have been issued and copies delivered to the Owner and Architect.

.2 All work, both interior and exterior, shall have been completed and cleaned except minor items which if completed after occupancy, will not, in the Owner’s opinion, cause interference to the Owner’s use of the building or any portion thereof. A significantly large number of items to be completed or corrected will preclude the Architect from issuing a Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Owner and Architect will be the sole judge of what constitutes a significantly large number of items.

9.8.7 After the date of Substantial Completion of the Project is evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Contractor will be allowed a period of thirty (30) days, unless extended by mutual agreement or provision of the Contract, within which to correct all deficiencies attached to the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Failure of the Contractor to complete such corrections within the stipulated time will be reported to the Contractor’s surety. In this report, the Contractor and surety will be informed that, should correction remain incomplete for fifteen (15) days, the Owner may initiate action to complete corrective work out of the remaining Contract funds in accordance with Article 14.2. 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.2 Delete the word “liens,” and delete the last two sentences.

Then At Subparagraph 9.10.2, add the following sentence:

Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall meet all of the requirements of Section 01 7800, Close Out Procedures. Add Subparagraph 9.10.6 as follows:

9.10.6 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be paid by the Owner, to the Contractor, thirty-one (31) days after Substantial Completion of the work unless otherwise stipulated in the Certificate of Substantial Completion, provided the Work has been completed, the Contract fully performed, all of the requirements of Section 01700, Construction Contract Close Out, are met, and the Final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. The final payment will not be made until all of these conditions are met. ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

Delete the text in Subparagraph 10.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 10.1.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLITITY 10.1.1.1 The General Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs required under its portion of the Work on a day-to-day basis. 10.1.2 SAFETY OVERVIEW 10.1.2.1 Each Contractor and its subcontractors of all tiers shall be responsible for the health, safety and security of employees under their control and as to their area of Work and will maintain on file a copy of their specific Project Site Safety Program 10.1.2.2 Safety, Health and Security requirements on this Project shall be prepared and administered by the General Contractor in accordance with the following:


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-17

10.1.2.2.1 Contractor and its subcontractors shall conduct Work in a safe and practical manner in conformance with Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA) and all additions and revisions thereto, and the latest edition of the Manual of Accident Prevention, Associated General Contractors of America; 10.1.2.2.2 In addition to the General Contractor’s Project Site Safety Program, the General Contractor and its subcontractors shall follow all applicable Federal, State and local laws/regulations pertaining to safety, health, pollution control, water supply, fire protection, sanitation facilities, waste disposal and other related items; 10.1.2.2.3 Each Prime Contractor shall cooperate fully with all other Contractors and the Owner in their respective Safety, Health and Security programs; 10.1.2.2.4 Good housekeeping shall be observed at all times, and waste, debris, and garbage shall be removed daily or placed in appropriate waste containers outside of the work place and all materials, tools and equipment shall be stored in a safe and orderly fashion. 10.1.2.3 Should the Owner or the Program Manager observe a Contractor, Subcontractor or its supervisors or employees engaged in an unsafe act or improperly utilizing equipment in such a manner that creates an inherently dangerous condition which puts the life or safety of job site personnel at risk or in danger, then The General Contractor agrees that the Owner or Program Manager has the right to immediately stop such Work or acts. The safety concerns shall be immediately addressed by The General Contractor, who shall correct the hazard or condition prior to resuming Work in the area. 10.1.3 SAFETY PROGRAM 10.1.3.1 The General Contractor shall provide a written Project Site Safety Program, maintain injury records as required by OSHA, keep the Owner informed of all serious and/or lost time injuries, and make available to the Owner information on injury logs, safety meetings including topics and a sign-in sheet for each meeting, inspection reports and other items concerning Project safety. The General Contractor will post on site an emergency contact list on a prescribed form or one acceptable to the Owner. 10.1.3.2 The General Contractor shall inform the Owner of any Federal or State inspection, and the Owner will receive copies of all Federal and State inspection reports, citations, penalties, abatement dates, etc. 10.1.3.3 The General Contractor shall give full cooperation to the Owner, who may periodically observe the Project Work Site without prior notice. 10.1.3.4 The General Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees working on any District facility must wear picture identification with the company name provided and verified by General Contractor. Any exceptions must be approved in advance with the designated District representative. 10.1.4 EMPLOYEE SAFETY ORIENTATION AND SAFETY MEETINGS 10.1.4.1 The General Contractor or its subcontractor(s) of any tier shall follow OSHA Act 1926.21 (b) (2) requirements that state “that each employer shall instruct each employee in the recognition and avoidance of unsafe conditions and the regulations applicable to his work environment.” 10.1.4.2 The General Contractor shall provide site and safety orientation to all employees as they begin Work on the Project. This orientation shall cover general safety rules, potential hazards, and site work rules, the wearing of protective equipment and the relationship of the Owner’s personnel assigned to the Project. Attendance at the mandatory briefing is required of all Contractors’ employees. The General Contractor and each of its subcontractors shall keep a record of all attendees and topics discussed.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-18

10.1.4.3 The General Contractor and each of its subcontractors shall hold weekly Toolbox Meetings at the Project site. It is the responsibility of The General Contractor and/or its subcontractor(s) to furnish the following documentation to the Owner after each safety meeting: date, topics discussed, meeting chair, names of employees who were present, names of employees who were absent, trade and/or subcontractor name. 10.1.5 ACCIDENT REPORTS 10.1.5.1 All Accidents or occurrences resulting in employee injury and/or property damage shall immediately be verbally reported by The General Contractor and to the Owner. An Accident investigation with a formal written “Accident Report” and “First Report of Injury” shall be completed and forwarded to Owner within 24 hours, but not later than the end of the working day after the occurrence or Accident. Any incidents involving the police or law enforcement agency shall also be included in this documentation. 10.1.5.2 All recordable occupational injuries and illnesses, other than First Aid cases, shall be submitted with the Payment Application to the Owner. Failure to provide this information will delay the processing of The General Contractors Payment Application. 10.1.6 EMPLOYEE AND VISITOR DRESS REQUIREMENTS 10.1.6.1 All supervisors, employees and visitors shall be required to wear hard hats, durable work shoes and appropriate eye protection while on the Project Work Site. 10.1.6.2 All employees shall be properly and completely clothed while working. Bare torsos, legs and feet will not be allowed. 10.1.6.3 Other appropriate personal protective equipment shall be provided and worn as required for personal safety and protection. 10.1.7 EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION 10.1.7.1 A procedure will be established by The General Contractor to provide emergency communications to all individuals on the site. 10.1.8 FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH SAFETY REGULATIONS 10.1.8.1 If the Owner notifies The General Contractor of any non-compliance with the provisions of this program, The General Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to correct the unsafe conditions or acts. Satisfactory corrective action shall be taken within the time specified by the Owner. 10.1.9 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1.9.1 The General Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 10.1.9.1.1 All employees on-site and all other persons who may be affected thereby; 10.1.9.1.2 All the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody or control of The General Contractor or any of its subcontractors, sub-subcontractors or suppliers; and 10.1.9.1.3 Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation of replacement in the course of construction.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-19

10.1.9.2 The General Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and orders of any public authority having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss. The General Contractor shall erect and maintain as required by existing conditions and progress of the Work, until the acceptance of the completion of its portion of the project, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. 10.1.10 EMERGENCIES 10.1.10.1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, The General Contractor shall act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or Extension of Time claimed by The General Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in Article 4 “Administration of the Contract” of these General Conditions. 10.1.11 CRIMINAL BACKGROUND CHECKS FOR CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES 10.1.11 Prior to commencing any work on this project, Prosper will certify, on the form provided in the Program Manuel, that for each employee of Proposer who will have direct contact with students, the Prosper has obtained, as required by Texas Education Code Section 22.0834: (a) national criminal history record information from law enforcement or criminal justice agency for each employee of Proposer hired before January 01, 2008; and (b) national criminal history record information from the Texas Department of Safety for each employee of Proposer hired on or after January 01, 2008. Any employee that will have direct contact with students must have not been convicted of any offense identified in Texas Education Code Section 22.085. 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Add the following sentence to the end of Subparagraph 10.2.3:

10.2.3 “The contractor shall also be responsible, at the contractor’s sole cost and expense, for all measures necessary to protect any property adjacent to the project and improvements therein. Any damage to such property or improvements shall be promptly repaired by the contractor.” 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Delete the text in Subparagraph 10.3.1.1 in its entirety and replace with the following:

10.3.1.1 Contractor and subcontractors are responsible for reviewing all asbestos management plans and/or surveys on file with the Owner prior to commencing the Work and insure that all persons on the site have received the required training. Further, in performing the Work, Contractor and subcontractors shall not cause any release of asbestos or other hazardous materials or substances into the environment, including the spill, the atmosphere, any watercourse or ground water, except in accordance with applicable laws. In the event Contractor or any subcontractor encounters on the Project site any asbestos or other hazardous materials or substances, or what Contractor or subcontractor may reasonably believe to be asbestos or hazardous material or substance, Contractor and all subcontractors must immediately stop working the area affected and report the condition to Owner and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written authorization of the Owner. Contractor and subcontractors shall be responsible for the consequences of any failure to stop work under this subparagraph. Contractor and subcontractors shall not attempt to remediate or render harmless any asbestos or hazardous material or substances absent a separate written agreement with the Owner. Contractor is responsible for notifying all of Contractor’s employees, agents, representatives, and subcontractors of the Owner’s asbestos management plans and surveys and of the rules, procedures and instructions contained within this subparagraph. (The “Acknowledge” form will be completed during the CSP Negotiation Phase and prior to the Construction Contract Award.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-20

Add Subparagraphs, 10.3.7 and 10.3.8 as follows: 10.3.7 The use of any construction process or the installation of any materials containing the hazardous materials not specifically required in the specifications is strictly prohibited on this project. Upon completion of the construction all products and assemblies that make up the project will not contain any of the following hazardous materials or any other hazardous materials as determined by law:

• Asbestos or asbestos containing materials • Lead in any portion of drinking water system (conformance with the Safe Drinking Water Acts Amendment of 1986 is required) • Refrigerant R-11 (Trichlorofluoromethane) • Refrigerant R-12 (Dischlorodhfluoromethane) • Refrigerant R-113 (Trichlorotrifluoromethane) • Refrigerant R-114 (Dichlorotetrafluoromethane) • Refrigerant R-500 (Combination of R-12 and R152a) • Refrigerant R502 (Combination of R-22 and R115) • Transformer Cooling Agent P.C.B. (Polychloride Biphenyls)

10.3.8 As part of the construction contract close out process, and prior to receiving payment of any of the retainage, the Contractor and certain of his subcontractors shall submit notarized statements pertaining to the above referenced hazardous materials. This certification will be supported by maintaining on site during construction a complete list and MSDS sheets of all materials used on site and the record will be turned over to the owner as part of the closeout documents. ARTICLE 11 -INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE At Subparagraph 11.1.1, add the following Subparagraphs: .9 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis

including: .1 Premises Operations (including X, C, and U coverage’s) .2 Independent Contractors’ .3 Products and Completed Operations .4 Personal Injury Liability with Employee Exclusion deleted .5 Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor’s obligation under Paragraph 3.18 .6 Owned, non-owned and hired vehicles .7 Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations .8 If the General Liability coverage’s are provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a

claims-made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than 12 months after the termination date of coverage’s required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2.

At Subparagraph 11.1.2, delete the first sentence in its entirety and replace it with the following:

The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits or the limits required by law, whichever coverage is greater:

.1 Workers’ Compensation: (a) State: Texas - Statutory (b) Applicable Federal - Statutory (c) Employer’s Liability

$1,000,000 per Accident $1,000,000 per Disease, Policy Limit


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-21

$1,000,000 per Disease, Each Employee .2 Commercial General Liability Insurance

(a) General Aggregate $2,000,000 (b) Products / Completed Operations Agg $2,000,000 (c) Personal and Advertising Injury $1,000,000 (d) Each Occurrence $1,000,000 (e) Fire Damage $50,000 (f) Medical Expense $5,000

.3 Contractual Liability: (a) Bodily Injury and Property Damage Combined:

$1,000,000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Aggregate

.4 Personal Injury, with Employee Exclusion deleted: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Aggregate

.5 Business Auto Liability (including owned, non-owned and hired vehicles): (a) Combined Single Limit $1,000,000

OR (b) Bodily Injury (per person) $500,000 (c) Bodily Injury (per accident) $1,000,000 (d) Property Damage (per accident) $500,000

.6 Umbrella Liability Insurance: (a) Each Occurrence $5,000,000 (b) Aggregate $5,000,000 (c) The Umbrella shall provide coverage over the workmen’s compensation, comprehensive

general liability, and comprehensive automobile liability. The Owner and the Architect and all Consultants listed on the Title Page of the Project Manual shall be an additional insured on the Contractor’s policy as to the subject job. Provision shall be included for Waiver of Subrogation against Owner and Architect and his Consultants.

At Subparagraph 11.1.3, add the following sentence:

Proof of insurance shall be evidenced on 1) an original ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25-S (7/90) and 2) an original Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25-S (7/90), AIA Document G715-1991, a copy of which is bound herein, each with an original signature of the Authorized Representative. Policy exclusions and/or restrictions should be clearly explained on the Certificate or in an attached letter from the issuing agency. Blank areas on the Certificate should have “not covered” written across the printed areas when coverage is not provided. Add Subparagraph 11.1.4 as follows:

11.1.4 Insurance shall be underwritten by a company rated not less than B+ VII in Best’s latest published guide.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-22

11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE Delete Subparagraphs in its entirety and replace it with the following:

The Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining Owner’s Protective Liability Insurance naming the Owner as insured with the stated limit to be per occurrence as primary limit (combined single limit, irrespective of whether occurrence consists of personal injury, death, property damage, or combination thereof). The policy shall cover the work to be performed for the Owner by the Contractor and all subcontractors. The definition of insured in the policy shall be endorsed to include officers, Board Members, employees of the Owner, while acting within the scope of employment or function for the Owner with respect to the work performed by the Contractor; the project architect and his consultants, as listed in the Bidding Documents, shall also be included as additional insured. The policy shall be written with the same company as the Comprehensive General Liability policy. Limits: $1,000,000 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE Delete Subparagraphs 11.3.1 through 11.3.10 in their entirety and replace them with the following:

11.3.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance in the amount of the initial Contract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without voluntary deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained until final payment has been made as provided in Paragraph 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Paragraph 11.3 to be covered, whichever is earlier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work. 11.3.2 Property insurance shall insure against the perils of fire and flood and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. This insurance is not intended to cover machinery, tools or equipment owned or rented by the Contractor that are utilized in the performance of the Work but not incorporated into the permanent improvements. The Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s own expense, provide insurance coverage for owned or rented machinery, tools or equipment. Coverage of other perils shall not be required unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 11.3.3 The property insurance shall include an endorsement allowing Owner occupancy and the insurance shall not be altered on account of partial occupancy prior to final completion. 11.3.4 The property insurance requires various deductibles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles, up to a maximum of ten thousand dollars ($10,000). 11.3.5 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval, and also portions of the Work in transit. 11.3.6 Before any exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverage required by this Paragraph 11.4. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least thirty (30) days’ prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. The policy can be canceled for non-payment of premium with 15 days written notice.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-23

11.3.7 The Owner or Contractor waive all rights against each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11.4 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. 11.3.8 A loss under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner and made payable to the Owner as the insured, as their interests may appear. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 11.3.9 The Owner as insured shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insured. 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND Add Subparagraphs 11.4.3, 11.4.4 and 11.4.5 as follows:

11.4.3 The Performance Bond Form and The Payment Bond Form included herein shall be executed and submitted to the Architect in duplicate prior to commencement of the work. The surety companies must be acceptable to the Owner and licensed admitted carriers in the State of Texas; and the companies must appear in a current Federal Treasury list as Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies. 11.4.4 Each bond shall be of penal sum equal to 100% of the Contract Sum and shall be compatible with the provisions of the governing authority. The Contractor shall file copies of each bond with the county clerk and furnish the Owner with a file receipt. The bonds shall remain in force throughout the warranty period of the contract. The work will not be started until the bonds and issuing companies have been accepted as satisfactory by the Owner. The original bonds will be delivered to the Owner with an authorized power of attorney attached. 11.4.5 Claims must be sent to the Contractor and his Surety in accordance with Article 5160, Revised Civil Statutes. The Owner will furnish in accordance with such Article, a copy of the Payment Bond as provided therein to claimants upon request. All claimants are cautioned that no lien exists on the funds unpaid to the Contractor on such Contract, and that reliance on notices sent to the Owner may result in loss of their rights against the Contractor and/or his Surety. The Owner is not responsible in any manner to a claimant for collection of unpaid bills, and accepts no such responsibility because of any representation by any agent or employee. Add Paragraph 11.5 as follows: 11.5 WORKER’S COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE 11.5.1 Comply with the requirements of Rule 28, TAC §110.110, Reporting Requirements for Building or Construction Projects for Governmental Entities. 11.5.2 Definitions:

.1 Certificate of coverage (“certificate”). A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers’ compensation insurance coverage for the person or entity’s employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-24

.2 Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor’s/person’s work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity.

.3 Persons providing services on the project (“subcontractor” in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. “Services” include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. “Services” does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply delivery, and delivery of portable toilets.

11.5.3 The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 11.5.4 The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 11.5.5 If the coverage period shown on the contractor’s current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 11.5.6 The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:

.1 A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the projects, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and

.2 No later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project.

11.5.7 The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 11.5.8 The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 11.5.9 The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Worker’s Compensation , informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack coverage. 11.5.10 The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:

.1 Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;

.2 Provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-25

.3 Provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate ends during the duration of the project;

.4 Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provides to the contractor: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;

.5 Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter;

.6 Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and

.7 Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.

11.5.11 By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers’ compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission’s Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false of misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other actions. 11.5.12 The contractor’s failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE Delete the text of Subparagraph 13.3 in its entirety and substitute the following:

13.3 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer at the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice, or if delivered by facsimile to the offices of the person or corporation for which it was intended. Facsimiles received after 5:00 p.m. on a business day, or on a weekend or legal holiday on which the recipient’s offices are closed, notice shall be deemed to have been duly served on the next business day.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 00 8000-26

These Supplementary Conditions are entered into as of the date indicated on the AIA Standard Form of Agreement. ________________________________ _________________________________ OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature) _________________________________ _________________________________ (Printed Name and Title) (Printed Name and Title) ACKNOWLEDGMENT This acknowledges that I have reviewed all asbestos management plans and/or surveys on file with the Owner prior to commencing the Work, and that I have reviewed and agree to follow the rules, procedures, and instructions contained within Article 10.3 of the A201-1997 General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. I further understand and agree that I will be responsible for notifying all of my employees, agents, representatives, and subcontractors of the Owner’s asbestos management plans and surveys and of the rules, procedures, instructions, and adhere to all training requirements contained within Article 10.3 of the A201-1997 General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. ______________________________________ Company Name ______________________________________ Person Responsible END OF DOCUMENT

Lane School Renovation SUMMARY OF WORKAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 1100MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 1100 - SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes:1. Project information.2. Work covered by Contract Documents.3. Work under separate contracts.4. Access to site.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION:

A. Project Identification: Lane School Renovation

B. Owner: Aldine Independent School District (AISD)Houston, Texas

C. Architect: Mr. Dean BarnesMorris Architects, a Huitt-Zollars Company1001 Fannin Street, Suite 4040Houston, TX 77002ph: (713)622-1180

1.3 CONTRACTS:

A. Owner intends to receive Competitive Sealed Proposals from Contractors for the LaneSchool Renovation project.

1.4 EXISTING CONDITIONS AND SPECIAL PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Prior to beginning actual Work, thoroughly examine Project site, including access,storage, delivery facilities and all existing conditions that may affect Work. InformArchitect of discrepancies that affect completion of Work in compliance with ContractDocuments.

B. Replace or repair new and existing site improvements, utilities, streets and curbs whichare damaged or disturbed incident to Work performed as part of Contract. Repairconstruction to be equivalent to or superior to quality and appearance of originalconstruction.

C. Coordinate work of all trades where work is concealed below finish floors or within walls,particularly where Contract Drawings are diagrammatic.

1.5 USE OF SITE:

A. Contractor use of site:1. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Owner. Limit use of site for work

and for storage to allow:a. Work by other Contractors.b. Space for subcontractorsU use.c. OwnerUs occupancy.

2. Confine construction operations, including materials and equipment storage,project offices, storage buildings and other construction related operations andactivities within designated areas.a. Contractor shall move materials, under his control, which interfere with

work, when directed and at his expense.b. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage and work areas needed.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 1100-1


B. Owner use of site: Owner specifically reserves right of entry to completed, and partiallycompleted, areas for performance of other Work under Separate Contracts.1. Owner will occupy existing adjacent buildings and site during entire construction

period. Cooperate fully with Owner, or his representative, during construction tominimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform work so as not tointerfere with OwnerUs operations.

C. Workmen: All workmen shall be fully clothed and shall exhibit acceptable behavior at alltimes. Association with building tenants shall be prohibited. Failure to comply with theserequirements will subject personnel to banishment from property and prosecution to fullextent of the law.

D. Radios/headsets: Absolutely no radios/headsets are allowed on the job-site.

1.6 BUILDING ACCESS:

A. Contractor shall generally be prohibited from entering areas of the building except wherework is in progress. Work and access shall cause as little disruption to buildingoccupants as possible.

B. Schedule the Work and arrange material storage in a manner which leaves the projectsite as unencumbered as possible. Provide temporary barriers and enclosures, andmaintain the site in clean condition. Loading dock areas shall not be blocked.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting damages to the building caused by hiswork or passage. Soiled or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired tosatisfaction of the Owner.

1.7 REFERENCE STANDARDS:

A. When reference is made to standard specifications and standards of nationally knownorganizations, edition in effect is that edition indicated in Specifications. When no date oredition is indicated in Specifications, latest edition is edition in effect.

B. When specific articles, divisions, sections, and headings are not given, suchspecifications apply in full.

C. Standard specifications, when included by reference, form part of Specification as ifquoted in full.

1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS:

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections usingthe 49-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections

in the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style oflanguage and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used inparticular situations. These conventions are as follows:1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract

Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted asappropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the senserequires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall beinterpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the ContractDocuments indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in theSpecifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to beperformed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood maybe used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must befulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 1100-2


a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on thecontext, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence orphrase.



END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 1100-3

Lane School Renovation PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURESAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 2513MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 2513 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES:

A. Products are specified by reference standards, performance and manufacturer's nameand model number or trade name.1. When specified only by reference standard or performance, Contractor may

select any product meeting specified standards or performance requirements, byany manufacturer.

2. When several products or manufacturers are specified as being acceptable,Contractor has the option of choosing among those named.

3. When one product or manufacturer is specified or indicated as the "basis ofdesign", "basis of selection" or "scheduled", Contractor shall bear costsassociated with changes required for application or installation of other productsor assemblies.

4. When proprietary products are specified, substitutions will be allowed only bysubstitution provisions specified herein, unless it is specifically stated that nosubstitutions are allowed.

B. If it is desired to use products different from those indicated in the Contract Documents,the party requesting the substitution shall make written application on form provided at theend of this section and as described herein. The burden of proving equality of proposedsubstitutions rests with the party making the request for substitution.1. Requests for substitution shall reach Architect not less than ten days prior to date

set for opening of bids. Requests received by Architect after this date will not beconsidered.

2. Requests for substitution shall be accompanied by such technical data andsamples as the party making the request desires to submit. Architect willconsider reports from independent testing laboratories, verified experiencerecords from previous users, and other printed or written information valid in thecircumstances.

3. Requests for substitution shall indicate in what respects proposed materials orproducts differ from those specified and the effect on interfacing or related work.

4. Requests for substitution shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's datedproduct data describing the installation, use and care, as applicable, of proposedsubstitution. Include reference standards, test data and clarification drawings.

5. Requests for substitution shall be accompanied by complete cost data indicatingmaterial cost, installed cost and savings, if any, resulting from proposedsubstitution.

6. Determination as to acceptability of proposed substitutions will be made basedonly on data submitted.

7. Contractor shall coordinate installation of accepted substitutions with interfacingwork, bearing re-design costs and making approved changes in the Work toproperly incorporate the substitutions, and shall waive all claims for additionalcosts related to use of acceptable substitutions which become apparent followingacceptance.

C. An addendum will be issued to Bidders not less than four days prior to the date set foropening of Bids if a proposed substitution is accepted by Architect. Unless substitutionsare received and approved as described above, the successful Bidder shall beresponsible for furnishing materials and products in accord with the Contract Documents.

D. In the event that specified items cannot be delivered to the job site and incorporated intothe Work at such times and in such quantities as to cause no delay, then Contractor mayrequest a substitution in the manner described above. Should the accepted substitutionprovide a cost savings, the Contract price will be adjusted by Change Order, with Ownerreceiving the benefit of the net savings. No increase in the Contract price will be allowedon substitutions made after the receipt of Bids, except where the Contractor can verify atimely placement of orders appropriate to the materials and conditions involved.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 2513-1


E. Inability to obtain specified items due to Contractor's failure to place timely orders will notbe considered reason for authorizing substitutions.

END OF SECTION(Attached: Substitution Request Form)

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 2513-2


SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

PROJECT: LANE SCHOOL RENOVATION

LOCATION: 2001 ALDINE BENDER ROADHOUSTON, TEXAS 77032

OWNER: ALDINE INDEPENDENT SCHOOL DISTRICT (AISD)14910 ALDINE WESTFIELD ROADHOUSTON, TEXAS 77032

DATE: _____________________________________________________

We hereby submit for your consideration the following substitution instead of the item specified or shownon the drawings:

Section: Paragraph: Specified Item:

____________________ _________________ __________________________________

Proposed Substitution:

Attach complete product data, drawings and descriptions of product, with fabrication and installationdetails. Provide laboratory tests if applicable.

Provide sample, if applicable. Indicate if sample will be provided under separate cover.

Include complete information on changes to drawings and/or specifications that proposed substitution willrequire for its proper installation.

Fill in blanks below: (Include attachments if space is insufficient. Failure to provide information will voidsubmittal.)

A. Reason(s) for proposed substitution: (check all that apply): 1. Request is equivalent to product/material/ assembly specified. (Note: Attach technical

documentation.) 2. Specified product or method cannot be provided within the Contract Time. (Note: This request

will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of the Contractor'sfailure to pursue the work promptly, or to coordinate the various activities properly, or if theContractor fails to place timely orders.)

3. Specified product or method cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and theContractor certifies that the requested substitution can be approved.

4. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or otherconsiderations of merit, after deducting redesign and evaluation costs and the increased cost ofother work by the Owner or separate contractors, and similar considerations.

5. Specified product or method cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible with othermaterials of the work, and the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome theincompatibility.

6. Specified product or method cannot be properly coordinated with other materials in the work, andthe Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be properly coordinated.

7. Specified product or method cannot receive a warranty as required by the Contract Documents,and the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can receive the required warranty.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 2513-3


B. Does the substitution affect dimensions or details shown on drawings:

No. Yes. (Attach marked up prints of drawings showing changes required.)

C. What effect does the substitution have on other trades?

D. Compare significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of work or product originallyspecified or shown on drawings. Include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance,visual effect, etc.

E. Coordination information. Include all changes required in other elements of the work in order toaccommodate the substitution, including work performed by the Owner or separate contractors.

F. State effect the substitution will have on the work schedule in comparison to the schedule whichwould prevail without the proposed substitution. State the effect of the proposed substitution onthe Contract Time.

G. Provide complete cost information, including a proposal of any net change in the ContractAmount.

H. Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are:

Same Different (explain on attachment)

The Undersigned Contractor certifies its opinion that, after thorough evaluation, the proposed substitutionwill result in work that in e ery significant respect will be equivalent to or superior to the work required bythe original Contract Documents and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Rights toadditional payment or time because of failure of the substitution to perform adequately are hereby waived.

The Undersigned hereby agrees to pay in full for any changes to design, including detailing andengineering costs caused by the requested substitution.

Submitted by: _____________________________________________________________

Signature: _____________________________________________________________

(Contractor’s Authorized Representative)

_____________________________________________________________

(Title)

Contractor's Firm Name:

Date:

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 2513-4


For use by Architect:

Accepted Accepted as Noted

Not Accepted Received Too Late

By: (Signature and printed name)

Date:

Remarks:

END OF FORM

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 2513-5

Lane School Renovation REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)Aldine Independent School District SECTION 01 2613MA No. R305675.01 SBA-16105

SECTION 01 2613 - REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requestsfor information and interpretations.

1.2 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI):

A. General: Submit request for information in compliance with Request for Information (RFI)Form section and as specified herein. If the Contractor has his own format, it must besubmitted for Architect’s approval prior to submission of first RFI, and as a minimum,must include information in form provided in Request for Information (RFI) Form section.

B. Architect shall review properly prepared, timely requests by Contractor for additionalinformation about Contract Documents. All RFIs are to be made by the Contractor. Nosubcontractor RFIs sent directly to Architect will be responded to by Architect. 1. However, information which is discernable from the Contract Documents will not

be addressed in an RFI response;2. Any response by Architect will not address construction means or methods, or

construction site safety issues; and3. The use of the RFI process is limited to a clarification of the Contract Documents

and the Architect will not review requests for substitution items as an RFI.

C. Request for Information (RFI) shall be in format included in Request for Information (RFI)Form and shall include, as a minimum, following:1. Detailed written statement indicating specific Drawings and/or Specifications in

need of clarification.2. Detailed written statement regarding the nature of clarification requested.3. RFI Form must include:

a. Chronological number of the RFI;b. Name of requester;c. Name of Contractor making request;d. Specification section and page number to which RFI pertains, when

applicable;e. Drawing name and sheet number, when applicable;f. Clear and concise statement of request for information identifying the

conflict, error, discrepancy, or ambiguity giving rise to the RFI; andg. Whether any increase in Construction Amount or Construction Time will

result from the RFI.

D. RFI Process and RFI Form format to be discussed at Preconstruction meeting.



END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 2613-1

Lane School Renovation REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) FORMAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 2614MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 2614 - REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) FORM

Project: AISD Lane School Renovation

To: Morris Architects

1001 Fannin Street

Suite 4040

Houston, TX 77002

Re:

Attn: Mr. Dean Barnes, AIA

R.F.I. Number:

Contractor’s Name:

From:

Date:

Architect’s Project Number: R305675.01

Contract For:

Specification Section Name and No.:

Specification Section Paragraph No. and Page No.:

Drawing Sheet Name and No.:

Drawing Detail No.:

Request:

Signed by:

Response:

[ ] Attachments

Response From: To:

Date Received: Date Returned:

Signed by: Date:

Copies: [ ] Owner [] Consultants [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] File

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 2614-1

Lane School Renovation PROJECT MEETINGSAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 3119MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 3119 - PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Work described: This section defines requirements for project meetings, of such natureas relates to the overall project.

B. Related work described elsewhere: A pre-construction conference relating to a specifictrade or specific construction process or sequence is specified in the applicable section.

1.2 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES:

A. Scheduling and notification:1. Notify invited parties of meeting time and place at least 36 hours prior to meeting.2. Coordinate timing of progress meetings with Architect and Owner to coincide with

progress of major divisions of work.3. Make physical arrangements for and preside over meetings.

B. Administration:1. Prepare meeting agenda and distribute to invited parties at least 36 hours prior to

meetings.2. Record and promptly distribute copies of minutes of significant proceedings and

decisions of meetings.3. Prepare and distribute copies of construction progress schedules as originally

issued or subsequently approved, marked to show current progress.

1.3 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE:

A. Scheduling: A pre-construction conference shall be held at location to be announced,prior to commencement of the Work.

B. Attendance:1. Owner.2. Architect and invited consultants.3. Contractor.4. Major subcontractors as requested by Owner, Architect and Contractor.5. Representatives of separate contractors, when applicable.

C. Minimum agenda:1. Distribute and discuss list of major subcontractors and material suppliers.2. Distribute and review insurance submittals.3. Distribute tentative construction progress schedule and submittals schedule, with

discussion of critical work sequencing.4. Identify and designate responsible personnel.5. Process and distribute field decisions, change orders and other Contract

Documents.6. Process required submittals, including shop drawings, samples and product data,

and review Contractor's submittal schedules.7. Establish procedures for maintaining required Record Documents and

Maintenance Manuals.8. Discuss use of site, including temporary offices, storage areas, erosion control

and site use limitations or restrictions.9. Discuss material and equipment deliveries, storage, protection and priorities.

10. Discuss RFI Process and procedures. 11. Discuss security procedures and methods. 12. Discuss housekeeping procedures and methods. 13. Discuss special project requirements and conditions.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 3119-1

Lane School Renovation PROJECT MEETINGSAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 3119MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

1.4 PROGRESS AND COORDINATION MEETINGS:

A. Scheduling: Unless otherwise requested by Owner or Contractor, a progress andcoordination meeting shall be held on monthly basis at job site.

B. Attendance:1. Contractor, represented by Project Manager or Principal.2. Contractor's Project Superintendent.3. Subcontractors and material suppliers specifically invited, as applicable to the

progress of the Work.4. Architect, when specifically requested by Owner if more than once monthly, and

invited consultants.a. Architect will visit once per month.

5. Owner.

C. Minimum agenda:1. Review minutes of previous meeting, with review of follow-up and work progress

since previous meeting.2. Review field observations, problems and decisions.3. Identify problems and potential problems affecting project construction or

anticipated progress.4. Review problems of materials delivery, off-site fabrication and subcontractor

scheduling.5. Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain planned schedule when

delays occur.6. Revise construction progress and submittals schedule to reflect actual progress.7. Review details of anticipated construction progress prior to next meeting.8. Review workmanship and maintenance of quality standards.9. Review proposed changes, including effect on construction progress schedule

and completion date.



END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 3119-2

Lane School Renovation CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATIONAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 3200MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 3200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This section covers provisions for construction schedules and supplements Article 3.10 ofthe General Conditions.

1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES:

A. Prepare in form of "Critical Path Method" or similar network type chart.1. Provide separate horizontal breakdown of each trade or operation.2. Order: Chronological order of beginning of each item of work.3. Identify each item of work:

a. By major specification section number.b. By logically grouped activities.

4. Horizontal time scale: Identify first work day of each week.5. Scale and spacing: Allow space for updating.

1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES:

A. Provide complete sequence of construction by activity:1. Shop drawings, product data and samples:

a. Submittal data.b. Status of each submittal relative to Contractor's Submittal Schedule.

2. Decision dates for selection of finishes.3. Product procurement and delivery dates.4. Dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction.

B. Show projected percentage of completion for each element of construction.

C. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of work.

1.4 UPDATING:

A. Show all changes since previous submittal of updated schedule.

B. Indicate progress of each activity, show completion dates. Include the following:1. Major changes in scope.2. Activities modified since previous updating.3. Revised projections due to changes.4. Other identifiable changes.

C. Provide narrative report, including:1. Discussion of problem areas, including current and anticipated delay factors and

their impact.2. Corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect.3. Description of revisions:

a. Effect on schedule to change of scope.b. Revisions in duration of activities.c. Other changes that may affect schedule.

1.5 SUBMITTALS:

A. General: In compliance with Section 01 3300 and as specified herein.

B. Submit initial schedule at least five calendar days prior to pre-construction conference.

C. Submit updated schedules accurately depicting progress to first day of each month.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 3200-1

Lane School Renovation CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATIONAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 3200MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

D. Submit one reproducible transparency for Architect's information.

E. Distribute reviewed schedules to:1. Owner.2. Job site file.3. Subcontractors.4. Architect.



END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 3200-2

Lane School Renovation SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 3300MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Definitions:1. Submittals: General term including samples, shop drawings and product data, as

applicable.2. Shop drawings: Drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially

prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

3. Product data: Illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions,brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor toillustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

4. Samples: Physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment orworkmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

B. Shop drawings, product data, samples and similar submittals are not ContractDocuments. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of theWork for which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to theinformation given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

C. General provisions:1. Provisions in this section are mandatory procedures for preparing and submitting

samples, shop drawings and product data.2. Submittals shall be in orderly sequence and timed to cause no delay in the Work.3. Job delays occasioned by requirement of resubmission of samples, shop

drawings and product data not in accord with Contract Documents areContractor's responsibility and will not be considered valid justification forextension of Contract time.

4. Commence no portion of work requiring submittals until submittal has beenapproved and stamped by Architect.

D. Informational Submittals: Submittals required to be submitted “For Architect’s InformationOnly”, are required to demonstrate that Work complies with performance requirements ofContract Documents.1. Calculations, certifications and test reports are submitted for record purposes and

Architect’s information only and will not be approved by Architect.a. Include calculations and required information if not completely covered by

load tables and products data.2. Information Submittals, if acceptable to Architect, will not be returned to

Contractor.3. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal fileas follows:1. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision

identifier.2. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed

by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittalsshall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review andapproval markings and action taken by Architect and Contractor.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use .pdf electronic form acceptableto Architect and Owner, containing the following information:a. Project name.b. Date.c. Name and address of Architect.d. Name of Contractor.e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 3300-1


f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.g. Category and type of submittal.h. Submittal purpose and description.i. Specification Section number and title.j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic

name for each of multiple items.k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.m. Related physical samples submitted directly.n. Indication of full or partial submittal.o. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.p. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.q. Other necessary identification.r. Remarks.

5. Submit electronic submittals via NewForma as PDF electronic files.a. Architect, through Contractor, will return annotated file. Annotate and

retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

1.2 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE:

A. At least five days prior to date of pre-construction conference, submit a list of all requiredsubmittals, by specification section. Indicate timing for submission of required submittalsand relation to construction sequence.1. Indicate timing and sequencing for submission of required submittals to reach

Architect in timely and manageable number. Avoid Architect receiving largegroups of submittals simultaneously. Allow Architect reasonable time for reviewas agreed to in submittal schedule.

2. All submittals to have the typical 14 days review period.

B. During course of the Work, maintain an updated submittal schedule showing status of allsubmittals. Provide copies for Architect's information at project meetings and at othertimes when requested.

C. In the absence of an approved Submittal Schedule, Contractor shall allow thirty (30) daysfor turnaround of each submittal.

1.3 SAMPLE PREPARATION:

A. Prepare samples in sizes, shapes and finishes in accord with provisions of individualspecification sections.

B. Samples submitted for color, sheen or texture selection for approval shall be actualsamples of the required material. Where a range of color, sheen or texture is anticipatedor proposed, samples shall indicate full range proposed, from which Architect may selectthe exact range to be provided.

C. Samples furnished under this section are not to be confused with full size, on-the-site"mock-ups" or "sample panels" called for in some specification sections.

D. The number of samples submitted shall be the number required by Contractor (minimumfive), plus one which will be retained by Architect, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Attach a tag to each sample, sized to accept Contractor's and Architect's stamps. Samples submitted to Architect shall have tag stamped with Contractor's stamp andappropriate action shall be indicated thereon.1. Samples subject to damage and breakage, such as tiles and stones and finished

woodwork, shall be properly wrapped individually to maintain finish and integrity ofsample.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 3300-2


1.4 SHOP DRAWING PREPARATION:

A. Drawings shall conform to the following requirements:1. Number drawings consecutively.2. Indicate working and erection dimensions and relationships to adjacent work.3. Show arrangements and sectional views, where applicable.4. Indicate material, gauges, thicknesses, finishes and characteristics.5. Indicate anchoring and fastening details, including information for making

connections to adjacent work.6. Contract documents prepared by the Architect and his consultants will not be

acceptable as shop drawing submittals.

B. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:1. PDF electronic file via NewForma.

1.5 PRODUCT DATA PREPARATION:

A. Include product manufacturer's standard printed material, dated, with product descriptionand installation instructions indicated. Product data may also contain test andperformance data, illustrations and special details.

B. Form: Submit Product Data in the following format:1. PDF electronic file via NewForma.2. Number of copies submitted shall be the number required by the Architect, plus

one which will be returned to the Contractor by the Architect.

C. Identify each product data item with specification section and paragraph number. Datanot related to this project shall be deleted from manufacturer's standard product data.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS:

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other SpecificationSections.1. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise

indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes

signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates andcertifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to signdocuments on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Testing LaboratoryServices.

B. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities andexperience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names andaddresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other informationspecified.

C. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifyingthat product complies with requirements.

D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnelcomply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) andProcedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms andpersonnel certified.

E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifyingthat Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for thisspecific Project.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 3300-3


F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer’s letterheadcertifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence ofmanufacturing experience where required.

G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer’s letterhead certifyingthat material complies with requirements.

H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by qualified testing agency, on testingagency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliancewith requirements.

I. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by qualified testing agency, ontesting agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performedbefore installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements.

J. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, ontesting agency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility testsperformed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primersand substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

K. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testingagency’s standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed eitherduring installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliancewith requirements.

L. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced bymanufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performedby manufacturer and witnessed by qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive testsperformed by qualified testing agency.

M. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organizationacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code ineffect for Project. Include the following information:1. Name of evaluation organization.2. Date of evaluation.3. Time period when report is in effect.4. Product and manufacturers’ names.5. Description of product.6. Test procedures and results.7. Limitations of use.

N. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operationand normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements inCloseout Procedures section.

O. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, andcalculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and asummary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version ofsoftware, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

P. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documentsmanufacturer’s recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating aproduct or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephonenumber of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:1. Preparation of substrates.2. Required substrate tolerances.3. Sequence of installation or erection.4. Required installation tolerances.5. Required adjustments.6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 3300-4


Q. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorizedservice representative’s tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service

representative making report.2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of

product.3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements.6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

R. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status ofinsurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond,limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

1.7 MONTHLY REPORTS:

A. Submit following on a monthly basis along with Application For Payment:1. Revised and Updated Progress Schedule.2. Projected Progress for next monthUs progress.3. Settlement Monitoring Readings as specified in Field Engineering section.4. Current Project Logs:

a. Submittal Log.b. Request for Information Log.c. Change Order Proposal Log.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW:

A. Review for compliance with the Contract Documents, stamp with approval and submit tothe Architect drawings, product data, samples and similar submittals required by theContract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause nodelay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittalswhich are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents or whichare not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect withoutaction.

B. By approving and submitting submittals, Contractor represents that he has determinedand verified materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within suchsubmittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

C. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements ofthe Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of shop drawings, product data,samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architectin writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given writtenapproval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility forerrors or omissions in shop drawings, product data, samples or similar submittals by theArchitect's approval thereof.

D. The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted shop drawings,product data, samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested bythe Architect on previous submittals.

E. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems orequipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to relyupon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 3300-5


F. Where work is indicated "By Others," Contractor shall indicate responsibility for providingand coordinating such work, whether by Subcontractors or under separate contracts.

G. Contractor agrees that submittals processed by Architect are not Construction ChangeDirectives or Change Orders; that purpose of submittals by Contractor is to demonstratethat Contractor understands design concept; that he demonstrates his understanding byindicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailingfabrication and installation methods he intends to use.

H. Contractor represents by submitting samples, shop drawings and product data that hehas complied with provisions herein specified. Submissions made without Contractor'sapproval indicated thereon will be returned without being reviewed for compliance withthis requirement.

I. Date each submittal and indicate name of Project, Architect, Contractor, Subcontractor,as applicable, description or name of equipment, material or product, and identify locationat which it is to be used in the Work.

J. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter containing project name, Contractor's name,number of samples or drawings, titles and other pertinent data. Transmittal shall outlinedeviations, if any, in submittals from requirements of Contract Documents.

K. Perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of submittals until therespective submittal has been approved and stamped by the Architect. Such work shallbe in accord with submittals bearing the Architect's stamp.

L. Contractor’s review/approval: Prior to forwarding to Architect, thoroughly check allsubmittals and affix Contractor’s shop drawing stamp, in form identical to the followingexample. Submittals received without the correct stamp signed, dated, and appropriateaction (Approved or Approved As Noted) checked, will be returned to the Contractorwithout action.

[ ] APPROVED [ ] APPROVED AS NOTED

Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements, and fieldconstruction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinatedinformation contained in this submittal with the requirements of the Work and with theContract Documents.

(Contractor's Name)

By:

Date:

1.9 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW:

A. Architect will review each submittal, mark it with appropriate action, and return it toContractor with reasonable promptness, except where it must be held for coordinationand the Contractor is so advised. Submittals will be marked by Architect as follows:1. "No Exceptions Taken" indicates the drawings have been reviewed for

conformance with design and no exceptions are taken. Proceed with the work.2. "Exceptions Noted, Revise and Resubmit for Record" indicates Contractor may

proceed with the work as noted.3. "Revise and Resubmit" indicates submittal to be revised and resubmitted for

review prior to proceeding with the work.4. "Rejected" indicates submittal to be revised and resubmitted for review prior to

proceeding with the work or that submittal does not comply with ContractDocuments.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 3300-6


B. Architect's review, or other appropriate action is only for checking for conformance withinformation given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in whichthe item is a component.

C. Architect's review of Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve Contractor of responsibilityfor deviation from requirements of Contract Documents unless Contractor has informedArchitect in writing of such deviation at time of submission and Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. Architect's review shall not relieve Contractor fromresponsibility for errors or omissions in submittals.

D. Informational Submittals: Submittals required to be submitted "For Architect's InformationOnly" are required to demonstrate that the Work complies with performance requirementsof the Contract Documents. “For Architect’s Information Only” submittals are furtherdefined herein. Such submittals, if acceptable to Architect, will not be returned toContractor.

E. Architect will return one reproducible copy of reviewed shop drawings for printing anddistribution by Contractor.

1.10 RESUBMISSION:

A. Make corrections and changes indicated for unapproved submittals, and resubmit insame manner as specified above until Architect's approval is obtained.

B. On resubmittal transmittal, direct specific attention to revisions other than correctionsrequested by Architect on previous submittals, if any.

1.11 DISTRIBUTION:

A. Contractor is responsible for obtaining and distributing copies of submittals to hissubcontractor and material suppliers after, as well as before, final approval. Prints ofreviewed shop drawings shall be made from transparencies which carry the Architect'sappropriate stamp.

B. For duration of project, Contractor shall maintain a file of approved submittals which shallbe delivered to Owner as a part of project closeout documents.



END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 3300-7

Lane School Renovation REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONSAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 4200MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 4200 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:

A. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations inforce among members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate ordistinguish work included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall reconcilesuch conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to theArchitect or Owner. In case progress of the Work is affected by undue delay in furnishingor installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of aconflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Architect may require that othermaterial or equipment of equivalent kind and quality be provided at no additional cost tothe Owner.

B. Manufactured articles, materials, and items of equipment shall be stored, applied,installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, adjusted, conditioned, and protected permanufacturer's current published recommendations and specifications unless otherwiserequired in the Contract Documents.

C. Reference Standards and Industry Specifications:1. Materials, equipment and operations specified by reference to published

specifications of a manufacturer, society, trade association, code, or otherpublished standard, shall comply with the requirements of the current edition ofthe listed document that is in effect on the issue date of the Project Specificationor Addendum page making reference thereto, unless otherwise specified. In caseof conflict between referenced documents and Project Specifications andAddenda, Project Specifications and Addenda shall govern. In case of conflictbetween referenced documents, the more stringent requirements shall govern asdetermined by the Architect.

2. Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar withindustry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies ofapplicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.a. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required

construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from thepublication source.

3. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of generalstandards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations areused in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean therecognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization,authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the textprovision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by GaleResearch Co. or Columbia Books "National Trade and Professional Associationsof the U.S.", which are available in most libraries.

D. No provision of a reference standard, specification, manual, or code shall be effective tochange the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, the Contractor, the Architect andtheir consultants, their agents and employees from those duties and responsibilities setforth in the Contract Documents.

1.2 DEFINITIONS:

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4200-1


B. "Provide" shall mean furnishing all material, labor, tools, plant, supplies, equipment,transportation, superintendence, temporary construction of every nature, insurance,taxes, contributions, and all services and facilities, unless specifically excepted, andinstalling all materials, equipment and other items referred to, all in compliance with therequirements of the Contract Documents.

C. "Directed": Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved,""required," and "permitted" mean directed by Architect, requested by Architect, and similarphrases.

D. "Required" shall be understood to refer to the requirements of the Contract Documents,unless its use clearly implies a different interpretation.

E. The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on theDrawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirementsin the Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown." "noted," "scheduled," and"specified" are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference; no limitation on locationis intended.

F. "Necessary" shall be understood to refer to proper completion of the Work.

G. "Addendum": An Addendum (plural - Addenda) is a document issued after the originaldocument issue date, but prior to the date of the Owner/Contractor Agreement, whichmodifies the original documents to the extent indicated. An Addendum may describecertain modifications in words or may include a reissue of the modified original documentwith the modifications indicated.

H. "Regulations": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawfulorders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, andagreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

I. "Furnish": The term "furnish" means to supply and deliver to Project site, ready forunloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

J. "Install": The term "install" describes operations at Project site including unloading,temporary storage, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying,working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

K. "Installer": An installer is Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor, as anemployee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular constructionoperation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

L. The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having successfullycompleted a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project;being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied withrequirements of authorities having jurisdiction.1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction

activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of acorresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply thatrequirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the correspondinggeneric name.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4200-2


M. Unless otherwise indicated, the following words, where they appear on the Drawings andin the Project Manual, shall have the following meanings:1. "Match" means providing a portion of the Work using the same construction

products, techniques, sequences, dimensions, finishes, colors, and degree ofcraftsmanship as another portion of Work, or as existing conditions adjacent tothe new portion of Work.

2. "Similar" means a portion of the Work which matches the whole or part of anotherportion of Work but has a slightly different configuration.

3. "Opposite Hand" means a portion of the Work which matches another portion ofWork but is a mirror image.

4. "Symmetrical" means a portion of the Work which matches adjacent Work, oritself, but reversed about centerlines of symmetry.

5. "Finished Floor Elevation" means the elevation of the top of the floor to whichflooring finishes and materials are to be applied except that for terrazzo, mortarbed set ceramic and quarry tile, and other materials requiring a depressed slab,finished floor elevation means the top surface of the installed materials and theslab shall be depressed as required for the appropriate setting bed.

1.3 WRITING STYLE:

A. The word "all" is implied throughout the Contract Documents as the Contractor is requiredto do all Work under the Contract. The word "all" requires the doing of all things exceptthose listed items which are specifically excluded.1. Where "complete" is used, it shall mean "complete with all connections, supports,

attachments, and incidental items necessary for a finished and properly operatingassembly or installation".

B. "Equivalent":1. As used herein, in reference to the acceptability of products, materials, and

equipment, other than those specified, the term "Equivalent", which shall beconsidered a substitution, shall be defined as:a. Having the same form and function in terms of size and capacity.b. Having the same or better operating characteristics in terms of power

requirements and output.c. Having the same or greater term and force of Warranty/Guarantee.d. Having the same or greater choices of available colors and patterns.e. Having the same or better availability and repair service.f. Having the same approvals of Code Officials and other governing

authorities.g. Having the same or better compatibility with adjacent components and

other related parts of the Work.h. Capable of providing the same design and artistic effect.i. Not requiring changes in details and construction of related work.j. Having the same or lower installed cost to the Owner.

2. It is understood that all of the above characteristics of equivalency may not beapplicable to each and every product and application required in the Work. Wherea proposed product possesses some, but not all, of the equivalent characteristics,the Architect will make a judgement as to which of the characteristics are mostimportant to the particular application and may, at the Architect's option, waivethose determined to be less important in the particular instance.

C. Where the term "product", "products", "item", "items", and similar terms are used theyshall be understood to include, but not be limited to, materials, systems, and equipmentas applicable.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4200-3


D. Where the words "or equivalent", "equivalent to", "or equivalent accepted by theArchitect", and all similar phrases are used in connection with a specified product,material, or equipment, it shall be understood that the determination as to equivalencyrests solely with the Architect.

E. In the interest of brevity and clarity, the following single words and short phrases have, insome cases, been abbreviated from the following phrases. The single words and shortphrases are defined as having the same meaning as the compete phrase from which it isderived.1. "including ..." is the same as "including, by way of example only, but not limited to,

..."2. "... or ..." is the same as "..., or ..., or both".3. "such as ...." is the same as "which is a generic category of items including, but

not limited to, such examples as ..."4. "exposed" is the same as "exposed to interior or exterior ambient air before and

after being covered with finishing fluids such as paint, sealers, and stains".5. "at least ..." is the same as "at least and not less than ..."6. "product" is the same as "product, material, system, and equipment".7. "Accepted..." is the same as "accepted by the Architect and the Architect's

consultants, after review.

1.4 TOLERANCES OF NUMBERS:

A. Unless more restrictive tolerances are specifically called out in other locations, specifiednumbers (other than dimensions and time) such as gages, weights, temperature, andsimilar references will be acceptable if within formally established, written and recognizedcommercial tolerances established by the particular trade affected. In the absence offormally written and recognized commercial tolerances, plus or minus 1% will beacceptable. If a specified number cannot be obtained, the number shall be interpreted asthe next larger provided it meets other requirements of the Contract Documents includingsufficient space being available as indicated on the Drawings.1. Refer to Technical Specification Sections for applicable strength tolerances.

1.5 TOLERANCES OF SPECIFIED WORDS:

A. Unless otherwise indicated, the following words shall incorporate the following meanings.Construction executed within these tolerances will be considered acceptable.1. "Straight" construction shall be allowed deviations from an absolutely straight line

of sight if within 1/16" in 1'-0", within 1/8" in 10'-0", and within 1/4" for the entirelength of a particular construction.

2. "Flat" construction shall be allowed deviations from an absolutely flat plane ifwithin 1/1000" in 1 sq. in., 1/16" in 1 sq. ft., 1/8" in an area 10' x 10', and 1/4" forthe entire area of a particular construction. All flat planes on Drawings shallconform to these tolerances.

3. "Level" construction shall be straight and flat and shall be allowed deviation froman absolutely horizontal plane of 1/2 degree of angle. All level planes on Drawingsshall conform to these tolerances.

4. "Plumb" construction shall be straight and flat and shall be allowed deviation froman absolutely vertical plane of 1/2 degrees of angle. All plumb planes onDrawings shall conform to these tolerances.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4200-4


1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS:

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications orother Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicatedin Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade& Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or otherContract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the followinglist. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believedto be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100www.iapmo.org

ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233www.iccsafe.org

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used inSpecifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of theentities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject tochange and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the ContractDocuments.

COE Army Corps of Engineers (202) 761-0011www.usace.army.mil

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923

DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000www.commerce.gov

DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220www.energy.gov

EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167www.epa.gov

FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322www.faa.gov

FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322www.fcc.gov

FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332www.fda.gov

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4200-5


GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111www.gsa.gov

HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112www.hud.gov

LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000www.lbl.gov

NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program(See TRB)

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478www.nist.gov

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999

PBS Public Buildings Service(See GSA)

PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694http://www.hhs.gov/ophs/

RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540(See USDA)

SD State Department (202) 647-4000www.state.gov

TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934http://gulliver.trb.org

USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791www.usda.gov

USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) 227-8772www.usp.org

USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000www.usps.com

D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used inSpecifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of thestandards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Websites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the dateof the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and FacilitiesAvailable from U.S. Access Boardwww.access-board.gov

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4200-6


CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800Available from Government Printing Office (2202) 512-1800www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html

DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-2664Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Pointhttp://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus(See FS)

FED-STD Federal Standard(See FS)

FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Pointhttp://dodssp.daps.dla.mil/

Available from Defense Standardization Programwww.dsp.dla.mil

Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925www.gsa.gov

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800www.wbdg.org/ccb

FTMS Federal Test Method Standard(See FS)

MIL (See MILSPEC)

MIL-STD (See MILSPEC)

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-2664Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Pointhttp://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080www.access-board.gov

E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used inSpecifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of theentities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject tochange and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the ContractDocuments.

TDLR Texas Department of Licensing and Regulationwww.license.state.tx.us

TDSHS Texas Department of State Health Serviceswww.dshs.state.tx.us/hfp/default.shtm

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4200-7


TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Qualitywww.tceq.state.tx.us

TDI Texas Department of Insurancewww.tdi.state.tx.us

TFS Texas Forest ServiceForest Resource Developmenthttp://txforestservice.tamu.edu



END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4200-8

Lane School Renovation TESTING LABORATORY SERVICESAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 4529MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 4529 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Related work specified elsewhere:1. Earthwork.2. Cast-in-place concrete.3. Concrete reinforcement.

B. Applicable standards; standards of the following, as referenced herein:1. American Concrete Institute (ACI).2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).4. ASTM International (ASTM).5. American Welding Society (AWS).

1.2 TESTING AGENCY:

A. Except as otherwise specified, testing will be performed by independent testing agency oragencies selected and paid by the Owner.

B. Contractor shall pay costs for testing beyond the scope of that required by the ContractDocuments and for re-testing if initial tests reveal non-conformance with specifiedrequirements.

1.3 QUALIFICATION OF AGENCIES:

A. Independent Testing Agency requirements:1. Testing Agency shall meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent

Laboratory Qualification," latest edition, published by American Council ofIndependent Laboratories.

2. Testing Agency shall meet basic requirements of ASTM E329-07, "Standard ofRecommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steeland Bituminous Materials in Construction," and shall submit current copy of anestablished Quality Assurance Manual meeting criteria of the American NationalStandards Institute (ANSI) N45.2, assuring that tests and/or inspections will beperformed in accord with established and accepted procedures and criteria.

3. Testing Agency shall submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made byMaterials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during mostrecent tour of inspection; with memorandum of remedies of any deficienciesreported by inspection.

4. Testing equipment shall be calibrated at maximum twelve-month intervals bydevices of accuracy traceable to the National Bureau of Standards or acceptedvalues of natural physical constants. Provide copy of certification.

5. Testing Agency on-site supervisory personnel shall be qualified and certified inthe fields of testing required for the project, as well as meteorology, as set forth inappropriate Quality Assurance and Calibration Manuals.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES:

A. Cooperate with Testing Agency personnel. 1. Make work accessible for required inspections throughout project. Assume costs

resulting from exposure and restoration of concealed work subject to required(scheduled) inspection.

2. Provide access to material supplier's plant and operations.

B. Provide representative samples of materials proposed for use in the Work, in quantitiessufficient for accurate testing and as specified.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4529-1


C. Submit copies of mill test reports.

D. Furnish casual labor and facilities:1. To provide access to work to be tested or inspected.2. To obtain and handle samples at the site under the direction of the Testing

Agency.3. To facilitate inspections and tests.

E. Notify Testing Agency sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment ofpersonnel and scheduling of tests.

F. Furnish and pay for the following:1. Soil survey of location of borrow soil materials, samples of existing soil materials,

delivered to the Testing Agency.2. Certification of reinforcing steel mill order.3. Certification of Portland cement.4. Weld procedure qualification tests.5. Tests and samples when source of material is changed after original test or

inspection has been made.6. Samples and mock-ups of substitute material, when the substitution is requested

by the Contractor and the tests are necessary in the opinion of the Architect toestablish equality with specified items.

7. Provide and maintain, for the sole use of the Testing Agency, adequate facilitiesfor safe storage and proper curing of such test specimens which must remain onthe project site prior to testing.

8. Required Verification and Inspection of steel construction as referenced inConstruction Drawings.

G. Neither the observations, inspections, tests or approvals by the Architect or the TestingAgency shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the Work in accord withthe Contract Documents.

H. Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing and receive a written reply prior toproceeding with additional testing beyond that specified in the Contract Documents.

I. Contractor shall designate one individual in his organization to be responsible forconducting Contractor's duties relative to testing. Individual will be instructed in his dutiesby Testing Agency. Individual shall not be changed without notice to Architect.

1.5 AUTHORITY OF DESIGNATED TESTING AGENCY PERSONNEL:

A. When requested by the Architect, the Testing Agency shall render professional opinionsregarding corrective measures for construction deficiencies.

B. Testing Agency is not authorized to revoke or change requirements of the ContractDocuments or to approve or accept any portion of the Work.

1.6 REPORTS:

A. Testing Agency will submit one copy each of reports of tests and inspection andcertification as required herein to the Owner, Architect and engineering consultants, asapplicable, for information only.

B. Copies of test reports will be distributed within three working days after date of test orinspection.

C. Tests and inspection reports will be in standard outline form including the following:1. Issue date.2. Project title and number.3. Testing Agency name and address.4. Name of technician.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4529-2


5. Signature of reviewing registered engineer.6. Date of inspection or sampling.7. Significant weather conditions.8. Report number.9. Sample number.

10. Location in project. 11. Observations regarding compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Pertinent remarks.

D. Field reports will include the following items:1. Items inspected.2. Specific location of the inspection.3. Explanation of deficiencies or non-conforming installations.4. Listing of parties informed and corrections made.5. A statement certifying that the final inspection proved the installation to be in

accord with the Contract Documents.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SOIL TESTS:

A. Perform Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index, Maximum Laboratory Density(Proctor) tests; field moisture and density tests. 1. Exposed subgrades prior to placing compacted earth fill material. 2. Fill and backfill under paving.3. Laboratory shall run Plasticity Index and Proctor Density curves of fill material at

time of placement.4. The laboratory shall perform Proctor Moisture Density curves of all stabilized

soils.

B. Provide additional testing as required on any suspect material or material which hasreplaced previously failed material.

3.2 CONCRETE TESTING:

A. Review initial mix design for all types of concrete.

B. The testing laboratory shall provide a competent, trained technician to inspect the point ofloading of all materials into the mixer truck where ready-mixed concrete is used. Thetechnician shall verify weights, proportions and suitability of cement, sand, gravel andadmixtures to be used. The technician shall check the scales at periodic intervals toinsure accurate weighing; verify that cement is that which has been tested and mill testreports submitted. Make sieve analysis to verify the gradation of aggregates entering themix.

C. Laboratory's technician shall inspect concrete at the point of deposit to direct any changesin the mix as required. The technician shall take sample specimens as follows:1. Each sampling shall consist of three cylinders and shall be made for each

placement operation and not less than one sampling for each 50 cubic yards ofconcrete placed. Transport cured cylinders to the laboratory: one cylinder to beused for a seven-day test and one for a twenty-eight day test. Third cylinder shallbe held to test in case of failure.

D. The testing laboratory shall submit and distribute a report for each cylinder tested.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4529-3


3.3 FIELD TESTS:

A. As specified in individual specifications, shall be responsibility of and at Contractor’sexpense.

3.4 REPAIR AND PROTECTION:

A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services,repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies,including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes.

B. Protect construction exposed by, or for, quality control service activities, and protectrepaired construction.

C. Repair and protection is ContractorUs responsibility, regardless of assignment ofresponsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 4529-4

Lane School Renovation TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLSAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 5000MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations ofauthorities having jurisdiction, including but not necessarily limited to:1. Building Code requirements.2. Health and safety regulations.3. Utility company regulations.4. Police and Fire Department rules.5. Environmental protection regulations.

B. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporaryutility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Provide work and facilities of temporary nature specified herein and necessary to facilitateand expedite progress of Work.

D. Temporary facility requirements specified herein are minimum and do not include facilitiesdesired for convenience.

E. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in safeand efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overloadfacilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous orunsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site.

1.2 FACILITIES:

A. Temporary offices: Provide sufficient space for Contractor's personnel and Architect’sand Consultant’s use.1. Provide temporary office facilities complete with lighting, heating, air conditioning

and telephone service.a. Provide additional dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine.b. Provide the facsimile machine for the field office.

2. Location of temporary office shall be subject to Owner’s and Architect'sacceptance.

3. Provide office space complete with desks, layout board, chairs and drawinghanging racks and one lockable four-drawer file cabinet for Architect’s use andone lockable four-drawer file cabinets for Consultants’ use.

B. Telephone/internet service: Provide temporary telephone service to temporary offices forduration of project. Pay costs of installation and for local service. Provide computersystem complete with printer and internet connection. Provide internet service with emailaccount(s).

C. Temporary storage facilities: Provide weathertight storage sheds with raised floors. Sheds shall be of type and size required by storage conditions. Locations and adequacyof storage facilities shall be subject to Architect's acceptance.

D. Temporary construction fence:1. Provide a temporary construction fence, enclosing project site, and acceptable to

the Owner. Fence shall be 6'-0" high, minimum, chain link type. Provide posts,top rails, braces and other fittings and accessories for rigid installation. Fencing,if not new, shall be of good appearance and condition.

2. Provide gates as required for Contractor's operations. Gates shall be of sameheight as fencing. Keep gates locked at all times other than normal constructionhours. Furnish a set of gate lock keys to the Owner.

3. Maintain fence until building is enclosed, outdoor storage areas are no longer inuse and finish grading is begun, unless otherwise directed by the Owner.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 5000-1


E. Site access and parking:1. Provide and maintain temporary all-weather access to building site.2. Parking: Parking for construction personnel shall be in locations acceptable to

the Owner.

F. Storage and staging areas: Provide within fenced areas at locations acceptable to theOwner.

1.3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES:

A. Electrical service: Provide temporary electrical service, including extensions andconnections necessary for construction work. Pay costs of installing and maintainingservice for duration of project. Pay costs associated with use of permanent electricalsystem until Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Temporary lighting; provide the following minimum light levels for construction purposes:1. General construction and safety lighting: Five footcandles.2. Finishing work and testing: 25 footcandles.

C. Temporary heat and ventilation:1. Provide temporary heat in enclosed spaces to provide minimum temperatures of

40 degrees F. until the time that finishing work begins.2. After building is enclosed and installation of finishes begins, maintain spaces in a

temperature range of 60 degrees F. to 80 degrees F. at all times, except as mayotherwise be required by product manufacturers for proper product installationand performance. Maintain until Date of Substantial Completion.

3. Maintain relative humidity in a range of 50% to 65% in enclosed spaces afterbuilding is enclosed and installation of finishes begins, except as may otherwisebe required by product manufacturers for proper product installation andperformance. Maintain until Date of Substantial Completion.

4. Provide ventilation to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes or gases and to curematerials and disperse humidity.

D. Water service: Provide temporary water for construction purposes, including extensionsand connections necessary for work. Pay costs of installing and maintaining service forduration of project. Pay costs associated with use of permanent water system until Dateof Substantial Completion.

E. Sanitary toilet facilities: Provide and maintain temporary toilet facilities for constructionpersonnel. 1. Permanent existing and new facilities may not be used by personnel.2. Sanitary facilities shall meet standards of Building Code.

F. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, providevented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual spacethermostatic control. Use of gasoline burning space heaters, open flame, or salamanderheating units is prohibited.

1. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC systemfor temporary use during construction, assume full responsibility for placingsystems in like-new operational status, including replacement of worn parts andcleaning or replacement of pumps, traps, screens and filters before offering Workfor acceptance.

1.4 TEMPORARY HOIST EQUIPMENT:

A. Temporary hoist and staging equipment: Provide temporary equipment for transportationof personnel and equipment.1. Provide protection devices for building during equipment use.2. Do not overload building structural system with temporary equipment; do not

overload hoisting equipment or staging.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 5000-2


1.5 SECURITY:

A. Security lighting: Provide temporary security lighting for site and structures untilpermanent building site lighting is installed and in operation on a normal basis.

B. For off-hours work of construction personnel, coordinate security clearance with theOwner's building security. Security clearance is required for work performed duringholidays and at times other than 7:30 A. M. to 5:00 P. M., Monday thru Friday.

1.6 BUILDING ACCESS:

A. Schedule the Work and arrange material storage in a manner which leaves the projectsite as unencumbered as possible. Provide temporary barriers and enclosures, andmaintain the site in clean condition.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting damages to the building caused by hiswork or passage. Soiled or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired tosatisfaction of the Owner.

C. The limits of construction shall be maintained at all times.

1.7 SPECIAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS:

A. Protect building and building components from damage, staining or defacing due to theWork. Correct or replace damaged materials or finishes to satisfaction of the Owner.

B. Protect landscape planting, indicated to remain, from damage, including toxic oversprayor run-off from cleaning materials. Damaged or ruined planting shall be replaced by theContractor with plants of identical variety, size and configurations. Replace damagedground cover materials to match existing.

C. Control surface water and drainage during the course of construction. Provide equipmentand materials to safely remove drainage water from the site. Dispose of drainage waterin a manner to prevent damages to any portion of the site or adjacent sites.

D. Provide methods, means and facilities to prevent pollution and contamination of water andair. Enact emergency measures to contain spills, to prevent toxic chemical releases andto remove pollution and contaminated materials.

E. Drives shall not be blocked to extent of restricting vehicular access, and parking arearestrictions shall be kept to a minimum. Barriers and restrictions shall be approved inadvance by the Owner. Do not work with materials subject to being wind blown duringtimes of high winds.

F. Protect building from rain or water leakage during the course of the Work. Do not openjoints and roof areas to extent that openings cannot be protected from inclement weather. Openings shall not be left unprotected overnight.

1.8 CLEANING UP:

A. Remove debris and rubbish from construction areas and Project site on weekly basis.1. Provide sufficient trash bins and containers to hold daily accumulation of debris,

rubbish, scrap and waste materials.2. Require workmen of all trades to utilize trash bins and containers. Empty bins

and containers on daily basis or as filled, whichever occurs earlier.3. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste

material and debris.

B. Clean mud and construction related debris from roadways and walkways outsideconstruction limits on daily basis.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 5000-3


C. Upon completion of Work, completely remove excess materials, tools, equipment,temporary construction, remaining trash, rubbish and foreign materials and leave Workclean and neat, ready for occupancy and operations of Owner.

1.9 RELOCATION AND REMOVAL:

A. Relocate temporary facilities during construction as required by progress of the Work andas directed by Architect at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. At completion of the Work or at the time of permanent utility connections, as applicable,remove temporary facilities, including connections and debris resulting from temporaryinstallation.



END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 5000-4

Lane School Renovation PRODUCT REQUIREMENTSAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 6000MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES:

A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to exclude all materials which contain knownhazardous substances, including materials containing asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB), or any other known substances determined to be a health hazard by the UnitedStates Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and other recognized agencies. Instudying the Contract Documents and at any time during execution of the Work, theContractor shall at once report to the Architect any materials containing hazardoussubstances that he may discover. Do not proceed with installation of materials containingknown hazardous substances.

B. Where products are specified by product, by manufacturer, by reference standard or indescriptive manner without manufacturer's name, model number or trade name,Contractor shall select materials meeting specified requirements which do not containknown hazardous substances in any form.

C. In making requests for substitution, Contractor shall be responsible for determining thatmaterials requested for substitution are free of known hazardous substances in any form.

1.2 DEFINITIONS:

A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other termsused in Contract Documents, such as "specialties", "systems", "structure", "finishes","accessories", and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have wellrecognized meanings in the construction industry.1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased

for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product"includes the terms "material", "equipment", "system", and terms of similar intent.a. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturerUs product name,

including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturerUspublished product literature, that is current as of the date of the ContractDocuments.

2. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed,finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part ofthe Work.

3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manuallyoperated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprintmanufacturerUs or producerUs nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of productswhich will be exposed to view in occupied spaces.1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on concealed surface or,

where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that isnot conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide permanent nameplate on each item ofservice-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessiblesurface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. Nameplate shall containfollowing information and other essential operating data:a. Name of product and manufacturer.b. Model and serial number.c. Capacity.d. Speed.e. Ratings.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 6000-1


1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. General: Requirements specified herein are general in nature. Refer to individualSpecification Sections for additional specific requirements.

B. Deliver, store and handle products in compliance with manufacturerUs recommendations,using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, includingtheft.

C. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at site and to prevent overcrowding ofconstruction spaces.

D. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items thatare flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and otherlosses.

E. Deliver products to site in manufacturerUs original sealed container or other packagingsystem, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protectingand installing.

F. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with Contract Documents, and toensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

G. Store products at site in manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantityor counting of units.

H. Store heavy materials away from Project structure in manner that will not endangersupporting construction.

I. Store products subject to damage by elements minimum 6" above ground, under cover inweathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintaintemperature and humidity within range required by manufacturerUs instructions.

J. Store no construction material or equipment within drip line of trees indicated to remain.

K. Prevent corrosion, soiling or breakage of materials or contact with deleterious materials.

L. Handle materials and equipment to prevent damage, deterioration or contamination. Install no materials which are physically damaged or stained prior to time for installation.

M. Comply with manufacturerUs instructions and recommendations for product storage andhandling.

N. Comply with manufacturerUs product data in all aspects of basic material usage, handling,installation and substrate preparation, except where more stringent requirements arespecified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION/MATERIALS:

A. Use materials and equipment that are new and of quality suited to use intended, suitablefor function intended, and plainly labeled and delivered to Project site in original unopenedcontainers when nature of materials is suitable for containers.

B. Products that are specified by reference standards or in descriptive manner without amanufacturerUs name, model number or trade name, shall be selected by the Contractor,shall comply with all specified requirements.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 6000-2


C. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where Specifications only requirecompliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select product that complieswith standards, codes or regulations specified.

2.2 CONTRACTORUS OPTIONS:

A. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers, nosubstitutions will be permitted, provide one of named products.

B. Naming any manufacturer does not imply approval of that manufacturerUs nonconformingproducts.

C. The Contractor shall include in the Work; the materials, products and equipment namedby trade name, proprietary name or manufacturerUs catalog numbers, including allspecified modifications thereto unless proposed substitutions are approved in writing bythe Architect prior to award of the Contract. After execution of the Contract, theContractor shall provide only those materials, products and equipment named in theContract Documents and approved substitutions therefor for inclusion in the Work, exceptas provided herein.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS:

A. Verify and obtain substrate conditions, tolerances and material alignments to receiveapplied or attached materials and construction.

B. Substrates shall be sound, clean, dry and free of imperfections and conditions whichwould be detrimental to receipt of applied materials and finishes.

C. Remove existing and remaining residue, dirt, debris, previously-installed materials andother elements indicated for removal or deleterious to the installation of new materials. Removal methods and equipment shall be as proposed by Contractor, for Architect'sapproval; in no case shall removal methods or equipment damage or deface existingconstruction indicated to remain.

D. Align materials to give smooth, uniform surface planes within specified tolerances andstraight, level and plumb surfaces.

E. Inspect substrates prior to installation of applied materials and finishes. Correctunacceptable conditions prior to proceeding with work.

F. Existing subsurfaces receiving new finishes shall have existing finish removed or, ifsound, prepared in accord with manufacturer's product data to receive new specifiedfinish.

3.2 FINISHED SURFACES:

A. Finished surfaces shall be clean, uniform and free of damages, soiling or defects inmaterial and finish.

B. Finished surfaces shall match color and texture of samples provided or approved byArchitect.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP:

A. Follow manufacturerUs instructions. When instructions are in conflict with ContractDocuments, make request for clarification before proceeding. Maintain copy ofmanufacturerUs instructions at Project site.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 6000-3


B. Comply with industry standards except when specified tolerances indicate more rigidstandards or more precise workmanship. Perform Work by persons qualified to produceworkmanship of specified quality.

C. Join materials to uniform, accurate fit to meet with straight lines free of smears andoverlaps. Install exposed materials appropriately level, plumb, and at accurate rightangles or flush with adjoining materials. Attach materials with sufficient strength, number,and spacing of attachments that will not fail until materials joined are broken orpermanently deformed.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS:

A. Comply with manufacturerUs instructions and recommendations for installation of productsin the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately locatedand aligned with other Work.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION:

A. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage anddeterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Protection:1. Protect finished surfaces from damage and soiling during application, drying or

curing, as applicable.2. Provide temporary protective coverings required.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 6000-4

Lane School Renovation CUTTING AND PATCHINGAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 7329MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 7329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Contractor's responsibilities:1. Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting and patching required to

complete the work and as follows:a. Make new and existing parts fit together.b. Provide penetrations of existing structural, non-structural, mechanical

and electrical elements and surfaces for installation of new materials andproducts. Provide shop drawings or other appropriate submittals for eachstructural penetration, as herein specified.

c. Restore penetrations of existing structural, non-structural, mechanicaland electrical elements and surfaces in accord with accepted submittals. Restoration materials shall be similar to those removed or disturbedand/or materials and products as specified.

d. For structural, mechanical and electrical penetrations and disturbances,engage the services of a professional Engineer registered in the State ofTexas for all aspects of the work. Submittals shall bear the Engineer’sseal.

2. In addition to Contract requirements, upon written instructions of Architect:a. Uncover work to provide for observation of covered work.b. Remove samples of existing installed materials for testing and for

matching of new materials.c. Remove work to provide for alteration, restoration or refinishing of

existing work.3. Do not endanger work by cutting or altering work.4. Do not cut or alter work not of this Contract without written consent of Owner.5. Costs incurred for ill-timed work or uncovering of work shall include costs for

services of Owner's consultants.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:1. Summary of work.2. Selective demolition for remodeling.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS:


B. Shop drawings, calculations, product data and samples: 1. Submit shop drawings, calculations, product data and samples for structural,

mechanical and electrical penetrations and disturbances. Indicate existingconditions, extent of cutting and patching work required, and restoration ofelements to accommodate new work. Include concrete mixes, structural steeland reinforcement, wiring, conduit, piping, ductwork, fixtures and otherengineering elements required for completion of new work.

2. Submittals shall bear the seal of an Engineer licensed in the State of Texas.


A. Cutting/patching request:1. Submit a written request to Architect, well in advance of executing cutting or

alteration, which affects the following and are not indicated on the drawings:a. Work of Owner or any separate Contract.b. Structural value or integrity of any element of project.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 7329-1


c. Integrity or effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture-resistantelements or systems.

d. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operationalelements.

e. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.2. Request shall include:

a. Identification of project.b. Description of affected work.c. Necessity of cutting or alteration.d. Effect of work on Owner or separate Contract, or on structural or

weatherproof integrity of project.e. Description of proposed work:

1) Description of cutting, patching or alteration.2) Trades who will execute the work.3) Products proposed to be used.4) Extent of work to be done.

f. Alternatives to cutting and patching.g. Cost proposal, when applicable.h. Written permission of separate Contractors whose work will be affected.

3. Should conditions of the work or the schedule indicate a change of products fromthe original installation, Contractor shall submit a request for substitution asspecified in Substitution Request Form section.

4. Submit a written notice to Architect designating date and time work will beuncovered.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Materials for replacement of work removed: Materials shall be similar to those removed ordisturbed and shall comply with specification sections for type of work to be performed.

B. Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

C. In-place materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. Forexposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to thefullest extent possible.1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when

installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functionalperformance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. Pre-cutting and patching conference: Review cutting and patching work with Architectand affected subcontractors as a part of pre-demolition conference and monthly progressmeetings.

B. Examination:1. Examine existing conditions of the project, including elements subject to damage

or to movement during cutting and patching.2. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of products or

performance of work.3. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing; do not

proceed with work until Architect has provided further instructions.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 7329-2


C. Preparation:1. Provide adequate temporary support to ensure the structural value or integrity of

the affected portion of the work.2. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the project from

damage.3. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the project which may be

exposed by cutting and patching work. Maintain excavations free from water.

D. Performance:1. Execute cutting, patching and demolition by methods which will prevent damage

to other work and will provide surfaces to receive installation of repairs.2. Execute work by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work.3. Elements of a structural or support nature, including concealed elements exposed

by the removal of existing elements of the work, shall be inspected and theArchitect notified should additional work be indicated due to loss of structuralintegrity, rot, rust, corrosion or other similar condition.

4. Employ original installer or fabricator to greatest extent possible to performcutting and patching for:a. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.b. Sight-exposed finished surfaces.

5. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation tocomply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.

6. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to providecomplete work in accord with requirements of Contract Documents.

7. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations throughsurfaces. Firestop penetrations through fire-rated construction as specified inFirestopping section.

8. Refinish entire surfaces (as necessary) to provide an even finish to matchadjacent finishes:a. For continuous surfaces: Refinish to nearest intersection.b. For an assembly: Refinish the entire unit.

9. Repair damaged adjacent surfaces and finishes to original condition.10. Maintain integrity of fire-resistant and rated construction.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 7329-3

Lane School Renovation CLEANING UPAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 7410MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 7410 - CLEANING UP

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of wastematerials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work,remove waste materials and rubbish, tools, construction equipment, machinery andsurplus materials, from and about the project. Turn over to Owner at Date of SubstantialCompletion those tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materialsspecifically required by Contract Documents to be left for Owner's maintenance.

B. If Contractor fails to keep project clean or to clean up prior to Date of SubstantialCompletion, the Owner may do so as provided in the General Conditions, and the costshall be charged to the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Provide cleaning products to suit individual cleaning needs for materials, equipment andsurfaces to be cleaned, and meeting following general requirements:1. Product, or products, do not create hazards to health.2. Will not scratch, mar, stain, discolor or otherwise damage Work or any portion

thereof.3. Are recommended by manufacturer of surface material to be cleaned.

B. Provide brooms, rakes, vacuum cleaners, tools, equipment, buckets, pails, clean clothsand incidentals necessary for proper application and removal of cleaning materials andfor execution of interior and exterior cleanup operations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Store volatile waste in covered metal containers. Remove from project site daily.1. Allow no volatile wastes to accumulate on project site.2. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile substances.3. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste

materials and debris.

B. Do not burn or bury waste materials or rubbish on project site. Comply with governmentaland environmental regulatory requirements for disposal of waste.

C. Dispose of no volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm orsanitary drains, on pavements, in gutters or on project site.

D. Dispose of no waste or cleaning materials containing materials harmful to plant growth onproject site. As quickly as possible, clean up materials which are accidentally spilled.

3.2 CLEANUP DURING CONSTRUCTION:

A. Execute cleaning procedures to ensure that building, project site and adjacent propertiesare maintained free from debris and rubbish.

B. Wet down materials subject to blowing. Throw no waste materials from heights.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 7410-1


C. Provide covered on-site containers for waste collection. Place all waste materials andrubbish in containers in an expeditious manner to prevent accumulation. Remove wastefrom project site when containers become full.

D. Legally dispose of all waste materials, rubbish, volatile materials and cleaning materialsoff project site.

E. Dispose of no materials in waterways.

F. Clean mud and construction related debris from roadways and walkways outsideconstruction limits on daily basis.

G. Prior to start of finish painting, clean and maintain interior spaces in a "broom clean" stateuntil Date of Substantial Completion. Protect newly finished and clean surfaces fromcontamination during cleaning operations.

H. Allow no accumulation of debris contributing to survival or spread of rodents, roaches orother pests.1. On a daily basis, remove debris containing food scraps.2. Contractor shall be responsible for securing services of a pest exterminator at no

additional cost to the Owner.

3.3 FINAL CLEANUP:

A. General requirements:1. Provide a level of cleanliness generally provided by commercial building

maintenance organizations using commercial quality maintenance equipment andmaterials. Visually inspect finished surfaces and remove traces of soil, wastematerial, smudges, and other foreign matter. Remove paint droppings, spots,stains, and dirt from finished surfaces.

2. Clean all finished surfaces in accord with manufacturer's product data andrequirements specified in trade sections, prior to Date of Substantial Completion. All general and specific cleaning shall be performed prior to Contractor's requestthat the project or portion thereof be inspected for Substantial Completion.

3. Remove dust, debris, oils, stains, fingerprints and labels from exposed interiorand exterior finish surfaces, including glazing materials.

4. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. Replacematerials which cannot be repaired or patched.

5. Clean disturbed areas of project site of debris:a. Broom-clean paved surfaces. Remove oil and similar deleterious

substances.b. Remove debris from grassed and landscaped areas and from

undisturbed areas.

B. Interior cleaning:1. Remove temporary protection, tags, labels and markings from materials, fixtures,

accessories and equipment.2. Clean transparent and glossy materials to polished condition; remove foreign

substances.3. Wash and polish both sides of glass.4. Polish reflective surfaces to clear shine.5. Clean switch and outlet plates, finish hardware, handrails and metal trim of

smudges, paint and soiling.6. Clean metals in compliance with instructions of metal manufacturer.7. Vacuum clean carpeted and similar soft surfaces.8. Clean resilient floors thoroughly with well-rinsed mop containing only enough

moisture to remove surface dirt and dust; then buff dry by machine, bringing surfaces to sheen.

9. Clean tile in compliance with grout and tile manufacturer’s recommendations.10. Broom clean and vacuum concrete floors.11. Clean under and behind convectors and other equipment.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 7410-2


12. Clean inside cabinets and other concealed areas.13. Repaint surfaces and items that cannot be cleaned.14. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.

C. Exterior cleaning:1. Remove debris, waste and surplus materials from site and adjacent streets and

roads.2. Remove temporary protection and temporary construction.3. Remove stains, spills and foreign substances from exterior surfaces.4. Employ window-cleaning firm or personnel experienced in window cleaning work.

Clean interior and exterior of all glazing.5. Remove debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.6. Rake lawn areas and clean grounds.7. Sweep and hose down paving and walks.8. Clean exterior materials according to product manufacturer’s directions.

D. Cleaning mechanical and electrical equipment:1. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication.2. Clean plumbing fixtures to sanitary condition.3. Clean permanent filters of ventilating equipment and replace disposable filters

when units have been operated during construction; in addition, clean ducts,blowers and coils when units have been operated without filters duringconstruction.

4. Light fixtures and lamps:a. Wipe light fixtures with anodized aluminum louvers or reflectors free of

dust, grease and fingerprints, using non-abrasive cloth and suitablecleaner, recommended by fixture manufacturer.

b. Replace burnt-out bulbs with new specified bulbs.c. Replace construction bulbs with new specified bulbs.

3.4 INSPECTION:

A. Prior to occupancy by Owner of any designated portion of Work, conduct inspection inpresence of Owner to verify Work is properly clean and ready for acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 7410-3

Lane School Renovation CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESAldine Independent School District SECTION 01 7700MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. Closeout includes general requirements in preparation for Final Completion and FinalPayment. Closeout is directly related to “Substantial Completion” and may be a singletime period for entire work or a series of time periods for parts of the Work accepted assubstantially complete.

1.2 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:

A. Prior to requesting Architect’s certification of Substantial Completion, complete thefollowing and list all known exceptions.1. If Substantial Completion is being requested for a portion of the Work, define

such portion.2. Submit application for payment:

a. Submit sworn statement indicating 100 percent completion of the workclaimed as “Substantially Complete”.

b. List incomplete items, value of incomplete work, and reasons for beingincomplete.

c. Include documentation for completion.3. Indicate accounting changes to Contract Sum.4. Submit for that portion of the Work:

a. Specific warranties.b. Workmanship/maintenance bonds.c. Maintenance agreements.d. Final certifications.e. Record drawings.f. Maintenance manuals.g. Project photographs, if pertinent to project activities.h. Damage or settlement survey.

5. Obtain and submit releases enabling:a. Owner’s use of the Work.b. Access to services and utilities.c. Occupancy permits.d. Operating certificates.

6. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements.7. Obtain and submit operating certificates, final inspection/test certificates, and

similar releases enabling Owner’s full and unrestricted use of the work andaccess to services and utilities.

8. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items toOwner.

9. Make final change-over of locks and transmit keys to Owner, and advise Owner’spersonnel of change-over in security provisions. Tag each key to indicate whichlock key operates. Accompany keys with final hardware schedule, as specified inDoor Hardware section.

10. Complete start-up testing of systems and instruction of Owner’soperating/maintenance personnel.

11. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.

B. Observation procedures:1. Upon receipt of Contractor’s request, Architect will either proceed with

observation or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled.2. Following initial observation, Architect will either prepare Certificate of Substantial

Completion or advise Contractor of work which must be performed prior toissuance of certificate.

3. Re-observe when requested and assured Work has been substantiallycompleted. If the Architect and/or his consultants are required to perform morethan two re-observations, the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of timeand costs incurred by Architect and his consultants for further re-observations.

4. Results of completed observation will form initial “punch list” for final acceptance.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 7700-1


1.3 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE:

A. General: Prior to requesting Architect’s observation for certification of Final acceptanceand Final payment, complete the following. List known exceptions.1. Indicate accounting changes to Contract Sum.2. Submit Final Application for Payment with:

a. Final releases.b. Supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted.c. Certificates of insurance for Products and Completed Operations where

required.3. Submit copy of Architect’s Final Punch List. Contractor shall certify each item has

been completed or resolved for acceptance.4. Submit final meter readings for utilities.5. Submit:

a. Specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenanceagreements, final certifications and similar documents not submitted attime of Substantial Completion.

b. Record drawings and maintenance manuals not submitted at time ofSubstantial Completion.

c. Final project photographs.6. Submit consent of surety.7. Finishes manual:

a. Assemble a manual bound in hard cover binders, presenting for Owner’sguidance full details of all finish materials used in the building includingcare and maintenance.

b. Include a list of all finishes and their product names, numbers, colors,and cleaning and maintenance data. Include a list of installers andservice representatives with company names and addresses, names ofindividual contacts, and telephone numbers.

c. Submit documents in suitable transfer cases indexed and marked foreach division of the Work.

8. Submit executed contracts for extended maintenance or service required by theContract Documents to Architect for transfer to Owner.

9. Revise and submit evidence of final (continuing) requirements.10. Complete final clean up.

B. Storm lines: Upon completion of the project and before Final Acceptance will be made,Contractor shall use an electric sewer router cleaning machine to ream out all sanitaryand storm sewer lines installed under this Contract. Contractor shall use a cleaning headsame size as pipe up through 4" pipe size and a 4" cleaning head for sewer lines 4" andlarger. Contractor shall demonstrate to Owner's inspector that all lines are free and clearof obstructions for proper sewer operation. If any deficiencies or obstructions are found toexist, they shall be corrected before requesting final inspection.

C. Re-observance procedure:1. Upon receipt of contractor’s Notice that Work has been completed, including

punch list items and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptablecircumstances, Architect will observe work.

2. Upon completion of observation, Architect will either prepare certificates of FinalAcceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled.

3. If necessary procedure will be repeated.

1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS:

A. General:1. Unless otherwise required, furnish three complete sets of required documents.2. Do not use required documents for construction purposes.3. Protect from deterioration and loss in a secure fire resistive location.4. Provide access to record documents.

B. Record drawings:1. Maintain a blueline set of Contract Drawings and shop drawings in clean,

undamaged condition.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 7700-2


2. Mark up variations in the Work as originally shown.3. Mark the drawing most capable of showing field condition.4. Where shop drawings are used for mark-up, cross reference with Contract

Drawings.5. Mark with red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish

categories of work.6. Mark up new information of importance not shown on Contract Drawings or shop

drawings.7. Record work covered by subsequent construction or requiring the removal of

finish material should maintenance be necessary.8. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable.9. Organize Record Drawing sheets into manageable sets. Identify each set.10. At completion of project, provide the following:

a. One full set of reproducible prints marked and noted with all variationsand revisions. Provide reproducible and two additional sets of printsmade from the reproducible.

b. Electronic copy of scanned documents marked and noted with allvariations and revisions. Provide in pdf format, on CDs.

c. Indicate prints and electronic copies of drawings as Record Drawings.

C. Record Project Manual:1. Maintain one copy of Project Manual, including addenda, Change orders, and

similar modifications. 2. Mark up variations occurring in actual work.

3. Record substitutions and selection of options.4. Cross reference with other documents.

D. Record product data:1. Maintain one copy of each Product Data Submittal.2. Mark up significant variations in the actual work. Include:

a. Variations in product as delivered to site.b. Variations from manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for

installation.3. Cross-reference with Change Orders and mark up Record Drawings and

Specifications.

E. Record sample submittal: Immediately prior to Date(s) of Substantial Completion,Architect will meet with Contractor at site, and determine which, if any, samples to betransmitted to Owner. Comply with Architect’s instructions for packaging, identificationmarking, and delivery to Owner’s sample storage place. Dispose of other samples.

F. Maintenance and operating manuals:1. Organize maintenance and operating information into sets of manageable size.

Manuals divisions shall match organization and location of specification sectionsindicated in Project Manual.

2. Bind into heavy duty 3-ring binders, minimum 2" size, permanently identified andindexed with thumb tabs.

3. Include:a. Name of project, nature of information, Contractor/subcontractor and

name and address of local parts supplier and service organization.b. Emergency instructions.c. Spare parts listing.d. Warranties.e. Wiring diagrams.f. Recommend turn-around cycles.g. Inspection procedures.h. Applicable shop drawings.i. Applicable product data.

G. Miscellaneous record submittals:1. Refer to other sections of these specifications for requirements of miscellaneous

record-keeping and submittals in connection with performance of the work.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 7700-3


2. Immediately prior to Date(s) of Substantial Completion:a. Complete miscellaneous records and place in good order.b. Identify and bind or file.c. make ready for continued use and reference.

H. Inspection reports: Submit certificates from applicable local governmental agencies thatthe construction has been inspected as required by laws or ordinances and that thebuilding is approved for occupancy.

I. Warranties: In accord with Contract Conditions, provide warranties as follows:1. Contractor shall furnish his warranty and shall require each subcontractor to

furnish his warranty, in writing, on the form bound hereinafter. Assemble, bind,label and transmit warranties as required for other manuals above. Unlessspecifically indicated otherwise in individual sections, the period for warrantiesshall begin on the Date of Substantial Completion and shall continue for one year. Warranties shall state the Date of Substantial Completion and the date on whichthe warranty expires.

2. Contractor shall forward manufacturers’ and installers’ warranties as specified inthe individual specification sections. Assemble, bind, label and transmitwarranties as required for other manuals above. Unless specifically indicatedotherwise in individual sections, the period for warranties shall begin on the Dateof Substantial Completion. Warranties shall state the Date of SubstantialCompletion and the date on which the warranty expires.

J. Valve tag schedules: Furnish two copies of schedules with closeout documents, andmount one copy, framed under glass, in mechanical room.

K. Keys: Deliver at Date of Substantial Completion. Tag each key to indicate lock which keyoperates. Accompany keys with final hardware schedule, as specified in Door HardwareSchedule.

1.5 OPERATING/MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS:

A. Coordinate demonstrations and trial operations of equipment for Owner’s designatedpersonnel, and complete such demonstrations prior to Date of Final Acceptance. Eachinstaller of work requiring maintenance or operation shall:1. Meet with Owner’s personnel, at project site to provide basic instructions needed

for proper operation and maintenance of entire work.2. Provide instructions by manufacturer’s representatives as required.3. Review maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, spare parts and

materials, lubricants, fuels, identification materials, control sequences, hazards,cleaning and similar procedures and facilities.

4. Demonstrate start-up, shut-down, emergency operations, noise and vibrationadjustments, safety, economy/efficiency adjustments, and similar operations.

5. Review maintenance and operations in relation to warranties and similarcontinuing commitments.

1.6 CONTINUING INSPECTIONS:

A. Comply with Owner’s request to participate in inspections at end of each time periodrequired by specific warranties or similar components. Participate in general inspection ofWork approximately one year beyond Date(s) of Substantial Completion.



END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 01 7700-4

Lane School Renovation DEMOLITIONAldine Independent School District SECTION 02 4116MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 02 4116 - DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations beforebeginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations ofauthorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Work included in this section:1. Removal of existing work to accommodate remodeling, renovation and

restoration, as indicated on drawings.2. Protection of existing finished surfaces.3. Removal, storage, cleaning, restoration and reinstallation of existing items

indicated to be reused in the finished work, including doors.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:1. Temporary facilities and controls.2. Cutting and patching.3. Interior finishes.4. Doors and frames.5. Gypsum board.6. Acoustical ceilings.7. Carpeting.8. Mechanical.9. Electrical.



B. Where structural members which are not included in detail on drawings are required to beremoved or altered, notify Architect and await instructions prior to proceeding.

C. Calculations: Provide the services of a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Texasto recommend procedures to be used in the alteration or removal of any structuralmembers not included in detail on drawings. Submit calculations and drawings sealed byengineer.

D. Inventory list: Submit list of items designated to be removed and stored or items to bereused in the work.

E. Execution plan: Submit plan of execution for Owner's and Architect’s approval. Indicatelocations of barricades, dust and noise enclosures and protective coverings. Indicate useof areas outside the work limits, including corridors, and public thoroughfares. Indicatephasing of the work. Submit phasing plan as marked up blueline prints.

F. Obtain acceptance of Owner's property insurance carrier for proposed work involvingexisting building prior to start of work.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Refer to Temporary Facilities and Controls section for restrictions relative to buildingaccess.

B. Store materials to be retained or reused in locations acceptable to Owner.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 02 4116-1


C. Maintain neat, clean conditions in storage areas; remove rags and waste materials at endof each day's work.

1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS:

A. During demolition operations, should suspect asbestos or asbestos-containing materials,or other material listed as a hazardous material by the Environmental Protection Agencybe discovered, notify Architect and Owner and discontinue that portion of the work untilfurther instructed.

B. Drawings indicating existing building conditions are available from Owner for generalinformation only. Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of structures tobe demolished. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will bemaintained by Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations within the structure mayoccur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to the start of the demolition work.

C. The use of explosives will not be permitted.

D. Conduct demolition operations and the removal of debris to ensure minimum interferencewith roads, streets, walks and adjacent facilities.

E. Do not close or obstruct streets or walks without permission from authorities havingjurisdiction. Provide flagman where public thoroughfares are used for debris removal. Maintain thoroughfares free of dirt and debris caused by demolition or hauling operations.

F. Conduct demolition operations to minimize disruption or interference with buildingoccupants and operation, and the use of building facilities not included in the work. Coordinate phasing of work with Owner.

G. Protect portions of existing building indicated to remain. Repair or replace portions ofbuilding damaged by this work, at no additional cost.

H. Provide temporary enclosures or other methods to limit dust transmission to adjacentareas. Provide temporary weatherproof enclosures for portions of work exposed toweather. Provide temporary noise reduction barriers to separate work areas fromadjacent occupied areas.

I. Maintain building security. Equip doors with locks. Secure construction area during non-working hours.

J. Where removal or alteration of concealed structural members is required, which are notincluded in detail on drawings, submit engineering details for review by Architect prior toproceeding.

K. Provide temporary fire protection devices and construction when removing or relocatingexisting fire doors or barriers. Install permanent fire protective construction to close voidsand penetrations as work progresses, as specified in Firestopping section. Coordinatewith local building officials and Owner's insurance carrier.

L. Provide temporary protective walkways or covering on existing finish floor surfaces toprotect floor finishes. Provide plywood walkways on finish floors where machinery ismoved or operated.

M. Schedule high noise level operations to non-business hours as acceptable to Ownerwhere working in close proximity to existing business operations.

N. Erect and maintain temporary ditches and silt barriers to prevent surface water fromcarrying soil and debris beyond contract limits, onto adjacent properties or pavements orinto storm drainage structures.

O. Maintain or re-establish existing bench marks.

P. Limit exterior dust by sprinkling or other acceptable methods.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 02 4116-2


Q. Schedule removal of debris and cleaning operations so as not to interfere with pedestriantraffic in building lobbies, corridors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PROTECTIVE COVERS:

A. Partitions and dust protective coverings:1. Provide non-combustible panels, flame-resistant tarpaulins or approved materials

of equivalent fire-retardant characteristics. Polyethylene sheet and other plasticfilms shall be reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, minimum 10 mil thickness, with aflame spread rating of 15 or less, meeting ASTM E84-15 and passing NFPA 701,Test Method 2.

2. Provide equivalent fire-resistive tape for sealing joints.

B. Protective covering for floors:1. Non-asphaltic, non-waxed, non-staining, reinforced kraft paper.2. Minimum 1/2" thickness plywood or composition board for walkways.

C. Barricade and corner guard material:1. Utility grade lumber.2. Plywood.

2.2 REMOVED MATERIAL:

A. The following items are to be removed, temporarily stored if necessary, and reused in thework, subject to the conditions further specified:1. Doors and frames as indicated, including hardware.2. Office partitions/furniture.3. Art work.4. Fire extinguishers.5. Signs, clocks, and similar items.

B. Reuse of material: Reuse of any items involved in the work is subject to Contractor'sability to remove, store and reinstall the item without permanently damaging or marringthe items to be reused. If Contractor is unable to reuse any item as prescribed herein, heshall substitute new material to match existing in lieu of reusing same. Contractor mayalso elect to use new material to match existing in lieu of reuse of existing for his ownconvenience.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-DEMOLITION CONFERENCE:

A. Prior to beginning demolition work, a pre-demolition conference will be held to reviewwork to be accomplished and to inventory existing conditions. 1. Contractor, Architect, Owner and related subcontractors involved in demolition

work will be present. 2. Contractor shall notify Architect and Owner at least seven days prior to time of

conference.3. Demolition work and inventory of existing equipment, existing damages to work to

remain and items to be removed shall be reviewed at conference.4. Contractor shall make list of inventoried items to be removed, reused or stored. If

requested by Owner, at additional cost Contractor shall provide a photographicrecord of specific existing conditions stipulated by Owner on 8" by 10" glossycolor prints.

5. Contractor shall take minutes of meeting and distribute minutes and copies of listand photographs to all participants.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 02 4116-3


3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Examination: Visit project site and compare locations of equipment, electrical andmechanical work with indications in Contract Documents. Report discrepanciesdiscovered for resolution.

B. Scheduling and phasing:1. Comply with approved execution plan for scheduling and phasing of the work. 2. Coordinate disconnect or disruption of electrical and mechanical services with

Owner.3. Minimize interference with Owner's existing operations that will remain in use

during the work. Minimize disruption of building operations and use of adjacentfacilities.

4. Movable office furniture, file cabinets or other stored items belonging to Owner,located in work area shall be removed to storage space designated by Owner.Include description and quantity of items in inventory list.

C. Security for occupied areas:1. Provide safe access to occupied areas during the course of the Work.2. Provide fences, enclosures or partitions to segregate work areas from occupied

areas.3. Provide guards or lockable closures for off-hours to secure occupied areas of

building.

D. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. Do not usewater when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding andpollution.

E. Erect and maintain temporary ditches, barriers, straw bale dams or skirts to preventsurface water from carrying debris beyond contract limits, onto adjacent properties or intostorm drainage system.

F. Plant protection:1. Cover, barricade or otherwise protect foliage of plants or trees designated to

remain.2. Rinse dust from foliage and maintain plants watered during operations.3. Prevent spillage of demolition runoff or solutions of harmful liquids on root

systems of plants or trees.4. Replace, at no cost to Owner, landscape items damaged by demolition

operations.

G. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt and debris caused by demolitionoperations, as directed by Architect or governing authorities. Return adjacent areas tocondition existing prior to the start of the work.

3.3 SITE DEMOLITION:

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade construction indicated to be removed, to thelimit indicated on drawings.1. Remove underground structures to within 2'-0" of subgrade elevations in areas to

receive new site pavements and landscape planting.

B. Disconnect and seal off abandoned utilities and utilities to be removed prior to start ofdemolition. Utilities shall be disconnected below existing grade level or outside ofcontract limits by representatives of public utility being disconnected. Maintain utilityservice to facilities in use.

C. Observe and monitor adjacent structures during demolition operations by instrumentsaimed at benchmarks. Stop work and notify Architect for resolution if movement isobserved.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 02 4116-4


3.4 DEMOLITION:

A. Building demolition, general: Remove existing buildings indicated to be completelydemolished. Include portions of the building above and below grade, including floor slabsand foundations, as required for new construction. 1. Remove underground structures to within 2'-0" of subgrade elevations in areas to

receive new site pavements and landscape planting.

B. Disconnect and seal off abandoned utilities and utilities to be removed prior to start ofdemolition. Utilities shall be disconnected below existing grade level or outside ofcontract limits by representatives of public utility being disconnected. Maintain utilityservice to facilities in use.

C. Interior demolition: 1. Remove interior construction and finishes as required for new construction and to

limits indicated on drawings.2. Resilient floor coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to

recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal ofResilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-basedadhesive strippers.

D. Remove existing mechanical and electrical equipment, including plumbing fixtures andpiping, as indicated and required to complete work.

E. Remove existing materials and finishes to limits indicated without damage to substratesor adjacent surfaces.

F. Where work is to be cut or removed to accommodate new work, form neat, uniform andsmooth edges or terminations.

G. Proceed with demolition in accord with approved schedule.1. Demolish concrete and concrete unit masonry in small sections.2. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by means of hoists,

derricks or other suitable methods.3. Locate demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove materials so

as not to impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors or framing.4. Where new construction connects to existing, Contractor shall provide and

maintain temporary partitioning until removal is directed by Architect. Contractorshall execute new construction to maximum extent possible before breakthroughto existing, and shall advise Owner in writing of the intended breakthrough andthe demolition methods to be used. Contractor shall schedule the work to provideminimum shutdown of the operations of Owner.

H. Provide all necessary shoring and bracing to maintain structural integrity of the buildingduring demolition operations. Remove only after new structure is in place and capable ofsupporting braced or shored parts.

I. During demolition, protect adjoining work from damage. Observe and monitor adjacentstructural elements. Stop work and notify Architect for instructions if changes are noted. Cracks or structural damage resulting from demolition shall be repaired at no expense toOwner and to Architect's satisfaction.

J. Prepare an itemized list of material or equipment for reuse or storage. List quantities,condition and location. Submit copies to Owner within seven days of removal of item.

K. Except for items designated to be removed and reused in the work or items retained byOwner for storage, all material resulting from this work shall become property ofContractor and shall be promptly removed from site. Storage or sale of removedmaterials will not be permitted on project site or within building.

L. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according torecommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of ResilientFloor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 02 4116-5


M. Materials resulting from demolition become the property of Contractor except as follows:1. Equipment belonging to utility or public service companies unless abandoned by

such companies.2. Hidden valuable items, buried items and property of third persons.3. Salvaged equipment and materials noted for reuse.4. Other items indicated or otherwise identified by Owner or Architect.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS:

A. Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from theproject site. Do not stockpile debris on project site.

B. Removal of debris from interior demolition shall be through unoccupied spaces andcorridors, with removal through occupied spaces or corridors only upon specificpermission by Owner.

C. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures will not be permitted on theproject site.

D. Transport materials removed from demolished structures and dispose of off project site.

E. Chute and load debris and materials within confines of existing open spaces on projectsite. Chuting and loading in streets surrounding site is prohibited when such operationscan be executed on project site. Immediately remove debris or materials that fall ontostreets or walks surrounding site.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 02 4116-6

Lane School Renovation Aldine Independent School District MA No. R305675.01 SBA-16105

ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 1000

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016

SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Work of this section includes rough carpentry and blocking as indicated in drawings.

B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Finish carpentry and millwork.2. Gypsum board.3. Toilet accessories.4. Roof patching.



B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturerand certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials.

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisturecontent of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for eachtype of treatment.


A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.


A. Applicable standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM), standards as referenced herein.2. Wood products; comply with the following standards published by the U. S.

Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards:a. Lumber: PS 20-10.b. Construction and Industrial Plywood: PS 1-95.

3. Preservative-treated wood: American Wood Protection Association (AWPA);current standards, as referenced herein, shall apply to preservative-treated woodproducts.

4. Plywood: APA The Engineered Wood Association (APA), current standards.5. Grading rules; current grading rules of the following associations apply as

applicable to wood products:a. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).

06 1000-1



Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 06 1000-2

b. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).c. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).d. National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA).

B. Product identification: 1. Lumber: Lumber shall bear the grade stamp of a listed grading rules association

certified by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC), identifying species or species combination, grade, moisture condition at time of surfacing, mill of origin and grading agency.

2. Plywood: Plywood shall bear the stamp of the APA The Engineered WoodAssociation (APA), indicating type, grade, thickness, exposure durability, span rating, agency compliance, species group, edging, finish and glue type.

3. Preservative-treated wood products: Preservative-treated lumber and plywoodshall bear the quality standard stamp of the applicator, indicating preservative type, exposure conditions, year of treatment, treatment plant and treatment supervising agency.


A. Upon delivery to project site, place materials in areas protected from weather.

B. Store materials a minimum of 6" above ground on blocking and cover with waterproof covering. Provide for air circulation and ventilation.

C. Store no seasoned materials in wet or damp portions of building.

D. Protect sheet materials from breaking corners and damaging surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER:

A. Species and standards: Grade-stamped commercial softwood conforming to PS 20 and referenced grading rules, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Seasoning: 19% maximum moisture content at time of building enclosure, unless otherwise noted.

C. Surfacing: Surfaced four sides (S4S).

D. Dimensions: Indicated lumber dimensions are nominal. Comply with PS 20.

E. Framing lumber; 2" to 4" thickness, 2" to 4" wide, any commercial softwood species, Grade #2 or better.

2.2 SHEET MATERIALS:

A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde.

2.3 TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS:

A. Pressure-preservative-treated wood: 1. Treatment type: Water-borne preservative registered with EPA.2. AWPA standard:

a. Lumber, timber and plywood shall conform to applicable requirements ofAWPA Standard U1-07 and T1-07 for species, product and end use.

b. Handling and care of pressure treated wood products shall conform toAWPA Standard M4-06.

c. Preservatives shall conform to AWPA P5-07.



Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 06 1000-3

3. Preservative retention: As required by treatment type in accord with AWPAStandards for below- or above-ground use.

4. Seasoning; re-dry after treatment to 19% maximum moisture content.5. Use:

a. Wood products in contact with concrete slabs-on-grade or foundations.b. Nailers or blocking cast or built into concrete or masonry.c. Wood products in contact with exterior walls.

B. Interior fire-retardant-treated wood: 1. Acceptable product; subject to compliance with specified requirements:

a. Hickson Corporation, Dricon.b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Pyro-Guard.c. Viance, LLC, D-Blaze.

2. Description: Pressure-impregnated with a chemical retardant tested and listed byUnderwriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL). When tested in accord with ASTM E84-12atreated products shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and show no evidence ofsignificant progressive combustion when the test is continued for an additionaltwenty minute period. In addition, flame front shall not progress more than 10'-6"beyond centerline of burners at any time during test.

3. Surface burning characteristics: F.R.-S rating in accord with UnderwritersLaboratories, Inc. (UL).

4. AWPA standard: AWPA U1-07, T1-07 and P17-02.5. Seasoning; kiln-dried after treatment to the following maximum moisture content:

a. Lumber: 19%.b. Plywood: 15%.

6. Hygroscopicity: Maximum 28% equilibrium moisture content when tested inaccord with ASTM D3201-08a at 92% relative humidity.

7. Use: As required by codes.

2.3 HARDWARE:

A. Provide nails, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, expansion bolts, clips, powder-actuated fasteners and similar hardware necessary for complete installation of rough carpentry items. 1. Material and finish for use with non-pressure treated and fire-retardant-treated

components shall be G90 hot dip galvanized steel or Type 304 stainless steel,except nails shall be hot dip galvanized.

2. Material and finish for use with pressure-preservative-treated components shallbe one of the following:a. G185 hot-dip galvanized steel.b. Type 316L stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WORKMANSHIP:

A. Install wood framing and rough carpentry work cut square on bearings, fitted and set to required lines and levels, and secured in place.

B. Lay out the work to provide correct openings to receive work of other trades.

C. Preservative-treated wood: 1. Prior to installation, brush-apply preservative to cut edges and ends of wood,

using same type of preservative used for pressure treatment.2. Handle and install in accord with AWPA standards.

D. Fire-retardant-treated wood: 1. Prevent exposure to water or moisture, and do not use if so exposed.2. Only end cuts shall be made. Do not rip or re-surface.3. Attach using only hot dip galvanized nails and anchors.



Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 06 1000-4

E. Plates, blocking, nailers and miscellaneous framing: 1. Provide 2" nominal thickness members to support and secure finishing materials,

fixtures, toilet accessories and grab bars, partitions, specialty items and trim.2. Bolt to structural steel or metal framing at 4'-0" o. c., maximum.3. Secure to concrete and masonry using cast-in bolts, powder-activated stud,

sleeve or wedge type anchors spaced at 4'-0" o. c., maximum.4. Provide anchors within 3" of ends of members.5. Provide linear runs in maximum practicable lengths, with joints in multiple

members offset 3'-0", minimum.6. Around roof perimeter and at roof penetrations, provide blocking equal to roof

insulation thickness. Attach through decking into structural members at 2'-0"o. c., maximum, starting within 3" of each end. Space ends 1/2" for venting.

7. Provide wood blocking behind grab bars and toilet accessories.

F. Site tolerances: 1. Variation from plumb: 1/4" in 10'-0" height, non-cumulative,2. Variation from horizontal squaring diagonals: 1/2".3. Variation from indicated location of framing: ± 1/4".4. Location of dimensioned openings: ± 3/8".5. Variation from indicated rough opening size: +1/4", -1/8".

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORKAldine Independent School District SECTION 06 2200MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 06 2200 - FINISH CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Work of this section includes factory-fabricated woodwork as follows:1. Field paint finish millwork.

2. Plastic laminate casework and countertops.

B. Related work: Painting.

C. Definitions:1. Opaque finish: Finish that obscures the underlying character of the substrate;

includes plastic laminate, melamine, opaque stains.



B. Shop drawings: Submit for finish carpentry and millwork. Indicate construction andinstallation details, species and grades of materials, finishes, plastic laminate and cabinethardware selections. Indicate layout of architectural paneling.

C. Product data: Submit for cabinet hardware and similar manufactured items. Submit withshop drawings.

D. Samples; submit as follows:1. Plastic laminate: Manufacturer's standard color and pattern selections for

selection by Architect.2. Finish samples: Submit one sample of each type of selected finish on samples of

species and grade material specified.3. Hardware items: Submit if requested by Architect. Samples will be returned to

supplier.


A. Fire-retardant treatment certification: Submit for Architect's information only. Submitcertification by treating plant that fire retardant treatment materials comply with governingordinances and that treatment will not bleed through finished surfaces.

B. AWI Certification: Submit AWI Quality Certification Program certificates indicating that themillwork provided for this project complies with the requirements of the AWS Gradesspecified.


A. Applicable standards; comply with the following:1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein:

a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).b. APA The Engineered Wood Association (APA).c. ASTM International (ASTM).d. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA).e. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA).f. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA).g. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).h. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL).

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 06 2200-1


2. Wood products; standards of the U. S. Department of Commerce, NationalInstitute of Standards and Testing:a. Lumber: PS 20-10.b. Construction and Industrial Plywood: PS 1-95.

3. Standards for millwork: Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), "ArchitecturalWoodwork Standards, 2nd Edition, October 1, 2014, herein referred to as AWSStandards. Work shall comply with applicable portions of AWS standards.

B. Grade marks: Identify lumber and plywood by official grade mark.1. Lumber: Grade stamp shall contain symbol of grading agency, mill number or

name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation,rules under which graded where applicable, and condition of seasoning at time ofmanufacture.

2. Plywood: Appropriate grade trademark of the APA. Indicate type, grade, class,identification index and inspection and testing agency mark.

3. Preservative-treated wood products: Preservative-treated lumber and plywoodshall bear the quality standard stamp of the applicator, indicating preservativetype, exposure conditions, year of treatment, treatment plant and treatmentsupervising agency.

4. Fire-retardant-treated wood products: Fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywoodshall bear UL stamp or stamp of other approved independent inspection agency,indicating treatment type or name, flame spread and treatment plant

5. On components to be exposed to view, grade marks shall be located so as to beconcealed in finished work.

C. Fabricator/installer qualifications: Finish carpentry and millwork shall be fabricated andinstalled by a single manufacturer. 1. Fabricator/installer shall have at least five years successful experience in the

fabrication, finishing and installation of finish carpentry and millwork of the typeand quantity required and, if requested by Architect, shall submit evidence ofsuch experience


A. Deliver no finish carpentry and millwork to project site until areas are ready for millworkinstallation.

B. Immediately upon delivery to job site, place finish carpentry and millwork indoors,protected from weather.

C. Store finish carpentry and millwork a minimum of 6" above floor on blocking and coverwith waterproof covering. Provide for air circulation and ventilation. Store in dry,conditioned space.

D. Wrap prefinished finish carpentry and millwork in protective covering for shipping andstorage. Protect from sunlight exposure.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Field measurements: Take field measurements to ascertain exact finish carpentry andmillwork sizes. Indicate exact dimensions on shop drawings.

B. Install no interior millwork until spaces are enclosed, dry and conditioned. Maintaintemperature between 55 degrees F. and 80 degrees F. for 72 hours before beginninginstallation and afterwards until Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Maintain interior relative humidity at the site between 25% and 55% before, during, andafter installation.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 06 2200-2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIC MATERIALS:

A. Lumber for opaque finish:1. Species: Poplar.2. Lumber grade: Grade I.3. Moisture content: 8-13%.4. Locations: As indicated on drawings.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; 1/4" thickness.2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: Meeting ANSI A208.2; Grade MD; Class "C" fire

hazard classification for 3/4" thickness, made with binder containing no ureaformaldehyde.

3. Particleboard: Meeting ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior glue; mat-formed,manufactured of long fibered cuttings, weighing minimum of 45 lbs./cu. ft.; fire-retardant-treated (FR), meeting NFPA 101; moisture-resistant (MR); filled onfaces to be painted, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

4. Plywood:a. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1 and

AWPA P17-02, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.b. Softwood plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.

5. Countertop core at sink areas shall be of 7/8" marine grade plywood and shallhave 24 hour thickness swell factor of five percent or less and 24 hour waterabsorption factor of ten percent or less; P.S. 51, Type II or better.

C. Plastic laminates:1. Acceptable products:

a. Formica Corporation.b. Chemetal Metal Laminatesc. Lab Design Architectural Laminates.d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

2. Conforming to NEMA Standard LD3-2005, as follows:a. Horizontal applications: Grade HGS.b. Vertical applications: Grade VGS.c. Cabinet-liner: Grade CL-20.d. Backing sheet: Grade BKL, undecorated plastic laminate.e. Post-forming applications: Grade HGP.f. Chemical resistant applications: Grade VGP.g. Solid color applications: Grade HGS.

3. Colors, textures and patterns: As selected by Architect from laminatemanufacturer's standard full line selection.

D. Thermoset decorative panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.1. Provide 3mm PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on

components with exposed or semi-exposed edges.2. Color, gloss, texture and pattern as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s

standard color selection.3. Location: Cabinet interiors.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 06 2200-3


2.2 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS:

A. Architectural cabinets shall comply with AWS Standards, Section 10.

B. Plastic laminate clad cabinets:1. AWS quality grade: Custom.2. Panel core: Fire-retardant-treated particleboard or hardwood plywood.3. Finish on exposed surfaces: Plastic laminate as specified herein.4. Finish on semi-exposed surfaces: Plastic laminate cabinet liner.5. Component edges: Plastic laminate faced.

C. Tops:1. AWS quality grade; Custom for plastic laminate.2. Plastic laminate:

a. Exposed surfaces: Plastic laminate.b. Non-exposed surface: Backing sheet.

3. Core:a. Counters without sinks/lavatories: Medium density fiberboard or

particleboard.b. Sink top cores: Countertop core at sink areas shall be of 7/8” marine

grade plywood and shall have 24 hour thickness swell factor of fivepercent or less and 24 hour water absorption factor of ten percent or less;P.S. 51, Type II or better.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS WOODWORK:

A. Comply with AWS Standards as follows:1. Storage shelving: Section 6, Economy Grade, except Custom Grade for strength.

2.4 TREATED WOOD PRODUCTS:

A. Pressure-preservative-treated wood:1. Treatment type: Water-borne preservative registered with EPA.2. AWPA standard:

a. Lumber, timber and plywood shall conform to applicable requirements ofAWPA Standard U1-07 and T1-07 for species, product and end use.

b. Handling and care of pressure treated wood products shall conform toAWPA Standard M4-06.

c. Preservatives shall conform to AWPA P5-07.3. Preservative retention: As required by treatment type in accord with AWPA

Standards for below- or above-ground use.4. Seasoning; re-dry after treatment to 19% maximum moisture content.5. Use:

a. Wood products in contact with concrete slabs-on-grade or foundations.b. Nailers or blocking cast or built into concrete or masonry.c. Wood products in contact with exterior walls.

B. Interior fire-retardant-treated wood:1. Acceptable product; subject to compliance with specified requirements:

a. Hickson Corporation, Dricon.b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Pyro-Guard.c. Viance, LLC, D-Blaze.

2. Description: Pressure-impregnated with a chemical retardant tested and listed byUnderwriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL). When tested in accord with ASTM E84-10btreated products shall have a flame spread of 25 or less and show no evidence ofsignificant progressive combustion when the test is continued for an additionaltwenty minute period. In addition, flame front shall not progress more than 10'-6"beyond centerline of burners at any time during test.

3. Surface burning characteristics: F.R.-S rating in accord with UnderwritersLaboratories, Inc. (UL).

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 06 2200-4


4. AWPA standard: AWPA U1-07, T1-07 and P17-02.5. Seasoning; kiln-dried after treatment to the following maximum moisture content:

a. Lumber: 19%.b. Plywood: 15%.

6. Hygroscopicity: Maximum 28% equilibrium moisture content when tested inaccord with ASTM D3201-08a at 92% relative humidity.

7. Use: As required by codes.

2.5 HARDWARE:

A. All hardware shall meet ANSI A156.9. All keying shall match existing master key systemand be approved by the Owner.

B. Stainless steel door and drawer pulls: Epco "No. MC 402-3.5-SS", stainless steel, 1/4"diameter wire pull, 3" centers.1. Type: 3-1/2" long wire pull.

C. Magnetic catches: Mill finished aluminum.1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Basis of design: Stanley Works #SP41.b. Epco, Inc.c. Sugatsune America, Inc.

D. Concealed hinges: 1. Acceptable products:

a. Grass America, Inc., #3903. b. Julius Blum, Inc., #71.6500 Series.c. Sugatsune America, Inc., #H160-C.

2. Type: 165E opening, self-closing.

E. Standard duty recessed shelf standards and supports: Pilaster for built-in shelving andbookcase applications. Adjustable on 1/2" centers. 19 gauge steel, 5/8" wide x 3/16" high.1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Basis of design: Knape and Vogt Mfg. Co., #255 gauge standard with#256 support.

b. Stanley Works.c. Sugatsune America, Inc.

2. Type: Steel.3. Finish: As selected by Architect.

F. Heavy duty shelf standards and supports: Pilaster for built-in shelving and bookcaseapplications. Adjustable on 1" centers. 16 gauge steel, 5/8" wide x 13/32" high.1. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Basis of design: Knape & Vogt Mfg. Co., #80 standards with #180brackets.

b. Stanley Works.c. Sugatsune America, Inc.

2. Type: Steel.3. Finish: As selected by Architect.

G. Pencil drawer slides:1. Accuride "2009"; hold-open detent and adjustable bracket; 3/4 travel.2. Grant "512"; no hold-open and nonadjustable bracket; 3/4 travel.3. K & V "1240"; no hold-open and nonadjustable bracket; 3/4 travel.

H. Side mount drawer slides:1. Acceptable products:

a. Basis of design: Accuride, #3832.b. Grant Hardware Co., #5632.c. Knape and Vogt Mfg. Co., #1429.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 06 2200-5


2. Type: Full extension, steel ball bearing.3. Capacity: 100 lb. capacity:

I. Cabinet drawer/door lock: 1. Acceptable products:

a. Knape and Vogt Mfg. Co., #986.b. Sugatsune America, Inc., #3310.c. Timberline Supply, Ltd., Style CB-230 deadlock and Type 230 cylinder

body with lock plug.2. Finish: Nickel-plated.

J. Wire management grommet: 1. Acceptable products:

a. Outwater Plastics, Inc., #31-2". b. Sugatsune America, Inc., #V60-B.c. Hafele America, Inc.

2. Provide set including grommet, grommet cap and slot cover; color as selected byArchitect from manufacturer's standard selection.

K. Fasteners: Provide bolts, nails, screws, toggle bolts and similar fasteners as indicated orrequired to attach and secure work. 1. Fasteners for trim shall be finishing nails for attachment to wood framing, trim-

head screws for attachment to metal framing. 2. Material and finish for non-pressure treated and fire-retardant-treated

components shall be G90 hot dip galvanized steel or Type 304 stainless steel,except nails shall be hot dip galvanized.

3. Material and finish for pressure-treated components shall be G185 hot-dipgalvanized steel or Type 316L stainless steel.

2.6 ADHESIVES:

A. Adhesives, general: 1. Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.2. Adhesives used in cabinets installed adjacent to slide-in ranges must have a

temperature rating of at least 194 degrees.

B. VOC limits for installation adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with thefollowing limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24):1. Wood glues: 30 g/L.2. Multipurpose construction adhesives: 70 g/L.3. Contact adhesive: 80 g/L.

a. Adhesive for bonding plastic laminate: Acceptable types includeunpigmented contact cement, contact cement, PVA, urea formaldehydeand resorcinol.

b. Adhesive for bonding edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specifiedabove for faces.

2.7 FABRICATION:

A. General:1. Quality grade for finish carpentry and millwork shall be AWS Custom Grade.2. Fabricate finish carpentry and millwork in accord with approved shop drawings.3. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished

surfaces.4. Seal faces and edges of medium density fiberboard indicated to be sealed or

finished.5. Perform veneer operations using hot press method using moisture-resistant, fire-

retardant adhesives.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 06 2200-6


6. Shop-assemble for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passagethrough building openings. Items which cannot be manufactured in one pieceshall have joints at logical breaking points and shall be so noted on shopdrawings.

7. Apply plastic laminate sheets in full uninterrupted sheets consistent withmanufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealedfasteners.

8. Flat Edge PVC edging shall be 0.020 inch. Solid, high-impact, purified, color thru,acid resistant, machine-applied with hot melt adhesives. 3 mm PVC shall besolid, high-impact, purified, color-thru, acid resistant, pre-lamination primededging, machine-applied with hot melt adhesives, and machine profiled to 1/8"radius.

9. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance forcutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.

10. Scribe, miter and accurately join members.11. Finish work shall be smooth, free from abrasion, tool marks, open joints or raised

grain on exposed surfaces.

B. Casework:1. Fit shelves, doors and exposed edges with matching plastic laminate edging.

Use one piece for full length only.2. Where countertops can not be provided in single length, join using compression

type fasteners.3. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, fixtures

and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from onsite dimensions. Seal contactsurfaces of cut edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Prior to pre-installation conference, examine substrates and conditions to receive work. Check that floors and wall substrates are level, plumb and within tolerances to receivework specified in this section.

B. Verify mechanical, electrical and building items affecting work of this section are placedand ready to receive finish carpentry and millwork.

C. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory substrates or conditions have been corrected.

D. Pre-installation conference:1. Prior to beginning work, a pre-installation conference will be held to review work

to be accomplished.2. Contractor, fabricator/installer and Architect shall be present.3. Contractor's submittals will be reviewed.4. Substrates and conditions under which millwork shall be installed will be

reviewed.5. Contractor shall notify all parties at least seven days prior to time of conference.6. Contractor shall record minutes of meeting and distribute to all parties in

attendance.

3.2 JOB MOCK-UP:

A. Erect a full size mock-up of cabinet work at project site for Architect's acceptance. Ifunacceptable, erect additional mock-ups until acceptable.

B. Mock-up shall indicate the following:1. Workmanship.2. Finishes.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 06 2200-7


3. Relationships to adjacent work.4. Do not begin millwork production until each mock-up has been accepted by

Architect.

C. Accepted, undamaged mock-ups may remain as part of the finished work.

3.3 GENERAL WORKMANSHIP:

A. Install finish carpentry and millwork in a manner consistent with the specified QualityGrade, plumb, level, true and straight within 1/8" in 10'-0". Shim as required usingconcealed shims.

B. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners andblind nailing. 1. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.2. Secure cabinet and counter base to floor using angles and anchorages.

C. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work, with maximum gap of 1/32". Do notuse addition overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.

D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units andcountertops.

E. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners.

F. Finish work shall be smooth, free from abrasion, tool marks, raised grain grade markingsor similar defects on exposed surfaces.

G. Distribute defects allowed in the quality grade specified to the best overall advantagewhen installing job assembled work. Install work in accord with approved shop drawings.

H. Touch up mill finished items, including refinishing necessitated by job fitting or attachingand repair of scratches and similar damages. Touch up repairs shall be indiscernible inthe finished work.

3.4 FIELD FINISHING:

A. Field finish: Field finish painted millwork in accord with the requirements of the Paintingand Coating section. Prior to finishing, sand using 120 to 180 grit abrasive on a smoothsanding block, to remove scuff and handling marks, raised grain, scratches and effects ofmoisture exposure.


A. Protect finished and prefinished surfaces from work of other trades.

B. Prior to Date of Substantial Completion, examine work for damages. Repair or replacesuch damaged work to original condition.

C. Clean wood, metal and accessory items using a neutral cleaner. Check and correctoperating mechanism for proper operation. Adjust and lubricate hinges, catches andother operating hardware.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 06 2200-8

Lane School Renovation MEMBRANE ROOF PATCHINGAldine Independent School District SECTION 07 5900MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 07 5900 - MEMBRANE ROOF PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Existing roof areas: Existing roof area is a modified bituminous roof membrane assemblythat no longer has a warranty in force.

B. Work of this section includes minor cutting and patching of existing roofing systems toaccommodate new roof penetrations required for interior renovation. Extent of roofpatching to be performed will be determined during the pre-construction conference andduring the course of the work.

C. Existing conditions: Existing roofs will require protection during the course of the work ofthis section. Existing roofs are not leaking or showing any other signs of performancefailure. Exercise particular care to protect areas not affected by this cutting and patchingwork.

D. Special project requirements:1. Cover existing roofs in areas to patched using plywood walkboards, to avoid

damaging existing roof systems.2. Avoid material storage, staging and traffic on areas of the roofs not affected by

work of this Contract.3. The existing facility will remain in full operation during the work of this section.

Allowable hours and times for roof cutting and patching may be restricted, asdetermined by Owner or Landlord.

4. Should further roof repairs be required as requested by Owner or Landlord, or asrequired to ensure a watertight roof, such repairs shall be performed in addition tothe work of this Contract.

E. Roofing system components, including flashing materials, shall be products of a singlemanufacturer.



B. Product data: Submit product description and complete installation instructions for roofingand equipment curbs, including standard flashing details, for insulation, roofing andaccessory materials. Indicate specific systems and procedures proposed for use. Indicate mechanical fastener types and spacings to meet specified uplift requirements.

C. Shop drawings:1. Submit for tapered insulation from roof system manufacturer's authorized tapered

fabricator. Indicate layout of insulation showing slopes, crickets, valleys and drainlocations. Include longitudinal and transverse sections, and sections showinginsulation layers. Indicate method of attachment.

2. Submit for flashing details not specifically indicated on drawings or inmanufacturer's product data details.


A. Bill of lading for bituminous roofs: Submit bill of lading stating recommended EquiviscousTemperature (EVT) as determined by bitumen processor.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 07 5900-1


1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS:

A. Warranty work, if applicable: For roofs currently under warranty, submit recommendationsand requirements for roof patching, executed by authorized representative of roofmembrane system manufacturer, indicating that manufacturer has reviewed drawings andspecifications, conditions affecting the work and the relationship of roof membranesystem with related work, and that manufacturer proposes to continue to honor theexisting roof warranty without further stipulation.1. Submit certification that proposed applicator is approved for warranted work by

roof membrane system manufacturer.2. Submit certification from authorized representative of roof membrane system

manufacturer stating that specified system and materials, as well as indicatedsurfaces and conditions, are acceptable for purpose of honoring existingwarranty.


A. Applicable standards:1. ASTM International (ASTM), standards as referenced herein.2. Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (FM):

a. "Wind Forces on Buildings and Other Structures," Data Sheet #1-7.b. "Approval Guide.”

3. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA), "Roofing and WaterproofingManual," Fifth Edition, 2001 with 2003 Update.

4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):a. "Building Materials Directory”.b. "Fire Resistance Directory”.

B. Design criteria; fire resistance: Comply with existing fire resistance designs. Use onlymanufacturers and types of materials as required by existing designs.

C. Roofing system components, including flashing materials, shall be products of a singlemanufacturer. Insulation shall be the product of the roofing manufacturer or acceptableand approved in writing by the roof manufacturer for installation with roof system.


A. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's unopened containers bearing manufacturer'sname and type of material.

B. Store materials in dry, covered storage, off ground. Store roll goods on ends. Handle toprevent damage to edges.

C. Store cartons level, standing in upright position. Do not stack cartons. Protect open topcontainers from debris and precipitation.

D. Store solvent-bearing materials in dry, cool storage and keep lids tight on openedcontainers to prevent solvent escape.


A. Environmental requirements: Apply roofing in dry weather, when ambient temperature isabove 40EF.

B. Protection:1. Protect building and site from damage and defacing by roofing operations. Use

tarps at hoisting points and at trash chutes.2. Restore or replace adjacent work or materials damaged during handling of

bitumen and roofing materials.3. Until Date of Substantial Completion, provide protection for completed roof

surfaces against damage due to work of other trades.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 07 5900-2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Materials: Provide only roofing, insulation, sheet metal flashing and trim materials andproducts compatible with roof membrane systems existing at the time that roof patching isrequired, to provide watertight assemblies meeting existing manufacturers’ warranties,requirements and fire-resistance ratings. Materials exposed to view from buildingelevations shall match existing materials and assemblies in function, color, finish andappearance.

2.2 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING SYSTEM:

A. Acceptable systems; one ply felt, if required, modified bitumen base sheet and modifiedbitumen cap sheet:1. Firestone Building Products Company, I-S-38-G.

a. First ply: Firestone SBS Base.b. Top ply: Firestone SBS Glass FR.c. Flashing top ply: Firestone SBS Metal Flash AL.

2. Siplast, 2030 IH FR.a. First ply: Paradiene 20EG.b. Roof top ply: Granule-surfaced Paradiene 30 HT FR.c. Flashing top ply (torched): Veral Aluminum.

3. Soprema Roofing and Waterproofing, Inc., Specification 2147FR. a. First ply: Sopralene 180 Sanded.b. Roof top ply: Granule-surfaced Sopralene 180 FR Granules.c. Flashing top ply (torched): Sopralast 50 TV Aluminum.

B. Roofing materials:1. Modified bitumen base ply: SBS modified asphalt base sheet membrane, smooth

surfaced, fiberglass or polyester mat reinforcement, minimum 115 mil thicknessfor 2-ply systems, minimum 65 mil thickness for 3-ply systems; designed for hot-mop application.

2. Felt ply for three-ply systems: Manufacturer's premium grade asphalt-coatedfiberglass felt meeting requirements of ASTM D2178-04 (Discontinued 2013),Type VI, as required by roofing system manufacturer's specification for systemwarranty specified.

3. Modified bitumen cap sheet:a. Characteristics: Manufacturer's premium SBS modified asphalt cap

sheet with mineral granule surfacing and fiberglass or polyester matreinforcements, minimum 130 mil thickness, designed for hot-mopapplication.

b. UL fire resistance classification: Class A. c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection.

4. Torched modified bitumen flashing membrane: a. Manufacturer's premium SBS or APP modified asphalt-reinforced

membrane, minimum 130 mil thickness with aluminum metal or granulesurfacing, as required by roofing system manufacturer's specification forsystem warranty specified. Granule-surfaced flashing shall be samecolor as roofing system cap sheet.

b. For application over wood substrates, flashing membranes shall beapplied using cold adhesives in lieu of torching.

5. Cold-adhesive applied flashing membrane: For areas with wood or plywoodsubstrates, flashing membrane shall be applied by cold-adhesive methods; notorching allowed over wood or plywood substrates.

6. Bitumen: Steep roofing asphalt meeting ASTM D312-00(2006), Type III for fieldof roof, Type IV for flashings.

7. Flashing cement and cold adhesive: As required by roofing system manufacturerfor system warranty specified, compatible with SBS modified bitumen materials.

8. Walkway pads: Manufacturer's premium product, minimum 2'-0" wide, incontrasting color to roofing system cap sheet.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 07 5900-3


9. Accessory products:a. Termination bars: Manufacturer’s standard.b. Color granules: Mineral granules matching size and color of granules in

cap sheet and flashing membrane.

2.3 ROOF INSULATIONS:

A. Isocyanurate roof insulation:1. Type: Rigid isocyanurate closed-cell foam boards, permanently bonded to non-

asphaltic glass facing sheets, complying with requirements of ASTM C1289-12Class 1, Type II.

2. Face size: Minimum 4'-0" by 4'-0". 3. Total thickness: Match thickness of existing insulation.4. Fire hazard classification: FM Class I.5. Roof covering classification: UL Classified for installation with Class A roof

covering.6. R-value: Minimum 20.2 R-value.

B. Tapered units and top layer for built-up roofing systems; perlite insulation:1. Type: Rigid perlite boards.2. Face size: 2'-0" by 4'-0", minimum.3. Thickness: Minimum 3/4", except as otherwise required to achieve roof slopes

indicated.4. "R" value at 75EF.: Minimum 2.78/inch.5. Roof covering classification: UL Classified for installation with Class A roof

covering.6. Slope for tapered boards: 1/4" per foot, across board width.

C. Insulation fastener system over metal deck; type required by roofing system manufacturerand meeting characteristics and wind uplift further specified:1. Corrosion resistance: Pass FM 4470 Corrosion Test, modified DIN 50018

standard, with a maximum of 15 percent red rust after 15 wet and dry acidicatmosphere cycles in Kesternich cabinet.

2. Plates: Minimum 3" diameter, non-corrosive material.3. Wind uplift: FM Class I-90 wind uplift rating.

2.4 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS:

A. Roof curbs:1. Acceptable manufacturers; equipment supports:

a. Custom Curb, Inc.b. Roof Products and Systems Corp.c. Thycurb Div./Thybar Corp.

2. Characteristics: Minimum 18 ga. galvanized steel construction with factory-installed, preservative-treated wood nailers and integral counterflashing.

3. Insulation: Rigid fiberglass board insulation, 1-1/2" minimum thickness at curbs.

B. Fans and vents: Refer to Division 22, Plumbing and Division 26, Electrical.

C. Cant strips: Impregnated fiberboard or preservative-treated wood; sizes and profilesindicated.

D. Tapered edge strips: Impregnated fiberboard, tapered from 1-5/8" to 1/8"; 1'-6" wide by4'-0" lengths.

E. Roof material fasteners for built-up roof:1. Base-ply fasteners: Type as recommended by roof manufacturer.2. Nails: Large head, galvanized roofing nails driven through tin caps, of length to

penetrate substrate 3/4".

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 07 5900-4


F. Sheet metal materials:1. Aluminum sheet: 3003-H14 alloy, meeting ASTM B209-10, minimum 0.040"

thickness, mill finish.2. Surface-mounted flashing reglets:

a. Acceptable products:1) Fry Reglet Corp., Springlok, Type SM.2) W.P. Hickman, Surface-Mounted.

b. Characteristics:1) Material: Aluminum alloy reglet and counterflashing;

counterflashing minimum 0.032" thickness.2) Finish: Manufacturer's standard.3) Accessories: Prefabricated interior and exterior corners and

splice plates.3. Sheet lead: Minimum 4.0 lbs./sq. ft., hard type.

G. Butyl sealant for concealed sheet metal joints:1. Acceptable products:

a. Pecora Corp., BC-158.b. Protective Treatments, Inc., 707.c. Tremco, Inc., Butyl Sealant.

2. Type: One part, non-skinning butyl sealant.

H. Silicone sealant for exposed fastener heads and exposed joints:1. Acceptable products; subject to compliance with specified requirements:

a. Dow Corning Corp., #795.b. Pecora Corp., #895.c. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company, SpecTrem 2.

2. Characteristics:a. Type: One-part silicone rubber; meeting ASTM C920-11, Type S, Grade

NS, Class 25.b. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Pre-construction conference: Prior to beginning roof patching work, a pre-roofingconference will be held to review work to be accomplished.1. Contractor, Architect, Owner’s representative, roofing and insulation

manufacturers' representatives, roofing subcontractor and all othersubcontractors who have equipment penetrating roof or whose work involvesaccess to roof shall be present.

2. Contractor shall notify all parties at least seven days prior to time for conference.3. Contractor shall record minutes of meeting and distribute to attending parties.

B. Ascertain that work of other trades penetrating roof membrane or intended to be madewatertight by membrane application is in place and accepted prior to patching of roofmembrane system. Schedule roof patching to minimize traffic on new and existingmembranes.

C. Install preservative treated wood blocking where required for curbs, nailers and othermiscellaneous blocking.

D. Insulation installation:1. Install insulation for built-up roofing in two layers, with joints staggered between

layers; isocyanurate insulation first layer, perlite insulation second layer.2. Install isocyanurate insulation for single-ply roofing in one layer, with joints

staggered between boards.3. Stagger end joints in adjacent boards. Butt edges for snug contact.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 07 5900-5


4. At metal decks, install insulation in accord with FM I-28. Attach isocyanurateinsulation to metal decks using specified mechanical fasteners, meeting FM I-90wind uplift classification.

5. At other decks, adhesively install or hot-mop first layer of insulation in full bed ofadhesive or bitumen.

6. Solid-mop second and subsequent layers of insulation, including taperedinsulation, in full adhesive or bitumen mopping at rate recommended by insulationmanufacturer.

7. Install only as much roof insulation each work period as can be covered byroofing by end of same work period.

8. Install cant strips and tapered edge strips; butt lengths together and to adjacentconstruction. Install cant strips at abutting vertical surfaces, except those whichhave built-in cants.

9. "Shave" insulation at roof drains to obtain slope to drains.

3.2 ROOF PATCHING FOR BUILT-UP ROOFS:

A. Install roof patching systems in accord with roof system manufacturer's product data,warranty and fire-rating requirements, manufacturer’s specific installation instructions andrequirements of the Landlord. Keep interior spaces watertight during course of roofpatching.

B. Apply felts in shingle fashion, perpendicular to deck slope, beginning at low points. Applyuniform interply bitumen mopping between felts. Lay felts straight.

C. Apply bitumen at proper Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) in accord with NRCArecommendations and with bitumen processor's recommended EVT submittal on bill oflading.

D. Broom in felts, whether hand-or machine-applied, using clean, soft bristled broom orsqueegee.

E. Apply all plies in the same work period. Apply a glaze coat of bitumen, if flood coatingand graveling is not to be accomplished immediately.

F. At end of work period, install water cutoffs at exposed edges. Remove cutoffs prior tobeginning next day's work.

G. Deficiencies:1. Torn or damaged felts: Apply additional ply over damaged areas.2. Blisters: Puncture to release entrapped gas. Apply additional ply, overlapping

blister 1'-0" each direction.3. Fishmouths: Cut out. Seat flaps with bitumen and apply additional ply,

overlapping fishmouth 1'-0" each direction.

H. Roof penetration flashing:1. Roof drains: Comply with NRCA Details. Provide 2'-6" by 2'-6" sheet lead

flashing at roof drains. Lock flashing into drain clamps. Set lead in mastic. Lockflashing into drain clamps. Flash with materials and methods as stipulated byroof membrane manufacturer.

2. Pipe penetrations: Comply with NRCA Detail BUR-18. Provide one-piece leadflashing extending 6" onto roof each direction for pipe penetrating roofmembrane. Set lead in mastic. Lap sleeve 2" inside pipe. Extend flashing overroof surface, flashing with materials and methods as stipulated by roof membranemanufacturer. Apply tooled bead of mastic at juncture of roof and pipe.

I. Flashing system: Comply with manufacturer's product data and recommended details.1. Provide base flashing at parapet walls, curbs, roof penetrations and roof

accessories.2. Nail top edge of base flashing with large head roofing nails or other fasteners

suitable for substrate. Space fasteners at 4" o. c., maximum. Locate fasteners tobe covered by metal counterflashing.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 07 5900-6


J. Form flashing envelope at gravel stops by returning base felt back over ply felts, 4"minimum. Set in flashing cement.

K. Cover exposed flashing edges with metal counterflashing as specified in Sheet MetalFlashing and Trim section.

L. Flash at curbs and vertical surfaces same as parapets. Provide cant strips at curbs andequipment not having built-in cants. Provide counterflashing at vertical surfaces whichare not self-flashing.

3.3 INSPECTION:

A. Upon completion of the patching of roof membrane system, an inspection shall be madeby a representative of the roof membrane system manufacturer to ascertain that the roofmembrane patching system has been installed according to manufacturer's publishedspecifications and details. Observed defects or deviations shall be remedied as requiredto maintain existing warranty.

B. Completed roof patching areas shall be free of defects, including leaks and ponded water.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 07 5900-7

Lane School Renovation JOINT SEALANTSAldine Independent School District SECTION 07 9200MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Definitions:1. Joint sealant compound:

a. A material used in filling joints and seams, having properties of adhesionand cohesion; not required to have extensibility and recovery properties.

b. Material is designed generally for application in interior joints not subjectto movement.

2. Caulk: The process of filling joints, without regard to type of material.3. Joint failure: A caulked joint exhibiting one or more of the following

characteristics:a. Air and/or water leakage.b. Migration and/or reversion.c. Loss of adhesion.d. Loss of cohesion.e. Failure to cure.f. Discoloration.g. Staining of adjacent work.h. Development of bubbles, air pockets or voids.



B. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product description, indicating conformance withspecified requirements and installation instructions for each type of sealant. Indicatepreparation and priming requirements for each substrate condition.

C. Color samples:1. Samples for initial selection: Samples shall be actual materials or literature

depicting actual colors of standard color materials showing full range of colorsavailable for each product exposed to view.

2. Samples for verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required,provide samples with joint sealants in 1/2" wide joints formed between two 6" longstrips of material matching appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to jointsealants.

3. Submit samples of custom color sealant materials matching color sampleselected by Architect.

D. Adhesion compatibility test results: Submit a letter from sealant manufacturer indicatingadhesion and compatibility testing has been performed and that materials are compatibleand that adhesion is acceptable. Indicate requirements for primers or special preparation.


A. Applicable standards as referenced herein: 1. ASTM International (ASTM).2. Food and Drug Administration (FDA).

B. Adhesion compatibility tests: Perform tests on actual samples of aluminum framingsystem, storefront, components, to determine that materials are compatible and thatadhesion is acceptable. Identify requirements for primers or special preparation.1. Test structural sealants in accord with ASTM C1135-00(2011).

C. Architect reserves the right to reject work not in conformance with selected colors, basedupon verification samples.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 07 9200-1



A. Protection of adjacent surfaces:1. Protect by applying masking material or manipulating application equipment to

keep materials in joint. If masking materials are used, allow no tape to touchcleaned surfaces to receive sealant. Remove tape immediately after sealantapplication, before surface skin begins to form.

2. Remove misapplied materials from surfaces by using solvents and methodsrecommended by manufacturer.

3. At surfaces from which materials have been removed, restore to original conditionand appearance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL:

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that arecompatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service andapplication, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and fieldexperience.

B. VOC content of interior sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside theweatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content whencalculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):1. Architectural sealants: 250 g/L.2. Sealant primers for nonporous substrates: 250 g/L.3. Sealant primers for porous substrates: 775 g/L.

2.2 INTERIOR ONE-PART, NON-SAG POLYURETHANE SEALANT:

A. Acceptable products:1. BASF Building Products, MasterSeal NP-1.2. Pecora Corp., Dynatrol I-XL.3. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company, Vulkem 116.4. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company, Dymonic.

B. Type: One-part, non-sag polyurethane-based sealant; meeting ASTM C920-11, Type S,Grade NS, Class 25, for use NT.

C. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.

2.3 TWO-PART POLYURETHANE SEALANT FOR HORIZONTAL TRAFFIC-BEARINGPAVEMENTS:

A. Acceptable products:1. BASF Building Systems, MasterSeal SL 2.

2. Pecora Corp., Urexpan NR-200. 3. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company, 45 SSL.

B. Characteristics:1. Type: Two-component polyurethane sealant for horizontal traffic-bearing

surfaces meeting ASTM C920-11, Type M, Grade P or NS, minimum Class 25,for use T; self-leveling for flat surfaces and non-sag for sloped surfaces.

2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.

2.4 SILICONE BATH SEALANT FOR WET AREAS:

A. Acceptable products:1. Dow Corning Corp., 786 Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant.2. Franklin International, Titebond Kitchen & Bath Sealant.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 07 9200-2


3. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc., GE Sanitary SCS1700.4. Pecora Corp., #898NST Silicone Sanitary Sealant.

B. Characteristics:1. Type: One-part silicone rubber, mildew- and stain-resistant, acid-curing silicone

sealant; meeting ASTM C920-11, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for use NT.2. Color: Clear, white or off-white, as selected by Architect.

2.5 SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING ACRYLIC SEALANT:

A. Acceptable products:1. Franklin International, Titebond Painters Plus Caulk.2. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., Acryl-R Acrylic Sealant.3. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company, Mono 555.

B. Characteristics:1. Type: One-part, acrylic polymer sealant, meeting ASTM C1311-10.2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.

2.6 PAINTABLE ACRYLIC-LATEX JOINT SEALANT:

A. Acceptable products:1. Bostik, Chem-Calk 600.2. Franklin International, Titebond Painters Caulk.3. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc., GE RCS20.4. Pecora Corp., AC-20 Acrylic Latex.5. Tremco, Inc., an RPM Company, Tremflex 834.

B. Characteristics: Flexible, paintable, non-staining, non-bleeding acrylic latex or siliconizedacrylic emulsion, meeting ASTM C834-10, Type OP, Grade NF.

2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS:

A. Joint cleaner: Type recommended by material manufacturer for substrates indicated.

B. Joint primer/sealer: Type recommended by material manufacturer for substrates,conditions and exposures indicated.

C. Bond breaker tape: Plastic tape applied to contact surfaces where bond to substrate orjoint filler must be avoided for material performance.

D. Sealant backer rod: Compressible rod stock as recommended by sealant manufacturerfor compatibility with sealant. Provide size and shape of rod to control joint depth.

E. Tooling agent: Agent recommended by material manufacturer to ensure contact ofmaterial with inner joint faces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION:

A. Clean joints of debris and projections including shims.

B. Clean joint surfaces immediately before caulking joints. Remove dirt, insecure coatings,moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond.

C. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity, unless materialmanufacturer's product data indicates that alkalinity does not interfere with bond andperformance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with dilute ammoniasolution; rinse with clean water and allow to dry before caulking.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 07 9200-3


D. Roughen joint surfaces of non-porous materials, unless material manufacturer's productdata indicates equal bond strength as porous surfaces. Rub with fine abrasive cloth orwool to produce dull sheen.

3.2 APPLICATION:

A. Comply with joint sealant material manufacturer's product data and ASTM C1193-13except where more stringent requirements are specified.

B. Prime joint surfaces where recommended by material manufacturer. Do not allowprimer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjacent surfaces.

C. Install backer rod for joint sealant materials, except where recommended by materialmanufacturer to be omitted for application indicated. 1. Place backer rod to maintain recommended sealant thickness and profile.2. Place rod at depth to provide sealant manufacturer’s recommended sealant

depth. 3. Do not twist rod during installation. 4. Place rod to minimize possibility of extrusion when joint is compressed. 5. Install bond breaker tape in lieu of backer rod for shallow, closed joints and as

recommended by manufacturer’s product data.

D. Employ installation techniques which will ensure that materials are deposited in uniform,continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete wetting of joint bondsurfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface,fill joint to form slight cove so that joint will not trap moisture and debris.

E. Do not allow materials to overflow onto adjacent surfaces. Prevent staining of adjacentsurfaces.

F. Remove excess and misplaced materials as work progresses. Clean the adjoiningsurfaces to remove misplaced materials, without damage to adjacent surfaces or finishes.

G. Interior joints: At interior joints and seams at abutting and adjacent materials, recess jointsealant 3/16" in joints wider than 1/4". At joints 1/4" or less in width, tool joint sealantflush.

H. Tool joints of non-sag sealant to concave profile and smooth, uniform surface, flush withedges of substrate. Maintain sealant depth-to-width ratio in accord with manufacturer'sproduct data.

I. Cure joint sealants and joint sealant compounds in accord with manufacturer's productdata to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Protect uncured surfaces from contamination and physical damage.

3.3 JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE:

A. Interior joints at perimeter of concrete, aluminum and hollow metal framing: One-part,non-sag polyurethane sealant.

B. Interior concealed bedding joints and thresholds: Solvent-release-curing acrylic sealant.

C. Exterior and interior horizontal traffic-bearing joints, excluding tile floor joints: Two-partpolyurethane sealant.

D. Tile expansion and control joint sealant: Refer to Tiling section.

E. Typical interior joints and seams at abutting and adjacent materials except as specifiedherein: Paintable acrylic-latex joint sealant.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 07 9200-4

Lane School Renovation HOLLOW METAL FRAMESAldine Independent School District SECTION 08 1113MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Related work specified elsewhere:1. Plastic faced wood doors.2. Door hardware.


A. Physical endurance: Comply with performance level for specified level classification inaccord with ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003(R2008) and ANSI/SDI A250.4-01 for frames, frameanchors and hardware reinforcings.

B. Finish: Comply with standard performance criteria of ANSI/SDI A250.10-98(R2004) forprimed steel surfaces.



B. Shop drawings: Indicate frame elevations and sections, materials, gauges and finishes,fabrication and erection details, location of finish hardware by dimension and locations.

C. Samples: Submit as follows:1. Welded frame: 1'-0" by 1'-0" head and jamb corner section showing welded

corner construction.2. Anchors: One of each type.

D. Product data: Indicate that hollow metal frames comply with specified requirements,including performance criteria.


A. Applicable standards; standards of the following, as referenced herein:1. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI).2. ASTM International (ASTM).3. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC).4. Steel Door Institute (SDI).

B. Fabrication standard: Except for more stringent requirements specified, comply withANSI/SDI A250.8-2003(R2008) including performance levels as referenced.


A. Deliver hollow metal frames palletized, packaged or crated for protection during transitand site storage. 1. Do not use nonvented plastic. 2. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of

frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

B. Inspect work upon delivery for damage. Reject damaged items.

C. Store materials under cover, on raised platforms. 1. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place

on minimum 4" high wood blocking.ext2. Protect from moisture but provide for cross ventilation. Remove units from wet

packaging if wetting occurs.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 08 1113-1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL:

A. Steel; Interior frames: Fabricate of cold-rolled steel sheet meeting ASTM A1008-13.

B. Finish: Prime painted steel surfaces shall comply with requirements for acceptancestated in ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007(R2011).1. Interior frames: One coat of manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer.

C. Field applied coating for inside of frames to be fully grouted in concrete construction: 1. Bituminous paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion for separation of dissimilar

materials complying with ASTM D1187-97(2011), minimum 15 mils dry film percoat.

2. Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfurcomponents, and other deleterious impurities.

2.2 FRAMES:

A. Frame construction:1. Welded steel frames: 16 ga. for interior and 14 ga. for exterior, with backbend

returns. a. Setup arc welded, with all joints, including face, flange and throat, full

welded, dressed and ground smooth; no mechanical interlocking allowed. b. Provide welded frames with temporary spreaders during shipping,

storage and erection. Spreaders shall span both rabbets of frame and belocated at bottom and at middle of frame.

2. Machine door frames for hardware scheduled for installation on that frame. Fillerplates installed at unused openings will not be acceptable. Provide blockoutsbehind frame for continuous hinges.

3. Joints:a. Dress welded joints and ground smooth, indistinguishable in completed

work.b. Make non-welded connections with tight fitting, closed joints.c. Make joints with aligned faces and arrises.

4. Inside of frames to be grouted in concrete construction shall receive protectivecoating as specified herein.

B. Frame anchors:1. Wall anchors for frame attachment to drywall partitions: Manufacturer's standard

minimum 18 ga. adjustable type for attachment to studs. Provide one anchor perjamb for each 2'-0" of height or fraction thereof. Anchors for fire-rated framesshall be labeled type.

2. Floor anchors: Provide frames, other than slip-on drywall type, with minimum 18gage anchors for attachment to floor. a. For wall conditions that do not allow for the use of a floor anchor, provide

an additional jamb anchor.

2.3 PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE AND ANCHORS:

A. Reinforcement: Factory reinforce frame components for hardware installation in accordwith ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003(R2008) and ANSI/SDI A250.6-03(R2009).

B. Punch single leaf frames to receive three silencers; double leaf frames to receive twosilencers per leaf, at head.

C. Install hardware reinforcement and anchors without distortions or blemishes on exposedsurfaces.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 08 1113-2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FRAME INSTALLATION:

A. General:1. Install hollow metal frames in accord with ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003(R2008),

ANSI/SDI A250.11-2012, SDI-122-07, manufacturer’s product data and approvedshop drawings.

2. Shimming of door hinges is not an acceptable correction of door frames installedout of erection tolerance.

B. Welded frames:1. Set welded frames in position prior to beginning partition work. Brace frames

until permanent anchors are set.2. Set anchors for frames as work progresses. Install anchors at hinge and strike

levels. Install rubber bumpers and silencers in frames prior to grouting.3. Remove temporary spreaders before frame installation is complete. 4. Remove temporary braces after wall construction is complete.

3.2 SITE TOLERANCES:

A. Allowable erection tolerances:1. Variation from specified clearances: +1/32".2. Variation in face alignment, pairs of doors: +1/16".3. Variation in face alignment between door and frame: 1/8" maximum.


A. Protect hollow metal frames from damage and staining until Date of SubstantialCompletion. Replace or repair damaged or stained components.

B. Replace components which exhibit warp, buckle or broken welds.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 08 1113-3

Lane School Renovation PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORSAldine Independent School District SECTION 08 1423MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 08 1423 - PLASTIC FACED WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 ACTIONS SUBMITTALS:


B. Product data: Submit manufacturer's product description, indicating materials,classifications, factory finish and fabrication. Include manufacturer's proposed warranty. Indicate that doors meet specified requirements. Include manufacturer's requirements fordoor installation, finishing, care, maintenance and cleaning to obtain specified warranties.

C. Shop drawings: Submit schedules and elevations indicating door sizes, construction,swing, fire rating, undercut, and hardware locations. Indicate that doors meet specifiedrequirements, including fire ratings.


A. Intent to warrant and certifications: Submit an Intent to Warrant executed by authorizedrepresentative of door manufacturer, indicating that manufacturer has reviewed drawingsand specifications, conditions affecting the work and the relationship of doors with relatedwork, and that manufacturer proposes to provide warranties as referenced herein withoutfurther stipulation.


A. Labeling requirements: On top edge, provide each door with a label which identifiesmanufacturer, trade association of which he is a member, grade and type of door orindustry standard with which it complies.

B. All flush doors shall be the product of one manufacturer.

C. Applicable standards; as referenced herein:1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).3. Standards for architectural woodwork: Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI),

"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and QualityCertification Program," October 1, 2014, 2nd Edition, herein referred to as AWIStandards. Work shall comply with applicable portions of AWI standards.

4. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association (HPVA).5. Window and Door Manufacturer’s Association (WDMA).


A. Deliver no doors to building until weatherproof storage space is available. Store doors ina space having controlled temperature and humidity. Stack doors flat, off floor, supportedto prevent warpage and protected from damage and direct exposure to sunlight.

B. Seal top and bottom edges of doors, if required by manufacturer’s product data tomaintain warranty.

C. Protect doors during shipping and storage by enclosing in polyethylene bags. Replacedoors in original packaging for shipment to site following machining and finishing. Hangpre-machined and prefinished doors without removal of packaging. Identify each doorwith door number on packaging. Maintain packaging in place until Date of SubstantialCompletion.

D. Break packaging seal on site to permit ventilation.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 08 1423-1


E. Do not walk or stack other materials on top of stacked doors. Do not drag doors acrosseach other.

1.5 WARRANTIES:

A. Provide manufacturer's door replacement warranty against warpage, twist, delamination,telegraphing of core and manufacturing defects for the following terms:1. Interior solid core and mineral core doors: Lifetime of original installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOORS:

A. Acceptable manufacturers include, but are not necessarily limited to following; subject tocompliance with specified requirements:1. Basis of design; Eggers Industries, Inc.2. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.3. Doormerica.4. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc.5. VT Industries, Inc.

B. General quality standard: 1. Performance grade: Extra heavy duty.2. Aesthetic grades: WDMA I. S. 1-A or AWS, Section 9, Custom Grade.

C. Glued particleboard core wood doors: Eggers "Plastic Flush-Particle"; meeting AWSStandards, Section 1300, three-ply construction, plastic laminate face, PC-HPDL-3,structural composite lumber core (SCLC).1. Thickness: 1-3/4". 2. Adhesive bond: Type II or better for interior applications.

a. Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. 3. Blocking: Top and bottom rail and lock stile blocking shall accommodate

specified hardware, without through-bolting hardware.4. Core: Structural composite lumber (SCL) core doors, meeting AWS SLC,

structural composite lumber core. 5. Construction: Hardwood stiles and rails glued to core; core assembly sanded for

uniform thickness.6. Crossbanding: Engineered high density fiberboard (HDF), minimum 1/16"

thickness.

D. Plastic laminate facing include, but are not necessarily limited to following; subject tocompliance with specified requirements:1. Acceptable products:

a. Formica Corp., Formica.b. Nevamar Corp., Nevamar.c. WilsonArt International, Inc.

2. Type: Nominal 0.050" thickness, general purpose type, high pressure decorativelaminate conforming to NEMA Standard LD 3-2005, Grade HGL. Laminate facesshall be applied in one piece.a. Color: As selected by Architect.

3. Stiles for plastic laminate-faced doors: Minimum 1-3/8" wide by thickness of corewith close grained solid hardwood or structural composite lumber inner stilebacker with not less than outermost 1/4" of stile being close grained hardwoodmatching grain and color of plastic laminate door face; no exposed fingerjointsallowed.

2.2 FACTORY FITTING, MACHINING AND FINISHING:

A. Factory fitting and machining and finishing are required for all wood doors.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 08 1423-2


B. Fitting and machining:1. Factory fit and machine doors to clearances and bevels specified.2. Prepare for hardware installation using hardware manufacturer's templates.

a. Locate in accord with WDMA I. S. 1.7, unless otherwise indicated.b. Drill pilot holes for screws and bolts.

3. Seal edges of doors and cutouts immediately following fitting and machining.

C. Clearances and bevel:1. Hinge stile: 1/8".2. Lock stile: 1/8".3. Top: 1/8".4. Bottom: 1/4" above floor finish or threshold, except where undercutting is

indicated. Confirm installed floor covering thickness before cutting door bottomedges.

5. Meeting stiles, pairs of doors: 1/8".6. Bevel: 1/8" in 2".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Acclimatization: Allow doors to become acclimated to finished space conditions aminimum of 72 hours before hanging.

B. Preparation: Verify that framed openings are installed within specified tolerances. Do notinstall doors in frames which are not installed within size and plumb tolerances.

C. Installation:1. Install doors in accord with manufacturer's product data using scheduled

hardware. Install using threaded-to-the-head wood screws furnished by hardwaremanufacturer.

2. Anchor hardware in correct position and alignment.3. Adjust hardware and door for proper function and for smooth, free operation,

latching without force or excess clearance, within specified clearances andtolerances.

D. Erection tolerances:1. Variation from specified clearances: +1/32", -0".2. Maximum variation in edge alignment, pairs of doors: 1/16".

E. Replace doors with defects in material, finish, fit or machining.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 08 1423-3

Lane School Renovation ACCESS DOORS AND PANELSAldinen Independent School District SECTION 08 3113MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 08 3113 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Product data: Indicate material types, finishes and sizes, fabrication and installationdetails and requirements.

C. Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types,locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

D. Location drawings: Submit a shop drawing submittal to indicate locations and sizes of allaccess doors and panels to be installed in all public spaces.


A. Applicable standards; standards of the following, as referenced herein:1. ASTM International (ASTM).2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Fire Codes.

B. Note: Access doors and panels are to be purchased by affected trade, and installed bytrade providing material where access door and panel is to be located. Review alllocations, especially in public locations, with Architect prior to purchase and installation ofaccess doors and panels. 1. Finish: Selected by Architect to match adjacent finish materials.


A. Deliver access doors in protective packaging.

B. Store in packaging to prevent soiling and physical damage.

C. Handle to prevent damage to finished surfaces and operating mechanisms.


A. Protection: Protect prefinished surfaces from damage or staining. Following installation,provide protective covering for duration of project.

B. Coordinate installation of access doors required to be built into building structure. Securetemplates or lay out to rough dimensions provided by specialty manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS:

A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements:1. Acudor Products, Inc.2. Babcock Davis Hatchways.3. J. L. Industries, Inc.4. Karp Associates, Inc.

B. Characteristics:1. Sizes: As indicated on drawings.2. Types:

a. Typical: As required by substrates.b. Non-fire-rated access doors in gypsum board work: Flush type with

perforated frame flanges for finishing with joint compound.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 08 3113-1

Lane School Renovation ACCESS DOORS AND PANELSAldinen Independent School District SECTION 08 3113MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

3. Construction:a. Non-fire-rated units: Minimum 14 ga. steel sheet for doors; 16 ga. for

frames; prime painted.4. Hardware:

a. Non-fire-rated units: Manufacturer's standard concealed hinges allowing175 degree operation and cylinder lock. Provide two keys per lock.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install access doors in accord with manufacturer's product data, plumb, level and true toline and location.

B. Install access doors with fasteners of type and spacing recommended by manufacturer'sproduct data.

C. Protect surfaces from damage or staining. Clean surfaces prior to Date of SubstantialCompletion.

D. Test and adjust hardware for ease of operation.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 08 3113-2

Lane School Renovation DOOR HARDWARE Aldine Independent School District SECTION 08 7100 MA No. R305675.01

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 08 7100-1

SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Commercial door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Frames" for astragals provided as part of fire-rated

labeled assemblies.

C. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.

a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and

frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 08 7100-2

f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

D. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders.

E. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2) complete maintenance manuals to the owner. Manuals to include the following items:

1. Approved hardware schedule, catalog cuts and keying schedule. 2. Provide keying bitting list in paper and electronic format by registered mail directly to facility

manager owner. 3. Hardware installation and adjustment instructions. 4. Manufacturer’s written warranty information. 5. Wiring diagrams, elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Door Hardware Installer Qualifications: An experienced and factory trainined Installer who has completed both standard and electrified builders hardware and integrated access control installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity which is not more than a half day of travel from the jobsite and who employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant or equivalent experience available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. Supplier recognized by manufacturers to be a direct factory-authorized distributor of the specified hardware products. Supplier is required to be available for onsite meetings with one days notice regarding issues that arise with opening functions, installation, keying, on-site warehousing, trouble shooting of products, and final punch out related issues.

1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of aluminum, steel and wood door hardware from the same single source manufacturer and supplier, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide standard door hardware, electrified door hardware and access control door hardware as a single sourced package from the same qualified supplier.

2. Provide exterior door hardware from the same manufactures as the interior door hardware, no deviations will be allowed.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 08 7100-3

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:

1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows:

a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist.

b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2.

2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:

a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high.

3. International Building Code.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. One complete shipment of door hardware as detailed in approved Door Hardware Schedule Shop Drawings to be inventoried on site and upon receipt of material is secure in lock-up room provided with shelving for door hardware. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization and climate controlled facility, failure to do so will void electronic warranties.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, electronic key software with loaded bitting and key records per cylinder, and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". Hardware Supplier must be a regional supplier to address owner questions and concerns relating to keying issues that arise as project close-out.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Door Hardware Supplier to provide and distribute to the parties involved for templating for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard, electrified and access control door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Keying Conference: Door Hardware Supplier to conduct keying conference to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:

1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 08 7100-4

3. Review all lock and exit device functions when reviewing keying requirements. 4. Requirements for key control system. 5. Installation of permanent keys and cylinder cores. 6. Address the requirements for delivery of keys. 7. Address keying and cylinder stamping (identification) as required by owner or owner

representative. 8. Establish method of submitting electronic format of keying systems and diagram and to be

produced and provided by Hardware Supplier.

C. Pre-Installation Conference: Hardware Supplier to conduct conference at Project site attended by representatives of Door Hardware Manufacturers, Hardware Installers, Owner Representative and General Contractor to review proper hardware installation methods and the procedures for receiving and handling hardware. On site training should not be less then four hours of on-site training by qualified Hardware Supplier and Manufactures. At completion of installation and final walk through, provide written certification that hardware items were applied according to conference recommendations and to finish hardware specifications. Electrified door hardware to be discussed at conference with additional representatives of Access Control Integrator, Electrical Contractor and to review the following items:

1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 3. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of standard, electrified hardware and access control hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

C. Warranty Period: Two year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for Sargent mortise locksets. 2. Five years for exit devices. 3. Ten years for manual door closers..

E. Extended Warranty: As requested by either the Owner or Architect provide a separate optional extended warranty and maintenance contract is required for the access control system and power assist operated openings. Version upgrades and "fix" releases to the software, beyond the general warranty time period, are available at no extra charge only if the end user is under a valid extended warranty and maintenance contract.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 08 7100-5

1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware and integrated access control systems suppliers and installers. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated for named products listed in Hardware Sets.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. (Source manufacturer listed in boldface).

2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hinges:

a. Hager Companies (HA). b. McKinney Products (MC). c. Stanley Hardware (ST).

B. Standards: BHMA Certified products complying with the following:

1. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.

C. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.

2. Flush Floor Plates and Thresholds: Provide finish cover plates or thresholds as indicated in door hardware sets for floor hinges. Match door hardware finish, unless otherwise indicated.

Metal Thickness (inches)


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 08 7100-6

Maximum Door Size (inches) Hinge Height (inches)

Standard Weight

Heavy Weight

36-in by 86-in by 1-3/4 4-1/2 0.134 0.180 < 36-in by 120-in by 1-3/4 5 0.146 0.190

D. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Interior Doors: Heavy weight, ball bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard

weight.

2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES


1. Mechanical Mortise Locks and Latches: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 8200 Series. NO SUBSTITUTION.

2. Auxiliary Mortise Deadbolts: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 4870 Series.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.. 2. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5.

C. Mortise Locks: BHMA Certified Grade 1, Series 1000.

D. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA Certified Grade 1.

E. Lock Trim: Match the following design style:

1. Levers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – LNJ

F. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule comply with the following:

1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.

G. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows:

1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.

H. Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Provide patented, security cylinders utilizing a unique factory code pattern that is both geographically and time zoned protected. A letter of authorization under the letterhead of the End User must accompany purchases of any products which involve patented cylinders, keys and accessories. Manufacturers of patented security cylinders to allow the ability for both security and conventional cylinders to be used together under the same


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 08 7100-7

facility master or grandmaster key system. The End User is required to have the ability for on-site cylinder pinning and original key cutting.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Security Cylinders: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - Signature Patented Cylinders.

C. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5. 2. Key Control System: BHMA A156.5.

D. Cylinder Grade: BHMA Certified Grade 1.

E. Furnish and install cylinder lock with privacy/occupancy sign with a closer and deadbolt with the thumb lock inside of restroom to allow maintenance to clock out the restroom.

F. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following:

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and as directed by Owner.

2. Quantity: Provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys (Per Key Set): Three. b. Construction Control Keys: Two. c. Permanent Control Keys: Two.

G. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative for lock cylinders.

2.5 STRIKES

A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 3. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

B. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.

2.6 CLOSERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one the following:

1. Surface-Mounted Closers (Standard Duty): BHMA Certified Grade 1. a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 1331 Series.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 08 7100-8

2.7 STOPS AND HOLDERS


1. Stops and Holders:

a. McKinney Products (MC). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco Manufacturing (TR).

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16. 2. Door Silencers: BHMA A156.16.

C. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Certified Grade 1.

D. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: Certified BHMA Grade 1. 1. Rixson Hardware (RX) – 1 Concealed and 9 Surface Series. 2. Sargent Hardware (SA) – 600 Concealed and 500 Surface Series.

E. Floor Stops: For doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

1. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead stops.

F. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. Provide (3) per single door and (2) per paired door frame if applied gasketing is not specified in Hardware Sets.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.9 FINISHES

A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following:

1. BHMA 600: Primed for painting, over steel base metal. 2. BHMA 605: Bright brass, clear coated, over brass base metal. 3. BHMA 606: Satin brass, clear coated, over brass base metal.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 08 7100-9

4. BHMA 609: Satin brass, blackened, satin relieved, clear coated, over brass base metal. 5. BHMA 611: Bright bronze, clear coated, over bronze base metal. 6. BHMA 612: Satin bronze, clear coated, over bronze base metal. 7. BHMA 613: Dark-oxidized satin bronze, oil rubbed, over bronze base metal. 8. BHMA 618: Bright nickel plated, clear coated, over brass or bronze base metal. 9. BHMA 619: Satin nickel plated, clear coated, over brass or bronze base metal. 10. BHMA 622: Flat black coated, over brass or bronze base metal. 11. BHMA 623: Light-oxidized statuary bronze, clear coated, over bronze base metal. 12. BHMA 624: Dark-oxidized statuary bronze, clear coated, over bronze base metal. 13. BHMA 625: Bright chromium plated over nickel, over brass or bronze base metal. 14. BHMA 626: Satin chromium plated over nickel, over brass or bronze base metal. 15. BHMA 627: Satin aluminum, clear coated, over aluminum base metal. 16. BHMA 628: Satin aluminum, clear anodized, over aluminum base metal. 17. BHMA 629: Bright stainless steel, over stainless-steel base metal. 18. BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, over stainless-steel base metal. 19. BHMA 651: Bright chromium plated over nickel, over steel base metal. 20. BHMA 652: Satin chromium plated over nickel, over steel base metal. 21. BHMA 689: Aluminum painted, over any base metal. 22. BHMA 690: Dark bronze painted, over any base metal. 23. BHMA 691: Light bronze painted, over any base metal. 24. BHMA 717: Bright aluminum, uncoated; aluminum base metal. 25. BHMA 718: Satin aluminum, uncoated; aluminum base metal. 26. BHMA 722: Dark-oxidized bronze, oil rubbed, over architectural bronze base metal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 08 7100-10

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

C. Provide and coordinate concealed wood blocking for wall mount stops as detailed in Door Hardware Schedule.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall comply with AIA A201 1997 section 3.3.1 which reads as follows: “The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters.”

B. Field Inspection: Supplier and Door Hardware Manufacturer will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following:

1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware.

2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials,

or installation of door hardware units.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. and provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation GYPSUM BOARDAldine Independent School District SECTION 09 2900MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Related work:1. Rough carpentry.2. Finish carpentry and millwork.3. Tiling work.4. Acoustical ceilings.5. Painting and coating.6. Mechanical.7. Electrical.



B. Product data: Indicate product description, including compliance with specifiedrequirements and installation requirements. Mark manufacturer's brochures to includeonly those products proposed for use. Include complete details of shaftwall system. Include details for supplementary fire protection at penetrations and locations ofacoustical sealant.


A. Evaluation reports: For firestop tracks, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agencyacceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Applicable standards; standards of the following:1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).2. ASTM International (ASTM) as referenced herein.3. Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries - International (AWCI).4. Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA).5. Gypsum Association (GA).6. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA). 7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).8. Intertek Testing Services/Warnock Hersey, Inc. (WHI).9. “Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish” as published

jointly by the Gypsum Association, AWCI, CISCA and PDCA.10. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA).

B. Design criteria:1. Sound rating: Construct designated partitions in accord with manufacturer's

product data, as submitted, for obtaining Sound Transmission Class (STC)ratings as indicated on the drawings, in accord with ASTM E90-09.

2. Fire-resistance: Comply with fire-resistance designs indicated on the drawings. Use only manufacturers and types of materials as required by indicated designs. Designs with tests by other than Testing Agency listed may be submitted forArchitect's acceptance, subject to prior acceptance by governing authorities.

C. Preinstallation meetings:1. Conduct meetings at project site with Architect, Contractor, gypsum board

installer and installers of other related products in attendance.2. Review details of gypsum board installation, including finishing of gypsum board

and location of control joints.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 2900-1



A. Delivery: Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brandname, applicable standard designation and name of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Storage:1. Stack gypsum board inside building under roof, off floor on pallets or similar

platforms providing continuous support for gypsum board and to prevent sagging. Stack gypsum board flat and so that long lengths are not over short lengths.

2. Protect gypsum board from direct exposure to rain, snow, sunlight or otherexcessive weather conditions.

3. Protect ready-mixed adhesives and joint compounds against freezing, exposureto extreme heat and direct sunlight at all times.

4. Do not overload floor systems.


A. Do not install gypsum board until installation areas are enclosed.

B. Environmental limitations: Comply with ASTM C840-11 requirements and gypsum boardmanufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.1. During mechanical application of gypsum board, maintain room temperature at

not less than 40 degree F. 2. During adhesive application of gypsum board, joint treatment, and decoration,

maintain room temperature not less than 50 degrees F for 48 hours prior toapplication and continuously thereafter until completely dry and until permanentheating system is in operation or building is occupied.

3. When temporary heat source is used, temperature shall not exceed 95 degree Fin any given room or area.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that aremold damaged.1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited

to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

D. Ventilation: Comply with ASTM C840-11 requirements and gypsum board manufacturer'swritten recommendations, whichever are more stringent.1. Provide ventilation during and following adhesive and joint treatment applications,

and drying and curing periods.2. Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas lacking natural ventilation.3. Under slow drying conditions, allow additional drying time between coats of joint

treatment.4. Protect installed materials from drafts during hot, dry weather.

E. When recommendations of manufacturer’s product data exceed the above, comply withrequirements of manufacturer’s product data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING MEMBERS:

A. Gypsum board studs: Meeting requirements of ASTM C645-13; channel type, roll-formedfrom hot dip galvanized steel only; complying with ASTM A1003-13b and with ASTMA653-13, G40 minimum. No EQ coatings permitted.1. Stud size: As indicated on drawings, except minimum 3-5/8" depth where

partition is indicated to receive tile finish.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 2900-2


2. Stud gauge: As required by manufacturer's product data and ASTM C754-11 forlimiting heights, structural determinations, and conditions of use, with maximumallowable deflections as follows: a. Ground floor, excluding those with tile finishes:

1) Non-structural studs: Minimum L/120 at 10 psf in accord withASTM C645-13.

2) Structural studs: Minimum L/120 at 20 psf in accord with ASTMC955-11c.

c. Partitions to receive tile finishes:1) Non-structural studs: Minimum L/360 at 10 psf using 20 ga. or

heavier studs, in accord with ANSI A108.11 and ASTM C645-13.2) Structural studs: Minimum L/360 at 20 psf using 20 ga. or heavier

studs, in accord with ANSI A108.11 and ASTM C955-11c.d. Other partitions: Meet code requirements.

3. Comply with submitted design calculations.

B. Floor and ceiling runners: Hot dip galvanized steel, 1" deep, minimum, by widths toreceive studs, same gauge as studs. Runner tracks shall have slotted holes forattachment to structure and studs, for slip joints where required by manufacturer’s productdata.1. Wall: Runners, galvanized steel, sizes and shapes compatible with metal stud

system.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD:

A. Fire-retardant board: Meeting ASTM C1396-11, Type X, 5/8" thickness, tapered roundededges.

B. Mold and moisture resistant board: Treated paper-faced gypsum board.1. Acceptable products:

a. American Gypsum, M-Bloc.b. National Gypsum, XP Gypsum Board.c. United States Gypsum (USG), Sheetrock Mold Tough Gypsum Panels.

2. Thickness: 5/8" thickness, tapered edges.3. Description: Mold and moisture resistant gypsum core encased in mold and

moisture resistant facers, with tapered long edges. Panels shall comply withASTM C1396-11.

4. Mold resistance: Resistant to mold growth when tested in accord with ASTMD3273-12, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274-09(2013).

5. Water absorption: Less than 5% of board weight when tested in accord withASTM C473-12.

6. Joint tape: As recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.7. Limitations: Do not use as a tile backer board.

2.3 TILE BACKER BOARD:

A. Tile Water-resistant, coated glass mat backer board.1. Acceptable products:

a. G-P Gypsum Products, Dens-Shield Fireguard Tile Backer.b. National Gypsum Co., eXP Tile Backer.c. Temple-Inland, GreenGlass Tile Backer.

2. Characteristics: Meeting ASTM C1178-11, minimum 5/8" thickness Type X,water-resistant, silicone based gypsum core, fiberglass surface mats, front andback, coated with water and vapor retardant coating.

3. Joint tape: Fiberglass mesh joint tape as recommended by gypsum boardmanufacturer.

2.4 SOUND CONTROL MATERIALS:

A. Contractor's option: Based on sound ratings and fire-resistance ratings required forassemblies, Contractor may select glass fiber or mineral wool sound attenuation materialsas follows:

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 2900-3


1. Glass fiber sound attenuation batts:a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) CertainTeed Corp.2) Knauf Insulation.3) Johns Manville Corp.4) Owens-Corning Corp.

b. Characteristics:1) Type: Unfaced fiberglass batts for friction fit between studs,

complying with ASTM C665-15, Type 1.2) Surface burning characteristics: Maximum 25 flame spread and

50 smoke development when tested in accord with ASTM E84-15.

3) Assembly STC: As indicated on drawings.4) Thickness: As indicated on drawings.

2. Mineral wool sound attenuation blankets:a. Acceptable manufacturers:

1) IIG, MinWool, LLC, MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts.2) Owens-Corning Corp., Sound Attenuation Fire Batt.3) U. S. Gypsum Co., Thermafiber SAFB (Sound Attenuation Fire

Blankets). Owens-Corning Corp.b. Characteristics:

1) Type: Paperless, semi-rigid mineral wool fiber blanket complyingwith ASTM C665-12, Type 1.

2) Density: Maximum 4.0 pcf for 1" thickness, and maximum 2.5pcf. for greater thicknesses.

3) Surface burning characteristics: Maximum 15 flame spread and5 smoke development when tested in accord with ASTM E84-12c.

4) Assembly STC: As indicated on drawings.5) Thickness: As indicated on drawings.

B. Acoustical tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam tape, 1/4" thickness by 1" wide.

C. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latexsealant complying with ASTM C834-10. Product effectively reduces airborne soundtransmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction asdemonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90-09.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are notlimited to, the following:a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

2.5 FASTENERS:

A. Expansion anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load orstrength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greaterthan or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488/E 488Mconducted by a qualified testing agency.

B. Power-actuated anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculatedaccording to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined bytesting per ASTM E1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

C. Fasteners for metal framing, corrosion-resistant:1. For fastening framing members to concrete and masonry surfaces: Fasteners

shall be beaded drive pins or threaded studs driven by powder actuated tools.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 2900-4


Fasteners shall resist design loads in accord with requirements of ASTME1190-11.

2. For fastening to metal decking and for fastening framing members together: Type S, pan head screws, in sizes recommended by gypsum board manufacturerfor applications indicated.

3. Provide slotted, stand-off washers for slip joint attachments.

D. Screws for gypsum board and accessory application: Meeting ASTM C1002-07,corrosion-resistant.1. For application of single layer or base layer of gypsum board to metal framing: 1",

Type S, bugle head.2. For application of face layer of gypsum board to metal framing in double layer

construction: 1-5/8", Type S, bugle head.3. For gypsum board to gypsum board application: 1-1/2", Type G, bugle head.

E. Screws for tile backer board application: Corrosion resistant sheet metal screws withhead diameter providing 125 lb. fastener pull-through and pull-out resistance. Screwlength shall provide 1/4" minimum thread engagement.

2.6 JOINT MATERIALS AND ADHESIVES:

A. Standard gypsum board products:1. Joint tape: Meeting ASTM C475-12, perforated paper type.2. Joint compound: Meeting ASTM C475-12, ready-mixed tape embedment and

topping compounds, vinyl-based.

B. Mold and moisture resistant paper faced gypsum board: Joint tape and joint compoundshall be in accord with recommendations of board manufacturer’s product data.

C. Joint tape for glass mat-faced tile backer board: Fiberglass tape, as herein specified.

D. Laminating adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by gypsum boardmanufacturer’s product data for directly adhering gypsum board to continuous substrate.1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

2.7 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES:

A. PVC Trim Accessories:1. Basis of design; Trim-Tex, Inc. with recycled content at least 50 percent.2. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047. 3. Material: Rigid PVC products meeting ASTM D3678-97 Class 2, D1784-03,

C1047-99 and achieve a Class A rating for flame spread and smoke developedwhen tested under ASTM E84-14

4. Shapes: Including, but not limited to, following:a. Standard Cornerbeads; 1-3/4" mud flange.b. Bullnose bead; 7/8" and 1" mud flange.c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint

compound.f. Expansion (control) joint.g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

2.8 ACCESSORIES:

A. Accessories shall comply with ASTM C1047-10a and shall be as follows.

B. Corner reinforcement: Galvanized steel with 1-1/4" wide fine expanded mesh flanges.

C. Metal jamb and casing trim: Manufacturer's standard "L" and "U" shaped galvanizedmembers with fine expanded mesh flanges; "mud-in" type for finishing with jointcompound.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 2900-5


D. Control joints: Roll-formed galvanized steel.

E. Furring channels: Minimum 25 ga. galvanized steel, 7/8" deep by 1-3/8" face width.

F. "Z" furring channels: Minimum 25 ga. galvanized steel to receive 1 insulation.

G. Cold-rolled channels: Minimum 16 ga. steel, hot dip galvanized or black asphaltum-painted, as follows:1. 3/4" depth: 300 lbs./mlf, for use as horizontal stiffeners, bracing and cross furring.2. 1-1/2" depth: 475 lbs./mlf, for use as main ceiling runners.

H. Furring channel clips: Manufacturer's standard type for attachment of furring channels tocold-rolled runner channels.

I. Resilient channel: Galvanized steel, manufacturer's standard type.

J. Furring brackets: Minimum 20 ga. galvanized steel, for attaching 3/4" furring channels tomasonry walls.

K. Special trim shapes:1. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements:

a. Fry Reglet Corp.b. Gordon, Inc.c. Pittcon Industries, Inc.

2. Characteristics:a. Material: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy.b. Finish: Painted finish, color selected by Architect.c. Shapes: As indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FRAMING AND FURRING INSTALLATION:

A. Except where more stringent requirements are specified, install framing and furring inaccord with ASTM C754-11, Gypsum Association requirements and manufacturer’sproduct data.

B. Runners:1. Attach runner tracks at floor and underside of structural deck with specified

fasteners. Provide slip joint attachments to meet deflection criteria andmanufacturer’s calculations at the following locations:a. Tall partitions.b. Full-height, floor-to-floor or floor-to-deck partitions.c. All partitions subject to deflection.

2. Where partitions are indicated to stop at finish ceiling, attach to ceilingsuspension system using 1/8" toggle bolts or sheet metal screws spaced at 1'-4"o. c., maximum, where partition aligns with ceiling grid. Where partition does notalign with grid, attach at each intersection with grid.

C. Studs:1. Position full length studs vertically, engaging floor and ceiling runners.

a. Space studs as indicated on drawings.b. Space studs not to exceed 1'-4" o. c. for partitions to receive tile, FRP

panels and stone finish(es).2. Provide double studs at interior and exterior corners, expansion joints, partition

termination and adjacent to door and borrowed lite openings in partitions. Locatenext stud not more than 6" from double studs.

3. Secure abutting and intersecting walls with fasteners through stud flanges.4. For horizontal reinforcement at door and borrowed lite frames, install cut-to-length

runner sections with slit flanges secured to studs.5. Install acoustical tape on metal studs which abut other studs or dissimilar

surfaces in walls to receive sound attenuation blankets.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 2900-6


D. Furring:1. Attach to masonry and concrete substrate with fasteners spaced at 2'-0" o. c. on

alternating furring channel flange.2. Position channels vertically, spaced at 1'-4" o. c., maximum.

3.2 GENERAL BOARD APPLICATION:

A. Except where more stringent requirements are specified, install gypsum board in accordwith ASTM C840-11, GA-216 and manufacturer’s product data.

B. Use gypsum board of maximum lengths to minimize end joints. Stagger end joints.

C. Abut gypsum boards without forcing. Fit ends and edges of board. Do not place buttends against tapered edges.

D. Support ends and edges of gypsum board panels on framing or furring members, exceptfor face layer of double layer work.

E. Install gypsum board accessories in accord with gypsum board manufacturer's productdata and as follows:1. Control joints: Install in walls in accord with requirements of ASTM C840-11 and

in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. Attach with staples topanel face. Where control joints occur in fire rated partitions, comply with coderequirements and gypsum board manufacturer's product data.

2. Corner bead: Install at external corners.3. Metal trim shapes: At exposed edge of gypsum board at door and window

openings, at intersections with other materials and at intersection of walls withceilings.

4. Install corner beads and metal trim shapes to framing system with mechanicalanchors.

F. Install acoustical sealant at sound-rated partitions:1. Seal partition perimeter with continuous 1/4" minimum round bead of acoustical

sealant applied to each leg of runners, including those used at partitionintersections with dissimilar wall construction.

2. Install gypsum board with 1/8" perimeter relief compressing sealant to formpermanent airtight seal.

3. Where slip joint attachments are required at top of partition, fill resulting jointbetween drywall and adjacent structure with acoustical sealant to form permanentair tight seal.

4. Apply acoustical sealant around cutouts such as at electrical boxes, plumbingpenetrations, medicine cabinets, heating ducts and cold air returns to formpermanent airtight seal. (Sealant shall not be used as a fire stopping material.)

G. Install sound attenuation blankets at locations indicated on drawings. Comply withmanufacturer's product data for installation. Attach flanges of blanket to web of stud andnot to face of stud receiving gypsum board.

H. For fire-rated and acoustically rated construction, comply with requirements of testedassemblies scheduled on the drawings.

I. Continue required components of fire-rated and acoustically rated wall assembly tooverhead structure. Apply joint tape and one coat of compound to gypsum board jointsconcealed from view in completed work.

J. Seal openings and penetrations in fire-rated construction as specified in Firestoppingsection.

K. Identification: 1. Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers and smoke partitions or any

other wall required to have protected openings shall be effectively andpermanently identified with signs or stenciling in a manner acceptable to theAuthority having Jurisdiction.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 2900-7


2. Such identification shall be above any decorative ceiling and in concealedspaces.

3. Suggested wording for fire and smoke barriers: “_____ HOUR FIRE ANDSMOKE BARRIER – PROTECT ALL OPENINGS.”

L. Attach gypsum board to resilient channels with screws of length to not contact framing.

M. Allowable tolerances in framed gypsum board construction.1. Position: ±1/4" maximum variation from design position.2. Alignment: 1/8" in 8'-0"; 1/4" maximum in any continuous wall, line or surface.3. Surface plane: 1/8" in 12'-0"; 1/16" in 1'-0", maximum variation in true surface

plane.4. Surface smoothness: No joint or fastener location, roughness or blemish

discernible after application of finish when viewed at any angle from a distance of5'-0" under occupancy lighting conditions, with surface preparation as specified inPainting and Coating section.

3.3 SINGLE LAYER APPLICATION:

A. Walls:1. Apply gypsum board vertically or horizontally at Contractor's option, except as

required by gypsum board manufacturer's product data for system designs,including fire-rated and acoustically-rated partitions.

2. Stagger end joints in opposite sides of partitions.3. Terminate edges of gypsum board running parallel to framing, furring on framing

or furring members.

B. Fastening: Attach gypsum board using fasteners specified at spacings required bymanufacturer's product data.

3.4 JOINT TREATMENT:

A. Finish Levels shall be in accord with the “Recommended Levels of Finish for GypsumBoard, Glass Mat and Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum panels”, GA-214-2015, as publishedjointly by the Gypsum Association, AWCI, CISCA, DFC and PDCA.

B. Finish Level 0; temporary construction: No taping, finishing, or accessories required.

C. Finish Level 1; joint treatment in smoke barrier applications and areas not normally opento public view such as plenum areas above ceilings, attics, and other areas where theassembly would generally be concealed: 1. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound. 2. Excess joint compound, tool marks and ridges are acceptable. 3. Accessories are optional unless specified or indicated in the contract documents.

D. Finish Level 2; where board products are used as a substrate for tile and in storage, orother similar areas where surface appearance is not a concern. 1. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped

with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over joints and interiorangles. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tapeembedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound and shallsatisfy the conditions of this level.

2. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with one (1) coat of jointcompound.

3. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges areacceptable.

4. Water-resistant, coated glass mat backer board for tile and/or stone backer:a. Embed glass fiber mesh tape in skim coat of material used to set tiles on

joints and corners that are to receive tile.b. Caulk or seal penetrations and abutments to dissimilar materials.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 2900-8


E. Finish Level 4; Appearance areas where smooth wall designs are decorated with flatpaints, light textures, non-continuous textures, or where wall coverings are to be applied: 1. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and shall

be immediately wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compoundover joints and interior angles.

2. Apply two (2) separate coats of joint compound over flat joints and apply one (1)separate coat of joint compound over interior angles.

3. Cover fastener heads and accessories with three (3) separate coats of jointcompound.

4. Surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.5. Where glass mat and/or fiber-reinforced gypsum panels are installed, refer to the

gypsum panel manufacturer’s product data for specific finishingrecommendations.

6. Jobsite mock-up(s) shall be used to determine acceptance of the finish within thebuilding.

F. Fastener pop: Drive new fastener approximately 1-1/2" from popped fastener and repairto match gypsum board finish.

G. Fill cracks with joint compound and sand smooth and flush.

H. Dust surfaces and leave ready for decoration. Joint and fastener treatment shall beindistinguishable in finished work.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 2900-9

Lane School Renovation TILINGAldine Independent School District SECTION 09 3000MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 09 3000 - TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. General: In compliance with Section 01 3300 and specified herein.

B. Shop drawings: Submit for tile pattern work indicated. Indicate control and expansionjoint locations. Include tile layout, setting bed thicknesses, joint widths, control andexpansion joint sizes and sections.

C. Product data: Submit manufacturer's printed product description and installationinstructions for each type of tile and for use of manufactured mortars, shower pan/waterproof membrane, grouts, adhesives, sealants, latex/polymer additives, crackisolation membrane and accessory products. Include mortar and grout proportioning andmixing instructions for latex/polymer additives.

D. Samples; submit the following:1. 1'-0" by 1'-0" panel of each type and color tile selected, grouted as specified.2. Samples of each trim shape required.3. 1'-0" length of threshold.4. Samples of each accessory required.5. Submit samples of color sealant materials for Architect's approval.

E. Sustainable design submittals:1. Laboratory test reports: For adhesives, indicating compliance with requirements

for low-emitting materials.2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealers, indicating compliance with requirements for

low-emitting materials.


A. Master grade certificates: Indicate that tile materials conform to ANSI A137.1. Certificates shall indicate grade, kind of tile, identification for tile packages and name andlocation of project. Tile manufacturer shall issue certificates at time of shipping.

B. Certification: Submit written certification that crack isolation membrane is approved foruse with specified mortars.


A. Applicable standards:1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein:

a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).b. ASTM International (ASTM).c. Marble Institute of America, Version VII (MIA).

2. Tile Council of North America (TCNA), "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and StoneTile Installation," 2014 Edition.

B. For each type of setting material and grouting material specified, only one brand shall beused throughout project.

C. Allowable tolerances: Plumb, level and true to line, meeting ANSI A108.02 as follows:1. For tile with all dimensions less than 15": Maximum 1/16" in 1'-0" and maximum

1/4" in 10'-0".2. For tile with any dimension greater than 15": Maximum 1/16" in 2'-0" and

maximum 1/8" in 10'-0".


A. Deliver materials in original containers with labels legible and intact, identifying brandname and contents.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 3000-1


1. Tile cartons shall be grade-sealed by manufacturer in accord with ANSI A137.1and ANSI A137.2, with grade seals unbroken.

2. Manufactured mortars, adhesives and grouts shall bear hallmarks certifyingcompliance with specified standards.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Environmental requirements: 1. For field-mixed mortar and grout, set and grout tile when ambient temperature is

at least 50EF. and rising. 2. For manufactured mortar, adhesive and grout, comply with minimum temperature

recommendations of manufacturers.

1.6 MAINTENANCE:

A. Extra materials:1. Provide not less than 5% of installed total of each type, size and color of tile

specified and 5% of each type, size and color of accessory, for Owner'smaintenance.

2. Store tile and accessory units where indicated by Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE, GENERAL:

A. Factory blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory andpackage so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those takenfrom other packages and match approved Samples.

B. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies asstandard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

C. Factory-applied temporary protective coating: Where indicated under tile type, protectexposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by pre-coating withcontinuous film of release agent as recommended by mortar and grout manufacturer or ahot-applied petroleum paraffin wax. Do not coat backs or sides of tile surfaces.

2.2 TILE:

A. The basis of design for each type of tile is as scheduled on the drawings. Tile of similarcharacteristics, as manufactured by other acceptable manufacturers, may be submittedfor Architect's acceptance.

B. Porcelain tile: Provide rectified tiles.1. Meeting ANSI A137.1, Section 4.1 Impervious Class, and Section 6.1 Table 10,

Standard Grade.2. Color: Match colors scheduled in Finish Schedule.3. Nominal face size: As scheduled on drawings.4. Thickness: Minimum 3/8".5. Finish: As scheduled on drawings.6. Dynamic coefficient of friction (DCOF) for floor tile:

a. Tested in accord with the DCOF AccuTest, and meeting ANSI A137.1and recommendations of ADA Accessibility Guidelines.

b. DCOF minimum: 0.42.7. Trim shapes: Matching tile in color and size. Include coved base, coved bullnose

base, bullnose caps, beads and corner units, as required.

C. Ceramic mosaic tiles:1. Meeting ANSI A137.1, Section 4.1 Impervious Class, and Section 6.1 Table 6,

Standard Grade, porcelain type, maximum water absorption of 0.5%.2. Color: Match colors scheduled on drawings.3. Nominal face size and thickness: As indicated on drawings.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 3000-2


4. Mounting: Factory-mounted, permanent mesh, dot or net mounting with 1/16"wide joints. Back of tile shall achieve 80% minimum bond with setting material.

5. Dynamic coefficient of friction (DCOF) for floor tile:a. Tested in accord with the DCOF AccuTest, and meeting ANSI A137.1

and recommendations of ADA Accessibility Guidelines.b. DCOF minimum: 0.42.

6. Trim shapes: Matching tile in color and size. Include coved base, coved bullnosebase, bullnose caps, beads and corner units, as required.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES:

A. Premium latex-modified thinset mortar for floor tile:1. Acceptable products:

a. Bonsal American, ProSpec Superior Permaset 400.b. Bostik, Tile-Mate Premium.c. Custom Building Products, Flexbond Premium Flexible Bonding Mortar.d. Mapei Corp., Kerabond/Keralastic System.e. Basis of design; Laticrete, 3701, 4-XLT, or 254 Platinum Fortified Mortar

bed.2. Characteristics: Pre-sanded, latex/polymer-modified or polymer-modified

Portland cement and additives meeting ANSI A118.4.

B. Premium latex-modified thinset mortar for walls:1. Acceptable products:

a. Bonsal American, ProSpec Superior Permaset 400. b. Bostik, Tile-Mate Premium.c. Custom Building Products: MegaLite Crack Prevention Mortar.

d. Mapei Corp., Kerabond/Keralastic System.e. Basis of design; Laticrete, 254 Platinum.

2. Characteristics: Pre-sanded, latex/polymer-modified or polymer-modified Portlandcement and additives meeting ANSI A118.4. For wall applications, providemortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to theother requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2.4 GROUTING MATERIALS:

A. Epoxy grout for all floor tile and for wall tiles:1. Acceptable products:

a. Bonsal American, ProSpec B-7000 Epoxy Mortar & Grout.b. Bostik Findley, Color-Poxy.c. Custom Building Products, CEG-Lite 100% Solids Commercial Epoxy

Grout.d. Mapei Corp.: Kerapoxy.e. Basis of design; Laticrete, Spectralock Pro Grout.

2. Characteristics: 100% epoxy, two-part or three-part composition meetingANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to40 CFR 59, Subpart D; standard colors selected by Architect.

3. Grout release agent: Provide grout manufacturer’s recommended grout releaseagent, for application prior to grouting tile to receive epoxy grout.

2.5 ADDITIVES:

A. Latex/polymer additives: Integral polymer additives or undiluted additives for field mixing. Additives shall be manufactured by or approved in writing by mortar and groutmanufacturers.

B. Additives for thickset mortar beds; acceptable products:1. Bonsal American, ProSpec B-710 SBR Mortar Additive.2. Bostik Findley: #425 Multi-Purpose Acrylic Latex Admixture.3. Custom Building Products: Thin-Set Additive.4. Mapei Corp.: Keraply.5. Basis of design; Laticrete, 3701 Mortar Admix.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 3000-3


C. Proportioning and mixing: For manufactured mortars and grouts, comply with mortar andgrout manufacturers' product data for additive proportions and mixing instructions.

2.6 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINT MATERIALS:

A. Acceptable products:1. Pecora Corp., Dynatrol II.2. BASF Building Systems, MasterSeal NP-2.3. Custom Building Products, 100% Silicone Caulk.4. Tremco, Inc., Dymeric.

B. Characteristics:1. Type: Two-part, polyurethane-based sealant with separate pre-packaged color

agent; VOC Content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.

C. Primer: Types recommended by sealant manufacturer:1. Sealant primers for nonporous substrates: 250 g/L.2. Sealant primers for porous substrates: 775 g/L.

D. Backup material: Flexible, non-compressive foam type as recommended by sealantmanufacturer.

2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS:

A. Marble thresholds: Meeting MIA Group A, honed finish, in sizes and shapes indicated;types and colors as selected by Architect.

B. Trim and transition profiles:1. Basis of design is Schluter Systems L.P. Products of other manufacturers may

be submitted for Architect’s consideration, subject to compliance with specifiedrequirements and Architect’s approval.

2. Horizontal edge protection and transition profiles: a. Basis of design: Schluter, Schiene A30 Edge Protector”, with integral

perforated anchoring leg.b. Description: Brass with satin finish.

C. Cleaning materials and methods for face of epoxy-grouted tile: Provide grout cleaningmaterials and methods in accord with manufacturer’s product data.

D. Leveling compound; acceptable products: Portland based, free flowing, self-levelingcompound.1. Custom Building Products, LevelQuik RS.2. Euclid Chemical Co., Super Flo-Top.3. Mapei, Ultraplan 1 Plus.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Concrete moisture vapor emission, humidity levels and pH testing: Perform one or moreof the following tests, as required by flooring manufacturer’s product data, using thefollowing methods:1. Moisture vapor emissions: Perform tests on subfloors in accord with ASTM

F1869-04 calcium chloride test and flooring manufacturer’s product data, todetermine if surfaces are acceptable to receive specified flooring products.

2. Humidity level: Perform on subfloors in accord with ASTM F2170-02 in situ probeand flooring manufacturer’s product data, to determine if surfaces are acceptableto receive specified flooring products.

3. Concrete pH level: Perform on subfloors to verify that surfaces are acceptable toreceive specified flooring products.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 3000-4


4. Correction of conditions: Prior to installation, correct conditions that do not meetflooring manufacture’s requirements, or that may be detrimental to flooringinstallation.

B. Conditions of surfaces to receive tile:1. Surfaces shall be firm, dry, clean and free of oily or waxy films.2. Grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and mechanical work in or

behind tile shall be installed prior to proceeding with tile work.

3.2 GENERAL TILE INSTALLATION:

A. Install tile in accord with ANSI A108.1 through A108.11 and as specified herein.

B. Layout:1. Center tile within areas to avoid tiles of unequal widths at opposite walls and tiles

of less than 1/2 tile width.2. Align tile joints straight and parallel to walls.3. Align joints in floor and base or wall tile.4. Locate accessories, control joints and expansion joints before installing tile.

C. Cutting and fitting:1. Cut and drill tiles without damaging exposed tile face. Rub cut edges smooth with

Carborundum stone.2. Grind and fit tile at intersections, against trim and at built-in fixtures and

accessories.3. Fit tile around outlets, pipes, fixtures and fittings so that tile edges are concealed

under applied escutcheons, collars or plates.4. Miter coved and bullnose tile in corners or use special trim shapes to maintain

uniform joint widths.

D. Joints:1. Provide uniform joint widths equal to pre-spaced tile for ceramic tile and glazed

wall tile.2. Provide 1/4" wide joints for unglazed paver porcelain tile.3. In internal vertical corners of wall tile and where tile abuts dissimilar materials,

form joints using control joint filled with sealant in lieu of grout.

E. Control and expansion joints:1. Ascertain that control and expansion joints are located in accord with approved

shop drawings, TCNA EJ171-14, and as approved in advance by Architect. 2. Provide control joints, perimeter control joints and expansion joints through tile

and setting bed.a. Field of floor control joints shall be located as follows:

1) Spacing indicated, but not less than the following:a) Interior dry areas: 20'-0" to 25'-0" o. c. in each direction.b) Interior wet areas: 8'-0" to 12'-0" o. c. in each direction.

2) Over cold joints and saw-cut control joints.b. Provide control joints at all perimeters.c. Locations of joints shall be as approved in advance by Architect. Width

of joints shall match width of grout joints, except control joint shall be notless than 1/8" wide.

3. Prime joints in accord with sealant manufacturer's product data. Following tilework completion, seal joints in accord with TCNA EJ171-14, using specifiedsealant.

F. Thresholds, transition strips and edge strips:1. Marble thresholds: Install in accord with TCNA TR611-14. Seal joint between

threshold and tile using sealant in lieu of grout.2. Transition strips and edge strips: Install at door openings not having thresholds,

at intersections with other flooring materials, and at other locations as shown onthe drawings.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 3000-5


G. Tolerances:1. Allowable lippage: Comply with ANSI A108.02 as follows:

a. Glazed wall tile/mosaic tile: 1/32".b. Pressed floor tile and porcelain tiles, joint width less than 1/4": 1/32".d. Pressed floor tile and porcelain tiles, joint width 1/4" or greater: 1/16".

2. Allowable site installation tolerances: Plumb, level and true to line, meeting ANSIA108.02 as follows:a. For tile with all dimensions less than 15": Maximum 1/16" in 1'-0" and

maximum 1/4" in 10'-0".b. For tile with any dimension greater than 15": Maximum 1/16" in 2'-0" and

maximum 1/8" in 10'-0".

H. Grout release agent: Prior to grouting tile to receive epoxy grout, apply specified groutrelease agent to face of tile only. Do not allow agent to migrate into joints.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION:

A. Wall tile and base, thinset over coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backer board:1. Setting method: Premium latex-modified thinset mortar on coated glass mat

gypsum backer board over studs.2. Standard installation method: TCNA W244-14.3. Grout types: Epoxy grout. Apply grout release agent prior to grouting tile to

receive epoxy grout.

B. Floor tiles; thinset, interior:1. Setting method: Premium latex-modified thinset mortar.2. Standard installation method: TCNA F115-14.3. Grout: Epoxy grout. Apply grout release agent prior to grouting tile to receive

epoxy grout.


A. Clean tile as work progresses, preventing accumulation of setting and grouting materialsor debris on tile faces.

B. Immediately remove stains, grout release agent, excess mortar, grout and sealant fromfaces of tile; comply with manufacturer's product data.

C. Glazed tile: Clean glazed tile using a solution of detergent and water only. Use no acidsto clean glazed tile.

D. Unglazed tile:1. Allow tile work to cure a minimum of 14 days prior to acid cleaning.2. Saturate grout joints with clean water at least two hours prior to beginning acid

cleaning. Apply a grease coating to metal and vitreous surfaces subject tocontact with acid solution.

3. Utilize a solution of one pound sulfamic acid to five gallons clean water forcleaning in accord with ANSI A137.1, Section 3.5.3. Work in areas not exceeding20 sq. ft., scrubbing tile surfaces to remove residue. Do not scrub grout joints.

4. Flush cleaned areas with water immediately after cleaning. Scrub surfaces withclean water to remove remaining film.

5. Do not reuse cleaning solutions. Discard solutions containing residue and debrisfrom cleaning operations so as not to contaminate or stain adjacent work.

E. Protection: Protect installed tile work until Date of Substantial Completion by coveringwith kraft paper.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 3000-6

Lane School Renovation ACOUSTICAL CEILINGSAldine Independent School District SECTION 09 5100MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 09 5100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Shop drawings; include the following:1. Layout, including locations of lighting fixtures and grilles.2. Insert and hanger spacing and fastening details.3. Splicing method for main and cross runners.4. Change in level details.5. Support requirements for lighting fixtures, grilles and similar items.

C. Product data: Include product descriptions and installation instructions for each material. Indicate load carrying capacity of suspension system hanger spacings and manufacturer'srecommended methods for fixture support.

D. Samples; submit the following:1. 1'-0" by 1'-0" samples of each type and color acoustical material.2. Samples of each type and color suspension member and accessory.


A. Certificates: Indicate compliance with specified requirements.


A. Applicable standards; standards as referenced herein:1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).2. ASTM International (ASTM).3. Ceiling & Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA).4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

B. Obtain acoustical panels and supporting suspension system through one source from asingle manufacturer. Each type of acoustical panel and painted grid shall be from a singleproduction run.


A. Sequencing and scheduling: Schedule acoustical material installation to minimize needfor removal and replacement of acoustical units to accommodate work of other trades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL:

A. Metal suspension system standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metalsuspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that complywith applicable requirements in ASTM C635-12.

B. Attachment devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C635-12,Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic designrequirements.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 5100-1


1. Anchors in concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes orloops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, asdetermined by testing according to ASTM E488-10 or ASTM E1512-01(2007) asapplicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.a. Type: Cast-in-place anchors.b. Corrosion protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply

with ASTM B633-11, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 servicecondition.

2. Power-actuated fasteners in concrete: Fastener system of type suitable forapplication indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips orother accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated and withcapability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed byceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E1190-11,conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

3. Hanger clips: Prefabricated metal clamps for fastening to building structure.

C. Wire hangers, braces, and ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:1. Zinc-coated, carbon steel wire: ASTM A641-09a, Class 1 zinc coating, soft

temper.2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C635-12, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, butprovide not less than 0.106-inch diameter wire.

D. Special shapes:1. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements:

a. Fry Reglet Corp.b. Gordon, Inc.c. Pittcon Industries.

2. Characteristics: Aluminum acoustical moldings, shapes as indicated; white color.

2.2 STEEL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS:

A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements:1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.2. CertainTeed Corp.3. Chicago Metallic Corp.4. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Exposed steel grid system; 15/16" flange face.1. Structural classification: Meeting ASTM C635, Intermediate Duty.2. Module: 2'-0" by 2'-0".3 Main and cross tees:

a. Tee material: Hot dip galvanized, cold-rolled steel.b. Cap material: Hot dip galvanized, cold-rolled steel.c. Design: Double web. Ceiling suspension systems:d. Tee size: 15/16" flange face width; 1-1/2" nominal height main tees and

2'-0" or 4'-0" long cross tees; material thicknesses as required to meetspecified structural classifications.

C. Finish on exposed components: Chemically treated for paint adhesion with factory-applied, low-gloss white paint.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 5100-2


2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL:

A. Source limitations:1. Acoustical ceiling panels: Obtain each type from single source from single

manufacturer.2. Suspension system: Obtain each type from single source from single

manufacturer.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS:

A. Acceptable manufacturers; subject to compliance with specified requirements:1. Basis of design; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.2. CertainTeed Corp.3. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Acoustical ceiling panels:1. 24" by 24" by 5/8" Acoustical Lay-In Panels: Armstrong “Cortega, Item No. 824,

24" by 24" by 5/8" thick, medium texture, square edge lay-in acoustical panels for15/16" profile exposed grid.

2.5 ACCESSORIES:

A. Acoustical sealant:1. Acoustical sealant for exposed and concealed joints: Manufacturer's standard

nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834-10 andeffective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints andopenings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representativeassemblies according to ASTM E90-09.

2. Acoustical sealant for concealed joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying,nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealantrecommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne soundtransmission.

3. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.

B. T-Grid support clip:1. Acceptable products:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Beam End Retainer Clip Item 7395.b. Chicago Metallic corp., Perimeter clip 1499.c. Erico Products, Inc., Caddy TGE T-Grid support clip.d. USG Industries, Inc., Mac 2.

2. Characteristics: Mechanical clip for attaching acoustical “T” to edge moldingwithout exposed fasteners in grid system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 JOB MOCK-UP:

A. Install complete ceiling of each type specified, in space designated by Architect. NotifyArchitect when spaces are ready for observation.

B. Following Architect's acceptance, retain mock-up as a standard of quality for ceilinginstallation. Accepted mock-up may remain as part of finished work.

3.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION:

A. Install suspension system in accord with manufacturer’s product data, ASTM C636-08,ASTM E580-11b and CISCA recommendations, except for more stringent requirementsspecified herein.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 5100-3


B. Layout:1. Center grid system within areas to avoid panels of unequal widths at opposite

walls and panels of less than 1/2 width.2. Align grid members straight and perpendicular to walls.3. Locate accessories, control joints and expansion joints before installing grid

system.

C. Hangers:1. Space hangers for carrying channels or main tees at 4'-0" o. c. maximum.

Secure to building structure.2. Install additional hangers at ends of each suspension member, within 6" of end of

member or wall.3. Install additional hangers within 6" of each corner of lighting fixtures, grilles and

similar items.4. Splay wires no more than 5" in 2'-6" vertical drop.5. Where spacing of hangers for main tees exceeds maximum specified spacing

due to interference by adjacent construction, indirect-hang tees using carryingchannels to maintain maximum hanger spacing.

6. Wrap wire minimum of three times horizontally, turning ends upwards.

D. Direct-hung, exposed grid system, 2'-0" by 2'-0" module:1. Space main tees at 4'-0" o. c., maximum, perpendicular to structure.2. Locate cross tees at 2'-0" o. c., perpendicular to main tees.3. Space cross tees at 2'-0" o. c., perpendicular to previously installed cross tees, to

form 2'-0" by 2'-0" grid module. Connect to cross tees through slots in main tees.

E. Level and square suspension system components within specified tolerances prior tobeginning ceiling material installation.

F. Install cross tees adjacent to lighting fixtures and grilles on each side not supported bymain tees. Support no fixtures on main or cross tees when fixture weight results in deadload exceeding deflection capacity of suspension system.

G. Where cut tees intersect other tees or edge moldings without mechanical attachment,attach components using T-Grid support clip. At contractor’s option tees may be attacheddirectly to partition with tie wire.

H. Wall moldings:1. Install wall molding at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces.

Install suspension members on bottom leg of shadowline edge molding.2. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.3. Attach to vertical surfaces with mechanical fasteners.4. Apply continuous ribbon of acoustical sealant on vertical web where space above

ceiling is a plenum.

I. Where grid system exists in an unrestrained condition, brace back to building structureusing hanger wire, main tee or carrying channel braces spaced at 4'-0" o. c., maximum.

3.3 ACOUSTICAL UNIT INSTALLATION:

A. Install acoustical units in level plane, in straight line courses, within specified tolerances.

B. Place acoustical materials to bear all around on suspension members.

C. Pattern shall be symmetrical about centerline of area, unless otherwise indicated. Lay outunits having directional pattern in same direction.

D. Seal joints in acoustical units around pipes, ducts, and ducts and electrical outlets withacoustical sealant where ceiling is used as supply or return air plenum.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 5100-4


E. Where cutting of acoustical units is required, cut so that no cut or damaged edges arevisible in finished work.

F. Hold-down clips: Install acoustical units surrounding recessed troffer lights with hold-down clips to prevent movement or displacement of units.

G. Allowable tolerances:1. Deflection: Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices

supporting lighting fixtures, ceiling grilles and acoustical units shall havemaximum deflection of 1/360 of the span when tested in accord with ASTMC635-12.

2. Bow, camber and twist: Not exceeding tolerances established by ASTMC635-12.

3. Variation from level in finished ceiling: ±1/8" in 12'-0".

3.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS:

A. Furnish extra materials equal to one percent of each type of acoustical material supplied.

B. Furnish suspension system components in amount sufficient to install extra ceiling units.

3.5 CLEANING:

A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation.

B. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted metal surfaces.

C. Remove and replace damaged and stained acoustical units with new units.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 5100-5

Lane School Renovation RESILIENT FLOORINGAldine Independent School District SECTION 09 6500MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUBMITTALS:


B. Product data: Indicate product characteristics and installation requirements, includingmanufacturer's recommended adhesives and maintenance instructions.

C. Samples: Submit full size samples for each type color and pattern of flooring andaccessory required.


A. Applicable standards, as referenced herein: ASTM International (ASTM).

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and todemonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.1. Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories.2. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by

Architect.3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves suchdeviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part ofthe completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Environmental requirements:1. Maintain temperature in space to receive resilient materials at not less than 70EF.

for not less than 24 hours before, during and for 48 hours after installation.2. Maintain minimum temperature of 55EF. after flooring is installed, except as

specified above, for duration of project.

B. Protection: Protect finished flooring, base and accessories from staining, marring or otherphysical damage by work of other trades. Cover or mask surfaces as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-test-response characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testingidentical products according to ASTM E648-14c or NFPA 253 by a qualified testingagency.1. Critical radiant flux classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE:

A. Acceptable manufacturers:1. Basis of design; Armstrong World Industries, Inc.2. Mannington Commercial.3. Tarkett, Inc.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 6500-1


B. Type: Armstrong Excelon, Imperial Series, or similar of other acceptable manufacturersmeeting ASTM F1066-04(2014), Class 2 for through pattern tile.

C. Size: 1'-0" by 1'-0" face size by 1/8" thickness.

D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.2 RUBBER BASE:

A. Rubber base: Roppe Corp. with following characteristics:1. Type: Minimum 48% rubber, 100% vulcanized; meeting ASTM F1861, Type TS

Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber SBR.2. Length: Minimum 120'-0" rolls.3. Thickness: 1/8".4. Height: 4".5. Style: Coved.6. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection. Refer to

Drawings for installation locations.

2.3 ACCESSORIES:

A. Acceptable manufacturers:1. Burke Flooring Products, a Div. of Burke Industries.2. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc.3. Johnsonite, Inc.4. R. C. Musson Rubber Co.5. Roppe Corp.

B. Reducers:1. Material: Vinyl. 2. Thickness: Same as abutting floor materials.3. Width(s): As indicated.4. Edges: Tapered.5. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS:

A. Leveling compound; acceptable products: Portland based, free flowing, self-levelingcompound.1. Custom Building Products, LevelQuik RS.2. Euclid Chemical Co., Super Flo-Top.3. Mapei, Ultraplan 1 Plus.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant types and brands of solvent-free adhesive recommended byflooring material manufacturer's product data for installation conditions indicated.1. VOC Content: Comply with the following limits when calculated according to 40

CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):a. VCT Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.b. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Prepare surfaces to receive resilient material in accord with flooring manufacturer’sinstructions.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 6500-2


B. Grind high areas and fill depressions with leveling compound where required to producesmooth installation and for proper alignment of resilient flooring with adjacent flooringmaterials.

C. Perform bond and moisture tests on subfloors in accord with ASTM F2170-11 andresilient flooring manufacturer’s product data, to determine if surfaces are acceptable toreceive specified resilient flooring products. Correct conditions detrimental to resilientflooring installation prior to starting installation.

D. Remove dirt, oil, grease or other foreign matter from surfaces to receive floor covering oraccessories.

3.2 APPLICATION OF ADHESIVES:

A. Mix and apply adhesives in accord with resilient material manufacturer’s product data. Apply with notched trowel or other tools as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Provide safety precautions during mixing and applications as recommended by adhesivemanufacturer.

C. Apply adhesive to only that area which can be covered by resilient material within therecommended working time of the adhesive.1. Remove adhesive which dries or films over.2. Do not soil walls, bases or adjacent areas with adhesives.3. Remove spilled or misplaced materials.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION:

A. Lay tile in accord with resilient tile manufacturer’s product data.

B. Lay tile beginning at center of room or space, working toward perimeter. 1. Adjust starting point as necessary to provide border tile widths equal to or greater

than a half width tile. 2. Joints between tile shall be fitted without gap; butted together.3. Cut border tile to fit within 1/32" of abutting surfaces.

C. Fit flooring material into breaks and recesses, against bases, around pipes andpenetrations, under saddles or thresholds and around permanent cabinets andequipment.

D. Lay tile with grain or pattern running in pattern indicated in Drawings.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF BASE:

A. Workmanship:1. Unroll base material and allow to relax for 24 hours, minimum, prior to installation.

Cut into lengths for minimum number of joints. Double-cut adjoining lengths.2. Install with tight butt joints with no joint widths greater than 1/64".

B. Top-set base:1. Apply adhesive and adhere to vertical surfaces.2. Press down so that bottom edge follows floor profile.3. Form internal corners using premolded corners.4. Form external corners using premolded corners.5. Scribe base to abutting materials.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 6500-3


C. Butt type cove base:1. Install base prior to installation of border tile.2. Apply adhesive and adhere to wall surfaces.3. Press down and set bottom edge to floor surface profile.4. Form internal corners by coping and bending sufficient length around corner for

anchorage. 5. Form external corners using premolded corners.6. Scribe base to abutting materials.

3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION:

A. Cut materials to lengths and sizes indicated.

B. Resilient reducers:1. Apply adhesives and bond to substrate.2. Center reducers in door openings.3. Fit edge to door frame jambs without visible gaps or cracks.4. Fit edges to abutting floor materials for flush fit.

3.6 CLEANING:

A. Upon completion of installation, clean surfaces using a neutral cleaner acceptable tomaterial manufacturer.

3.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL:

A. Furnish additional floor tile of each color and pattern of tile as maintenance material. Furnish at the rate of one carton for each 1000 sq. ft. of floor surface or fraction thereof.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 6500-4

Lane School Renovation CARPETINGAldine Independent School District SECTION 09 6800MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 09 6800 - CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Shop drawings: Show columns, doorways, enclosing walls and partitions, built-incabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Indicate the following:1. Carpet type, color, and dye lot.2. Locations where dye lot changes occur.3. Seam locations, types, and methods.4. Type of subfloor.5. Type of installation.6. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.7. Pile direction.8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.

9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Product data: Submit for carpet and installation accessories. Include test reportsverifying that carpet meet(s) specified design criteria. Include manufacturer'sspecification data and installation procedures. Indicate primers, adhesives and seamingmethods proposed for use. 1. If carpet manufacturer does not publish detailed installation data, installer must

provide detailed proposed procedures for ArchitectUs approval.a. Carpet manufacturer, prior to installation, shall provide written

specifications as to degree of variations expected, degree of installedmis-match (if any) considered acceptable, and all guarantees andwarranties of pattern match offered.

D. Samples; identify carpet samples by name, number and manufacturer's lot number:1. Carpet: Submit minimum of two 1'-0" by 1'-0" samples of each type, color and

pattern selected.2. Accessories: Submit 1'-0" length of carpet edge strip.


A. Certificates: Carpet shall be certified for compliance with specification requirements. Submit certificates from carpet manufacturer at time of carpet delivery to project site. Each certificate shall be signed by authorized officer of carpet manufacturing companyand shall contain the name and address of the Contractor, the project location and thequantities and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which certificates apply.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS:

A. Maintenance data: Submit as part of Contract closeout documents. Includerecommendations for various traffic conditions, cleaning procedures and intervals.


A. Applicable standards; standards of the following, as referenced herein:1. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC).2. ASTM International (ASTM).3. Department of Commerce (DOC).4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).5. The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI).

B. Design criteria; carpet shall meet the following:1. Smoke development: Less than 450 when tested in accord with NFPA 258.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 6800-1


2. Critical radiant flux: Class II, 0.22 watt/cm2 when tested in accord with ASTME648-10. Carpet used in exit corridors is required to meet Class I, 0.45 watts/cm2

critical radiant flux.3. Electrostatic propensity: Less than 3000 volts when tested in accord with AATCC

134.4. Flammability of carpet: Pass methanamine pill test when tested in accord with

ASTM D2859-06. 5. Emissions: Provide carpet that complies with testing and product requirements of

CRI's "Green Label Plus" program.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original mill wrappings, with carpet having register tagnumber attached. Deliver only after building is enclosed and spaces have controlledtemperature and humidity.

B. Store materials under cover, off floor, in ventilated space. Protect from damage, stainingand moisture. Stand no roll material on end.


A. Provide fresh air ventilation during entire installation process and for 72 hours afterwards.

1.7 WARRANTIES:

A. Carpet warranty:1. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for each type of carpet stating that

carpet will remain dimensionally stable, colorfast and static-resistant and will notlose more than 10% by weight of face yarn, will not edge ravel or separate.

2. Warranty period shall be 15 years beginning at Date of Substantial Completion.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS:

A. Provide 3% excess of each type, pattern and color of carpet installed for Owner's use.

B. Salvage scraps from installation over three sq. ft. in area and over 1'-0" in width forOwner's use.

C. Store excess material where directed by Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Carpet will be selected by Architect.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES:

A. Carpet edge strip: Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Imperial Reducer heavy-duty rubberof size and profile indicated; for glue-down installation.1. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard selection.

B. Adhesive: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining type recommended by carpetmanufacturer’s product data for installation conditions. Adhesive shall be solvent-free,release type, allowing removal of carpet without damage to carpet or substrate.1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

C. Leveling compound; acceptable products: Portland based, free flowing, self-levelingcompound.1. Custom Building Products, LevelQuik RS.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 6800-2


2. Euclid Chemical Co., Super Flo-Top.3. Mapei, Ultraplan 1 Plus.

D. Miscellaneous materials: Furnish fiberglass seaming tape, thread and similaraccessories required for carpet installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Subfloor curing:1. Concrete subfloors shall be cured in accord with the requirements of the

Concrete Finishing section.2. If a curing compound has been used, Contractor shall verify that compound is

compatible with flooring manufacturer’s installation materials.3. If the curing compound is not compatible, or if compatibility is unknown,

Contractor shall remove curing compound by shot-blasting or other methodsapproved by floor finish manufacturer.

B. Concrete moisture vapor emission, humidity levels and pH testing: Perform one or moreof the following tests, as required by flooring manufacturer’s product data, using thefollowing methods:1. Moisture vapor emissions: Perform tests on subfloors in accord with ASTM

F1869-11 calcium chloride test and flooring manufacturer’s product data, todetermine if surfaces are acceptable to receive specified flooring products.

2. Humidity level: Perform on subfloors in accord with ASTM F2170-11 in situ probeand flooring manufacturer’s product data, to determine if surfaces are acceptableto receive specified flooring products.

3. Concrete pH level: Perform on subfloors to verify that surfaces are acceptable toreceive specified flooring products.

4. Correction of conditions: Prior to installation, correct conditions that do not meetflooring manufacture’s requirements, or that may be detrimental to flooringinstallation.

C. Vacuum substrate immediately prior to beginning carpet installation. Remove debris, oil,grease and other foreign materials. Surfaces to receive installation shall be dry.

D. Grind high areas and fill depressions with leveling compound where required to producesmooth installation and for proper alignment of carpet with adjacent flooring materials.

3.2 WORKMANSHIP:

A. Except where more stringent requirements are specified herein, comply withmanufacturer's product data and with CRI Commercial Installation Standard 104,Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials.

B. Lay carpet with pattern and texture running in direction as shown on the drawings andapproved shop drawings, and as directed by the Architect.

C. Extend carpet under movable furniture and equipment and into closets of rooms indicatedto be carpeted unless other floor finish is indicated in finish schedule.

D. Install carpet edge strip at locations where edge of carpet is exposed to traffic, exceptwhere another device, such as a threshold, is indicated.

E. Maintain edges and seams straight and square with adjacent surfaces.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 6800-3


3.3 DIRECT GLUE INSTALLATION:

A. Unroll, cut and fit carpet lengths for space prior to applying adhesive. In cutting, allow l/2"overlap in adjacent widths.

B. Apply adhesive in accord with manufacturer's product data. Apply to half of width at atime, beginning at seam, with carpet width already laid.

C. Apply seaming cement to cut backing and pile edges without evidence on carpet faces. Compress 1/2" overlap at seam by fitting against width already laid; then push loosenessaway from seam.

D. As installation progresses, roll out air bubbles using a roller weighing approximately 10lbs.

E. Where transverse seams are required, loosely back-sew lengths together.

F. For carpet at vertical surfaces, trim straight and true to line, within 1/32" of abuttingsurfaces.


A. At completion of installation, remove debris. Sort out scraps to be saved.

B. Vacuum carpet with a commercial type vacuum cleaner having a rotating agitator innozzle. Use corner attachment for vacuuming in corners and crevices.

C. Remove stains with spot remover acceptable to carpet manufacturer.

D. Immediately after cleaning, cover carpeted areas with heavy kraft paper. Maintain inplace for remainder of construction period.

E. Just prior to Date of Substantial Completion, remove protective covering and vacuumcarpet. Steam clean areas if required to remove stains.

F. Replace carpet which cannot be cleaned.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 6800-4

Lane School Renovation PAINTING AND COATINGAldine Independent School District SECTION 09 9100MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 09 9100 - PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Work of this section includes:1. Touching up of shop-applied prime coats.2. Preparation of surfaces to receive finishes.3. Painting, staining or otherwise finishing of surfaces, except as otherwise

indicated.4. Priming, back priming and finishing of interior woodwork.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:1. Shop-applied primer coats.2. Joint sealants.3. Wall coverings.4. Special finishes.5. Piping identification.6. Prefinished items.7. Epoxy-urethane coatings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS:

A. Standard coating terms: As defined in ASTM D16-08 and herein:1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when

measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when

measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when

measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65

when measured at a 60-degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when

measured at a 60-degree meter.

B. Commercial: Painter grade products.

C. DFT: Dry film thickness of the coating.

D. Premium: Best quality product (top of the line):

E. VOC: Volatile Organic Compounds found in primers, paints, sealers and stains. VOClevels are designated in grams per liter (g/L).


A. DFT for each primer, paint, sealer and stain shall be as recommended by productmanufacturer’s product data.

B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdictionand, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits,exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, shall apply when calculated according to thereferenced standard in the following table.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 9100-1


Applicable VOC Limits

Product Type Referenced Standard VOC Limit (g/L minus water)

Interior Flat Coating Green Seal GS-11, 1993 50

Interior Non-Flat Coating Green Seal GS-11, 1993 150

Anti-Corrosive/ Anti-Rust Paint Green Seal GC-03, 2nd Edition, 1997

250

Clear Wood Finish: Lacquer SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 550

Clear Wood Finish: Sanding Sealer SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 350

Clear Wood Finish: Varnish SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 350

Clear Brushing Lacquer SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 680

Floor Coatings SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 100

Primers, Sealers and Undercoaters SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 200

Shellac: Clear SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 730

Shellac: Pigmented SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 550

Stain SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 250

Concrete Curing Compounds SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 350

Japans/ Faux Finishing Coatings SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 350

Magnesite Cement Coatings SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 450

Pigmented Lacquer SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 550

Waterproofing Sealers SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 250

Waterproofing Concrete/ MasonrySealers

SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 400

Wood Preservatives SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 350

Low-Solids Coatings SCAQMD Rule 1113, 2004 120*

* Note: VOC levels for Low-Solids Coatings are measured in grams of VOC per liter of material,including water.



B. Product data:1. Submit complete list of products proposed for use at least 30 days prior to

commencement of painting work.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 9100-2


2. Indicate manufacturer, brand name, quality, type, and sheen for each type ofpaint and for each surface to be finished. Indicate VOC rating and compliancewith applicable regulations.

3. Indicate manufacturer's instructions regarding mixing, surface preparation andapplication. Include application rates, film thickness and required primers.

4. Intent of Contractor to use products specified does not relieve him fromresponsibility of submitting product list.

C. Card stock brush-outs: Prepare two sets of color coat brush-outs for each paint and stain

color and sheen scheduled, applying actual finish color coat to standard sample cardstock, minimum 80 sq. in. size.

D. Substrate brush-outs:1. In addition to color coat brush-outs, submit one actual brush-out sample

application for each paint and stain type, color and sheen as applicable to thefollowing substrates:a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch square samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of masonry, with

mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. c. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch square samples of each color and

material on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of natural- or

stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces. e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch square samples of flat metal and two

8-inch long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 2. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of

each type of coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply withprocedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved preparedsamples. a. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and

conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. 1) Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of wall

surface. 2) Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or

area as required. b. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been

activated, apply coatings in this room or to each surface according to theSchedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture oneach surface. 1) After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or

surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 2) Final approval of colors will be from job-applied samples.


A. Applicable standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM), as referenced herein.2. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), volatile organic compounds (VOC)

standards as required by local codes and regulations.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to project site ready-mixed in original containers with labelsintact; labels bearing manufacturer's name, paint type, color and recommendedinstallation and reducing procedures.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 9100-3


B. Storage and handling:1. Store materials in location acceptable to Architect.2. Maintain neat, clean conditions in storage area; remove rags and waste materials

at end of each day's work.3. Close containers at end of day's work. Leave no materials open.

C. Waste management and disposal:1. Disposal containers for recycled materials must be established on site. 2. Dispose of rags containing solvent, daily. 3. Dispose of hazardous coatings in accord with state, county and local regulations

for hazardous waste disposal.


A. Environmental requirements:1. Comply with manufacturer's product data as to environmental conditions under

which materials may be applied.2. Apply no materials in spaces where dust is being generated.3. Comply with applicable VOC regulations.

B. Protection: Cover finished work of other trades and surfaces not being paintedconcurrently and prefinished items.

C. Safety precautions:1. Provide temporary fire protection equipment in materials storage area.2. Prohibit smoking in storage area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Acceptable manufacturers: Except as otherwise noted, products specified as a standardof quality are manufactured by Sherwin Williams. Products of the following manufacturerssimilar in type and quality are acceptable for use, subject to approval of product list:1. Pittsburgh Paints.2. Benjamin Moore Co.

B. Where products other than those of the manufacturer listed as the standard of quality arespecified in Painting Schedule, such products have been selected to achieve specificresults and substitutions will be allowed only in accord with Product SubstitutionProcedures section.

2.2 PAINTING MATERIALS:

A. Miscellaneous materials:1. Paint thinners and tints shall be products of same manufacturer as paints or

approved by him for use with his products.2. Shellac, turpentine, patching compounds and similar materials required for

execution of work shall be pure, best quality products.

B. Paint and stain colors will be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colorrange with final approval based on benchmark (mock-ups).

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 9100-4


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Surfaces to receive finishes shall be dry and free of debris, oils, dust or other deleteriousmaterials.

B. Existing surfaces:1. For previously painted surfaces, remove dirt, debris and chalk by washing with

detergent and water. Sand glossy surfaces. Remove loose paint and blisters byscraping and sanding. Apply bond coat when required by paint manufacturer'sproduct data.

2. Previously painted metal surfaces to remain shall be wire-brushed and cleaned ofexisting paint and rust.

3. Treat mildewed surfaces with a solution of one quart hypochlorite bleach to a halfcup of detergent to one gallon water. Rinse and allow to dry prior to painting.

4. Previously painted masonry:a. Where existing paint is loose or blistered, remove by scraping or

brushing.b. Remove debris and chalking from surfaces by washing with detergent

and water. Flush with clean water. Touch up with material specified forfinish.

C. Where finish materials abut or are abutted by dissimilar materials, caulk joints in accordwith Joint Sealants section.

D. Lumber, plywood and veneered wood surfaces:1. Apply shellac, maximum two pounds cut to knots, pitch and resinous sapwood

prior to application of first paint or stain coat.2. For surfaces to receive opaque finish, fill nail holes, cracks, joints and defects

with spackling compound. Apply after first coat of paint.3. For surfaces to receive transparent finish, fill nail holes, cracks and defects with

wood filler matching finish color.4. Sand surfaces smooth except where rough sawn surfaces are indicated. Final

step shall remove scuffs, handling marks and effects of moisture exposure. Dustto remove debris.a. Sand plane surfaces using sanding block; touch sand moldings in

manner preventing removal of sharp edges or obscuring profile.b. Moldings cut with machine finish or minimum 16 knife cuts per inch shall

not require further sanding except to correct irregularities.c. Sand surfaces within normal visual range, including surfaces within 10'-0"

of floor level, using not less than 80 grit abrasive exterior or 100 gritabrasive interior, except increase to 120 to 180 grit abrasive fortransparent finished interior surfaces.

d. Install prefinished or presurfaced items following finishing or sanding ofadjacent surfaces. Replace prefinished items damaged by finishing ofadjacent work.

E. Gypsum board:1. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with patching compound. Allow to dry

and sand smooth without raising nap of gypsum board paper.2. Gypsum board shall be finished as specified in Gypsum Board section prior to

painting.

F. Cement stucco:1. Allow surfaces to cure a minimum of 30 days before applying first coat of paint.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 9100-5


2. Surfaces shall be dry prior to applying first paint coat. Moisture level shall beacceptable to paint manufacturer when tested by a moisture meter.

3. Perform pH testing to determine alkalinity of substrates prior to paintingapplication; comply with paint manufacturer's product data.

4. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with patching plaster. Allow to dryand sand smooth.

5. Cut out map cracks and repair to same plane and finish as original work.

G. Concrete:1. Fill cracks, holes and irregularities with cement grout.2. Remove laitance, oil, grease, dirt and debris from surfaces. Allow concrete to

cure prior to paint application.

H. Concrete unit masonry: Rub to remove loose mortar and debris. Fill irregularities withcement grout.

I. Galvanized metals: 1. Test for passivator or stabilizer using copper sulfate solution (20 grams of copper

sulfate in one liter of water). If passivator or stabilizer is present, remove bybrush blasting, sanding or chemical etching.

2. Wash with xylol to remove grease, oil and contaminants. Wipe dry with cleancloth.

J. Aluminum:1. Sand or scrape to remove oxides.2. Wash with xylol to remove grease, oil and contaminants. Wipe dry with clean

cloth.

K. Ferrous metals:1. Wire-brush or sandpaper to remove rust and mill scale.2. Solvent-clean with xylol to remove grease, oil and contaminants. Wipe dry with

clean cloth.

3.2 APPLICATION:

A. Apply paint only when moisture content of surfaces is within limits recommended inproduct data. Apply paint materials using clean brushes, rollers or spraying equipment.

B. Apply materials at rate not exceeding that recommended in product data for surface beingpainted, less ten percent for losses.

C. Comply with product data for drying time between coats.

D. Sand and dust between coats to remove defects visible from a distance of 5'-0".

E. Finish coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps or pile-up of paint,skipped or missed areas.

F. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp withoutoverlapping.

G. Primer coats may be omitted for surfaces specified to receive factory-applied primer, ifprimer is compatible with finish coats. If primer coats are not compatible, substitute abond coat as recommended by paint manufacturer for specified primer coat.

H. Where two-coat finish is specified, prime coat shall be tinted to approximate finish color.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 9100-6


I. Where portion of finish on gypsum board partition is damaged or unacceptable, refinishentire surface of partition.

J. Seal tops and bottoms of interior doors with prime coat only; side edges same as faces.

K. Finish top, bottom and side edges of exterior doors same as faces.

L. Paint inside of ductwork flat black for entire area visible through ceiling openings. Paintunderside of ductwork and other above-ceiling items flat black for entire area visiblethrough ceiling openings.

M. Paint exposed piping and ductwork in painted spaces same as adjacent wall surfaces.

N. Paint exposed grilles and registers in public spaces.

O. Paint walls, exposed structure, handrails and exposed ductwork and piping in stairwells.

P. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting fixtures, factory-finished work and similar items, or provide in-place protection. Upon completion of eachspace, replace removed items.

Q. Unless otherwise indicated, paint exposed structural system.

R. Back prime interior woodwork with material specified for prime coat, without runs on face. Finish cut edges prior to installation.

S. Unless otherwise indicated, paint construction on roof top, including prefinishedmechanical and electrical equipment.

T. Unless otherwise indicated, paint ground mounted mechanical, plumbing and electricalequipment, including prefinished equipment.

3.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE:

A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide thefollowing finish systems over exterior concrete, stucco soffits, and masonry substrates:1. Flat Acrylic Finish:

a. First coat: SW Loxon Masonry Primer, A24W300 (<100 g/l voc).b. Second coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series (<50 g/l voc).c. Third coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series (<50 g/l Voc.

2. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish:a. First coat: SW Loxon Masonry Primer, A24W300 (<100 g/l voc).b. Second coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A-82 Series, (<50 g/l voc).c. Third coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A-82 Series, (<50 g/l voc).

B. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete unitmasonry:1. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:

a. First coat: SW PrepRite Interior / Exterior Latex Block Filler, B25W25(<50 g/l voc).

b. Second coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series, (<50 g/l voc).c. Third coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series, (<50 g/l voc).

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 9100-7


C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. First coat:is not required on shop-primed items; Low-Luster Acrylic Finish:1. First coat: SW Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310 (<100 g/l

voc).2. Second coat: SW SW Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-660 Series

(0 g/l voc).3. SW Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-660 Series (0 g/l voc).

D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metalsurfaces:1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish:

a. First coat: SW Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310(<100 g/l voc).

b. Second coat: SW Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-660Series (0 g/l voc).

c. Third coat: SW Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-660 Series(0 g/l voc).

2. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:a. First coat: SW Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310

(<100 g/l voc).b. Second coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series, (<50 g/l voc).c. Third coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series, (<50 g/l voc).

E. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces, exceptfactory-applied fluoropolymer finished aluminum:1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish:

a. First coat: SW Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310(<100 g/l voc)


c. Third coat: SW Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-660 Series(0 g/l voc).

2. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: a. First coat: SW Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310

(<100 g/l voc).b. Second coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series, (<50 g/l voc).c. Third coat: SW A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series, (<50 g/l voc).

F. Parking Line and Driveway Paint: Setfast Waterborne Yellow (TM225) (meets FederalSpecification (FS) TTP-1952-B)

3.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE:

A. Concrete: Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete substrates:1. Flat Acrylic Finish:

a. First coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Primer, B11 Series, (0g/l voc).

b. Second coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series, (0 g/lvoc).

c. Third coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series, (0 g/lvoc).

2. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:a. First coat: SW Loxon Masonry Primer, A24W8300 (<100 g/l voc).b. Second coat: SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC S/9, B31-2600, (<0 g/l voc).c. Third coat: SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC S/9, B31-2600, (<0 g/l voc).

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 9100-8


B. Concrete Masonry Unit: Provide the following finish systems over interior concretemasonry:1. Flat Acrylic Finish:

a. First coat: SW PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler, B25W25 (<50 g/lvoc).

b. Second coat: SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-2600 (0g/L voc).

c. Third coat: SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-2600 (0g/L voc).

2. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:a. First coat: SW PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler, B25W25 (<50 g/l

voc).b. Second coat: SW ProMar 200 Interior Zero VOC Latex S/G Enamel, B31-

2600 Series, (<0 g/l voc).c. Third coat: SW ProMar 200 Interior Zero VOC Latex S/G Enamel, B31-

2600 Series, (<0 g/l voc).

C. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:1. Flat Acrylic Finish:


b. Second coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series, (0 g/lvoc).

c. Third coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Flat, B5 Series, (0 g/lvoc).

2. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: a. First coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Primer, B11 Series, (0

g/l voc).b. Second coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Latex EgShel, B9 Series (0 g/l

voc).c. Third coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Latex EgShel, B9 Series (0 g/l voc).

3. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:a. First coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Interior Latex Primer, B11 Series, (0

g/l voc).b. Second coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Latex S/G Enamel, B10 Series, (0

g/l voc).c. Third coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Latex S/G Enamel, B10 Series, (0 g/l

voc).

D. Wood and Hardboard and MDF: Provide the following paint finish systems over newinterior wood surfaces:1. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:


b. Second coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Latex S/G Enamel, B10 Series, (0g/l voc).

c. Third coat: SW Harmony Low Odor Latex S/G Enamel, B10 Series, (0 g/lvoc).

E. Plywood backer panels; fire-retardant paint:1. Flame Stop, Inc., Flamestop IM.2. Firefree Coatings, Inc., Firefree Class A.3. Shield Industries, Inc., FireGuard E-84.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 9100-9


F. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal; Low-LusterAcrylic Finish: 1. First coat: SW Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310 (<100 g/l

voc).2. Second coat: SW Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-660 Series (0 g/l

voc).3. Third coat: SW Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-660 Series (0 g/l

voc).

G. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metalsurfaces:1. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish:



c. Third coat: SW Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-660 Series(0 g/l voc). (0 g/l voc).

2. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:a. First coat: SW Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310

(<100 g/l voc).b. Second coat: SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex S/G Enamel,

B31W2600 Series, (< 0 g/l voc).c. Third coat: SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex S/G Enamel,

B31W2600 Series, (< 0 g/l voc).

H. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over interior aluminum surfaces;matching adjacent surfaces:1. Flat Acrylic Finish:

a. First coat: SW Direct-to-Metal (DTM) Acrylic First coat:/Finish, B66W1(<150 g/l voc).


b. Second coat: SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-2600 (0g/l voc).

c. Third coat: SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-2600 (0g/l voc).

2. Low-Luster Acrylic Finish:a. First coat: SW Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer, B66-310

(<100 g/l voc).b. Second coat: SW Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-660

Series (0 g/l voc).c. Third coat: SW Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel, B66-660 Series

(0 g/l voc).3. Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish:


b. Second coat: SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex S/G, B31-2600Series, (0 g/l voc).

c. Third coat: SW ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex S/G, B31-2600Series, (0 g/l voc).

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 09 9100-10

Lane School Renovation TOILET ACCESSORIESAldine Independent School District SECTION 10 2813MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 10 2813 - TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESIGN CRITERIA:

A. In order to be acceptable, products shall comply with the following criteria:1. All accessories shall be products of a single manufacturer.2. Keying: Keyed accessories shall be keyed alike, unless otherwise specified.3. Operation: Control and operating mechanisms shall be operable with one hand,

without tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of wrist, and with a maximum force of5 lbf.



B. Product data: Include catalog cuts and data sheets indicating size, material and finish,complete parts list and installation procedures for each accessory. Where manufacturer'sstandard products vary with design criteria, indicate compliance with design criteria.

C. Samples: Submit one actual sample of each accessory for approval if requested byArchitect. Upon approval, samples will be returned for incorporation into project.


A. Applicable standards; comply with the following as referenced herein: Americans withDisabilities Act (ADA).


A. Protection: Maintain manufacturer's protective covering on accessories until final cleanupof installation.

B. Coordinate this work with work of other trades into which accessories are to be installed.

1.5 WARRANTY:

A. Mirrors: Warrant mirrors for five years against silver spoilage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Basis of design; Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. items are listed herein to establishquality and design standards for toilet accessories. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Allaccessories product of single manufacturer. Subject to compliance with all requirementsof this specification, provide named products and systems or comparable products andsystems by one of following manufacturers:1. American Specialties, Inc.2. Bradley Washfountain Co.3. McKinney/Parker.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 10 2813-1

Lane School Renovation TOILET ACCESSORIESAldine Independent School District SECTION 10 2813MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

2.2 TOILET ACCESSORIES:

A. Finish: No. 4 satin finish, vertical grain, stainless steel, unless specified otherwise.

B. Contractor furnished and installed toilet accessory items:1. Grab bars; "B-6806"; in each handicap stall on side wall and partition; 1-1/2"

diameter by 36" and 42" lengths; satin finish with peened gripping surface;concealed mounting with snap-on flange covers.a. Installed grab bar and anchors must withstand more than 250 pounds of

force.2. Fixed Framed Mirrors: "B-165 1836 Series" 1/4" thick No. 1 quality float glass

electrolytically copper backed in 3/4" by 3/4" stainless steel frame. 3. Coat Hook: “B-818", surface mounted coat hook. Locations indicated on

Drawings.4. Underlavatory Guards:

a. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.b. TCI Products.c. Truebro, Inc.d. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping

assemblies, that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, andallow service access without removing coverings.

e. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white.

C. Owner furnished contractor installed toilet accessory items: Toilet paper dispenser.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Size rough openings for recessed accessories. Coordinate accessory installation withgypsum board and ceramic tile work. Provide wood blocking and grounds necessary forproper anchorage.

B. Furnish concealed anchor plates to be built into stud walls.

C. Furnish proper location and size of opening required for partition mounted items to toiletcompartment manufacturer.

D. Furnish locations for grab bar concealed anchor plates to be built into walls.

E. Install accessories in compliance with manufacturerUs recommendations, unless indicatedotherwise.

F. Install accessories true, plumb and level, to fit snug and tight against wall surface.1. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible.2. Use tamper-proof bolts and screws for exposed fasteners.

G. Mounting Heights: Except as otherwise indicated, heights are given above finish floor(AFF) to top of accessory.1. Grab Bars: 2U-10" AFF to centerline. Installed grab bar and anchors must

withstand more than 250 pounds of force.

H. Provide key locked accessories keyed alike.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 10 2813-2

Lane School Renovation ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERSAldine Independent School District SECTION 10 7326MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 10 7326 - ALUMINUM WALKWAY COVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Detailed shop drawings for construction and installation.

C. Product data indicating materials, finishes and installation procedures recommended bymanufacturer.


A. Calculations: Submit design calculations or letter indicating design certification sealed bya registered professional engineer licensed in the state of Texas.


A. Applicable standards:1. ASTM International (ASTM), standards as referenced herein.2. American Welding Society (AWS):3. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC), "Systems and Specifications".

B. Installer qualifications: Erection shall be performed by manufacturer or by an erectorapproved and trained by manufacturer. Installer shall submit evidence of satisfactorycompletion of similar work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALKWAY COVER SYSTEM:

A. Acceptable manufacturers:1. Basis of design; AVAdek.2. E. L. Burns, Inc.3. Dittmar Architectural Aluminum Co.4. Mapes Industries, Inc.

B. System description:1. Extruded aluminum structural system. Column supported extruded aluminum

decking system and long span deck. Decking components shall interlock withoutvisible joint lines on horizontal surfaces.a. Column supported walkway covers.

2. Water shall drain internally from deck to beams to columns, spouting out atground level through designated columns will grout fill sloped to divert waterthrough outside face at grade.

3. Provide internal concealed splices and factory mitered and welded corners.

C. Aluminum materials and finish:1. Aluminum extrusions: 6063-T6 aluminum alloy meeting ASTM B221-12;

minimum 0.125" wall thickness for structural components, and as indicated byapproved engineering design.

2. Aluminum sheet: 5005-H34 aluminum alloy meeting ASTM B209-10; minimum0.050" thickness.

3. Fasteners: Hardened aluminum or stainless steel. Exposed fasteners shall becountersunk and shall match walkway cover in color.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 10 7326-1


4. Exposed aluminum finish; fluoropolymer coating finish:a. Two coat, shop-applied, baked-on, fluoropolymer coating system based

on minimum 70% Arkema Group, Kynar 500 or Solvay Solexis, Inc.,Hylar 5000 resin (Polyvinylidene fluoride, PVDF), formulated by alicensed manufacturer and applied by manufacturer's approved applicatorto meet AAMA 2605-05.

b. Color: Color as selected by Architect.

D. Bituminous coating for separation of dissimilar materials: Cold-applied asphalt masticmeeting SSPC-Paint 9.01.

2.2 FABRICATION:

A. Form work true to line and level, with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharpedges. Ease exposed edges to 1/32" radius. Form bent metal corners to smallest radiuspossible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Comply with AISCspecifications.

B. Fabricate from extruded aluminum in following sizes unless indicated otherwise:1. Fascia: 6" x 2".2. Decking: 2-3/4" x 6".3. Beam: 4" x 6".4. Columns: 4" x 4".

C. Form profiles without waves or buckling in metal surfaces. Form battens continuous.

D. Provide anchorage of type shown on approved shop drawings and coordinated withsupporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Anchorages: Furnish anchoring devices which must be set in concrete on timely basis toavoid delay in the work. Set at locations indicated on approved shop drawings.

B. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and product data for installation of integral anchors cast into concrete.

3.2 ERECTION:

A. Fastening to in-place construction: Provide anchoring devices and fasteners for securingitems to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners for concrete inserts. Anchorbolts and erection bolts of types and sizes indicated on approved shop drawings.

B. Placement: Set work in location, alignment and elevation, plumb and level withinspecified tolerances, true and free of rack; measured from established lines and levels. Install work in accord with approved shop drawings.

C. Column sleeves (and anchor bolts if required) shall be furnished by manufacturer andinstalled by Contractor to elevations and dimensions on approved shop drawings.Columns and beams shall be aligned with care before columns are grouted. 1. Downspout columns shall be filled to the discharge level to prevent standing

water, and downspout deflectors installed after grouting.2. Grout shall be 2000 psi compressive strength. Mix by volume, 1 part Portland

cement and 3 parts masonry sand. Add water to make pouring consistency andvibrate with a small rod to fill voids. Use an accelerator during cold weather.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 10 7326-2


D. Protection: Protect components from contact with dissimilar materials by separating withneoprene gaskets or bituminous coating. Protect finishes from damage duringinstallation.

E. Connections: Provide connections as indicated on approved shop drawings. Joindissimilar metal by bolting with galvanic separators.

F. Caulk perimeter of walkway cover using silicone sealant as specified in Joint Sealantssection. Flash to abutting walls for watertight connection.

G. Site tolerances:1. Maximum variation from plumb, level or designated position: 1/8" in 10'-0"

vertical or 1/8" in 20"-0" horizontal.2. Maximum offset in alignment between two consecutive members in line, end to

end: 1/16".

3.3 CLEANING:

A. Maintain walkway cover assembly in clean condition during construction period. Removestains or material having adverse effect on finishes or substrate materials.

B. Just prior to Substantial Completion, clean walkway cover assembly. Use pretested waterand detergent. Flush with clean water. Repair or replace work which cannot be cleanedor which has been damaged during construction period.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 10 7326-3

Lane School Renovation GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS Aldine Independent School District SECTION 22 00 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 00 00-1

SECTION 22 00 00 GENERAL PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section.

1.2 INTENT OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. GENERAL: Drawings and Specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work described in either of them, shall be work required under this contract. Should any work required by the drawings and specifications be in violation of any Federal, State, County or City laws, ordinance or regulation, those laws and regulations shall prevail, and shall be complied with by the Contractor as a part of this work with no extra compensation.

B. DRAWINGS: The drawings are schematic in nature, intended to show the various components of the system approximately to scale and indicate how they are to be integrated with other parts of the building. Determine exact locations by close coordination with the Owner’s Representative, job measurements, determining the requirements of other trades and reviewing all contract documents. The Drawings indicated general routing of the various parts of the systems, but do not indicated all fittings and offsets which may be required to fit the system into spaces allotted for them. The Contract shall include these items as required for a complete installation.

C. BASIS OF DESIGN: Equipment that is scheduled is the basis of the design and has been coordinated for space, installation and electrical requirements. Equipment and models from other acceptable manufacturers have not been verified or coordinated. Contractor shall verify these requirements prior to using other equipment in his bid and include any additional costs for installation of the substitute equipment.

1.3 MATERIALS

A. GENERAL: Manufacturer's printed directions shall be followed for preparing, assembling, installing, erecting and cleaning manufactured materials or equipment, unless otherwise directed. Materials, when not otherwise definitely specified, shall conform to applicable National Specifications and Standards. All materials shall be certified to not contain any asbestos or other material banned by the Environmental Protection Agency. Lead shall not be used in any material, pipe or solder in contact with the domestic water system.

B. SUBSTITUTION: The names of manufacturers and model numbers have been used in the Contract Documents to establish type of equipment and standard of quality. Where only one name is mentioned for a particular item of material, then that manufacturer is the only one acceptable. Where several names are mentioned, any one of those listed may be furnished provided submittal contains sufficient information to show complete compliance with contract Documents. No attempt has been made to determine if each manufacturer listed will produce material that will comply with all requirements of this project or will fit the allotted space.

C. SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS: Requests for substitution during the bidding period, in accordance with the requirements of the Special Conditions, must be accompanied by a complete product submittal with all features, accessories and capacities noted. Large equipment must include a drawing to scale showing how the equipment and required access space will fit the available space. Acceptance for bidding does not waive the post


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 00 00-2

bidding requirement for formal submittal and approval.

1.4 DEMOLITION AND REMODELING

A. In areas of demolition, contractor shall remove all plumbing equipment, piping and devices not to be reused. Any material that has salvage value shall be offered to the Owner, and if accepted, delivered to his designated location. If not accepted it shall be properly disposed of with the other construction material.

B. Where existing systems serve other areas as well, they shall remain active in those areas. Cap, patch and relocate piping to keep these systems operating.

C. Remove and replace ceilings as necessary to install or modify plumbing systems. Where ceilings are to be removed or replaced, adjust/reinstall existing sprinkler devices.

1.5 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. ELECTRICAL: Power wiring is specified in the Electrical Section. Controllers and starters, unless part of a motor control center, are specified under this Section.

B. PAINTING OF EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND ACCESSORIES: Painting Section. However, all items furnished under this Section shall be kept clean and free from corrosion.

C. OPENINGS: Various Sections. The locations of all inserts and openings shall be determined under this Section and coordinated with other Sections in ample time to avoid cutting new construction.

D. EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS REQUIREMENTS: Refer to structural drawings, details and notes for specific support and pipe hanging requirements. Specific loading and attachment methods shall be followed to assure that individual structural members are not overloaded.

1.6 ALTERNATES

A. PROJECT ALTERNATES: Determine the scope of each specified alternate proposal by carefully reading all Divisions of the Documents. The Bid Form contains information explaining the extent of the construction to be performed under a specific alternate. Alternate proposals, which are not predominantly plumbing in scope, are described in other Divisions of these Documents. Pay particular note to re-roofing items that may necessitate adjustments to existing piping.

1.7 PERMITS, FEES AND APPROVALS

A. The contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and fees to perform his work. He shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work specified or shown on the drawings. This applies to Federal, State and Local Codes and Requirements. Approval from the various insuring and inspection authorities shall also be obtained. Refer to Architectural sections for additional information.

1.8 VISITING THE SITE

A. The Contractor shall be familiar with the Drawings and Specifications and shall have examined the premises and understand the conditions under which he will be obligated to operate in performing the contract. No additional compensation shall be allowed for failure to fully understand the requirements.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 00 00-3

1.9 GUARANTEE

A. All equipment and materials furnished under this Section of these Specifications shall be new and free from any defects when accepted by the Owner and shall be guaranteed in writing for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner unless noted to have extended warranties.

1.10 NOISE AND VIBRATIONS

A. The Contractor shall guarantee that the entire system and its component items of equipment, as installed by him, shall operate without objectionable vibration or noises. If, in the opinion of the Architect, objectionable vibration or noise is present, the Contractor shall execute such remedial measures as are necessary to eliminate such unsatisfactory operating conditions and the material and labor thereby required shall be performed at the Contractor's expense.

1.11 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. COORDINATION: The Contractor shall cooperate with other trades on the job and make installations in the proper sequence during the construction of the buildings, and he shall notify the Architect well in advance of construction of all interference of his work with that of other trades and of building construction. This notification shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibilities to coordinate his work with the total project.

B. WORKMANSHIP: All work shall be performed in a neat workmanlike manner and in the best practice of the trade. Only workmen skilled in the trades shall be employed to perform the work included in these specifications.

C. CLEAN-UP: Keep area of operations free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish at all times. All piping above accessible ceilings shall be cleaned of cement, plaster and other construction debris prior to being concealed. The parts of the Plumbing installation which are to be painted or insulated shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, grease, oil spots and other materials in preparation for painting or insulating.

D. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION: Do not deliver equipment to jobsite until it is actually needed for installation. Protect equipment from damage due to construction activities and the weather. Equipment allowed to stand in weather will be rejected and Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment at no cost to Owner.

1.12 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

A. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: Obtain a set of project drawings and keep these at jobsite during construction. During the course of construction, mark on these prints any changes which are made, noting particularly locations for those items which will need to be located for servicing. At completion of job, mark each sheet "As-Built Drawings", date and deliver to Architect.

B. OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS: Provide four hours of instruction on operation and maintenance of the installed systems to the Owner's designated personnel upon completion of the system's installation.

C. CLOSEOUT MANUALS: At completion of job, furnish three copies of spare parts lists and operating instructions for all equipment furnished under this Division. These lists and instructions shall be published by the manufacturer of the equipment. Bind in 3-ring binders with project name.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 00 00-4

D. SPARE PARTS: Upon completion of the installation, deliver to the Owner all tools and spare parts that are furnished by the Equipment Manufacturer for use with the equipment furnished under this Contract.

1.13 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. All submittals shall be submitted in PDF form. Submittal will be reviewed with comments incorporated in this PDF. After final approval, Contractor shall provide a hard copy for use at the project site.

B. The purpose of these submittals is to attempt to aid the contractor in such a manner that improper or unacceptable materials are not delivered to or installed on the job. Shop drawings shall be approved before installation of the material under consideration. Approval of these submittals shall not be construed as releasing The Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at completion of construction.

C. Shop Drawings shall consist of published ratings of capacity data, detailed construction drawings, wiring and control diagrams, performance curves, installation instructions, manufacturer's installation drawings and other pertinent data. Where the literature is submitted covering a group or series of similar items, the item under consideration shall be clearly indicated. Drawings shall be submitted showing revisions to equipment layouts due to use of alternate or substitute equipment. The front sheet of each copy of the submittal shall have the following typed information:

01 Job name and location.

02 General Contractor's name, address, Project Manager's name and telephone number.

03 Submitting Sub-contractor's name, address, Project Manager's name and telephone number.

04 Suppliers company name, address, salesman's name and telephone number.

D. Shop Drawings are required for but are not limited to the following items:

Plumbing Carriers, Drains & Cleanouts Roof Pipe Supports Insulation Plumbing Fixtures & Equipment

E. If a submittal is returned to the Contractor marked “Rejected” or “Revise and Resubmit”, only one (1) additional submittal will be permitted without the Contractor incurring charges for the additional re-submittals. SEG shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any expense in connection with any necessary submission in addition to the two (2) submissions allowed. Contractor will be billed by SEG at a rate of $125/hr. for these occurrences.

1.14 PLUMBING INSPECTIONS

A. GENERAL: Contractor shall formally request inspections of any and all plumbing systems installations. Inspections shall include but not be limited to: pipe tests, underground installations prior to backfill, rough-in installations, wall cover inspections, above ceiling inspections and final inspection.

B. INSPECTION REPORTS: After each inspection, the Engineer will generate an inspection report and distribute promptly. The Contractor will then be given 7 working days from date of report to address all deficiencies listed on the report. The General Contractor shall verify that all items on each inspection report have been addressed by their subcontractors in this time period. Once verified the General Contractor shall sign-


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 00 00-5

off on each deficiency listed on the report and return the signed-off copy of the inspection report to the Architect and Engineer via e-mail.

C. Contractor shall provide a MINIMUM of 48 hour notice prior to requested inspection time, no exceptions.

D. INSPECTION REPORTS: After each inspection, SEG will generate an inspection report and distribute promptly. The Contractor will then be given 7 working days from date of report to address all deficiencies listed on the report. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall verify that all items on each inspection report have been addressed by their subcontractors in this time period. Once verified the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall sign-off on each deficiency listed on the report and return the signed-off copy of the inspection report to SEG via e-mail. After the signed-off report is returned to SEG, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall request a re-inspection by SEG to close the report. If after 7 working days no re-inspection is requested by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR to close a report, SEG reserves the right to re-inspect whenever our schedule allows, with these re-inspections still being subject to Paragraph E below.

E. TEST REJECTIONS AND RE-INSPECTIONS: If a test is rejected or a re-inspection of an issued SEG Inspection Report is found to NOT be completely addressed, only ONE (1) additional inspection will be permitted without the Contractor incurring charges for each additional inspection required. SEG shall be reimbursed $500 by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR for expenses in connection with EACH inspection in addition to the two (2) inspections allowed.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 22 05 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 05 00-1

SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS



B. The General Plumbing Requirements as specified in Sections 22, apply to the work specified in this Section.

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS

2.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING

1. Coordinate the work with other trades to arrange for all holes, chases, and other spaces necessary for the installation of all components of the plumbing systems. Inform the other trades in ample time for these to be provided. Failure to comply with this requirement may necessitate cutting and patching work. If such work becomes necessary, it will be done under this Section of the specifications, and shall conform to all applicable requirements of other Sections of the Specifications.

2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL

1. All structural steel used for the purpose of fabricating pipe supports, pipe guides, pipe anchors and equipment supports, shall conform to ASTM Designation A-36. All steel used for these purposes shall be new, clean, straight and galvanized.

2.3 CONCRETE PADS

1. All equipment mounted on the floor shall have a concrete housekeeping pad. Concrete pads shall be sized for the equipment to be supplied. Pad shall exceed base dimensions by approximately 4" all around. Reinforce pads rebar including #4 bar around perimeter. Tool pad to form chamfered edge. Nominal thickness shall be 4”. Refer to details for outdoor equipment.

2.4 PIPE SUPPORTS

1. GENERAL: Provide pipe supports and guides of size and type to support pipe as well as limit movement. Minimum size hanger rod shall be 3/8”. Piping connected to a piece of equipment shall have a support located near enough to the equipment that there will be no pipe weight supported by the equipment. In no case shall the nearest support be more than two feet horizontally from the connection point. Pipe support material shall be selected to be compatible with the pipe material to prevent galvanic corrosion. Un-insulated copper piping shall be wrapped with gas wrap tape at each hanger (minimum 2” beyond hanger), and supports shall be hot dipped copper clad or plastic covered. Vertical copper piping shall have a minimum on one intermediate support if over five feet.

2. HORIZONTAL PIPING SUPPORT SPACING: As recommended by support manufacturer, but spaced not more than listed below:

Pipe Size Steel Pipe Other Pipe

1" & Smaller 6 Feet 4 Feet


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 05 00-2

1¼" & 1½" 8 Feet 5 Feet

2" 8 Feet 5 Feet

2½" to 4" 8 Feet 6 Feet

6" and Larger 8 Feet 6 Feet

3. SUPPORT FROM ABOVE: Support piping near roof or upper floor from structure if sufficient strength exists. Use a method suitable for type of construction and of sufficient strength. Use threaded steel hanger rods of diameter required to safely support loads. Minimum size hanger rod shall be 3/8”. Install rods through holes drilled in beam flanges, 1½" x 1½" x 8" angles welded to structural members or top cord slot at joist panel points and secure with large washers and nuts. Refer to structural drawing details for additional information. Hangers shall be manufactured by Grinnell or Tolco. Do not use perforated strap.

01 SINGLE RUNS OF PIPE, NO EXPANSION PROBLEM: Adjustable clevis type Grinnell Figure 260.

02 MULTIPLE RUNS: Trapeze hangers.

03 BEAM CLAMPS: Grinnell Figure 92 for smaller pipe

04 BEAM CLAMPS: Grinnell Figure 228 (storm or sanitary 8” and larger)

4. SUPPORT FROM BELOW: All piping near the floor, or where ceiling structure does not have sufficient strength, or where there is no ceiling shall be supported from below. Support members shall be steel pipe with base plates, or welded steel structure suitably braced. Unless described by detail on the drawings, provide Tolco Pipe Pier Supports four foot on center to support piping on the roof. Select for proper weight loading.

5. SUPPORT MATERIAL FINISH: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel. Provide hot dipped copper clad supports for copper piping.

6. PIPE SADDLES: Install 18 gauge, formed galvanized sheets at each support point for insulated pipe, shaped to fit pipe, and covering bottom half of pipe. Length at saddle shall be not less than twice the insulation outside diameter, 16” minimum length. Provide compressible gasketing between non-insulated plastic pipe and hangers. Provide insulating material between dissimilar metal.

7. PLUMBING CHASE PIPING: Plumbing piping located in chases and at individual fixtures not located at chases shall be rigidly supported and aligned using the Sumner Pipe Support and Alignment System, Hubbard Holdrite System or Unistrut with U-bolts and pipe clips.

8. SWAY BRACING: All horizontal no-hub cast iron piping larger than 4” shall have sway bracing per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.5 VALVE AND FITTING SIZES

1. All hand valves, fittings and other piping accessories shall be size of the line in which installed unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

2.6 VALVES, STRAINERS AND DEVICES

1. GENERAL: All pressures shown below are minimum working pressures. Provide memory stops for valves used for throttling service. All devices shall suitable for domestic water service.

2. BALL VALVE: Provide for 2" and smaller pipe: Bronze body, threaded connection, full port, Teflon seat, stainless steel trim, extension stem for insulation. Nibco T-585-66-LF-


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 05 00-3

EL

3. GATE VALVE: Provide for copper pipe 2½" and larger only: 150# bronze, threaded connection, union bonnet, solid wedge and rising stem. Nibco F-617-0. Nibco LD-2000-3, 200 psig butterfly valve with lever-lock operator shall be acceptable in lieu of gate valve.

4. GAS VALVES: Ball type ANSI B16.33-1981, ANSI B16.38-1978 or UL 842-1980 approved and rated at the gas pressure of application. Nibco T-580-70-UL

5. SMALL GAS COCKS: Nibco T-585-70-UL

6. CHECK: 2" and under, 125# bronze body, bronze swing check with Teflon seat; 2½" and over 125# iron body, flanged, bronze trim. Nibco T-413-Y-LF or W-920-W-LF

7. UNIONS: Brass insert, ground joint

8. INSULATION PROVISIONS: Valves on insulated lines shall have stems extending through insulation.

9. INSTALLATION: Ball and butterfly valves shall be installed such that handle for valve is positioned on the side of the pipe and is pulled down to close the valve. All valves above a ceiling shall be installed within 24” of the ceiling.

10. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Kitz, Viega, Apollo and Nibco

2.7 VALVE INSTALLATION

1. Ball and butterfly valves shall be installed such that handle for valve is positioned on the side of the pipe and is pulled down to close the valve. Provide access panels of adequate size for concealed valves. All valves above a ceiling shall be installed within 24” of the ceiling.

2.8 ACCESS PANELS

A. REQUIRED: Panels of size and location to provide access to all concealed valves and equipment. Obtain Architect's approval of locations and type before ordering.

B. SIZE: Minimum 12" x 12", larger where required for adequate service access.

C. WALL MOUNTED: Best suited for surface materials in which installed, constructed of 12 gauge stainless steel, complete with anchor straps, concealed hinges, dust tight door and cylinder lock, all doors keyed alike. Prime coated steel is acceptable for installation in painted surfaces. U. L. Listed for 1-1/2 hour rating.

D. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Acudor, Mi-Fab and Zurn.

2.9 CLEANING DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

1. Flush thoroughly, then sterilize with chlorine solution for minimum 24 hours. Strength of chlorine solution shall be a minimum dosage 50 ppm, and methods must comply with local Code and Health Authorities. System shall be flushed afterwards with clean water until remaining chlorine content is less than 0.2 ppm. At completion, there must be no discernible odor. Post warnings until sterilization is complete.

2.10 TESTING WATER PIPING SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL: Test all piping systems to assure that they are absolutely leak free. Pipe to be insulated shall be proved leak free before pipe is concealed. SEG to witness and approve all testing. If piping is concealed prior to SEG witnessing and approving testing, contractor shall expose entire piping system and re-test piping for SEG to witness and


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 05 00-4

approve.

2. PRESSURE TEST METHOD: Hydraulically test domestic water piping with a minimum test pressure of 125 psig. Maintain pressure for 8 hours. During this test period, inspect all pipe fittings and accessories in the piping and eliminate all leaks.

3. FINAL TEST: Subject each piping system to its normal operating pressure and temperature for not less than twenty-four hours. The piping systems must remain absolutely tight during this period. The satisfactory completion of any test or series of tests will not relieve the contractor of responsibility for ultimate proper and satisfactory operation of piping systems and their accessories.

2.11 TESTING SANITARY PIPING SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL: Test all piping systems to assure that they are absolutely leak free. Test for sanitary piping shall include the first fitting above slab (i.e. transition fitting between underground PVC and cast iron). Pipes that will contain water or sewage shall be leak tested with water. Pipe to be insulated shall be proved leak free before pipe is concealed. SEG to witness and approve all testing. If piping is concealed prior to SEG witnessing and approving testing, contractor shall expose entire piping system and re-test piping for SEG to witness and approve.

2. PRESSURE TEST METHOD: For drainage systems, plug outlet and fill piping with water to top of vent. System shall remain plugged and filled with water until after system below grade is backfilled and compacted per specification. Multistory systems shall be tested one floor at a time at ten feet of hydrostatic head without leaks. Maintain pressure for 8 hours. During this test period, inspect all pipe fittings and accessories in the piping and eliminate all leaks.

3. UNDERGROUND PIPE CLEANING AND CERTIFICATION: All underground sanitary sewer piping shall be hydro-flushed or rodded prior to substantial completion.

2.12 SLEEVES

1. Provide sleeves for all piping passing through walls, floors not on grade and roof slabs. Make sleeves of galvanized pipe and sized to provide clearance of 1/4" around piping or pipe insulation if pipe is insulated. Set end of sleeve flush with the surrounding surface of wall or ceiling in which sleeve is installed. Floor slab sleeves shall extend 3" above floor level. Provide vented sleeves for all gas piping below floor slabs, paved areas and unventilated walls and ceiling cavities. Pipes through grade beams shall be sleeved per structural engineer’s drawings. As a minimum pipe through structure shall be wrapped with 1” thick closed cell pipe insulation.

2. Sleeves through floors and through fire walls shall be fire caulked or otherwise protected to maintain the fire rating of the wall.

2.13 PLATES

1. Provide chromium plated wall and ceiling plates for all exposed piping, at point piping passes through walls or ceilings. Plates shall be large enough to completely cover pipe sleeves. On insulated piping, inside diameter of plates shall just exceed outside diameter of pipe covering. Plates may be omitted for pipe sizes larger than 3".

2.14 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

1. Provide dielectric insulating unions at all connections between dissimilar metals.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 05 00-5

2.15 MISCELLANEOUS COPPER PIPING

1. GENERAL: Provide all required piping not specifically shown on the drawings but necessary for the proper operation of the systems and equipment. Piping materials, methods of installation, fittings, valves, etc., shall conform to that specified for similar piping systems.

2. PLUMBING CONNECTIONS: Make all required connections between HVAC Systems and Plumbing Systems. Pipe extensions to equipment shall be same materials as supply. Provide a valve at each and every connection between Plumbing and HVAC Systems.

3. TRAP PRIMER PIPING: Use Type K copper. Piping in contact with concrete shall be installed in a protective sleeve.

4. MISCELLANEOUS DRAINS: Provide drain line to floor drain from backflow preventers, relief valves and other plumbing equipment with automatic drains.

2.16 ROUGH-INS AND CONNECTIONS

1. SPECIAL FIXTURES AND TRIM: Provide rough-ins and connections to cabinet sinks and all trim where shown on the Drawings. Fixtures and trim requiring rough-ins and connections will be furnished loose under the special equipment section of those specifications, installation shall be under this Section. Refer to Architectural Specifications for information on prefab cabinets. Provide stops, risers and P-traps under this Section for prefab cabinets and kitchen equipment provided under the Architectural Specifications.

2. COORDINATION: The piping and connections for these areas have been indicated approximately. The exact arrangements and locations of various piping and connections shall be determined by shop drawings provided under other sections of these Specifications.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation PLUMBING INSULATION Aldine Independent School District SECTION 22 07 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 07 00-1

SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install all insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications.

B. Insulation materials manufactured by the following list of companies will be acceptable provided their materials conform to these specifications: Armstrong, CertainTeed, Knauf, Koolphen, Manville and Owens-Corning.

C. Flame Spread and Smoke Requirements:

01 All jackets, adhesives, coatings, insulating materials and vapor barrier mastics for piping and equipment shall have a flame spread not higher than 25 and smoke developed rating not higher than 50.

02 All materials containers shall have a U. L. Label.


2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. GENERAL: Insulate all cold and hot water supply and return piping, including booster heater piping and tempered water piping.

B. MATERIALS: 1" thick factory molded pipe covering insulation made with fiberglass having a density not less than 3 pounds per cubic foot. Conductivity (k) shall be .25 or less at 100° mean temperature difference. Insulation shall have a factory attached fire retardant jacket.

C. EXECUTION: Secure all laps and joints with staples at 4" on center. Provide 3" butt strips at each joint between sections. Insulate fittings with pre-molded cover of same materials and thickness as pipe covering.

2.2 LAP AND JOINT ATTACHMENT

A. Self-sealing type jackets will be acceptable provided the laps are sealed per the manufacturers recommendations.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation BUILDING WATER DISTRIBUTION Aldine Independent School District SECTION 22 11 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 11 00-1

SECTION 22 11 00 BUILDING WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL





A. Piping shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner parallel to building coordinates with vertical drops.

B. Piping shall be concealed in wall, chases and above ceilings except in the vicinity of equipment such as water heaters.

C. Piping in the vicinity of equipment shall be arranged to not interfere with access panels and maintenance space. Provide unions, flanges and shutoff valves to allow removal of the equipment and its subassemblies without having to remove excessive amounts of building piping or drain water systems.

D. All materials shall conform to the City Building Code. All piping, fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 EXTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER

A. GENERAL: This paragraph relates to all water piping below grade, all piping above grade outside of building and piping in contact with concrete.

B. MATERIALS: Type "K" copper rigid water tubing per ASTM B-42 and ASTM B-88, with solder type ASME B 16.18 cast bronze, or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy fittings. Piping in contact with concrete shall be protected with Benjamin Foster 60-25 mastic or be PVC coated.

C. INSTALLATION: Clean inside and outside of all tubing and fittings. Make up joints with lead-free solder. Solder shall be 95.5% tin, 4% copper, 0.5% silver (lead free, antimony free, zinc-free). Silvabrite 100 by Engelhard Corporation or approved equal.

D. TESTING: Test in accordance with recommendations of AWWA.

2.2 INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER

A. GENERAL: This paragraph relates to all piping inside of building.

B. MATERIALS:

01 All piping shall be hard drawn, copper water tube, Type "L" per ASTM B-88, with solder type ASME B 16.18 cast bronze, or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper alloy fittings, made up with lead-free solder. Victaulic copper piping connection system or Grinnell grooved system may be used for sizes 3” and larger.

02 All individual branches serving fixtures, from surface of walls to connections to

Lane School Renovation BUILDING WATER DISTRIBUTION Aldine Independent School District SECTION 22 11 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 11 00-2

fixtures or equipment, shall be chrome plated.

03 Solder shall be 95.5% tin, 4% copper, 0.5% silver (lead free, antimony free, zinc-free). Silvabrite 100 by Engelhard Corporation or approved equal.

04 Press Fit System is by Viega, Apollo or approved equal is acceptable.

C. AIR CHAMBERS: Install in each water branch, at each fixture and each piece of water supplied equipment. Locate in chases or walls as close to fixture or equipment as possible. Chambers shall be minimum 24" high Type L copper.

D. WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS: Provide on both hot and cold water branches in addition to air chambers. Arresters shall be Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. or Sioux Chief, size and location shall be based on pipe size, fixture unit count and manufacturer’s recommendation.

E. VALVES: Provide shutoff valve in branch line to each piece of water consuming equipment or fixture. Stop valves serving plumbing fixtures do not require additional valve unless shown on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation BUILDING SANITARY SEWERAGE Aldine Independent School District SECTION 22 13 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 13 00-1

SECTION 22 13 00 BUILDING SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 - GENERAL





A. Piping shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner parallel to building coordinates with vertical drops. Piping shown underground shall be buried a minimum of 12 inches to top of pipe. Piping in the vicinity of equipment shall not interfere with access panels and maintenance space.

B. Piping shall be concealed in walls, chases and above ceilings except in mechanical equipment areas.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 SANITARY SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING

A. GENERAL: Provide for all fixtures, equipment and floor drains as indicated and as required by Code. Provide appropriate wye fittings and bends. Do not use sanitary tees. Do not use any fittings prohibited by the codes. Cast iron pipe shall be manufactured by Charlotte or Tyler Pipe. All piping shall comply with ASTM D1785/D2665.

B. MATERIALS:

01 ABOVE SLAB: Standard weight, centrifugally cast, bell and spigot cast iron, standard weight fittings per ASTM A-74, with Ty-seal joints. No hub piping with no hub clamps may be used if proper pipe supports are installed to maintain uniform slope and rigidity. Heavy weight, medium duty no-hub clamps shall be installed on all sanitary piping, excluding vents. Piping above inaccessible ceilings shall be bell and spigot cast iron.

02 BELOW SLAB: Schedule 40, DWV PVC

03 BELOW GRADE, BEYOND FIVE FEET FROM BUILDING: Schedule 40, DWV PVC. Sizes over 6" may be heavy wall SDR-26 PVC sewer pipe meeting ASTM D3034 requirements.

C. GASKETS: Hub and spigot gaskets shall be Tyler Ty-Seal, positive double seal compression type conforming to ASTM C564. No-hub joints shall be made with gasket and one piece stainless steel, heavy weight, medium duty no-hub clamps. Clamps shall be Husky SD 2000 or equal by Mission or Mi-Fab.

D. CLEANOUTS: Install at each change of direction and at locations indicated on drawings. Exact location shall be reviewed by Architect prior to setting. Cleanouts shall be size of the line served, except maximum size of 4". Provide double cleanout for two-way rodding after each pipe exits the building. Wall cleanouts behind access panels shall be within 2” of the panel for ease of use.

Lane School Renovation BUILDING SANITARY SEWERAGE Aldine Independent School District SECTION 22 13 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 13 00-2

E. DRAINS: Floor drains installed in floors with waterproofing membranes shall have clamping collars.

F. GRADING: Continuously grade all drainage piping. Inside building, grade 1/4" per foot for lines 3" and smaller. Grade 1/8" per foot for line 4" and larger. Piping below grade beyond five feet from building shall have maximum continuous slope consistent with site conditions of existing mains to which they will be connected or 1/8" per foot whichever is less (1/4" per foot for lines smaller than 4").

G. SYSTEM CLEANING: Hydroflush or rod out all sections of sanitary waste lines prior to substantial completion.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. GENERAL: Install cleanouts at bends, angles, and at ends of all waste and sewer piping and as noted on Drawings. Bring all cleanouts up to grade and make accessible. All cleanouts shall have extra heavy PVC plugs. For cleanouts in unpaved areas, install in 18" x 18" x 6" thick concrete pad. The top of cleanout shall be 2” above grade with the pad sloping to edges at grade level. For cleanouts in paving, sidewalks, etc., install flush with finished surface. Refer to detail on Architectural Drawings.

B. MATERIALS:

01 UNFINISHED AREAS AND CHASES: Mi-Fab C1450 or Zurn Z-1440 cast iron caulking ferrule with countersunk head with PVC plug.

02 FINISHED WALLS: Mi-Fab C1450 or Zurn Z-1440 cast iron caulking ferrule with countersunk slotted head with PVC plug (full size up to 4”). Provide Mi-Fab UA-SS-VP square smooth finish, 8”x8”, 16 gauge stainless steel, vandal-proof access cover, flanged frame with anchoring lugs. Also provide flanged frame for pre-finished or CMU walls.

03 FINISHED FLOORS: MiFab C1100-R-3-6 or Zurn Z-1440-VP floor cleanout with adjustable extension housing, cast iron ferrule with PVC plug (full size up to 4”), round scoriated stainless steel, secured, vandal-proof access cover and round frame. Provide top style compatible with floor type. Carpet: - carpet flange (carpet markers will not be acceptable); Terrazzo: - top with terrazzo recess.

04 OUTSIDE AREAS: Mi-Fab C1100-XR-4-6 or Zurn Z-1440-HD-VP extra heavy duty, vandal-proof ductile iron cover, cast iron ferrule for caulk, PVC plug (full size up to 4”) and positioning set screws.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation BUILDING NATURAL GAS PIPING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 22 16 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 16 00-1

SECTION 22 16 00 BUILDING NATURAL GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL





A. Piping shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner parallel to building coordinates with vertical drops.

B. Piping shall be sloped to prevent pockets. Slope toward equipment and provide dirt leg.

C. Piping in the vicinity of equipment shall be arranged to not interfere with access panels and maintenance space. Provide unions, flanges and shutoff valves to allow removal of the equipment and its subassemblies.

D. All piping, fittings and valves shall be manufactured in the United States of America by National Tube, Republic and Youngstown, or approved equal.


2.1 NATURAL GAS, INSIDE BUILDING

A. GENERAL: Extend gas to all fixtures, appliances and equipment as required.

B. MATERIALS ABOVE GRADE: Schedule 40 black steel, ASTM ERW A-53, Grade B or ASTM A106. Joints may be welded or screwed, except that piping in inaccessible locations and all piping 2½" and larger shall be welded. Threaded nipples less than 1/2” shall be Schedule 80. All thread nipples are not allowed. All bolts, nuts and all thread used in the piping system and components shall be cadmium plated to resist rust. Final connections at low pressure appliances shall be corrugated flexible brass connections with epoxy coating, complying with ANSI ANS-Z21-24-1981, minimum pressure rating of 1/2 PSI. Science lab gas cocks shall be “hard piped” with schedule 40 black steel as specified above. Flex connections will not be accepted at gas cocks.

C. MATERIALS BELOW GRADE: Do not install piping below grade unless specifically shown on the Drawings.

D. INSTALLATION:

01 Do not install any gas piping in unventilated spaces including inside walls, unless totally encased with airtight sleeving. Sleeving shall be all metallic construction, welded or screwed black steel, Schedule 10 or heavier. Sleeves shall be vented as shown on the Drawings.

02 Provide an all brass lever handle gas cock in an accessible location branch line at each individual piece of gas consuming equipment.

Lane School Renovation BUILDING NATURAL GAS PIPING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 22 16 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 16 00-2

03 Branch connections to gas consuming equipment shall be size indicated on the Drawings up to points immediately adjacent to equipment. Do not reduce to size of equipment until immediately adjacent to equipment.

04 All welded connections shall be made with bevel-ended pipe by certified welders.

05 All branch connections shall be made off the top of the main line.

E. PAINTING: All gas piping shall be painted with two coats of industrial grade, yellow epoxy paint.

F. ACCEPTABLE PIPE MANUFACTURERS: National Tube, Republic and Youngstown, or approved equal.

2.2 GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS:

A. Size for full connected load, with stop valves on both inlet and outlet connections.

B. Equip with internal relief valve to vent full capacity if regulator fails wide open. Extend full size vent pipe without reduction to the outside.

C. Provide weather and bug proof screening on vent.

D. Select orifices for inlet pressures established by the gas company serving the building and for outlet pressures as required to serve the proper pressure at the items of equipment being supplied.

E. Outlet pressure shall be field adjustable.

F. Capacities as indicated in Schedule plus 10%.

G. Unit shall conform to latest published ANSI Code.

H. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: American Meter Company, Equimeter, Fisher and Rockwell, or approved equal.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES Aldine Independent School District SECTION 22 42 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 42 00-1

SECTION 22 42 00 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL





A. Provide all fixtures, drains, equipment, accessories and specialties indicated on the Contract Drawings, as specified, and as required under Section General Plumbing.

B. All fixtures and equipment shall be constructed of materials that are non-hazardous to the user.

C. Faucets, shower heads, shower valves and similar items shall have chrome plated brass handles, spouts, plates and trim.

D. Include all necessary accessories and trim pieces such as escutcheons, traps, supply tubing, stop and basin cocks, etc. All brass piping shall be seamless brass tubing. Fittings shall be heavy cast brass. Nipples shall be extra heavy. All exposed pipe shall be chrome plated.

E. All flush valves shall have screwdriver angle stops with cap covers, vacuum breakers and be chrome plated.

F. P-traps shall be chrome plated, cast brass body, adjustable type with bottom cleanout plug and 17 gauge tubing outlet with wall flange.

G. Provide 1/2" x 3/8" angle valve, loose key, supply stops with flexible supply risers for fixtures. Provide Marvel mechanical coupling for connection to copper piping.

H. Handicap fixtures shall have handicap compatible trim including stops and supplies, drains and valves. Provide Truebro Handi Lav-Guard vandal proof insulation kit over p-trap supplies and all sharp edges. Prowrap by McGuire or Trap Wrap by Brocar Products, Inc., will also be acceptable. Controls for flush valves shall be mounted on the wide side of toilet areas as required by the handicap codes.

I. Install Symmons 7-210-CK mixing valve on HW supply side of all lavatories and sinks, including fixtures not provided by Plumbing Contractor (i.e. lab sinks, kitchen faucets, etc.). Refer to Plumbing Drawings.

1.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. WATER CLOSETS, LAVATORIES AND URINALS: American Standard or Toto

B. SINKS AND SERVICE SINKS: Elkay or Just

C. TOILET SEATS: Bemis 1655-C/SS with stainless steel, self-sustaining check hinge or equal by Church

D. FAUCETS: Chicago or Zurn (Zurn shall have 5 year warranty)

E. SELF CLOSTING FAUCET: Symmons

Lane School Renovation COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES Aldine Independent School District SECTION 22 42 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 22 42 00-2

F. MANUAL FLUSH VALVES: Sloan Royal or Zurn Aquavantage

G. FIXTURE STOPS, P-TRAPS AND RISERS: McGuire or Zurn

H. CARRIERS: Mi-Fab, Wade or Zurn


2.1 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. GENERAL:

01 Provide fixture supports for all water closets, lavatories, urinals, drinking fountains and other wall hung fixtures.

02 All foot supports on all types of fixture supports shall be the type that does not extend out from under the wall on which the fixture is mounted.

03 Construction and installation of the supports shall be as required to suit the job conditions, the space available, and the riser diagrams and details on the Drawings.

B. CARRIERS:

01 WATER CLOSET CARRIER: Mi-Fab MC-10, 13, 14, 15 adjustable, horizontal or vertical closet carrier as required by waste piping. Provide hanger-rod support feet for carriers that span wide chases. Provide flush valve support with all water closet carriers.

02 LAVATORY CARRIER: Mi-Fab MC-41 with concealed arms.

03 URINAL CARRIER: Mi-Fab MC-32 with hanger and bearing plate.

2.2 FIXTURES

A. See Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS Aldine Independent School District SECTION 23 00 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 00 00-1

SECTION 23 00 00 GENERAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 INTENT OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. GENERAL: Drawings and Specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work described in either of them, will be work required under this contract. Should any work required by the drawings and specifications be in violation of any Federal, State, County or City laws, ordinance or regulation, those laws and regulations shall prevail, and shall be complied with by the Contractor as a part of this work with no extra compensation.

B. DRAWINGS: The drawings are schematic in nature, intended to show the various components of the system approximately to scale and indicate how they are to be integrated with other parts of the building. Determine exact locations by close coordination with the Owner’s Representative, job measurements, determining the requirements of other trades and reviewing all contract documents. The Drawings indicated general routing of the various parts of the systems, but do not indicated all fittings and offsets which may be required to fit the system into spaces allotted for them. The Contract shall include these items as required for a complete installation.

C. BASIS OF DESIGN: Equipment that is scheduled is the basis of the design and has been coordinated for space, installation and electrical requirements. Equipment and models from other acceptable manufacturers have not been verified or coordinated. Contractor shall verify these requirements prior to using other equipment in his bid and include any additional costs for installation of the substitute equipment.

1.3 MATERIALS

A. GENERAL: Manufacturer's printed directions shall be followed for preparing, assembling, installing, erecting and cleaning manufactured materials or equipment, unless otherwise directed. Materials, when not otherwise definitely specified, shall conform to applicable National Specifications and Standards. All materials shall be certified to not contain any asbestos or other material banned by the Environmental Protection Agency. Lead shall not be used in any material, pipe or solder in contact with the domestic water system.

1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. ELECTRICAL: Power wiring is specified in the Electrical Section. Interlock and control wiring (any voltage) is specified under this Section. Controllers and starters, unless part of a motor control center, are specified under this Section.

B. OPENINGS: Various other sections. The locations of all inserts and openings shall be determined under this Section and coordinated with the other Sections in ample time to avoid cutting new construction.

C. EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS: Refer to structural drawings, details and notes for specific support and pipe hanging requirements. Specific loading and attachment methods shall be followed to assure that individual structural members are not overloaded.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 00 00-2

1.5 PERMIT, FEES AND APPROVALS

A. The contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits and fees to perform his work. He shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work specified or shown on the drawings. This applies to Federal, State and Local Codes and Requirements. Approval from the various insuring and inspection authorities shall also be obtained. Refer to Architectural sections for additional information.


A. The Contractor shall be familiar with the Drawings and Specifications and shall have examined the premises and understand the conditions under which he will be obligated to operate in performing the contract. No additional compensation shall be allowed for failure to fully understand the requirements.

1.7 GUARANTEE

A. All materials, apparatus and equipment furnished and installed under this Section of these Specifications shall be new and free from any defects when accepted by the Owner and shall be guaranteed in writing for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner unless noted to have extended warranties.

1.8 NOISE AND VIBRATIONS

A. The Contractor shall guarantee that the entire system and its component items of equipment, as installed by him, shall operate without objectionable vibration or noises, as determined by the Architect. If, in the opinion of the Architect, objectionable vibration or transmission thereof to the building occurs, the Contractor shall execute such remedial measures as are necessary to eliminate such unsatisfactory operating conditions and the material and labor thereby required shall be performed at the Contractor's expense.


A. COORDINATION: The Contractor shall cooperate with other trades on the job and make installations in the proper sequence during the construction of the buildings, and he shall notify the Architect well in advance of construction of all interference of his work with that of other trades and of building construction. This notification shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibilities to coordinate his work with the total project.


C. CLEAN-UP: Keep area of operations free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish at all times. All piping above accessible ceilings shall be cleaned of cement, plaster and other construction debris prior to being concealed. The parts of the Plumbing installation which are to be painted or insulated shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, grease, oil spots and other materials in preparation for painting or insulating.

D. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION: Do not deliver equipment to jobsite until it is actually needed for installation. Protect equipment from damage due to construction activities and the weather. Equipment allowed to stand in weather will be rejected and Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment at no cost to Owner.

E. CUTTING AND PATCHING: Coordinate the work with other trades to arrange for all holes, chases, and other spaces necessary for the installation of all components of the mechanical systems. Inform the other trades in ample time for these to be provided.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 00 00-3

1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS


B. The purpose of these submittals is to attempt to aid the contractor in such a manner that improper or unacceptable materials are not delivered to or installed on the job. Shop drawings shall be approved before installation of the material under consideration. Approval of these submittals shall not be construed as releasing The Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at completion of construction.

C. Shop Drawings shall consist of published ratings of capacity data, detailed construction drawings, wiring and control diagrams, performance curves, installation instructions, manufacturer's installation drawings and other pertinent data. Where the literature is submitted covering a group or series of similar items, the item under consideration shall be clearly indicated. Ductwork shop drawings shall include one printed set of drawings in addition to the PDF. Drawings shall be submitted showing revisions to equipment layouts due to use of alternate or substitute equipment. The front sheet of each copy of the submittal shall have the following typed information:


02 General Contractor's name, address, project manager's name and telephone number.

03 Submitting Sub-contractor's name, address, project manager's name and telephone number.

04 Suppliers company name, address, salesman's name and telephone number.

D. Equipment that has regional representation shall only be supplied by the regional representative that serves the area where the project is located. The regional representative’s name and signature shall be included with the shop drawing.

E. Shop Drawings are required for but are not limited to the following items:

Rooftop Units Fans & Roof Curbs Air Devices Insulation Controls

F. Approval of these submittals shall not be construed as releasing the contractor from compliance with the contract Documents. They are a means of coordinating the work and aiding in the proper selection and installation of equipment. Do not release items such as fire dampers and starters until associated equipment or ductwork drawings are approved. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at the completion of construction and adjustments of the system.

G. If a submittal is returned to the Contractor marked “Rejected” or “Revise and Resubmit”, only one (1) additional submittal will be permitted without the Contractor incurring charges for the additional re-submittals. SEG shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any expense in connection with any necessary submission in addition to the two (2) submissions allowed. Contractor will be billed by SEG at a rate of $125/hr for these occurrences.


A. ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM: No portion of the total contract will be declared substantially complete until the automatic temperature controls for that portion has been demonstrated to be complete and functioning as intended. The temperature control


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 00 00-4

system shall maintain all of the space temperatures at plus or minus two degrees of set point.

B. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: Obtain a set of project drawings and keep these at jobsite during construction. During the course of construction, mark on these prints any changes which are made, noting particularly locations for those items which will need to be located for servicing. At completion of job, mark each sheet "As-Built Drawings", date and deliver to Architect.



A. In areas of demolition, contractor shall remove all HVAC equipment, ductwork, piping and devices not to be reused. Any material that has salvage value shall be offered to the Owner, and if accepted, delivered to his warehouse. If not accepted, it shall be properly disposed of with the other construction debris.

B. Where existing systems serve other areas as well, they shall remain active in those areas. Cap, patch and relocate ducts and piping to keep systems operable.

C. General Contractor shall remove and replace ceilings, walls, floors and other finishes as necessary to install or modify mechanical systems.

D. Where ceilings are to be removed or replaced, remove and reinstall diffusers, grilles or other existing mechanical devices.

E. Relocate ductwork and piping as necessary to allow new or modified construction. Repair existing mechanical systems damaged by construction activities.

F. Where existing equipment is modified or replaced (MEP and Architectural) and interfaces with the Energy Management System, disconnect and reconnect EMS wiring, and replace sensors as necessary.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation HVAC INSULATION Aldine Independent School District SECTION 23 07 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-1

SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. The General Mechanical Requirements as specified in Sections 23, apply to the work specified in this Section.


A. Install all insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications.

B. Insulation materials manufactured by the following list of companies will be acceptable provided their materials conform to these specifications: Armstrong, CertainTeed, Knauf, Koolphen, Manville and Owens-Corning.

C. Flame Spread and Smoke Requirements:

01 All jackets, adhesives, coatings, insulating materials and vapor barrier mastics for piping and equipment shall have a flame spread not higher than 25 and smoke developed rating not higher than 50.

02 All materials containers shall have a U. L. Label.


2.1 DUCT INSULATION

A. GENERAL: Insulate all supply air ducts, return air ducts through un-insulated spaces and outside air ductwork, including kitchen hood supply air ducts and dryer vent. Insulate exhaust ducts down stream of inline fan backdraft damper. Insulate backs of air devices where ceiling above is not used as a return plenum.

B. DUCTS INSIDE: 2” thick, 1 pound density (Type 100) fiberglass flexible duct insulation, with a conductivity (k) value not more than 0.27 at 75° mean temperature difference for an installed R value of 6 or higher. Insulation shall have a factory adhered reinforced foil faced flame resistant Kraft paper vapor barrier. Wrap around duct with minimum lap of 2 inches each way, staple with 1/2" outward clinch staples 2” on center, secure on bottom of duct with water based, fire retardant adhesive (Foster 85-60 or Childers CP-127). For ducts 24” to 30” wide, provide one row of pins on bottom of duct, 16” on center. For wider ducts provide one row on bottom of duct for each 16” of width. Trim pins flush with retainer disk. Seal all with tape with Foster 30-80AF vapor barrier coating. For ducts in mechanical rooms, reduce spacing to 12” on center for each 12” of dimension (all sides of duct). Seal joints and seams with 3" wide FSK foil tape, including termination of flex ducts, and coat tape with Foster 30-80AF vapor barrier coating. Where insulation terminates at equipment (AHU, fan coil, VAV box, etc.) and where insulation is custom fitted to transitions and elbows, add glass cloth strip adhered with anti-fungal Foster 30-80AF vapor barrier coating between equipment and insulation cover. Coating permeance shall be 0.013 perms or less at 43 mil dry thickness as tested by ASTM E96 and meet ASTM D5590 with 0 growth rating.

C. DUCTS THROUGH NON FIREWALLS: Install reinforcing mesh on insulation for ducts

Lane School Renovation HVAC INSULATION Aldine Independent School District SECTION 23 07 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-2

passing through walls. Mesh shall extend 6” beyond wall on either side of the wall.

2.2 LAP AND JOINT ATTACHMENT

A. Self-sealing type jackets will be acceptable provided the laps are sealed per the manufacturers recommendations.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC Aldine Independent School District SECTION 23 09 23 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-1

SECTION 23 09 23 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS




A. DESCRIPTION: There is an existing Automated Logic Control System in the facility. The Contractor shall modify this Direct Digital Control (DDC) System to monitor and control the HVAC system revisions in the facility.

B. MANUFACTURERS: The control system shall be manufactured by the following controls companies and be installed by their authorized local representative:

01 Automated Logic

02 Reliable Controls/Unify Environmental Systems

C. EQUIPMENT: All DDC Temperature Control Equipment shall be the product of the approved controls manufacturer. Controls contractor shall provide surge suppression (TVSS) protection for their equipment.

D. WIRING: System shall have a dedicated control network and not rely on the building network other than an interface to allow viewing of the control system. The Electrical Contractor shall provide a 20A, 120 volt power circuit to a single point in each mechanical room. The Controls Contractor shall extend this circuit as necessary to perform the controls functions as specified. Interlock wiring between fire alarm system’s shut down relays and mechanical system starters, VFD’s and temperature controls devices shall be provided by the Temperature Controls Contractor. All low voltage control and interlock wiring shall be provided by the Controls Contractor. All wiring shall be run in conduit except plenum rated, low voltage wiring above accessible ceilings may be installed without conduit if supported near structure separate from other low voltage systems. The installation of wiring and conduit shall be per the NEC and any special requirements of the electrical sections of these specifications.

E. SUBMITTALS: Provide equipment information, complete wiring diagram, drawings showing equipment locations, sequences of operations and drawings of graphics to be provided. Submittals shall be electronic in pdf format. Refer to submittal requirements in the General HVAC Requirements Section.

F. WARRANTY: The temperature control system and its proper operation shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after substantial completion and any control devices which prove to be defective during the guarantee period shall be repaired or replaced without cost to the Owner. After the initial warranty period, an additional twelve month preventative maintenance contract shall be included in the base price of this Contract. This maintenance contract shall include quarterly preventive maintenance, all repair labor, parts and equipment. The system shall be warranted for parts and labor for a total of two years.

G. CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS: Provide three printed copies of the approved submittal with


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-2

wiring diagrams, sequences, floor plans and graphics updated to the final installation configuration.

H. TRAINING: Provide 2 hours of instructions on system operation to Owner's personnel during the closeout period of the project.

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 INSTALLATION

A. WIRING: All wiring shall be plenum rated and installed in conduit if not installed above an accessible ceiling.

B. SENSOR LOCATIONS: Locations in finished spaces shall be reviewed with the Architect before beginning any installation work. Mount all wall sensors as noted on the floor plans at 46" above finished floor.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. TEMPERATURE SENSORS

01 GENERAL: All sensors shall be thermister type (10K at 77°F) with output over the scheduled temperature range.

02 ROOM SENSORS: Flush mounted within a wall box with aluminum cover. Sensing range shall be 45° to 96° F with an accuracy of ±.25° F. Mount at +46".

03 OUTDOOR AIR SENSORS: Waterproof with sunshield over sensing element. Sensing range shall be -30° to 130° F with an accuracy of ±1° F.

04 DUCT AIR SENSORS: Duct mounted junction box containing electronics and with 9" long sensing probe. Sensing range shall be 32° to 134° F with an accuracy of ±1/2° F.

B. DAMPERS: Shall be of the opposed blade type with the frame constructed of 16 gage galvanized sheet steel formed into channels, riveted and corner brackets added to maintain perfect alignment of the damper. In the closed position, all edges of blades must stop against other blades or a fixed stop, in a manner to provide tight shut-off. Provide synthetic elastomer seals on all edges of damper blades. Blades shall consist of two formed sheets spot welded together for extra strength. Square pins shall be used along with oil impregnated sintered bronze bearings. Leakage shall be less than 1/2% based on 2000 FPM approach velocity at 4" w.g. static. Submit certified test data for a typical damper, showing leakage characteristics.

C. CURRENT SENSING RELAYS. Relays shall monitor status of motor loads. Switch shall have self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts rated for the application. The setpoint of the contact operation shall be field adjustable. Install on fans, cooling tower and vertical turbine pumps.

D. CONTROL RELAYS: Control relay contacts shall be rated for 150% of the loading application, with self-wiping, snap-acting Form C contacts, enclosed in dust proof enclosure. Relays shall have silver cadmium contacts with a minimum life span rating of one million operations. Relays shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices.

E. SOLID STATE RELAYS (SSR): Input/output isolation shall be greater than 10 billion ohms with a breakdown voltage of 150 V root mean square, or greater, at 60 Hz. The contact operating life shall be 10 million operations or greater. The ambient temperature range of SSRs shall be 20°F-140°F. Input impedance shall be greater than 500 ohms.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-3

Relays shall be rated for the application. Operating and release time shall be 10 milliseconds or less. Transient suppression shall be provided as an integral part of the relays.

2.3 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

01 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY: The BAS Contractor shall be fully responsibility for the complete installation and proper operation of the Building Automation System equipment, sensors and controls devices. After the installation, the contractor shall be responsible for "debugging" and calibration of the BAS, including software for the duration of the warranty. All equipment shall be the latest standard design that complies with the specification. During the warranty period, Contractor shall monitor system from his office and provide assistance to Owner. Should software control schemes provide unsatisfactory operation, as determined by the Engineer during the warranty period, Contractor shall modify control schemes, setpoints, timing sequences or other software features to provide satisfactory operation as a part of his warranty package.

02 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE: The system shall possess fully modular architecture that permits the expansion of the system through the addition of field modules, sensors and actuators. Module communications to be through a local area network (LAN). The central site system shall be used only as an interface to the LAN.

03 SYSTEM INTERFACE: Operator interface to the control system shall be graphical accessed through the internet. Provide district wide site map with each school listed and shown. Individual school controls system shall be viewed by selecting that school. The various systems, settings and operating conditions shall be viewed/modified though the various controls screens for that school.

B. GRAPHIC CONSTRUCTION:

01 COLOR VALUE: Space temperature and its deviation from zone setpoint shall be displayed on a floor plan map by color. These colors shall represent a defined temperature value and be implemented by the same standard throughout the entire system, including all graphic displays and parameter pages. The central site shall be able to display graphically, in up to 64 different colors, the following system information:

a. General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks.

b. Floor plan maps shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated automatically without operator action. Set point adjustment and color band displays shall be operator definable. Floor plan maps shall also show the relative position of sensors and mechanical equipment. Each zone shall display the setpoint temperature and measured temperature.

c. Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components servicing any zone through the use of pictorial representation of components. It shall also provide a current status of all I/O points being controlled and applicable to each piece of equipment including analog readouts in appropriate locations on the graphic representation of the setpoint and measured value.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-4

d. All system graphics shall come programmed and require no owner modification. Individual graphics shall be as minimum the following:

1) Each roof top unit

02 INFORMATION ACCESS: The following information shall be selectable from a menu available on various graphics:

Alarms Schedule graphs Message Schedule groups Module status Setpoints Programming parameters Trends Utilities

Programming, scheduling and setpoint changes shall be accessible for modification of each menu for the associated equipment. Operator shall be able to automatically download changes to the appropriate program for the equipment being controlled. Operator shall be able to upload information from the field modules. In addition to having the ability to adjust setpoints on zones individually, the system shall allow the operator to make global setpoint changes that would take one command and automatically download it to the individual pieces of equipment and adjust their setpoints up or down by the operator defined deviation. A global command shall be able to be input that will automatically affect all installations connected to the network.

C. SPECIFIC GRAPHIC REQUIREMENTS

01 Data Format

Temperature Tenths xx.x ºF Percentage Units xx % Amps Units xx A Humidity Units xx % Air Quantity Units xxxx CFM

02 Main School Screen

a. Provide an overview of the entire building with color coding of zones based on temperature relative to setpoint, with light gray indicating zone is off. Green shall be area within setpoint tolerance, and varying shades of light to darker blue for lower than setpoint, and varying shades of light to dark red for higher than setpoint.

b. Clicking on an area of the building will change to a more detailed graphic of that area.

c. Provide table listing outside air temperature and RH percentage, and status for Fire Alarm, Security Alarm, Emergency Generator and Air Conditioning Emergency Shutdown.

d. Provide button to click to go to equipment and mechanical systems graphics.

03 Detailed Area Graphics

a. Individual zones shall be color coded base on temperature relative to setpoint, with light gray indicating zone is off. Green shall be area within setpoint tolerance, and varying shades of light to darker blue for lower than setpoint, and varying shades of light to dark red for higher than setpoint.

b. Label zone by RTU with zone temperature listed. c. Clicking on zone shall transfer to applicable RTU.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-5

d. Provide button for each RTU serving this area that transfers to the RTU graphic.

e. Each piece of equipment shall be labeled and have a text indication whether it is ON, OFF or FAILED. Additionally, equipment that is ON shall have some graphical indication of its status, either by color or animation. Status shall be based on equipment status sensors, not condition of the enabling point.

D. STAND-ALONE CONTROL UNIT (SCU):

01 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL: Each control unit shall be capable of full operation either as a completely independent unit or as a part of the building wide control system. All units shall contain the necessary equipment for direct interface to the sensors and actuators connected to it. Each control module shall be capable of stand-alone direct digital operation utilizing its own processor, memory, input/output, analog-to-digital conversion, clock (rechargeable battery backed for 30 days minimum) and voltage transient protection devices. No slave modules will be permitted.

02 MEMORY: The memory used in each module shall be non-volatile EEPROM type, which has read/write capability from the central site or local operator interface and does not lose its programs or operating data upon power failure. Each module shall have an automatic restart feature with sequencing after power failure and shall not require reloading at power up.

03 COMMUNICATION: To share global building data, such as outside air temperature, humidity and electric demand, modules shall be able to communicate with each other over a local area network (LAN). The system shall be capable of recognizing a failed module on the LAN and reporting the condition at the central site. If any module on the LAN fails or is powered down, it shall not inhibit the use of the LAN by other modules.

E. SCU FUNCTION:

01 CONTROL FORMS: All temperature control functions shall be executed within the SCU. Loop control shall be executed via direct digital control algorithms. The user shall be able to customize control strategies and sequences of control, and shall be able to define appropriate control loop. It shall be possible to fully create, modify or remove control algorithms within a specific unit while it is operating and performing other control functions. Input for these changes shall be made via the network form the central site computer or local operator interface.

02 ALARMS: Proof of equipment operating and alarm status shall be by positive feedback from the local control circuit as indicated on the Point List. The system shall have the capability of not only alarming abnormal OFF conditions of fans and pumps but shall also indicate abnormal ON condition of the same equipment. If a start command has not been issued from the central site and a piece of equipment is turned on, the central processor will alarm an abnormal ON. This abnormal ON shall also sound the audible alarm and display the alarm ON condition.

03 GLOBAL INFORMATION: The SCU's shall be able to share point information such that control sequences or control loops executed at one control unit may receive input signals from sensors connected to other SCU's within the network. If the network communication link fails or the other control units malfunction, the control loop shall continue to function using the last value received.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-6

The building operator shall be able to manually restore all system programs from the central site hard disk.

2.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. The mechanical systems will not be declared substantially complete until the automatic temperature controls for that portion has been demonstrated to be complete and functioning as intended. Operation in manual mode is not acceptable. The temperature control system will be complete and functioning as intended when all of the space temperatures are maintained at plus or minus two degrees of set point.

B. Engineer shall have access to the control system graphics via the internet to review and evaluate control system operation.

PART 3 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 3.1 ROOFTOP UNITS

A. Unit shall be controlled by DDC controller that shall receive start/stop signal from the central EMS. Controller shall monitor space temperature and cycle cooling in stages, and heating to maintain space temperature. Zone humidistat shall engage dehumidification cycle on high humidity.

B. Fan status shall be based on differential pressure sensors.

C. Fire alarm system shall disable fan through starter interlock when in alarm, and send alarm to the operator’s workstation.

3.2 ROOFTOP UNIT POINTS LIST

FAN RUN MODULATE

OUTDOOR AIR DAMPER/FAN ENERGIZE

ZONE TEMPERATURE TEMP READING

SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE TEMP READING

ZONE HUMIDITY HUMIDITY READING

COOLING STAGES REPORT POINT

HEATING STAGES REPORT POINT

DEHUMIDIFICATION CYCLE REPORT POINT

FAN SPEED REPORT POINT

FAN STATUS REPORT POINT

RUN TIME REPORT POINT

3.3 OUTDOOR LIGHTING

A. Controls system shall provide control and scheduling for one lighting contractor that controls outdoor lighting circuits.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation HVAC DUCTS AND CASING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 23 31 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 31 00-1

SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK AND AIR DEVICES

A. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where fabrication and installation of the work of this section may properly commence.

B. Verify the installed location of all structural components, piping, conduit and equipment is consistent with the coordination drawing. Verify that all ductwork will fit the spaces indicated on the coordination drawing and make any necessary adjustments prior to fabrication or installation of any ductwork.

C. The exact location of all registers, grilles or ceiling outlets shall be verified by the Architect before roughing-in. Reference shall be made to the architect’s reflected ceiling plan for locating ceiling outlets.

D. Ducts shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.

1.3 ADJUSTMENTS AND CORRECTIONS

A. Balance all systems of ductwork including exhaust systems to obtain the air quantities indicated for each inlet and outlet within ±10%. Air quantities shall be further adjusted as required to obtain uniform temperatures in the spaces.


2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. Furnish and install all supply, return, exhaust, outside air and other ductwork shown complete with splitters, extractors, dampers and other required devices. All ductwork, supports and bracing, shall be constructed of new grade, lock forming quality, G-60 or better galvanized steel sheets. All ductwork sheet metal shall be made in the United States of America.

B. Dimensions of duct work shown on Drawings are inside air stream dimensions. Allowances have not been made for internal duct insulation. Provide equivalent sized duct of different aspect ratio to accommodate ceiling cavity conditions.

C. Provide adjustable extractors with quadrant lock mechanism equal to Titus AG-45 at all supply outlet taps into trunk duct. Provide conical tap with damper and raised quadrant lock for flexible duct taps, reference detail on the Drawings. Provide adjustable round

elbows (0-90°) at ceiling devices connected with flex ducts to prevent collapse of the flex at connection unless Flexmaster self-supporting flex is installed.

Lane School Renovation HVAC DUCTS AND CASING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 23 31 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 31 00-2

D. Ductwork shall conform to current edition of SMACNA "Duct Manual and Sheet Metal Construction for Ventilating and Air Conditioning System" and the National Board of Fire Underwriters Pamphlet 90A, plus more stringent requirements of these Specifications. Adjust location of standing seams to clear structural members.

E. Duct connections to air handling units and fans shall match the outlet/inlet size, or as recommended by the equipment manufacture, including straight lengths of duct before transitions, to minimize system effect losses. Where duct adapters or damper trays are provided with roof fans, duct connections shall match size for a minimum of 36” before elbow or transition.

F. All duct transitions shall be gradual with a 15° maximum angle as measured from centerline of duct. This includes angled offset, mitered offset, eccentric transition and

concentric transition (2 x 15°).

G. Ductwork shall be constructed to operate at the design system pressure. Generally, ductwork shall be constructed for 2” static pressure.

H. Square turns shall be equipped with airfoil turning vanes built to SMACNA Standards. Provide radius turns for elbows less than 90°.

I. Support ductwork with 1" wide x 20 gage galvanized steel straps spaced 6'-0" maximum centers but not more than allowed by SMACNA. Connect strap to duct with two sheet metal screws on each side of duct and one on bottom. Exposed ducts shall be supported in a manner to provide a finished appearance.

J. Seal all duct joints, adjustable elbows, spin-in taps and any penetrations of the duct such as screws with Foster 32-19, Childers CP-146, Design Polymerics DP1010 or Hardcast IG601 Iron Grip installed full strength (no dilution). Ductwork subject to moisture (indoors) and not required to be welded, shall be sealed with Foster 32-14 or Childers CP-140.

K. Sheet metal contractor shall install control system devices that are attached to ductwork. This includes control dampers and sensors.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Aldine Independent School District SECTION 23 33 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 33 00-1

SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL





2.2 DAMPERS

A. GENERAL: Provide dampers where shown on Drawings and as necessary to control air flow in all supply and outside air ducts. Provide access doors in sheetrock ceilings to all access to damper operators.

B. VOLUME DAMPERS: Factory constructed of 16 gage galvanized steel for frame and blades. Blades shall not exceed 48" in length or 6" in width, and shall be of the opposed interlocking type. The blades shall be supported on 1/2" diameter rust-proofed axles. Axle bearings shall be self-lubricating ferrule type.

C. FLEX TAP CONNECTIONS: Taps on rectangular low pressure ducts for flexible connections to diffusers shall be 22 gauge, round conical taps with adjustable single blade damper. Damper rod shall be continuous though tap with blade mechanically attached. Provide bearings at each end, and quadrant lock operator with wingnut and 2” standoff bracket for insulation. Refer to detail on the drawings for additional construction details.

2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT

A. GENERAL: Flexible duct shall be U. L. Listed 181 Class I air duct with fiberglass/aluminum foil inner liner, fiberglass insulation with a C=.23, bi-directional reinforced metalized vapor barrier outer jacket and 6" w.c. pressure rating. The insulating value shall be meet the International Energy Code, minimum R=6.

B. INSTALLATION: The maximum length between duct and air device shall be six feet. The maximum length between duct and single or double duct mixing box shall be three feet. Connect inner liner to duct tap, VAV box, round rigid duct or air device with stainless steel, adjustable bands (hose clamps). Secure outer cover with nylon wire tie strap. Tape edges of outer cover to adjacent insulation or duct with FSK foil tape to present a finished appearance.

C. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES: Flexmaster Type 3M or Thermaflex M-KE

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation HVAC FANS Aldine Independent School District SECTION 23 34 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 34 00-1

SECTION 23 34 00 HVAC FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL




PART 2 - EQUIPMENT

2.1 ROOF FANS AND VENTS

A. GENERAL: Fans shall bear the AMCA seal of certified ratings for air and sound performance. Fans and their accessories shall be a prewired assembly from the factory for single point connection by the electrical subcontractor.

B. DESIGN: Fans shall be low silhouette type with removable top for easy access. Housings shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum.

C. DRIVE: Direct or belt drive with heavy cast iron sheaves, adjustable drive sheave and adjustable motor plate. Centrifugal fans shall have motor out of the air stream, cooled by outside air.

D. FAN: Centrifugal fans shall have aluminum, backward curved, non-overloading wheel. Propeller fans shall be of heavy aluminum construction with a minimum of five blades set in a smooth venturi orifice.

E. ROOF CURBS: Mount on insulated, welded prefabricated aluminum roof curb (galvanized steel if on steel decking) with integral cant strip. Curbs shall be designed to mount fan level on sloped roof and be compatible with roof construction specified under the Architectural Sections of the Specifications. Provide duct adapter matched to supply air fans selected. Securely attach fans and hoods to curb with two bolts on each side. Bolt fan curb to structure.

F. ACCESSORIES: All fans shall have built-in thermal overloads, disconnect switch and bird screen. Backdraft dampers shall be aluminum construction with nylon bushings. Provide additional accessories as noted on the Drawings.

G. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Acme, Cook, Greenheck, Penn-Barry, S&P and Twin City

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS Aldine Independent School District SECTION 23 37 13 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 37 13-1

SECTION 23 37 13 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL





2.1 AIR DEVICES

A. Furnish and install supply, return and exhaust registers, grilles and outlets shown on the Drawings.

B. All devices shall be all aluminum construction and shall have white finish. Aluminized type corrosion resistant steel with finish having a five-year warranty against the formation of visible rust will also be acceptable. Devices in U. L. fire rated ceilings shall be of aluminized steel construction with white finish, suitable for U. L. classification.

C. All supply outlets shall be equipped with opposed blade volume dampers. Provide Titus Model D-75 for supply diffusers.

D. The air distribution equipment supplier shall guarantee that each supply, return and exhaust device shall be of the proper design and size to pass the indicated quantity of air into or out of the space involved, with maximum diffusion and without objectionable noise, excessive friction or objectionable air movement at the occupied level.

E. Registers, grilles and outlets shall be of manufacture, type and capacity as shown on the schedule of the Drawings. Similar devices of other manufacture may be submitted for approval.

F. If devices other than those shown are proposed, the values for their face velocities, neck velocities and noise levels, DBA or NC, shall not exceed these values for the devices scheduled on the Drawings.

G. Ceiling outlets shall be of a type compatible with the ceiling in which they are installed and shall have removable core with overlapping cone design to prevent vertical downward projection of air.

H. Contractor shall check the Architectural Drawings and verify the type of ceiling shown in the various areas to determine the proper type of outlet for the ceiling used.

I. Air devices in U. L. fire rated ceilings shall have compatible U. L. classified ceiling dampers with volume adjustment mechanism and have U. L. approved fireproofing on device. Dampers connected to flexible ducts shall also have extension collar feature equal to Ruskin CFD-A. Fire proofing devices shall contain no friable or fibrous material in the air stream.

J. Air diffusers not required to have fireproofing on the back of the diffuser shall be factory insulated suitable for return air plenum installation.

K. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Krueger, Metalaire, Nailor, Price and Titus.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS Aldine Independent School District SECTION 23 74 16 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 74 16-1

SECTION 23 74 16 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




C. Provide Shop Drawings per Section 23 00 00


2.1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

A. The cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge zinc coated steel, with a baked acrylic enamel for positive weather-proof protection. The top panels shall interlock with each other to provide a waterproof seam.

B. All exterior panels shall be provided with devices for easy removal for servicing.

C. All interior surfaces of the entire cabinet shall be lined with 1" thick variable density fiberglass providing a non-flaking insulation in the air stream. All surfaces in the air stream shall be smooth, cleanable and non-absorbing.

D. The fan section shall consist of centrifugal fans, resiliently mounted, driven from a direct drive, variable speed motor.

E. The direct expansion refrigeration system shall be factory charged with refrigerant R410a and fully tested. The system shall include minimum four row DX coil with hot gas reheat coil and circuiting for dehumidification, thermal expansion valves, solenoid valves, liquid line valves, sight glass, filter dryer, liquid and suction line service valves, compressors, crankcase heater, high/low pressure switches, time delay relay and single phase protection. The air cooled condenser propeller fans shall be zinc plated and have iridite finish to prevent corrosion. Fans shall discharge air vertically. Fan motors shall be equipped with a rain shield. Coils shall be copper tube, aluminum plate fin construction with coil guards. Units 7½ tons and larger shall have two compressors and two circuits with face split cooling and hot gas reheat coils.

F. The heating section shall consist of modulating gas furnace.

G. Unit shall have the following features: Low leakage automatic fresh air damper, low ambient controls for operation at 40° F, 2" throwaway air filters, 3 phase overload protection, insulated full roof curb that compensates for roof slope, no ductwork exposed outside unit, remote programmable thermostat, remote humidistat to energize humidity control system, and 5 year warranty on the compressors.

H. Units shall be U. L. Listed for outdoor installation. Each unit shall be test operated at the factory prior to shipment. Units shall bear the ARI rating seal. Efficiency ratings shall meet the International Energy Conservation Code.

I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: AAON, Daikin, Carrier and Tempmaster, Trane.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 00 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-1

SECTION 26 00 00 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Provide all supervision, labor, equipment and materials required for the installation of complete and operating electrical systems in the building. Pay all fees and obtain all permits related to construction activities and utility service installation.

1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. GENERAL: Drawings and Specifications are intended to be complimentary. Any work described in either of them, will be work required under this contract. Should any work required by the drawings and specifications be in violation of any Federal, State, County or City laws, ordinance or regulation, those laws and regulations shall prevail, and shall be complied with by the Contractor as a part of this work with no extra compensation.

B. EQUIPMENT AND DEVICE LOCATION: The drawings indicate approximate locations of the various items of electrical systems. These items are shown approximately to scale and attempt to show how these items should be integrated with building construction. Locate all the various items by on-the-job measurements, conformance with Contract Documents and cooperation with other trades. Refer to Architectural Drawings that may locate devices relative to casework or devices provided by other contractors. The drawings are schematic in nature and are not intended to show exact locations of conduit, but rather to indicate distribution, circuitry and control.

C. CEILING DEVICES: All light fixtures, speakers and other ceiling devices shall be located to conform to the ceiling grid system as shown on the Architect’s reflected ceiling plan. Examine all drawings to become familiar with this requirement. In no case should fixture locations be determined by scaling drawings. Lighting fixtures in mechanical spaces are shown in their approximate location only. Do not install light fixtures until mechanical piping and ductwork is installed. At that time install lights in a location to provide best lighting.

D. MINOR RELOCATION: In certain instances, the Architect may require minor relocation of outlets, switches, etc. If Contractor is informed of necessary relocation before work is begun on this portion of the job, no extra compensation will be allowed.

1.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL MATERIALS

A. U. L. LABEL: All materials must be new and of good quality and shall bear the stamp of approval of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (U. L.). Equipment and materials shall be used and installed consistent with the U. L. testing and U. L. requirements.

B. MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES: Provide all parts and accessories necessary for a complete installation for the systems and equipment specified.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-2

C. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL: All materials shall be certified to not contain any asbestos, PCB's or other material banned by the Environmental Protection Agency.


A. COORDINATION: The Contractor shall cooperate with other trades on the job and make installations in the proper sequence during the construction of the buildings, and he shall notify the Architect well in advance of construction of all interference of his work with that of other trades and of building construction. This notification shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibilities to coordinate his work with the total project. Where various items of equipment and materials are specified and scheduled, the purpose is to define the general type and quality level, not to set forth the exact trim required to fit the various types of ceiling, wall or floor finishes. Provide materials which will fit properly the types of finishes actually installed.


C. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION: Do not deliver equipment to jobsite until it is actually needed for installation. Protect equipment from damage due to construction activities and the weather. Equipment allowed to stand in weather will be rejected and Contractor is obligated to furnish new equipment at no cost to Owner.

1.6 ALTERNATES

A. Determine the scope of each specified alternate proposal by carefully reading all Divisions of the Documents. The Bid Form contains information explaining the extent of the construction to be performed under a specific alternate. Alternate proposals, which are not predominantly electrical in scope, are described in other Divisions of these Documents.

1.7 CODES

A. All materials and their installation shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, local building codes and the National Safety Code. Nothing in the plans and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to the most stringent of the codes. Particular attention shall be paid to the U. L. codes for fireproofing of conduit, electrical devices and light fixtures that are part of or pass through fire rated ceilings, walls and floors.


A. The Contractor shall be familiar with the Drawings and Specifications and shall have examined the premises and understand the conditions under which he will be obligated to operate in performing the contract. No allowance shall be made consequently for any error through negligence in this regard.

1.9 ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. GENERAL: Existing site service to remain. Existing pole mounted transformers, poles and overhead 12470Y/7200V service is owned by Aldine ISD.

1.10 TEMPORARY SERVICE


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-3

A. Provide a temporary electrical service for construction power. Size and voltage as required for construction activities as specified by the General Contractor. Construction site distribution shall be overhead and comply with NEC and OSHA Standards. Pay all fees and installation costs charged by the Power Company for temporary service for construction power.

1.11 GUARANTEE

A. All materials, apparatus and equipment furnished and installed under this Section of these Specifications shall be new and free from any defects when accepted by the Owner and shall be guaranteed in writing for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner.

1.12 SUBMITTALS


B. The purpose of these submittals is to attempt to aid the contractor in such a manner that improper or unacceptable materials are not delivered to or installed on the job. Shop drawings shall be approved before installation of the material under consideration. Approval of these submittals shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents. All materials and equipment shall be subject to final acceptance by the Engineer at completion of construction.

C. Equipment and material submittals must show sufficient data to indicate complete compliance with contract documents as follows:

01 Proper sizes and capacities.

02 That the item will fit in the available space in a manner that will allow proper service.

D. Catalog data must be clearly marked to indicate the item or model number being submitted and must include all specified accessories. All information on a catalog sheet not pertaining to the item being submitted must be marked out.

E. All submittals shall include a table of contents listing all items in that specific submittal. All submittals on the project need not be submitted in PDF. The front sheet of each copy of the submittal shall have the following typed information:


02 General Contractor's name, address, project manager's name and telephone number.

03 Submitting Sub-contractor's name, address, project manager's name and telephone number.

04 Supplier's company name, address, salesman's name and telephone number.

F. For any item to be installed in or on a finished surface (such as tee bar acoustical ceiling, plaster wall), Contractor certifies by making the submittal that he has checked all applicable contract Documents and that the item submitted is compatible with the surface finish on which it is to be installed.

G. Submit shop drawings and/or brochures for:

Circuit Breakers Disconnect Switches Electrical Panels


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-4

Light Fixtures Wiring Devices Fire Alarm System Network Cabling If a submittal is returned to the Contractor marked “Rejected” or “Revise and Resubmit”, only one (1) additional submittal will be permitted without the Contractor incurring charges for the additional re-submittals. SEG shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for any expense in connection with any necessary submission in addition to the two (2) submissions allowed. Contractor will be billed by SEG at a rate of $125/hr for these occurrences.

1.13 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL: The names of manufacturer and model numbers have been used in the Contract Documents to establish types of equipment and standards of quality. If only one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment (except lighting fixtures), the specified manufacturer will be the only acceptable one. Where more than one manufacturer is named for a specific item of equipment, only one of these manufacturers will be considered for approval. Where only one manufacturer is mentioned with the phrase "or approved equal", Contractor may submit an alternate manufacturer as outlined in Special Conditions. No attempt has been made to determine if each manufacturer listed for a particular item of equipment will produce material that will comply with all requirements. If a submittal contains sufficient information to prove compliance with the Contract Documents, then that submittal will be acceptable.

B. ALTERNATE LIGHT FIXTURES: Alternate light fixtures may be submitted but a substitute fixture must be equal from the standpoint of materials, construction and performance. Request for substitution must be accompanied by complete data and descriptive sheets during the bidding period as described in the Architectural Sections.

1.14 FOUNDATIONS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. GENERAL: Provide all foundations and supports.

B. INSIDE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: Securely attach panels to block walls with concrete bolts. When attaching to sheetrock or other less substantial walls, provide blocking and unistrut cross supports to securely attach panel to structural members. Where panels are required to be freestanding provide angle iron support structure bolted to floor and building structure.

C. VIBRATION ISOLATION: Install dry type transformers on four waffle pad type isolators.

1.15 NOISE

A. Eliminate any abnormal noises which are not considered by the Architect to be an inherent part of the systems as designed. Abnormal buzzing in equipment components will not be acceptable.

B. ADDITIONAL TESTING: The Contractor shall make such other tests as may be or become necessary to assure satisfactory operation of each unit device or equipment.


A. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: Obtain a set of project drawings and keep these at jobsite during construction. During the course of construction, mark on these prints any changes which are made, noting particularly locations for those items which will need to be located for servicing. At completion of job, mark each sheet "As-Built Drawings", date and deliver


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-5

to Architect.

B. OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS: Provide the following periods of instruction to the Owner's designated personnel upon completion of the system's installation. Provide additional training as noted in individual equipment specifications.

01 Electrical Systems: 2 Hours


1.17 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. GENERAL: Heights are measured to centerline from the finished floor. Where devices are located in block walls Architect may require height to be adjusted so junction box is in a desired relationship with the mortar joint. Device must still be mounted within the acceptable height range for ADA.

B. DEVICE:

Light switch 46" Receptacle 18" Receptacle at counter 7" above countertop Data outlet 18” Telephone outlet 18" Telephone outlet at counter 7" above countertop Wall telephone 46" Desk telephone 18" Clock outlet 12" below ceiling or 96" maximum Wall exit light Bottom 4" above door frame or 96" Fire alarm pull station 46" Fire alarm horn or flasher 82" or on ceiling Wall TV outlet 18” Outdoor bells or speakers 10’-0” (or as shown on the Architectural Drawings) Wall Pack Lights 14’-0” (or as shown on the Architectural Drawings)

1.18 ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS

A. GENERAL: Contractor shall request inspections to review any and all electrical installations. Inspections shall include but not be limited to: system tests, grounding tests, underground installations prior to backfill, rough-in installations, wall cover inspections, above ceiling inspections, final inspection.

B. INSPECTION REPORTS: After each inspection, the Engineer will generate an inspection report. The Contractor will then be given 7 working days from date of report to address all deficiencies listed on the report. The General Contractor shall verify that all items on each inspection report have been addressed by their subcontractors in this time period. Once verified the General Contractor shall sign-off on each deficiency listed on the report and return the signed-off copy of the inspection report to the Architect and Engineer via e-mail.

C. GOVERNMENTAL INSPECTIONS: Contractor shall test and demonstrate systems, allow for Engineer and Owner inspections, and correct all punch list items before arranging for inspections from the Fire Marshall or other final “Certificate of Occupancy” inspection requirements. This will require that the contractor complete systems in a


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 23 07 00-6

timely manner to meet construction schedules.

D. Contractor shall provide a MINIMUM of 48 hour notice prior to requested inspection time, no exceptions.

E. INSPECTION REPORTS: After each inspection, SEG will generate an inspection report and distribute promptly. The Contractor will then be given 7 working days from date of report to address all deficiencies listed on the report. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall verify that all items on each inspection report have been addressed by their subcontractors in this time period. Once verified the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall sign-off on each deficiency listed on the report and return the signed-off copy of the inspection report to SEG via e-mail. After the signed-off report is returned to SEG, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall request a re-inspection by SEG to close the report. If after 7 working days no re-inspection is requested by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR to close a report, SEG reserves the right to re-inspect whenever our schedule allows, with these re-inspections still being subject to Paragraph F below.

F. TEST REJECTIONS AND RE-INSPECTIONS: If a test is rejected or a re-inspection of an issued SEG Inspection Report is found to NOT be completely addressed, only ONE (1) additional inspection will be permitted without the Contractor incurring charges for each additional inspection required. SEG shall be reimbursed $500 by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR for expenses in connection with EACH inspection in addition to the two (2) inspections allowed.


A. In areas of demolition, contractor shall remove all electrical devices, conduit and wiring not to be reused. Any material that has salvage value shall be offered to the Owner, and if accepted, delivered to his warehouse or other designated location. If not accepted it shall be properly disposed of with the other construction debris.

B. Where partial circuits or systems are to be reused, ensure that they remain active. Where existing equipment is removed and reinstalled or replaced with new equipment, modify, extend and relocate existing feeder and other wiring, and connect to equipment. Relocate conduit as necessary to allow new or modified construction. Repair existing electrical systems damaged by construction activities.

C. Remove and replace ceilings as necessary to install or modify electrical systems. Where ceilings are removed or replaced, remove and reinstall lights, speakers, security devices, fire alarm devices and other existing electrical and low voltage devices in the ceiling.

D. Where existing adjustable circuit breakers are to be reused, adjust for revised loads. Where existing fused switches are to be reused, replace fuses with proper size for revised loads. Where new circuit breakers are to be installed in existing panels, verify that the circuit breaker will fit in the allotted space. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure installed adjacent to panel and wire connect to bussing if there is insufficient space.

E. Where light fixtures are to be replaced or added in existing areas, verify and coordinate existing voltages with fixtures to be supplied prior to ordering fixtures.

F. Where auxiliary systems such as fire alarm, security, data, sound, etc, interface with existing equipment that is replaced or modified (mechanical, electrical or plumbing), disconnect and reconnect these systems.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 05 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 05 00-1

SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. The General Electrical Requirements as specified in section 26, apply to the work specified in this Section.

1.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. All electrical work dealing with electrical circuits or power requirements of 110 volts or higher shall be performed by a licensed journeyman electrician supervised by an on-site master electrician.

B. All cables not installed in conduit shall be plenum rated.

C. All conductors and cable shall be properly labeled at both ends and at any intermediate splice.

D. All low voltage cables shall be installed in continuous length without splice.

E. All plenum rated cables shall be supported from and near structure with nylon straps or D-rings. Do not weave through joists for support. All exposed cabling, and cabling above inaccessible ceilings shall be installed in raceway.

F. Install conduit sleeves with protective grommets for all wall penetrations for plenum rated cables.

G. Seal all sleeves and conduit penetrations of walls with grout or hardening caulk, suitable for wall material. Provide fire rated sealant at fire rated walls.

H. In areas of remodeling, remove all conduit and wire that is not to be reused.

I. Provide grounding bushings for all connections at concentric and eccentric knockouts, and where reducing washers are used.

J. All junction boxes and other devices above ceiling that may require maintenance shall be located within 18” of the ceiling.

K. Where light fixture switches are shown together, they shall be installed in a common junction box.

L. Where receptacles and/or data outlets are shown grouped, install close together. Provide Caddy TSGB16, RBS16 or equal mounting bar for sheetrock walls to accomplish this.

M. All exterior junction boxes in the ground shall be concrete type with traffic rated tops.

N. All junction and pull boxes shall be marked noting electrical circuits contained. Additionally, boxes containing emergency or exit circuits shall have housing painted red. Boxes containing normal high voltage circuits shall have housing painted yellow. Boxes containing normal low voltage circuits shall have housing painted blue. Do not paint the covers.



Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 05 00-2

2.1 RACEWAY SYSTEMS

A. REQUIRED: Complete raceway systems for all wiring. This includes, but is not limited to feeders, branch circuit wiring, temperature controls wiring, data cabling, video cabling, sound system wiring and fire alarm system wiring. Generally auxiliary system and controls wiring is plenum rated so conduit system would consist of junction boxes and conduit in walls or above inaccessible ceilings only. Control and interlock wiring shall be provided under the Mechanical Section.

B. RACEWAY CAPACITY: It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine the correct sizes of all types of raceway, to be installed, as instructed in the NEC and all applicable Codes. Runs of underground conduit longer than 80 feet shall be one size larger than NEC requirement, 4" maximum.

C. INSTALLATION:

01 LOCATION: Conceal all raceway systems in ceilings, walls and floors, except feeders serving equipment in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and in such other areas as indicated where conduit may be exposed. Keep at least 8" away from any heat producing items. Do not install conduit below grade or in floor slabs unless there is no other way to conceal conduit. Equipment feeders in mechanical rooms or mechanical yards shall be run above grade. Major feeders from switchboard to distribution panels containing 4/0 or larger wire may be run underground. Do not install conduit on roof unless specifically shown to be on the roof or authorized in writing by the Engineer. All junction and pull boxes above accessible ceilings shall be mounted so that the access panel is no higher than 18” above the ceiling.

02 ROUTING: Conduit shall be installed parallel to building coordinates, except for underground feeders from panel to panel may be installed in the most direct manner. Install all horizontal conduit at structure unless mounted to a wall.

03 EXPOSED RACEWAY: Run parallel to walls, ceiling or structural members, in a manner to present a neat appearance. Before installation, explain to the Inspector the proposed method of routing and obtain his approval. Hold all horizontal conduit at ceiling or structure, unless mounted on wall.

04 SUPPORT: Provide adequate and sturdy support for all parts of raceway system. Conduit concealed in walls or slabs may be supported with wire hangers, provided they are of heavy gage and spaced to give adequate strength. Exposed conduit must be supported with materials specifically made for this purpose; do not use wire hangers. Do not attach any parts of raceway system to air conditioning ducts or ceiling systems. Wiring above ceiling without conduit shall be supported from structure or wall with J hooks or other manufactured devices designed for this service. Unless described by detail on the drawings, provide Tolco Pipe Pier Supports four feet on center to support conduit on the roof. Select for proper weight loading.

05 CONTINUITY: Make all joints and connections in a manner which will insure mechanical strength and electrical continuity. Use double locknuts and insulated bushings for rigid conduit, and insulated type connectors for EMT conduit 1” and larger for connections to boxes. Use insulated grounding bushings wherever connection is subject to vibration or moisture, such as near mechanical equipment, when internal ground wire is installed, and when concentric or eccentric knockouts are encountered, as well as where reducing washers are used.

06 PULL BOX LOCATIONS: As required by the National Electrical Code.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 05 00-3

07 EXPANSION FITTINGS: Install O. Z. or equal expansion fitting in each run of conduit which crosses building expansion joint, and in all runs longer than 200 feet.

08 CORROSION PROTECTION: For all non-coated metal raceway in contact with concrete or mortar, tape with 3M corrosion protective tape, or equal. Tape shall extend for approximately 6" before entering and after exiting concrete. Conduit through slabs at grade shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel.

09 PULL WIRE: Install nylon pull cord in all empty electrical power raceway systems.

10 OPENINGS: Keep all raceway openings closed in a manner to prevent entry of moisture and foreign materials until conductors are installed.

11 FIRE PROOFING: All power and telephone raceway components passing through or installed within U. L. fire rated walls, ceiling or floor structures shall be fireproofed in the manner prescribed by the U. L. Fire Resistive Index and local building codes. All penetrations shall be fireproofed with 3M Fire Barrier CP25WB caulk, moldable putty or FS-195 wrap/strip installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.

12 SEALING: All conduit, junction box, outlet box and other penetrations of the building envelop shall be sealed with non-hardening caulking or other non-hardening material as required by the International Energy Conservation Code.

D. MANUFACTURERS: All components of raceway systems must be made in U.S.A. and bear U. L. label.

2.2 CONDUIT

A. CONDUIT TYPES

01 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL – Threaded fittings

02 PVC CONDUIT – Schedule 80

03 EMT – Steel conduit with steel watertight fittings. Provide insulated throat watertight fittings where conduit is exposed to dampness inside building.

04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT – Greenfield, galvanized steel conduit for field installation of conductors (maximum 24”)

05 LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT – SealTite Type UA galvanized steel conduit with PVC waterproof coating for field installation of conductors (maximum 24” long except light fixtures up to 72”)

06 MC CABLE – Flexible steel conduit with factory installed, stranded, color coded copper conductors, green insulated ground wire and polypropylene sheath/tape. Conduit exterior shall be color coded for contained conductors. Provide full size aluminum bonding/grounding conductor and additional Green Grounding wire. AFC MC Tuff

07 SURFACE RACEWAY – Wiremold steel raceway, ivory finished and mechanically connected to walls or casework. Type based on application. (only allowed where specifically noted on the drawings)

B. TYPE OF CONDUIT FOR VARIOUS LOCATIONS:

01 UNDERGROUND: Rigid galvanized steel or Schedule 80 PVC. Conduit in contact with concrete shall be PVC coated, rigid galvanized steel. Install PVC coated, rigid galvanized steel, long radius elbows where conduit turns up to grade including straight length section to a minimum of 6” above grade, concrete


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 05 00-4

slab or extended to panel connection. Encase underground conduit not under building slab in a 3" red concrete envelope located a minimum of 24" below finished grade to top of envelope (48" if above 600 volts) with red tracer tape installed on top of red concrete. Where more than one conduit is installed in the same trench, provide manufactured conduit support spacers to organize conduit and ensure proper concrete encasement. Notify Inspector for inspection of duct bank at least 24 hours prior to concrete placement. Conduit below building slab or conduit for telephone, data, etc. does not require concrete encasement. Conduit 1” and smaller under the building slab may be run just under the concrete. Larger conduit shall be 24” below finished floor.

02 IN POURED CONCRETE WALLS: PVC coated, rigid galvanized steel or Schedule 80 PVC. Install PVC coated rigid steel fittings on PVC conduit prior to conduit exiting concrete.

03 IN MASONRY WALLS: Galvanized steel EMT with steel, watertight fittings.

04 EXPOSED OUTSIDE OF BUILDING: Rigid galvanized steel. For conduit in mechanical courtyard within 50 feet of a cooling tower provide PVC coated, rigid galvanized steel conduit and fittings. Do not use EMT, IC or PVC conduit.

05 INSIDE OF BUILDING IN CEILING CAVITIES, IN EXPOSED FLOOR OR ROOF STRUCTURE AREAS, OR IN DRY WALL TYPE CONSTRUCTION: Galvanized steel EMT or rigid galvanized steel. MC cable with ground wire may be used to serve receptacles and light switches in existing sheetrock walls. MC cable must not extend more than 24” into ceiling cavity and be connected to a junction box of the rigid conduit system.

06 EXPOSED ON EXISTING MASONRY OR PLASTER WALLS IN FINISHED AREAS (only where specifically noted on the Drawings): Wiremold V500 metallic raceway, ivory finish, complete with various boxes, devices, offsets and transitions. For data systems provide Wiremold 2000 Series or larger consistent with cabling requirements, ivory finish, metal raceway with various devices, offsets and transitions. Provide Wiremold 4000 two compartment if both data and power wiring are installed together. All raceway shall be mechanically fastened to walls or cabinets. No tapes or glues allowed.

07 IN CONCRETE SLABS: Do not install conduit in concrete slabs.

08 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT CONNECTIONS: Use only for connection to lights, motors and transformers from rigid conduit system. Do not loop flexible conduit between light fixtures or receptacles. Provide liquid tight construction and fittings in wet, damp or outside areas. Connections to mechanical equipment in main mechanical or boiler room, and kitchen equipment shall be in liquid tight. Do not install liquid tight flex inside an air handling unit room. Minimum length shall be 18”. Maximum length shall be three feet except light fixture whips may be up to six feet.

09 LIGHT FIXTURE WHIPS: MC cable not to exceed six feet in length.

C. MINIMUM CONDUIT SIZE: 3/4"

D. FITTINGS:

01 RIGID CONDUIT: All rigid galvanized steel conduit shall have threaded fittings with insulated bushings.

02 EMT CONDUIT: Provide insulated bushings for all EMT conduit 1" or larger or housing #6 or larger wires.

03 GROUNDING: Provide fitting with grounding lug where conduit attaches to a painted box (disconnect switch, starter, transformer case, etc.), conduit attaches


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 05 00-5

to a box through a knockout which has an associated larger knockout or a reducing washer is used, or conduit contains a feeder from switchgear to switchgear or between switchgear and transformer.

04 TELEPHONE AND DATA CONDUIT: Provide protective bushing on the end of telephone, data, sound system or other conduit stubbed into the ceiling cavity.

E. LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS: Low voltage conductors may be run in accessible ceilings without conduit. Provide conduit sleeve with protective end fittings through all walls and floors where raceway system is not installed. All exposed conductors shall be in conduit. All splices shall be in supported junction boxes. Low voltage conductors installed without conduit shall be independently supported on ring hangers, and plenum rated. Low voltage conductors for audio and data wiring shall be stranded unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.

2.3 PULL BOXES

A. REQUIRED: Pull boxes, junction boxes, wiring troughs and cabinets wherever required for proper installation of various electrical systems.

B. CONSTRUCTION: Made of code gage steel with sides formed and welded, screw covers unless shown to have hinged doors. Hinged doors to be same as furnished on panel boards, with same locking device. Knockouts shall be factory made or formed in field with a cutting tool which will provide a clean, symmetrically cut hole. Do not gang boxes or use extension rings to increase capacity. Boxes outside shall be steel NEMA 3 Type.

2.4 OUTLET BOXES

A. REQUIRED: For all switches, light fixtures, receptacles and the various other outlets shown.

B. CONSTRUCTION: Galvanized steel, one-piece construction, in all cases suitable for intended use. Provide "gang" boxes where devices are shown grouped. Use hot dipped galvanized cast iron for floors or exterior locations. Boxes outside shall be steel NEMA 3 Type.

C. TYPES FOR VARIOUS LOCATION:

01 CEILINGS: 4" square, 2-1/8" deep.

02 DRY WALLS: Standard galvanized switchbox, gangable for multiple switches or receptacles. Provide 4" square, 2-1/8" deep galvanized switch box (1900) where additional volume is required for wiring. Provide shallow boxes where necessary. Provide tab or Caddy bar to align box with studs.

03 MASONRY WALLS: Galvanized switch boxes designed especially for masonry installations. Depths of boxes must be properly coordinated for each specific installation. Box shall be installed within 1/8” of surface of block.

04 FLOOR: Watertight, adjustable, cast iron.

05 SURFACE MOUNTED: Boxes surface mounted on walls or floor shall be Bell, cast aluminum box with appropriate plate and threaded hubs.

06 BACK-TO-BACK OUTLETS: Outlets shown back-to-back on the drawings are to be installed with a minimum of 6" of lateral separation between outlets for minimum sound transmission. "Through-the-wall" type boxes are not permitted.

07 SPECIAL: Boxes for A/V outlets shall have 1-1.5” and 1-1” knockouts/lugs, Hubbell HBL260, HBL263 or equal.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 05 00-6

D. MOUNTING PLATES: Boxes mounted in drywall construction shall have extension plates matched to wall thickness so the box can be mounted flush with the metal stud and the wiring device mounts flush with the wall.

E. CASEWORK COORDINATION: Outlets above counters shall be mounted vertically just above the back splash unless noted to be in the back splash. Outlets below counter shall be mounted in the knee space. Refer to casework drawings. Outlets shown together shall be mounted close together, not on adjacent studs. Provide appropriate mounting hardware to support between studs.

2.5 CONDUCTORS

A. REQUIRED: A complete system of conductors in all raceway systems except where shown otherwise. No conductors are to be installed in telephone conduit. Emergency or exit circuitry shall be installed in a separate raceway system.

B. BUILDING WIRE: 600 Volt, soft drawn annealed copper, 98% conductivity, continuous from outlet to outlet. Minimum wire size #12 except remote control wire may be #14. All wire shall be stranded Type THHN, THW-2 or THWN-2 (wet rated for 90 C) copper. All wires shall be color coded with same color connected to same ungrounded phase throughout the installation.

C. MANUFACTURERS: Collier, General Cable, General Electric, Simplex, Triangle and Southwire Co.

D. CONNECTORS: Make all connections on #10 and smaller wire with Code approved solderless pressure type insulated connectors; Ideal Wingnut. Solderless lugs must be used for all terminations.

E. TEST: After installation of all conductors, and before final acceptance, make such tests as are required to determine proper functioning of all circuits. Furnish all necessary instruments required to make such tests and correct any deficiencies found.

2.6 CONNECTIONS TO MOTORS, EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES

A. POWER WIRING: Make wiring connections to all mechanical, plumbing and other equipment being installed as a part of this Contract. In addition, make connections to Owner furnished equipment as shown.

B. CONTROL WIRING: Control and interlock wiring for HVAC Systems will be provided by the Mechanical Contractor. Motorized dampers of the same voltage as the associated fan shall be wired by the electrical contractor when the damper is in close proximity to the fan. Under this section provide a 20 amp, 120 volt circuit to the control panel in each mechanical room from the local low voltage panel.

C. CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT: Make connection to each motor and other equipment subject to vibration with not less than 18" nor more than 24” of flexible conduit. All horizontal runs of conduit (not strapped to walls) must be kept above 7 feet high, with a vertical drop to equipment. Conduit blocking walk and service space is not acceptable and will require relocation. Conduit on and adjacent to equipment must be located to allow free access to all removable panels for equipment service. Wire adjacent to heat producing equipment, such as boilers and electric heaters, must be of a type approved for this use.

D. CONNECTIONS TO TRANSFORMERS: Install not less than 18" nor more than 24” of flexible conduit at each connection to floor mounted transformers.

E. CONNECTIONS TO RECEPTACLES: All multiple devices on a circuit such as receptacles shall be back wired with pigtail so device does not provide continuity path.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 05 00-7

2.7 CIRCUITRY

A. The intent of the drawings is to indicate schematically the circuitry required.

B. 20 amp, single phase branch circuits serving lighting and general receptacles may be grouped in a single raceway provided a neutral conductor is installed for each circuit requiring a neutral. Do not install more than four current carrying conductors in a conduit except nine #12 or #10 conductors may be installed in 3/4" or larger conduit. Segregate data processing circuits and stage dimming circuits from other types of circuits. Do not install 480/277 volt conductors in the same conduit with 208/120 volt conductors.

C. The work performed in grouping conductors in a single raceway shall comply with all applicable articles in the latest edition of the NEC and Local Codes which shall include, but shall not be limited to, ampacity de-rating of conductors and maximum capacities of raceways.

2.8 POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING

A. 480/277 VOLT SYSTEM: Conductors shall have insulation of the proper color as listed below:

Phase A - Brown

Phase B - Purple

Phase C - Yellow

Neutral - Natural Gray

Ground - Green

Isolated Ground - Green w/yellow stripe

B. 208Y/120 VOLT SYSTEMS: Conductors shall have insulation of the proper color as listed below:

Phase A - Black

Phase B - Red

Phase C - Blue

Neutral - White

Ground - Green


C. 240/120 VOLT DELTA SYSTEMS

Phase A - Black

Phase B - Orange (high leg of delta)

Phase C - Blue

Neutral - White w/colored stripe

Ground - Green


D. Contractor may use colored tape marking for size 8 and larger phase and neutral conductors, and size 4 and larger ground conductors.

E. Switch legs are to be color coded the same as the un-switched phase, i.e., all wiring from


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 05 00-8

lighting control panels and contactors shall retain the phase color.

2.9 GROUNDING

A. GENERAL: Permanently and securely ground the mechanical and plumbing equipment and piping systems, conduit system, panel boards and all other components of the electrical system installed or connected by the Sub-contractor. Follow NEC and building code requirements.

B. CIRCUIT GROUNDS: Provide a green ground wire sized per the NEC for every circuit.

C. EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES: Make firm ground to raceway system. For equipment connected with flexible conduit or sealtite shall have the specified ground wire installed inside conduit. Do not install on the outside of the conduit. Where enclosure is painted, remove paint where ground lugs are installed.

D. TRANSFORMERS: Each transformer shall have its enclosure and secondary neutral terminal (except when a neutral terminal does not exist) bonded to the building steel and local, driven ground rod.

E. SYSTEM GROUND: Ground system neutral in service entrance equipment to the building steel and three 3/4" x 10 foot, copperclad, driven ground rods. Install ground rods outside in an equilateral triangle pattern, 10 feet on a side, with rod tops 12” below grade. Connect ground wire from rod to rod in a complete loop then extend to service equipment. Use cadweld connections below grade. Refer to drawings.

F. GROUND WIRE CONDUIT: Conduit containing a service or transformer grounding wire shall be grounded at each end to the grounding wire. Use conduit grounding fitting at ground rods.

2.10 SIGNS AND NAMEPLATES

A. Provide and engraved nameplate for each panel, switchboard, transformer, disconnect switch and starter stating the name as listed on the drawings (or load serviced) and where its power is derived. Refer to individual equipment specifications for additional labels required.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 09 23 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 09 23-1

SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. The General Electrical Requirements as specified in Sections 26, apply to the work specified in this Section.


A. Motor starters and contactors for mechanical and plumbing equipment shall be provided under those sections, installed under the Electrical Section. Locate starters next to electrical panel serving equipment unless shown otherwise.

B. Note that all motors require a starter or contactor to be provided and installed.


2.1 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. GENERAL: Contactors shall have poles and rating consistent with the load being served but shall have a minimum of three poles, 30 amps (20 amps tungsten) per pole at 600 volts. The load may consist of all types of ballast and tungsten lighting, resistance and motor loads.

B. CONTACTS: The unit shall have 100% rated double-break, silver-cadmium-oxide power contacts, field convertible from N.O. to N.C. and vice-versa and with clearly visible N.O. and N.C. contact-status indicators.

C. CONTROL: The unit shall be electrically held installed in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Provide 120 volt coil. Provide controls transformer with input and output fusing if circuit controlled is not 120 volt. Provide HOA switch to allow manual control of lights.

D. LABELING: List circuits controlled inside enclosure. Provide contactor nameplate.

E. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 09 43 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 09 43-1

SECTION 26 09 43 – LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS




A. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all of the trades covered in other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operable system.

B. Extent of lighting control system work is indicated by drawings and by the requirements of this section. It shall include low voltage switching system with lighting automation relay boxes, associated low voltage switches, fully programmable panel intelligence cards; and factory services. The complete lighting system shall consist of local room controller devices and line voltage switches where indicated on the drawings.

C. Contractor shall provide all quantities for system including but not limited to relays, relay panels, room controllers, switches, switch plates and plate configuration, wire lengths for both data and switches.

D. Provide complete lighting control system to control interior lights as indicated on the drawings.

E. All local digital switches shall be low voltage control type, with one or more switches controlling the lighting in each room.

F. All local wall mounted occupancy switches shall be line voltage type with one or more power packs controlling the lighting in each room.

G. A coordination meeting between the General Contractor, and Electrical subcontractor, shall occur prior to formal submittal.

1.3 INTRODUCTION

A. The work covered in this section is subject to all of the requirements in the General Conditions of the Specifications. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all of the trades covered in other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operable system. Contractor shall provide to the manufacturer all quantities for system including but not limited to relays, relay panels, switches, switch plates and plate configuration, wire lengths for both data and switches. Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner, the complete successful operation of system a minimum of 30 days prior to contract schedule completion date. Installing electrical contractor shall replace any failed warranty material during warranty period of one year.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Extent of lighting control system work is indicated by drawings and by the requirements of this section. It is defined to include, but not by way of limitation:


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 09 43-2

01 Digital Room Controllers – Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relays controllers with integral current thyristor, and 0-10 volt control for ballasts (if applicable).

02 Digital Occupancy Sensors – Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications.

03 Digital Switches – Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches, dimmers, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications.

04 Digital Photosensors – Single-zone closed loop and multi-zone open loop daylighting sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications can provide switching or dimming control for daylight harvesting.

05 Configuration Tools – Minimum of one (1) handheld remotes for room configuration provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have Organic LED display, simple pushbutton interface, and allow send and receive of room variables and store of occupancy sensor settings. Computer software also customizes room settings.

06 Minimum of one (1) handheld remotes for personal control – One-button dimming, two-button on/off, or five-button scene remotes provide control using infrared communications. Remote may be configured in the field to control selected loads or scenes without special tools.

07 Digital Lighting Management (DLM) local network – Free topology, plug-in wiring system (Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices.


A. Component Pre-testing: All components and assemblies are to be factory pre-tested and burned in prior to installation.

B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical wiring work.

C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to types of electrical equipment and enclosures.

D. UL Approvals: Remote panels are to be UL listed under UL 916 Energy Management Equipment.

E. FCC Emissions: All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC emissions Standards specified in Part 15 Subpart J for Class A application.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control system and components including shop drawings, detailed point to point wiring diagrams, and floor plans showing occupancy and daylighting sensor locations. Provide typical mounting details for occupancy and daylighting sensors for this application.

1.7 MANUFACTURERS

A. This specification utilizes Lighting Integrator Complete Control products from Watt Stopper/Legrand, Santa Clara, CA as the basis of design. Contact The Edwin Jones Company 713-572-4000.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 09 43-3

B. Substitutions must be submitted as approved equals per the requirements of the General Electrical section.

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 SINGLE / DUAL RELAY WALL SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Type PW: Manual-ON, Automatic-OFF passive infrared (PIR) wall switch occupancy sensor. Furnish the Company’s model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square-foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper PW-100, PW-200, PW-103, PW-203, PW-301, PW-302, PW-311, WS-301.

B. Type UW: Manual-ON, Automatic-OFF ultrasonic wall switch occupancy sensor. Furnish the Company’s model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square-foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper UW-100, UW-200.

C. Type DW: Manual-ON, Automatic-OFF dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic) wall switch occupancy sensor Furnish the Company’s model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square-foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper DW-100, DW-200, DW-103, DW-203, DSW-100, DSW-200, DW-103, DW-203, DSW-301, DSW-302.

D. Type LMDW: Automatic-ON, Automatic-OFF dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic) wall switch occupancy sensor. Furnish the Company’s model which suits the electrical system parameters, and accommodates the square-foot coverage and wattage requirement for each area (and type of lighting) controlled; WattStopper LMDW-101, LMDW-102.

E. Reference drawings for number, location and switch types.

2.2 DIGITAL WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR SYSTEM

A. Wall or ceiling mounted (to suit installation) passive infrared (PIR), ultrasonic or dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Furnish the Company’s system which accommodates the square-foot coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters. Passive infrared only sensors shall not be used for classroom applications.

B. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:

01 Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables:

a. Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments b. Time delay – 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments c. Test mode – Five second time delay d. Detection technology – PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation

and/or re-activation. e. Walk-through mode f. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight

enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 09 43-4

02 One or two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network.

03 Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.

04 Device Status LEDs including:

a. PIR Detection b. Ultrasonic detection c. Configuration mode d. Load binding

05 Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools.

06 Manual override of controlled loads.

C. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.

D. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.

E. All devices shall be hard wired. No wireless devices shall be permitted.

F. WattStopper product numbers: LMPX, LMDX, LMPC, LMUC, LMDC

G. Reference drawings for number, location and device types.

2.3 DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES

A. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration; available in white, light almond, ivory, grey and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening. Wall switches shall include the following features:

01 Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls.

02 Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttors and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.

03 Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.

04 Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:

a. Bi-level LED b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch c. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active

05 Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps.

B. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.

C. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required to achieve multi-way switching.

D. The following switch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

01 Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa).


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 09 43-5

02 Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only.

03 Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.

04 Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours.

05 Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.

06 Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads.

E. WattStopper product numbers: LMSW-101, LMSW-102, LMSW-103, LMSW-104, LMSW-105, LMSW-108, LMDM-101.

F. Reference drawings for number, location and switch types.

2.4 ROOM CONTROLLERS

A. Room Controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room Controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install and will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration. The control units will include the following features:

01 Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room.

02 Simple replacement – Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup.

03 Device Status LEDs to indicate:

a. Data transmission b. Device has power c. Status for each load d. Configuration status

04 Quick installation features including:

a. Standard junction box mounting b. Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable

05 Plenum rated

06 Manual override and LED indication for each load

07 Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz)

08 Zero cross circuitry for each load.

B. On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include:

01 Real time current monitoring

02 One, two or three relay configuration

03 Efficient 250 mA switching power supply

04 Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports.

05 One 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 09 43-6

06 The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

a. Establish preset level for each load from 0-100% b. Set high and low trim for each load c. Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours

07 Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space.

a. One relay configuration only b. Automatic-ON/OFF configuration

08 WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-211, LMRC-212, LMRC-213, LMRC-221, LMRC-222, LMPL-201

C. Reference drawings for number, location and room controller types.

2.5 ROOM NETWORK (DLM Local Network)

A. The DLM local network is a free topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building. Digital room devices connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors which provide both data and power to room devices. Features of the DLM local network include:

01 Plug n’ Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached.

02 Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup.

03 Push n’ Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local network.

04 Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and configuration by a handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor configuration and binding, within a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a sensor, wall switch or IR receiver.

2.6 USER INTERFACE

Each lighting control system shall be supplied with at least (1) handheld IR remote programming interface consisting of a keypad and associated OLED display screen. The user interface shall allow setup, configuration, and diagnostics of the panel without the need for software or connection of a computer. The user interface shall have the following functions as a minimum:

A. Set network parameters including panel device ID, MS/TP MAC address, baud rate and max master range.

B. Relay Group creation of up to 99 groups. Group creation shall result in programming of all seven key relay parameters for member relays. The seven parameters are as follows: After-hours Override Time Delay, Normal Hours Override Time Delay, Action on Transition to Normal Hours, Action on Transition to After Hours, Sensor Action During Normal Hours, Sensor Action During After Hours, Blink-Warn Time for After Hours.

C. Program up to 254 separate scheduled events. Events shall occur on seven day


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 09 43-7

intervals with each day selectable as active or inactive, and shall be configurable as to whether the event is active on holidays. Holidays are also defined through the User Interface.

D. Program up to 32 separate Dark/Light events. Events shall have a selectable source as either calculated Astro with delay, or a digital IO module with an integral 0-5V or 0-10V analog photocell. Dark/Light events shall occur on seven day intervals with each day selectable as active or inactive, and shall be configurable as to whether the event is active on holidays.

E. Button binding of digital switches to groups shall be accessible via the handheld IR remote and accomplished from the digital switch station.

F. Programming of panel location information shall be accomplished by the handheld IR remote and include at a minmum LAT, LON, DST zone, and an approximate city/state location.

G. An additional handheld IR remote may optionally be specified to be permanently mounted to the panel interior via a retractable anti-theft lanyard to allow for convenient programming of the panel while assuring that the handheld programmer is always present at that panel. An unlimited number of handheld IR remotes may also be purchased for facilities staff as seen fit by the end user’s representative.

2.7 CONFIGURATIONS TOOLS

A. A configuration tool facilitates optional customization of DLM local networks, and is used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless configuration tool features infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface.

B. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include:

01 Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet.

02 High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-driven operation.

03 Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room controllers and buttons on digital wall switches.

04 Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors.

05 Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s)on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting.

06 Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto-commissioning, and input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls.

C. WattStopper Product Numbers: LMCT-100, LMCI-100/LMCS-100

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall provide to the manufacturer all quantities for system including but not limited to relays, room controllers, relay panels, plug load controllers, switches, sensors


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 09 43-8

and wire lengths and configurations for both network and device cable at least 1 week before bid.

B. When using wire for connections other than the DLM local network (Cat 5e with RJ-45 connectors), provide detailed point to point wiring diagrams for every termination. Provide wire specifications and wire colors to simplify contactor termination requirements

C. All MSTP network and Cat 5e low voltage wiring must have “WattStopper” printed on the wire jacket. Any cable substitutions shall be removed and replaced at the contractor’s expense.

D. All MSTP network terminations shall utilize wire ferrules for terminations and MSTP network manufacturer’s instructions. Any network deficiencies shall be repaired at the contractor’s expense.

E. Electrical contractor must provide a detailed as-built plan in CAD showing MSTP network cable routing and network bridge serial numbers to the manufacturer at least 2 weeks prior to factory commissioning Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions unless otherwise indicated.

F. Electrical contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the following onsite coordination meetings through the duration of the project. Attendance shall be required for the GC, EC, representative from MEP firm, BAS Integrator and lighting control rep.

01 Pre-Installation- After submittals have been approved and material has arrived onsite and before installation of any devices begins. Review lighting control layout plans, required as-built information and MSTP Terminations.

02 Pre-Factory startup- Electrical contractor must have all lighting control devices installed, wired and tested at least 30 days prior to substantial completion deadline. At this coordination meeting the electrical contractor shall walk the site with attendees and go room by room to ensure they are ready for factory technician to start the system programming. Electrical contractor shall have his as built documentation of the system completed for this meeting.

03 Move in: 30 days prior to owner move in all parties shall meet onsite to review completed system. At this time all installation and factory programming shall be completed.

G. The installing electrical contractor shall complete, prior to request of WattStopper factory start up and site commissioning, complete installation of all relay panels, their respective loads landed and confirmed operations, switches installed, and confirmed operational, and the entire data network shall be pulled from all panels to the designated IT room as indicated on plans.

H. The installing contractor shall, prior to request of WattStopper factory start up and site commissioning, request a site visit by the local authorized WattStopper rep to assist in identification of any open ended issues, thereby eliminating potential for delays and system commission interruptions. The pre commissioning meeting shall include the Engineer, the Architect, the local rep (Edwin Jones Co.), the Owner’s project manager, the electrical contractor and the general contractor

I. Upon confirmation of progress by local factory authorities, the installing electrical contractor will complete the startup request form found in the WattStopper submittals, including any relay/circuit, and switching changes from the contract documents. This is essential to facilitate substantial completion.

J. The installing electrical contractor shall clearly label all low voltage wiring inside the relay controllers. Labels shall be typed and indicate what they are connected to (switch, occupancy sensor, etc.) and what room they are connected to. Labels shall be Panduit


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 09 43-9

Permanent Labels or Brother Cable Labels. The room # shall include both the architectural plan room numbers as well as the room numbers to be shown on the signage.

K. All low voltage wiring inside the relay controllers must be clean and organized. Wire nuts are not acceptable, only compression fittings.

L. Low voltage wire shall be terminated so the wire jackets match the color coding on the termination blocks.

M. Attic stock. Electrical contractor shall provide the following spare parts package to turn over to the owner within thirty (30) days of substantial completion of the project. This material is to be ordered separately when commissioning is scheduled in order to ensure the longest warranty period possible.

01 Room Controllers (1)

02 Ceiling Occupancy Sensors (3)

3.2 SUPPORT SERVICES

A. System Start Up and Commissioning

01 Manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized technician to confirm proper installation and operation of all lighting control system components. The startup requirement is intended to verify:

a. That all occupancy and daylighting sensors are located, installed, and adjusted as intended by the factory and the contract documents.

b. The occupancy sensors and daylighting sensors are operating within the manufacturers specifications.

c. The sensors and room controllers interact as a complete and operational system to meet the design intent.

02 Manufacturer to provide a written statement verifying that the system meets the above requirements.

03 The electrical contractor shall request factory commissioning by submitting a startup request form at least (2) weeks before startup is required.

04 Electrical contractor must schedule lighting control factory start-up to begin at least four (4) weeks prior to substantial completion deadline.

05 Lighting control technician shall issue daily reports notifying of the project status, open issues, challenges, etc at the end of each day he/she is onsite commissioning the system. Reports shall be sent directly to EC, GC and Architect/Engineer.

06 At the completion of the first visit of the lighting control technician, all parties shall meet onsite to walk the project and evaluate any open issues. At this meeting the schedule for owner training shall be determined.

07 The electrical contractor shall provide at least (1) journeyman electrician, familiar with the installation of the system, dedicated to assisting the factory start-up technician for the entire duration of the commissioning process.

B. System Training

01 Upon completions of the system commissioning the manufacturer shall provide factory authorized technician to train owner personnel in the operation,


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 09 43-10

programming and maintenance of the lighting control system including all occupancy sensors and daylighting controls.

02 Owner operation memo- Lighting control manufacturer shall prepare an operational memo for owner to distribute informing building occupants of the operation of their lighting control system. Memo shall explain the following but not limited to: auto on/ vs manual on, occupancy sensors, daylight harvesting, plug load control, after hours time delays.

C. System Programming

01 Manufacturer shall provide system programming including:

a. Wiring documentation.

b. Switch operation.

c. Occupancy sensors.

d. Photocells

02 Verification of a complete and working system including MSTP network status

03 Provide computer generated documentation on the commissioning of the system including a room by room description of:

a. Sensor Parameters, time delays, sensitivities and daylighting setpoints.

b. Sequence of operation (e.g. manual on, auto off, etc.)

c. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.)

D. Re-Commissioning

01 After 90 days from occupancy the factory authorized representative and electrical contractor shall re-calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect/Owner of all re-commissioning activity and changes.

E. Warranty

01 Provide a five (5) year complete manufacturer’s warranty on all products to be free of manufacturers’ defects.

02 System warranty shall be for two (2) years of complete maintenance coverage after final acceptance of the system and include all material and labor to provide consistent peak performance of the system. Post-warranty maintenance shall be available on contract or call basis.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 24 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 24 00-1

SECTION 26 24 00 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



C. Equipment shall meet or follow applicable requirements in other sections of the specifications and on the drawings.

D. Equipment shall meet applicable requirements include in the NEC, UL, NEMA and ANSI Standards and be so labeled.

E. Provide Shop Drawings per Section 26 00 00.

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 LIGHTING PANELS

A. GENERAL: Provide for panels 400 amps and smaller. Circuit breaker type; Square D Type NQOD for 120/208-240 Volts, NF for 277/480 Volts. Construction shall comply with NEMA and U. L. Standards. Panels and circuit breakers shall be listed for use with 75° C wiring. Mount panel with top of can at 72" above finished floor. All products shall be manufactured in the United States.

B. CABINETS: Safety dead front type with front hinged trim to box with full length piano hinge and quarter turn fasteners; box made of code gage galvanized steel; provide wire bending space per NEC Table 373-6; door-in-door construction with both inner door and outer door with flush type lock and latch, all keyed alike.

C. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Plug in for 120/208-240 Volts, bolt in for 277/480 Volts; quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic trip; automatic tripping indicated by handle at midpoint position; multi-pole breakers to have common trip (handle ties are not acceptable). Minimum interrupting ratings shall be 14,000 Amps symmetrical at 277/480 Volts and 10,000 Amps symmetrical at 120/208-240 Volts. All main circuit breakers shall be rated 22,000 Amps minimum and be vertically mounted. Ratings as scheduled on drawings. Square D I-line construction with plug on breakers is acceptable for 277/480 Volts. Install circuit breakers in same order as shown on the drawings. Where spaces are noted, provide buss connectors and all other provisions necessary to add future breakers of any size and number of poles up to 100 amp and three poles.

D. BUSSING: Tin plated copper sized in accordance with NEMA temperature rise standards and installed completely throughout panel for installation of future breakers where schedule shows space only. Lugs U. L. rated for Cu/Al terminations. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, buss bracing shall be 22,000 Amps symmetrical. Panels with 24 or more circuits shall have a minimum of 225 Amp bussing. Provide a ground bar in the Service Entrance Equipment and in each electrical panel having a branch circuit ground wire.

E. SURGE SUPPRESSION: Panels noted to have TVSS surge suppression shall include TVSS mounted inside panel. See TVSS section within this specification for more


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 24 00-2

information. The surge suppress device shall not use any of the scheduled spaces. Provide additional bussing and larger can to accommodate the surge suppression device.

F. DIRECTORY: Complete at end of job, typewritten, stating equipment or rooms served by circuit. Type even circuits on right side of card, odd on left side.

G. FINISH: Gray enamel over rust inhibiting treatment after fabrication and before assembly. After installation, and before acceptance by the Owner, assembly shall be painted with a rust inhibiting paint (color selected by Architect). Recessed cans may have galvanized finish.

H. NAMEPLATES

01 Factory Nameplate: Provide information per industry standards but shall include voltage, phase, buss amperage and short circuit rating.

02 Circuit Number Labels: All circuits and spaces shall be clearly labeled on the panel deadfront with the typed circuit number labeling provided by the switchgear manufacturer. Circuit numbers shall be attached adjacent to each circuit breaker and space on the panel, even circuits on right side, odd on left.

03 Field Nameplate: Provide lamacoid nameplate with 5/16" letters on front face showing panel name, voltage and amperage rating. Attach with mastic and two screws. Coordinate to give same name as shown on panelboard schedule.

Panel HA 225 MCB

480Y/277V, 3φ, 4W

Fed from Panel DA

04 Identification of ungrounded conductors: Provide permanent label indicating the color coding of phase conductors based on voltage as noted below:

480Y/277 Volt Panel

Phase A - Brown

Phase B - Purple

Phase C - Yellow

208Y/120 Volt Panel

Phase A - Black

Phase B - Red

Phase C - Blue

120/240 Volt Panel

Phase A - Black

Phase B - Orange (high leg of delta)

Phase C - Blue

I. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D.

2.2 SWITCHGEAR TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR (TVSS/SPD)

A. GENERAL: Provide TVSS equipment for electrical panels and equipment as noted on the Drawings. Unless noted to be mounted in the protected panel, TVSS shall be installed in NEMA 1 housing and mounted adjacent to the equipment to be protected. Connect TVSS to three pole circuit breaker in the panel with wiring as short and straight


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 24 00-3

as possible.

B. DISPLAY: Provide digital transient counter with battery backup.

C. SUPPRESSION MODES: System shall provide suppression of L-L, L-N, L-G and N-G transients.

D. RESPONSE TIME: 1 nanosecond or less.

E. EMI/RFI ATTENUATION: 38 dB or better.

F. WARRANTY: 10 year, non-prorated replacement.

G. TVSS RATING:

01 Panels smaller than 400 amps: 100 kAmps per phase

02 Panels 400 amps up to 800 amps: 160 kAmps per phase

03 Panels larger than 800 amps: 240 kAmps per phase

H. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D, Current Technology and Liebert.

2.3 NAMEPLATES

A. In addition to the nameplate specified with the various equipment, provide the following engraved lamacoid nameplate with 5/16" high letters on each lighting panel, distribution panel and transformer:

CAUTION

DO NOT ADD OR MODIFY CIRCUITS WHILE ENERGIZED

THIS PANEL IS POWERED FROM PANEL DA.

Replace PANEL with TRANSFORMER as appropriate. Replace PANEL DA with the actual device as shown on the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation WIRING DEVICES Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 27 26 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 27 26-1

SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 WIRING DEVICES

A. GENERAL: All devices must be suitable for use intended, and have voltage and current ratings adequate for loads served. All devices shall have terminals designed for use with stranded wire. All receptacles shall have a grounded pole and green painted grounding screw. Grounded receptacles shall ground lug internally connected to mounting tabs. Wall outlets shall be installed with the ground pin down. Devices installed in or served through fire rated structures shall be fireproofed in a manner compatible with the U. L. fire rating.

B. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Catalog numbers listed below are Hubbell or Legrand (Pass & Seymour), unless indicated otherwise. Equivalent items made by Arrow-Hart, Bryant and Leviton will be acceptable provided they meet specification requirements. All devices shall be ivory color unless noted otherwise. Devices on a generator shall be red. Computer/isolated ground outlets shall be orange.

C. WALL SWITCHES: (20 Amp/277 Volt) HBL1221

D. KEYED SWITCHES: (20 Amp/277 Volt) HBL1221L (Hubbell only) with 1209 key with each switch.

E. MOTOR RATED SWITCH WITH PILOT LIGHT: (20 amp, 277V) P&S PS20AC1-RPL7, (20 amp, 120/277V, Double Pole) P&S PS20AC2-RPL, (30 Amp, 120/277V, Double Pole) P&S PS30AC2-RPL. Switch shall have minimum rating of upstream overcurrent protection.

F. CONVENIENCE OUTLETS: (20 amp/125v/3 wire) Legrand TR5362. (Heavy-Duty, Tamper-Resistant) (Red if on generator)

G. COMPUTER OUTLETS: (20 amp/125v/3 wire) Legrand TRIG5362 (Heavy-Duty, Tamper-Resistant & Isolated Ground, Orange Color). (Red if on generator)

H. GFI OUTLET: (20 amp/125v/3 wire) (Heavy-Duty, Tamper-Resistant, LED Indicators, Auto Self-Test).

01 Hubbell GFTRST20I or Legrand 2097TRR-I

Lane School Renovation WIRING DEVICES Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 27 26 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 27 26-2

02 GFI outlets in the kitchen shall be P&S 2097TRWR-I only.

03 GFI outlets at the exterior of the building or damp/wet locations shall be weather-resistant, Hubbell GFTWRST20I or Legrand 2097TRWR-I

I. ISOLATED GROUND GFI OUTLETS: (20 amp/125v/3 wire), Legrand 2097IGTR-O (Tamper Resistant, Orange Color, Isolated Ground, Auto Self-Test, GFI).

J. CONVENIENCE OUTLET WITH USB CHARGING PORTS: (20 amp/125v/3wire), Hubbell USB20X2I (Tamper Resistant, 2-USB Type 2.0 Ports, 3.8 Amp, 5 Volt DC)

K. SPECIAL DEVICES: Refer to Drawings, all devices shall be specification grade. Provide matching cord and cap.

L. PLATES: Provide Type 302/304 smooth stainless steel plates for all devices; provide combination and/or gangable plates where adjacently located multi-outlet assemblies are indicated on drawings which shall include multi-switch installations. Plates for surface mounted switch or outlet boxes shall be Sierra galvanized steel handy box plates (H series). Mounting screws shall be stainless steel. Jumbo plates are not acceptable.

M. OUTDOOR COVERS: Electrical devices noted “WP” installed under canopies or other areas not subject to direct rainfall shall have aluminum self-closing covers that are rated for wet location with cover closed, Hubbell RW5xxxx Series. Devices subject to direct rainfall shall have Hubbell WPxxx Series aluminum cover rated for wet location with cord connected to device.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 28 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 28 00-1

SECTION 26 28 00 LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 FUSED AND SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. GENERAL: Provide a safety disconnect switch for each motor, motor starter, electric duct heater and other equipment required by the NEC. Provide fusible where shown. Switches shall be listed for use with 75 C wiring. All products shall be manufactured in the United States.

B. TYPE: Heavy duty switch sized for load served; non-fusible where used purely as disconnect device. Fused switches shall accommodate Class RK1 fuses. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for switches inside, and NEMA 3R for switches outside unless noted to be NEMA 4X stainless steel on the Drawings.

C. FUSES: See section on fuses.

D. NAMEPLATE: Provide each device with an engraved nameplate showing load served.

E. MANUFACTURERS: General Electric Type TH, Siemens and Square D.

2.2 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. TYPE: Single or multi-pole circuit breaker suitable for the short circuit requirements as listed on the Drawings. Mount in NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R enclosure to match application.

B. NAMEPLATE: Provide each device with an engraved nameplate showing load served.

C. MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Siemens and Square D.

2.3 FUSES

A. GENERAL: Provide fuses for all fused switches noted on the Drawings.

B. TYPE: Fuses to 600 amps shall be low peak, dual element, time delay fuses – LPS Class RK1. Larger fuses shall Limitron KTU Class L fuses.

C. SPARES: Provide 10% spare fuses of each size, minimum of three per size. Install in

Lane School Renovation LOW VOLTAGE CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 28 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 28 00-2

cabinet in main mechanical room.

D. MANUFACTURERS: Bussman.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation INTERIOR LIGHTING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 51 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 51 00-1

SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 LIGHT FIXTURES

A. GENERAL: Provide all fixtures as shown, completely wired and securely attached to supports. Fixture models scheduled are to show general type of fixtures required. Furnish mounting design and trim to fit type of ceiling and finish on which fixture is to be installed. Fixture shall be designed to operate satisfactorily where installed including the required fire proofing. All lens doors shall securely attach to the housing with spring operated latches to prevent release due to vibration or gravity.

B. PAINT: All fluorescent fixture housings shall have a complete coverage of white enamel or baked polyester powder finish with 85% minimum reflectivity.

C. PLASTIC REFRACTORS/DIFFUSERS: Material shall be light-stable 100% virgin acrylic with a nominal thickness of .125”.

D. LAMPS: Provide all lamps as scheduled. Fluorescent lamps shall be 4100K, High Performance T8 lamps with minimum of 3100 lumens output (Philips F32T8/ADV841/ALTO). HID lamps to have color correcting coating and be pulse start type. Lamps shall be manufactured by GE, Osram Sylvania or Phillips.

E. BALLASTS: Fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic type with a maximum of 10% THD, a minimum ballast factor of 0.90, a minimum power factor of .99 and crest factor less than 1.6. Ballasts shall be 2 or 3 lamp type with lamps wired in parallel so failure of one lamp does not extinguish all lamps or degrade ballast performance. Provide two ballasts where high/low switching is required or where two of the three lamps of the fixture are shown to be connected to a remote emergency power source. Ballasts shall not emit a discernible buzzing or hum. Ballasts shall be suitable for the location installed and application used (motion sensor controlled). HID ballasts shall be high power factor, constant wattage auto-transformer with a 20 F temperature rating for pulse start lamps. Ballasts shall be warranted for four years from date of substantial completion of the project. Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, Motorola or Magnetek.

F. LED FIXTURES: LED lamps shall be 4000K color temperature with a minimum CRI of 80 and shall come standard with 0-10V dimming and a five year warranty on LED boards

Lane School Renovation INTERIOR LIGHTING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 51 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 51 00-2

and drivers. All LED fixtures shall be DesignLights Consortium (DLC) or EnergyStar certified. Models shall have a minimum projected life of 50,000 hours at 70% lumen output using IESNA LM-79, LM-80 and TM-21 standards.

G. FLUORESCENT EMERGENCY POWER PACKS: Battery packs shall be high output, self-contained, mounted internal to fixture to power two lamps. Battery shall be long life nickel cadmium sized for 90 minute operation. Unit shall have 120/277 volt solid state charger and automatic transfer switch. Unit shall provide a nominal 1100 lumen output from the specified fluorescent lamps. Emergi-lite Model FPSI/U

H. FIRE PROTECTION: Provide fixture fire protection as required by U. L. Fire Resistive Index for the type ceiling to be installed. Provide additional fireproofing as required by the local building code. Protection is specified under the Ceiling Section of these Specifications.

I. SUPPORT: Securely support fixtures to prevent the fixture from falling. Layin fixtures shall be supported per the ceiling fire rating as specified by the Architect. Surface and pendant fluorescent fixtures shall be supported with two supports per four foot section. Provide caddy clips for recessed fixtures.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation EXTERIOR LIGHTING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 26 56 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 26 56 00-1

SECTION 26 56 00 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 LIGHT FIXTURES

A. GENERAL: Provide fixtures as shown and scheduled on the drawings, with all necessary accessories for a complete installation.

B. LAMPS: HID lamps to have color correcting coating.

C. LED FIXTURES: LED lamps shall be 4000K color temperature with a minimum CRI of 80 and shall come standard with a five year warranty on LED boards and drivers. All LED fixtures shall be DesignLights Consortium (DLC) or EnergyStar certified. Models shall have a minimum projected life of 50,000 hours at 70% lumen output using IESNA LM-79, LM-80 and TM-21 standards.

D. BALLASTS: Ballasts for fluorescent outdoor fixtures shall be rated for 0° operation. HID ballasts shall be high power factor, constant wattage auto-transformer with a 20° F temperature rating for pulse start lamps. Ballasts shall be warranted for four years from date of substantial completion of the project. Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, Motorola or Magnetek.

E. LIGHT POLES: All poles shall be selected to support the scheduled fixtures and equipment for 120 MPH wind loading plus 1.3 gust factor. Provide a reinforced concrete support base per the Drawing Details. Provide pole base cover to conceal mounting bolts.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation STRUCTURED CABLING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 27 10 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 10 00-1

SECTION 27 10 00 STRUCTURED CABLING







1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide a complete and tested cable distribution system for data interconnections (Local Area Network) in the facility. Provide all equipment and cabling systems per this specification and Drawings.

B. The data and voice distribution system shall unshielded twisted pair cables, raceways, conduit, UTP termination devices, data and voice communications outlets, patch panels, patch cables, racks and other incidental and miscellaneous premises wiring system hardware as required for a complete and usable system.

01 Home run all data and voice cables in Area A to the existing data rack serving the area. Provide new Cat6 patch panels and horizontal wire manager in existing rack for new drops.

02 Home run all data and voice cables in Area B to the existing patch panels in the wall mounted cabinet.

03 Install all patch cords.

C. A certified SCS Manufacturer Installer must be present at jobsite 100% of the time during operating hours and be prepared to show proper manufacturer Certification ID at any time asked by Owner.

D. All equipment shall be provided and installed by Structured Cabling Contractor.

E. The finished installation shall include a minimum 20 year factory warranty.

F. Conduit and outlet boxes will be provided by the electrical subcontractor under Section 26. Data cabling subcontractor shall coordinate with the electrical contractor to ensure that firewall, wall and floor sleeves are installed for proper and complete installation.

G. All work will be accomplished without the disruption of the existing structured cabling systems.


A. Installer Qualifications: The Data Cable System Installer shall be licensed and shall meet all applicable regulations of the State of Texas and Department of Labor insofar as they


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 10 00-2

apply to this type of system. The installer shall be a firm normally employed in the low voltage and data cabling industry and shall provide a reference list of ten projects of similar size and contact names confirming successful Category 6 premises wiring system installations. He shall also be factory certified to design and install this system by one of the specified equipment manufacturers.

B. STANDARDS: All work shall be performed in accordance with the following standards and codes:

City Building Code

National Electric Code, latest Edition

1.4 REFERENCES

TIA/EIA-568-A Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard

EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces

TIA/EIA-606 The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

EIA/TIA-455-A Standard Test Procedure for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices and Other Fiber Optic Components

TIA/EIA TSB 67 Transmission Performance Specification for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems

TIA/EIA TSB 72 Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines

ISO/IEC 11801 Generic Cabling Standard

EN 50173 Generic Cabling Standards for Customer Premises

ANSI/EIA/TIA 526-14 Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plan

1.5 ABBREVIATIONS

MDF Main Distribution Frame

IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame

MC Main Cross-Connect

IC Intermediate Cross-Connect

UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair

1.6 WARRANTY

A. The selected system installer shall be factory certified by the manufacturer, and shall provide an end-to-end performance warranty of not less than twenty (20) years for modifications to the system. The cabling contractor shall provide certification documentation. The performance warranty shall be issued by the manufacturer and shall warrant that all Category 6 cable links have been tested bi-directionally (end-to-end) using a Level 2 tester, per TSB-67, and that all test results conform to the most current TIA/EIA-568-A and/or TSB-67 Link values. Systimax Warranty or equivalent.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 10 00-3

B. The warranty will stipulate that all products used in this installation meet the prescribed mechanical and transmission specifications for such products as described in ISO/IEC 11801, ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A, or EN 50173. Quality and workmanship evaluation shall be solely by the Owner and designated representatives.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. GENERAL: Comply with Division 26 and 27 Sections.

B. PRODUCT DATA: Complete product data for all cable, patch panels, cross-connect blocks, modular outlets, cable supports, cable labels, outlet devices and other products to be used in the installation.

C. SHOP DRAWINGS: Proposed circuit routing and circuit grouping plan prepared by a BICSI certified registered communications distribution designer. The RCDD certification must have been granted on or before January 1, 2001. Any data runs exceeding 300 feet shall be brought to the Owner/Architect’s attention before cabling commences.

D. TESTING FORMS: Submit proposed Category 6 UTP cable test result forms, fiber optic test result forms, and a list of instrumentation to be used for systems testing.

E. PROJECT CLOSEOUT: At completion of the project, include the following in the Close-out Documents:

01 Complete manufacturer’s product literature and samples for all approved substitutions to the products made during the course of the Project.

02 Inspection and Test Reports - During the course of the Project, the Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system to insure that the materials supplied and the work performed conform to Contract requirements. The Contractor shall provide written documentation that indicated that materials acceptance testing was conducted as specified. The Contractor shall also provide documentation, which indicates that all cable termination testing was completed and that all irregularities were corrected prior to job completion.

03 Operating and Maintenance Instructions - Submit four copies of Operating and Maintenance Instructions for all devices within the system. These instructions shall reflect any changes made during the course of construction, and shall be in a three-ring binder labeled with the project name and description. Provide one copy of all as-built drawings and testing/survey documentation per O&M Manual. Provide complete electronic version of O&M Manual on CD to be included in each binder.

04 As-Built Drawings - As-built drawings will include cable pathways, data outlet locations with correct labeling and MC/IC locations. The as-built drawings will be prepared using AutoCAD Version 2002. Provide the Owner with four prints of each drawing, and electronic versions of the as-builts on CDs.

05 Manufacturer’s Warranty Certificates “Systimax Warranty Certificates or equivalent”.

F. BILL OF MATERIALS: The contractor must provide a detailed (itemized) pricing breakdown for the turnkey solution that includes: labor, materials, network equipment, wiring, termination, jacks, face-plates, electrical equipment, electrical hardware, installation, etc. Pricing breakdown must include the list price for each item provided.



Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 10 00-4

2.1 TWISTED PAIR CABLE

A. Refer to Section 27 15 00 Horizontal Cabling

2.2 TERMINATIONS FOR DATA AND VOICE OUTLETS

A. Refer to Section 27 16 00 Connecting Cords, Devices and Adapters.

2.3 DATA AND VOICE CLOSET (MC/IC) CATEGORY 6 TERMINATION HARDWARE

A. Refer to Section 27 11 00 Equipment Room Fittings

2.4 CABLE LUBRICANTS

A. Lubricants specifically designed for installing communications cable may be used to reduce pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit. Dyna-Blue, American Polywater or approved equal for twisted pair cables. Optic Lube, Ideal or approved equal for Fiber Optical Cable.

2.5 FIRE WALL SEALANT

A. Any penetration through firewalls (including those in sleeves) shall be sealed with an Underwriter Laboratories approved sealant, Flameseal or approved equal.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall familiarize himself/herself with the site and existing district

infrastructure before submitting proposal. Congested building areas shall be inspected by the Contractor to ensure coordination with the other trades during construction. NO EXTRAS SHALL BE PERMITTED BECAUSE OF THE CONTRACTOR’S FAILURE TO PROPERLY INVESTIGATE EXISTING CONDITIONS OR BUILDING DESIGN AT THE TIME OF THE PROPOSAL.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

01 The Cabling Contractor shall furnish and install a complete data cabling system with all necessary wiring and devices. The General Contractor will provide a conduit and outlet box at each outlet location. The Cable Contractor shall furnish tie wraps, tape or hooks for slack-wire management where appropriate.

02 Fire Wall Penetrations: The Contractor shall avoid penetration of fire-rated walls and floors wherever possible. Where penetrations are necessary, they shall be sleeved with metallic conduit and resealed with an Underwriter Laboratories approved sealant. Contractor shall also seal all floor, ceiling and wall penetrations in fire or smoke barriers and in the wiring closet.

03 Wall Penetrations: A conduit sleeve with protective bushings on both ends shall be provided through all walls for cabling where a raceway system is not installed. The installed sleeve shall be mechanically secured to the wall. Seal around sleeve penetrations.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 10 00-5

04 Allowable Cable Bend Radius and Pull Tension: In general, communications cable cannot tolerate sharp bends or excessive pull tension during installation. Refer to the cable manufacturers allowable bend radius and pull tension data for the maximum allowable limits.

05 Cable Lubricants: After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant residue.

06 Pull Strings: Provide pull strings in all new conduits, including all conduits with cable installed as part of this contract. Pull test is not to exceed 200 pounds. Where other cables (video, telephone, etc.) are data are in the same conduit serving the same wall outlet, they shall be pulled together with pull strings.

07 Conduit Fill: Conduit fill shall not exceed 40%.

08 Damage:

a. The Contractor shall replace or rework cables showing evidence of improper handling including stretches, kinds, short radius bends, over-tightened bindings, loosely twisted and over-twisted pairs at terminals and cable sheath removed too far (over 1½”).

b. The Contractor shall replace any damaged ceiling tiles that are broken during cable installation.

09 Clean-up: All clean up activity related to work performed will be the responsibility of the Contractor and must be completed daily before leaving the facility.

B. Documentation

01 Labels: The Contractor will label all outlets using permanent/legible typed or machine engraved labels approved by the Owner.

a. The font shall be at least one-eighth inch (1/8”) in height, block. All labels shall correspond to as-builts and to final test reports.

b. Label patch panels in the wiring closet to match those on the corresponding data outlets.

02 Floor Plan: A floor plan clearly labeled with all outlet jack numbers shall be included in the as-built plans.

03 LABELING SYSTEM: Contractor shall label wiring and equipment based on the Owner’s prescribed system to be provided to the Contractor prior to installation.

C. Station Wiring Installation

01 General

a. Cabling between wiring closet and workstation locations shall be made as individual home runs. No intermediate punch down blocks or splices may be installed or utilized between the wiring closet and the communications outlet at the workstation location.

b. All cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to change performance specifications. Factory twists of each individual pair must be maintained up to the connection points at both ends of the cable. There shall never be more than one and one-half inches of unsheathed Category 6 UTP cable at either the wiring closet or the workstation termination locations.

02 Exposed Cable:

a. All cabling shall be installed inside walls or ceiling spaces whenever possible.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 10 00-6

b. Exposed cable runs will require Owner approval, and will only be allowed when no other options exist.

03 Placement: All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to impair the Owner’s efficient use of their full capacity.

04 Cable Routes: All cabling placed in ceiling areas must be in conduit, cable tray or J-hooks. Cable supports shall be permanently anchored to building structure or substrates. Provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached and that are suitable sized to carry the weight of the cables to be supported. Attaching cable to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. Use J-hooks for up to 15 cables (Caddy CAT 21 or CAT 32 hooks with appropriate brackets). For all runs of sixteen (16) or more cables, provide cable rings. Cable supports shall be spaced 5 feet maximum on center to hang cable. Provide additional cable supports as required to maintain no more than 12 inches of cable sag between supports. Communications cable shall be routed so as to provide a minimum of 18 inches spacing from light fixtures, sources of heat, power feeder conduits and EMI sources. Cabling shall not be attached to ceiling grid support wires. Cable runs shall be parallel or perpendicular to building structure. Multiple cables to be bonded together every six feet.

D. Cable Testing

01 Notification: The Owner/Designer shall be notified one week prior to any testing so that the testing may be witnessed.

02 Inspection: Before requesting a final inspection, the Contractor shall perform a series of end-to-end installation performance tests. The Contractor shall submit for approval describing the test procedures, test result forms and timetable for all copper and fiber optic cabling.

03 TESTS: Trained personnel shall perform all testing. Acceptance of the test procedures discussed below is predicated on the Contractor’s use of the recommended products and adherence to the inspection requirements and practices set forth. Acceptance of the completed installation will be evaluated in the context of each of these factors.

04 Errors: When errors are found, the source of each error shall be determined, corrected and the cable retested. All defective components shall be replaced and retested. Retest results must be provided on Owner approved forms and witnessed by Owner.

05 Twisted Pair Cable Testing:

a. At a minimum, the Contractor shall test all station drop cable pairs from Data Closet termination patch panels to outlet device RJ45 jacks. Category 6 products shall be tested for compliance to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B and ISO/IEC 11801 for a Category 6 rated installation. Test equipment used shall meet TIA/EIA TSB-67, Level II accuracy. Further, the Contractor shall have a copy of TSB-67 in its possession and be familiar with its contents.

b. Each wire/pair shall be tested at both ends for the following:

1) Wire map (pin to pin connectivity) 2) Length (in feet) 3) Attenuation 4) Near End Cross Talk (NEXT) 5) Power sum


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 10 00-7

c. Test equipment shall provide an electronic and printed record of these tests. Test results for each Category 6 four-pair UTP cable must be submitted with identification to match labels on all patch panel ports and RJ45 jacks and must match as-builts associated with that cable.

H. Inspection: Conformance to the installation practices covered above will be verified when completed. In some cases, the Owner may inspect before acceptance.

3.3 TESTING

A. All testing shall be witnessed by the Owner’s Representative and the Commissioning Agent’s Representative. Notify/coordinate with these personnel for all testing scheduled.

3.4 TRAINING

A. Provide a 1 hour minimum on-site training for the owner’s representatives in the use and maintenance of the structured cabling system

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS Aldine Independent School District SECTION 27 11 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

100% CD Review – 04/15/2016 27 11 00-1

SECTION 27 11 00 EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS



B. The General Electrical Requirements as specified in Section 26, apply to the work specified in this Section.

C. The requirements as specified in Section 27 10 00 Structured Cabling, apply to the work specified in this Section.

D. Equipment shall meet or follow applicable requirements in other sections of the specifications and on the drawings.

E. Equipment shall meet applicable requirements include in the NEC, UL, NEMA and ANSI Standards and be so labeled.

F. Provide Shop Drawings per Section 26 00 00.

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 DATA AND VOICE CLOSET (MC/IC) CATEGORY 6 TERMINATION HARDWARE

A. Category 6 Patch Panels: The Category 6 data and voice station cable shall be terminated on Category 6 RJ45 patch panels with circuit board construction. Patch panels shall consist of faceplates pre-assembled with communication port housings and shall be 19 inch rack mountable with front patch cord retainer and rear cable retainer. Workstation patch panels shall terminate all workstation communications outlets. Furnish units that meet or exceed Category 6 requirements in ISO/IEC 11801 (2002), EN 50173-1 (2002) and TIA/EIA-568A. Patch panel must accept individual distribution modules which can be rotated forward, allowing front access to the 110 type IDC terminals for easy cable termination. 48 port panels must contain built in front wire management and take up a maximum of 2 U rack spaces. Systimax 360 GigaSPEED XL PATCHMAX or approved equal.

B. Cable Management Panels: Provide cable management panels as required for horizontal and vertical cable management. Chatsworth Evolution or approved equal.

01 Horizontal cable management to match; single sided / single door; available in 1U, 2U, 3U and 4U

a. Chatsworth 30330-719 2U or approved equal.

2.2 CABLE ROUTING/PATHWAY

A. Cable Support System: Cable saddles, bridal rings or J-Hooks shall be used to route all exposed cables (cable not in conduit or cable tray) in open access environments as well as in communications closets. Caddy, Panduit or approved equal.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation HORIZONTAL CABLING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 27 15 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 15 00-1

SECTION 27 15 00 HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. The General Electrical Requirements as specified in Section 26, apply to the work specified in this Section.





2.1 TWISTED PAIR CABLE

A. The wire provided for all data and voice outlets shall be plenum rated, unshielded twisted pair, 4-pair, 24 AWG solid copper conductor, meeting the intent and quality level of the TIA/EIA-568-B Commercial Building Wiring Standard. Also, meet or exceed TIA/EIA 568-C.2 Category 6 and ISO/EIC Category 6/E specifications. One (1) cable for each port shown on the drawing.

B. The Category 6, 4-paired UTP cable must be UL Performance Level tested. Each 1,000 foot spool must be individually tested with test results affixed to the spool.

C. Indoor data and voice cable shall be plenum rated 4-pair Category 6 certified cable, Commscope Systimax 71E series GigaSPEED XL or approved equal.

D. Outside data and voice cable shall be 4-pair Category 6 certified cable, Commscope Systimax 1571 series GigaSPEED XL or approved equal. Do not extend into plenum areas more than 50 feet.

E. Building copper riser cable for analog cabling shall be Commscope Systimax 2061B WH 25/24 R400 or approved equal.

F. All data and voice cable shall be home run to the patch panel distribution frames designated by the room number.

G. All cable shall be color coded as follows:

01 Standard Data (To Cat 6 Patch Panel): White

02 Voice (To Cat 6 Patch Panel): White

03 Projector (To Cat 6 Patch Panel): White

04 Wireless Data (To Cat 6 Patch Panel): White

05 EMS (To Cat 6 Patch Panel): White

06 Time and Attendance (To Cat 6 Patch Panel): White

Lane School Renovation HORIZONTAL CABLING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 27 15 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 15 00-2

07 Security Data / Voice Yellow

08 Fire Alarm Voice Yellow

09 Dedicated Telephones (Cat 3 to 110 Block at Telephone Demarc):

Blue with yellow stripe

10 Telephone (Cat 3 to Analog Patch Panel): Blue with yellow stripe

2.2 CABLE ROUTING/PATHWAY

A. Cable Support System: Cable saddles, bridal rings or J-Hooks shall be used to route all exposed cables (cable not in conduit or cable tray) in open access environments as well as in communications closets. Caddy, Panduit or approved equal.

B. Surface Raceway: Surface raceway shall not be allowed except where specifically indicated on the drawings or with prior approval by the owner. Surface raceway shall be 1-1/4” one piece surface raceway that is tamper resistant, self-locking, PVC, white, with a minimum continuous length of 8 ft. All runs shall be cut to length from a single continuous section. Multiple sections may not be spliced together unless the run length exceeds the maximum factory single section raceway length.

C. Conduit: Provide conduit sleeves through walls, where cabling passes above non-accessible ceiling and in walls.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES AND ADAPTERS Aldine Independent School District SECTION 27 16 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 16 00-1

SECTION 27 16 00 CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES AND ADAPTERS PART 1 - GENERAL





D. Equipment shall meet or follow applicable requirements in other sections of the specifications and on the drawings.

E. Equipment shall meet applicable requirements include in the NEC, UL, NEMA and ANSI Standards and be so labeled.

F. Provide Shop Drawings per Section 26 00 00.


2.1 TERMINATIONS FOR DATA AND VOICE OUTLETS

A. Flush mount jacks shall be high quality, white Category 6 RJ45 modular jacks with circuit board construction and IDC style or 110 style wire, T568B terminations. Jacks shall meet EIA/TIA TSB40 recommendations for Category 6 connecting hardware. Provide white jacks for data, white jacks for voice and grey jack for telephone.

01 Provide M- Series jack shall also be mounted either at 90 degrees (straight) or 45 degrees (angled) in any Systimax face plate.

02 Universal design and label supports both T568 A and B wiring

03 Optional Plastic Icons (M61A) and Dust Covers (M20A) available in several colors

04 Backwards compatible with Category 5, 5e, and 3 cords and plugs.

05 Shall support network speeds in excess of 1 gigabit per second

06 SYSTIMAX MGS400 Information outlet or approved equal

B. Faceplates shall match manufacturer for RJ45 outlets at all locations. Provide blank insert covers for unused station ports. Provide four port electrical white plastic plates with label cover and blank inserts as necessary. SYSTIMAX M14L-262 Information outlet face plate or approved equal.

2.2 PATCH CORDS

A. Provide patch cords for all cross connections in the MC and IC rooms, and connections for peripheral equipment to the network system. Two patch cables are required for each workstation served.

B. Patch Cables: Category 6/tangle free patch cables shall be modular/modular conforming

Lane School Renovation CONNECTING CORDS, DEVICES AND ADAPTERS Aldine Independent School District SECTION 27 16 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 16 00-2

to Category 6 protocols. (Two (2) patch cables are required for each workstation/outlet served). All patch cables shall meet or exceed attenuation and Category 6 specifications for patch cords as specified in ISO/IEC 11801, CENELEC EN50173 and TIA/EIA 568A.

01 Commscope Systimax GS8E non-plenum and GS8E-SP plenum rated modular patch cords or approved equal. All patch cords in plenum areas shall be plenum rated.

02 Data – Provide one yellow 10’ and one yellow 7’ patch cord per outlet.

03 Projector – Provide one dark grey 3’ and one yellow 7’ patch cord per outlet.

04 Time and Attendance – Provide one yellow 10’ and one red 7’ patch cord per outlet.

05 Provide 3’ patch cords for connections inside wall mounted data cabinets with color matching application type.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation INTEGRATED AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT Aldine Independent School District SECTION 27 41 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 41 00-1

SECTION 27 41 00 – INTEGRATED AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide a complete and tested audio/video distribution system for local instruction. The system shall include fully terminated cabling, faceplates, projectors, projection screens, local sound, patch cables, mounting equipment and other incidental and miscellaneous wiring, equipment and hardware as required for a complete and usable system. Contractor shall install equipment, if any, where shown on the drawings including patch cords as required for a complete and operable system.

B. Existing projectors, local sound speakers and projection screens shall be reused. Reinstall where shown on the drawings. Provide new mounting hardware as required.

C. All cabling, faceplates and patch cords shall be new.

D. The finished installation shall include a project warranty of a minimum of 2 years.

E. Conduit and outlet boxes will be provided by the electrical subcontractor under Section 26. Data cabling and audio/video subcontractors shall coordinate with the electrical contractor to ensure that wall and floor sleeves are installed for proper installation.


A. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS:

01 The firm bidder shall be normally employed in the audio-visual and industry and shall provide a reference list of ten (10) large-scale projects and contact names confirming successful classroom video projection system installations.

02 The bidder shall have an authorized service center in the state of Texas for the brand of projector that is submitted for bid. The school district reserves the right to perform an on-site inspection.

03 The bidder shall have full time local service personnel capable of servicing the projector and able to respond to service issues within 24 hours.

B. STANDARDS: All work shall be performed in accordance with the following standards and codes:

01 City Building Code

02 National Electric Code, latest Edition

1.4 WARRANTY

A. The selected system installer shall be factory authorized service center and shall provide a warranty of not less than two (2) years.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 41 00-2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. GENERAL: Comply with Sections 01300 and 26 00 00.

B. PRODUCT DATA: Complete manufacturer’s product literature for all projectors, mounting plates, projector bracket, speakers, amplifiers, cable, cross-connect blocks, cable supports, cable labels, outlet devices, and other products to be used in the installation. In addition, whenever substitutions for recommended products are made, samples (when requested by the Owner/Designer) and the manufacturer’s supporting documentation demonstrating compatibility with other related products shall be included. The contractor shall provide a letter from the manufacturer stating that the dealer is an authorized service center.

C. SHOP DRAWINGS: Proposed wiring and connectivity diagram of the proposed projection system including all faceplates, sound reinforcing equipment, device location, cable routing and cable type.

D. TESTING FORMS: Proposed Contractor test result forms, and a list of instrumentation to be used for systems testing.

E. PROJECT CLOSEOUT: At completion of the project, include the following in the Close-out Documents:

01 Complete manufacturer’s product literature and samples for all approved substitutions to the products made during the course of the Project.

02 INSPECTION AND TEST REPORTS - During the course of the Project, the Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system to insure that the materials supplied and the work performed conform to Contract requirements. The Contractor shall provide written documentation that indicated that materials acceptance testing was conducted as specified. The Contractor shall also provide documentation, which indicates that all cable termination testing was completed and that all irregularities were corrected prior to job completion.

03 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS - Submit four copies of Operating and Maintenance Instructions for all devices within the system. These instructions shall reflect any changes made during the course of construction, and shall be in a three-ring binder labeled with the project name and description. Provide an electronic version of the Operating and Maintenance Instructions with each binder.

04 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS - As-built drawings will include cable pathways, data outlet locations with correct labeling and MDF/IDF locations. The as-built drawings will be prepared using AutoCAD Version 2002. Provide the Owner with prints of each drawing, and electronic versions of the as-builts on CDs in each O&M binder.

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 GENERAL:

A. Contractor shall furnish and install a complete and tested video projection and instruction system as detailed in the project manual and associated project drawings. The video projection system shall include:

01 Multimedia faceplate and associated cabling – by Contractor for this section.

02 All cabling shall be field terminated. No pre-terminated cabling shall be allowed.

03 Any incidental and miscellaneous premises wiring system hardware including


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 41 00-3

faceplates, wiring, patch cords and connectors as required for a complete and usable system – by Contractor for this section.

04 Projector and projector mount – by Contractor for this section.

05 External speaker system – by Contractor for this section.

06 Local sound reinforcing amplifier – by Contractor for this section.

B. Electrical Contractor (Division 26) will provide all necessary conduit, junction boxes and outlet boxes together with all electrical wiring (120 volt) to accomplish these specifications. Audio/Video subcontractor shall coordinate with the electrical contractor to ensure that junction boxes, sleeves, conduit, etc. are properly installed, sized and located.

2.2 CEILING MOUNTED PROJECTOR

A. Ceiling Mounted Projector

01 Reinstall existing projectors at new locations as indicated on the drawings.

02 Prior to relocating, contractor shall test all existing projectors. Note any deficiencies in writing to Owner/Arch. Any deficiencies not so noted shall be deemed to have occurred during construction and shall be remedied at no cost to the Owner.

B. Provide all cables necessary to connect projector to wall input A/V plate under this section.

B. Projectors have networking capability. A data outlet is required by the projector.

C. Response time for projector/installation issues must be within 24 hours.

D. Electric is required by projector in ceiling tile by projector. Electrical contractor shall coordinate with A/V contractor for projector location prior to rough-in.

2.3 PROJECTOR MOUNTING EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES

A. Projector Mount

01 Reinstall existing projectors at new locations using the existing mounting hardware as indicated on the drawings.

02 Prior to relocating, contractor shall note any deficiencies in writing to Owner/Arch. Any deficiencies not so noted shall be deemed to have occurred during construction and shall be remedied at no cost to the Owner.

B. It is the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the ceiling mount distances from the projection screen location based upon the display size and model of projector.

C. It is the installing contractor’s responsibility to coordinate with the Architect, Owner and other trades for projector mounting location.

D. Contractor shall coordinate all ceiling mounted receptacle and outlet locations with projector installer on distances and exact location in room.

2.4 LOCAL SOUND REINFORCING SPEAKERS

A. Speakers

01 Reinstall existing local sound speakers at new locations using the existing mounting hardware as indicated on the drawings.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 41 00-4

02 Prior to relocating, contractor shall note any deficiencies in writing to Owner/Arch. Any deficiencies not so noted shall be deemed to have occurred during construction and shall be remedied at no cost to the Owner.

B. Provide all cables necessary to connect projector to local sound speakers under this section.

2.5 SYSTEM CABLING

A. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

01 Provide complete cabling video/audio solution from teacher’s computer to ceiling mounted projector. Contractor shall refer to floor plan for input plate and projector location to determine proper cable length requirements. Contractor shall provide at least 10’-0” service loop at all projector and input locations. Contractor shall properly support and label all cabling at each classroom projector and faceplate location.

02 Quiktron, Liberty Wire and Cable and approved equals are acceptable manufacturers of audio/video system cabling components.

B. AUDIO/VIDEO COMPONENTS AND CABLES

01 The ceiling mounted projector shall be installed with existing projector mount. Conduit shall be required for projector station outlets. Electric outlet is required by projector recessed in ceiling tile. Provide a dual gang box next to the electrical outlet at the projector for low voltage connections. Reference drawings and details for more information.

02 Cables for each projector shall include:

a. VGA with 3.5mm, plenum, x 1

b. HDMI, plenum, x 1

c. Audio cable to connect local sound speakers, x 1

d. 15’ Extension Cable, VGA w/3.5mm, x 1

e. 15’ Extension Cable, HDMI, x 1

f. Exact length of cabling shall be determined in the field with a minimum length of 50ft for all cables in the classrooms.

03 Patch Cords: Provide matching patch cords and connectors at projector end and teacher computer end for all the cables above.

a. VGA with 3.5mm 3ft and 15ft

b. HDMI 3ft and 15ft

a. Matching patch cords must be long enough to reach from wall faceplates to teacher computer end. Exact length for teacher station patch cord shall be determined in the field with a minimum patch cord length of 15’-0”.

C. TEACHER STATION FACEPLATES

01 Provide two gang stainless steel faceplate:

a. First 1-gang containing (1) VGA and (1) 3.5mm stereo mini jack.

b. Second 1-gang containing (1) HDMI.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 41 00-5

D. PROJECTOR STATION FACEPLATES

01 Provide two gang stainless steel faceplate:

a. First 1-gang containing (1) VGA and (1) 3.5mm stereo mini jack.

b. Second 1-gang containing (1) HDMI.

c. Note: 1 data drop is also required at this location to home run to nearest IC/MC (It is O.K. to provide a 3-gang box for all A/V and the 1 data drop instead of providing 2-gang for A/V and additional 1-gang for data).

E. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

01 Refer to the Details on the Drawings for additional information and requirements. Provide equipment, devices and wiring that is shown.

2.6 CABLE ROUTING, PATHWAY AND SUPPORTS

A. Cable saddles or J-Hooks shall be used to route all exposed cables (cable not in conduit or cable tray) in open access environments as well as in communications closets.

B. Approved Products: Erico, Caddy, Panduit or Pre-approved equal

2.7 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall familiarize himself/herself with the site before submitting proposal. Congested building areas shall be inspected by the Contractor to ensure coordination with the other trades during construction. NO EXTRAS SHALL BE PERMITTED BECAUSE OF THE CONTRACTOR’S FAILURE TO PROPERLY INVESTIGATE EXISTING CONDITIONS OR BUILDING DESIGN AT THE TIME OF THE PROPOSAL.

2.8 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL CABLING REQUIREMENTS

01 The Audio/Video Contractor shall furnish and install a complete audio/video cabling system with all necessary wiring and devices. The General Contractor will provide a conduit and outlet box at each outlet location. The Audio/Video Contractor shall furnish tie wraps, tape or hooks for slack-wire management where appropriate.

02 FIRE WALL PENETRATIONS: The Contractor shall avoid penetration of fire-rated walls and floors wherever possible. Where penetrations are necessary, they shall be sleeved with metallic conduit and resealed with an Underwriter Laboratories approved sealant. Contractor shall also seal all floor, ceiling and wall penetrations in fire or smoke barriers and in the wiring closet.

03 ALLOWABLE CABLE BEND RADIUS AND PULL TENSION: In general, A/V cable cannot tolerate sharp bends or excessive pull tension during installation. Refer to the cable manufacturers allowable bend radius and pull tension data for the maximum allowable limits.

04 CABLE LUBRICANTS: After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant residue.

05 PULL STRINGS: Provide pull strings in all new conduits, including all conduits with cable installed as part of this contract. Pull test is not to exceed 200 pounds. Where other cables (video, telephone, etc.) are data are in the same conduit


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 41 00-6

serving the same wall outlet, they shall be pulled together with pull strings.

06 CONDUIT FILL: Conduit fill shall not exceed 40%.

07 DAMAGE:

a. The Contractor shall replace or rework cables showing evidence of improper handling including stretches, kinds, short radius bends, over-tightened bindings, loosely twisted and over-twisted pairs at terminals and cable sheath removed too far (over 1½”).

a. The Contractor shall replace any damaged ceiling tiles that are broken during cable installation.

08 CLEAN-UP: All clean up activity related to work performed will be the responsibility of the Contractor and must be completed daily before leaving the facility.

B. DOCUMENTATION

01 LABELING:

a. The Contractor will label all outlets using permanent/legible typed or machine engraved labels approved by the Owner (no handwritten labels permitted). The font shall be at least one-eighth inch (1/8”) in height, block. All labels shall correspond to as-builts and to final test reports.

b. Refer to FBISD Standards for additional information.

02 FLOOR PLAN: A floor plan clearly labeled with all outlet jack numbers shall be included in the as-built plans.

03 LABELING SYSTEM: Contractor shall label wiring and equipment based on the Owner’s prescribed system to be provided to the Contractor prior to installation.

C. STATION WIRING INSTALLATION

01 GENERAL

b. Cabling between teacher station and projector station locations shall be made as individual home runs. No intermediate punch down blocks or splices may be installed or utilized.

a. All cable must be handles with care during installation so as not to change performance specifications. Factory twists of each individual pair must be maintained up to the connection points at both ends of the cable. There shall never be more than one and one-half inches of unsheathed Category 5e UTP cable at either of the termination locations.

02 EXPOSED CABLE:

a. All cabling shall be installed inside walls or ceiling spaces whenever possible.

b. Exposed cable runs will require Owner approval, and will only be allowed when no other options exist.

03 PLACEMENT: All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to impair the Owner’s efficient use of their full capacity.

04 CONDUIT/RACEWAY: Conduit and raceway system shall be installed in all mechanical rooms, through all inaccessible ceiling areas and inside wall. Minimum conduit sizes shall be 1" EMT. Provide bushing on the end of all conduits for low voltage conductors.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 41 00-7

05 CABLE ROUTES:

a. All cabling placed in ceiling areas must be in conduit, cable tray or J-Hooks. Cable supports shall be permanently anchored to building structure or substrates. Provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached and that are suitably sized to carry the weight of the cables to be supported. Do not route cable through webbing of structural steel. Cabling must be supported in dedicated supports intended to support cabling as described in this section.

b. Attaching cable to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. Use J-Hooks for up to 15 cables (Chatsworth hooks with appropriate brackets). For all runs of sixteen (16) or more cables, provide cable rings on 36-inch maximum centers to hang cable. Audio/Video cable shall be rerouted so as to provide a minimum of 18 inches spacing from light fixtures, sources of heat, power feeder conduits and EMI sources. Cabling shall not be attached to ceiling grid support wires. Cable runs shall be parallel or perpendicular to building structure. Multiple cables to be bundled together every 6 feet.

06 SERVICE LOOPS:

a. 10’ at each end.

D. STATION HARDWARE INSTALLATION

01 Flush Mount Jacks: Flush mount jacks shall be mounted in a faceplate with backbox.

02 Placement: Where possible, the Teacher Workstation (TWS) outlet shall be located so that its centerline is 18 inches above floor level or 12 inches above permanent bench surfaces. Outlets shall not be mounted on temporary, movable, or removable surfaces, doors, or access hatches. The Ceiling Mounted Projector (CMP) outlet shall be installed in the ceiling mounted projector plate.

E. CABLE TESTING REQUIREMENTS

01 Notification: The Owner and Engineer shall be notified one week prior to any testing so that the testing may be witnessed.

02 Inspection: Before requesting a final inspection, the Contractor shall perform a series of end-to-end installation performance tests. The Contractor shall submit for approval a proposal describing the test procedures, test result forms and timetable for all cabling.

03 Procedures: Trained personnel shall perform all testing. Acceptance of the test procedures discussed below is predicated on the Contractor’s use of the recommended products and adherence to the inspection requirements and practices set forth. Acceptance of the completed installation will be evaluated in the context of each of these factors.

04 Errors: When errors are found, the source of each shall be determined, corrected and the cable retested. All defective components shall be replaced and retested. Re-test results must be provided on Owner approved forms and witnessed by Owner.

05 Continuity: As tested in the above testing requirements.

06 Power Readings: A power reading will be required at each drop of each of the cabling systems. A +3 dB to a +7 dB is required at each drop with a common feed signal of + 15 dB into the head end amplifier. These measurements to be


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 41 00-8

taken with an approved field strength meter of know calibration. Test measurements to be performed at low channel, mid-band channel, and high channel to determine cable slope.

07 Signal Quality: A standard receiver, typical of those used in the system, shall randomly be connected to 10% of the outlets across the system and tuned to a reference channel of known quality. No visible indication of co-channel interference, noise, ghosting, or beat interference may be observed.

08 Carrier to Noise: Carrier to Noise shall be measured at random outlets representing an average cross section of the drops with an approved field strength meter by the following process. With normal operating levels the field set shall be tuned to each channels visual carrier and the level recorded. The input signal to the head end amplifier shall be removed and the input of the amplifier terminated with a short. Each channel shall be re-measured and the noise levels recorded. The Carrier to Noise measurement is the difference of the two figures.

09 Documentation of Results: All recorded measurements are to be tabulated and included in the systems documentation manual for reference during maintenance of the system.

F. INSPECTION:

01 Conformance to the installation practices covered above is to be verified when completed. In some cases, the Owner may inspect before acceptance.

G. TRAINING:

01 Contractor is required to provide at least 1 hours of training to owner on proper usage of system as well as maintenance requirements of system. Provide all training materials and documentation required for owner to operate, configure and maintain all components of system.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS Aldine Independent School District SECTION 27 51 23 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 51 23-1

SECTION 27 51 23 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEM

A. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:

01 There is an existing Bogen MCP35A switchbank system installed in the existing facility, located in the administrations area.

B. CENTRAL EQUIPMENT:

01 It appears that there are sufficient spare zone switches. Contractor shall confirm this and that the power amplifiers are sufficient to support the new speakers during the prebid walk thru prior to bidding.

C. PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT:

01 Ceiling Speaker– Provide Quam System12 2x2 lay-in speaker with white, micro-perforated grill or approved equal. Speaker inside baffle to be 8 inch diameter 12 watt rating, 5-ounce magnet, 25/70-volt multitap transformer.

02 Integral Volume Control Ceiling Speaker – Quam System12VC 2X2 lay-in speaker with white, micro-perforated grill and integral volume control or approved equal. Speaker inside baffle to be 8 inch diameter 12 watt rating, 5-ounce BeFe ceramic magnet and 25/70-volt transformer. Provide rotary switch to adjust wattage taps.

03 Call Switch: Provide Bogen compatible single-gang, flush mounted, call switch with stainless steel plate. Bogen CA10A or equal.

D. INSTALLATION:

01 Speaker wire shall be plenum rated, two conductor, shielded pair, 22 gauges


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 51 23-2

minimum plus one pair unshielded plenum rated, two pair twisted, unshielded. Provide larger size wire as recommended by manufacturer to prevent voltage drop. Wiring to punch down block shall have a minimum of 24” slack above the ceiling at the call-in button/handset, and 48” slack at the punch down block end. Install wiring neatly bundled, tied high at structure and protected against physical damage. Provide one cable to each classroom, office and conference room and additionally as shown in the drawings.

02 All wiring shall be installed in conduit. Wiring above accessible ceilings may be low smoke type installed without conduit if neatly bundled, supported at structure with cable rings 48” on center, and protected against physical damage. Do not support from data system cable rings.



05 Each signal device shall be connected to the distribution panel with a separate circuit. All room speaker lines shall terminate in a flush mounted wall cabinet with cover panel.

06 Wiring shall be run splice free from equipment to equipment. Connections at equipment shall be made with mechanical connections (splice block, spade connectors or butt crimp connectors but not wire nut).

07 Test and record speaker line Impedance for each circuit. Submit report with as built Drawings.

08 All wiring must be concealed. Surface mounted wiring on existing walls is not acceptable.

E. ADDITIONAL OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS:

01 Miscellaneous speakers shall be grouped together on circuits as follows:

a. All classroom speakers tap at 1/2 watt each.

b. All hall speakers tap at 1 watt each.

c. All outdoor speakers tap at 7.5 watts each.

d. Cafeteria speakers shall be tapped at 4 watts.

02 Any speaker determined to be too loud or too soft by Aldine ISD or the Engineer,

even though tapped at the wattage noted, shall be re-circuited to another tap more suitable until the Owner is satisfied. This may require work during the warranty period.

2.2 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Work specified herein for one year against becoming unserviceable or causing an objectionable appearance resulting from either defective or nonconforming


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 27 51 23-3

materials and workmanship.

B. Defects shall include, but not be limited to, the following.

01 Noisy operation or static.

02 Loose or missing parts.

03 Shorted circuits.

04 Feedback and other distortions.

05 Defective equipment items.

2.3 INSTALLATION

A. Provide labor, equipment and materials necessary for the complete installation.

B. Insure that all speaker and amplifier circuitry maintains constant and correct polarity.

C. Route cable within the racks in groups by signal level, and secure with plastic cable ties. Maintain as much physical distance between cable of different circuit levels as possible. Avoid tight bundling of cable.

D. Make all joints and connections with resin-core solder and with approved mechanical connectors, soldered after crimping. Splices will not be acceptable. Use spade lugs.

2.4 TRAINING

A. Provide a designated representative of the Owner with complete user support training in the proper operation of the system, at a time mutually convenient. He shall assist in the preparation of a set of detailed operating instructions for the sound system. Provide one (1) hour of training.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation CCTV SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM Aldine Independent School District SECTION 28 20 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 20 00-1

SECTION 28 20 00 CCTV SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL







1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. There are existing CCTV surveillance systems in the building:

01 There is an existing DVR in Building B that serves Building A. Security contractor shall install new cameras in Building A where indicated on the drawings and connect to existing DVR. Provide additional power supplies as required.

02 The contractor shall reinstall the existing DVR from the two-story building to the new supply room in Building B. The contractor shall reconnect the existing cameras in Building B to the relocated DVR. Reinstallation includes setup of the existing DVR, programming/aiming of the existing cameras, placing the DVR on the Owner’s network and all associated work required for a complete and useable system.

03 All new cabling shall have a lime green jacket.

B. Provide additional equipment as indicated on the drawings including cameras, cabling, mounting hardware, etc. for a fully tested and complete system.

C. Provide fully terminated coaxial cable, control cable, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable, UTP terminations, raceways, conduit, and other incidental and miscellaneous premises wiring system hardware as required for a complete and useable system. The installation shall comply with applicable codes and standards in effect at the job site and as indicated in the Specifications and Drawings.

D. The system shall be Non-Proprietary in nature and be available through multiple distribution channels in the Houston Marketplace. System that are manufactured and installed by a factory office and are not available through multiple distribution channels will not be accepted.

E. Provide all electronic hardware and coordinate with the building’s LAN/WAN. The contractor shall coordinate with other system vendors, where appropriate, to facilitate equipment installation, scheduling, protection of equipment and access to the project site in order to provide the Owner a substantially complete project in a timely manner.

F. Contractor will be required to meet with district representative before any cabling is to be installed to walk the site and coordinate proposed camera locations and cable routing.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 20 00-2

G. Acceptable manufacturers of CCTV equipment shall be PELCO only. Contractor must be a current integrator of solution in the Houston marketplace and be able to include information on current support staff to be able to service this client. PELCO part numbers and configuration are listed in the specification to define equipment capabilities and requirements for this project.

H. Contractor is responsible for all electrical work required on this project for connection of DVR, cameras, conduit, and power supplies. Contractor shall provide a complete turnkey solution to the owner and be responsible for the complete installation of a security camera system at each campus listed.


A. Installer Qualifications:

01 The Video Surveillance System Installer shall be licensed and shall meet all applicable regulations. The Contractor shall be a firm normally employed in the low voltage and video cabling industry.

02 The contractor shall be certified by the manufacturing company in all aspects of design, installation and testing of the products described herein. Each contractor shall furnish with their submittal a letter from the manufacture indicating they are a dealer in good standing.

03 The contractor must be certified by the manufacturer of the products, adhere to the engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels.

04 The contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. The contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful installation and testing of video surveillance distribution systems and have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools and equipment.

B. The Owner’s representative reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed, either on technical or aesthetic grounds.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Standards: All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the following standards and codes:

01 Local Building Code

02 Local Electrical Code

03 NEC National Electrical Code

B. Other references:

01 TIA/EIA-568-A - Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard

02 EIA/TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

03 TIA/EIA-606 - The Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings

04 TIA/EIA-607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 20 00-3

05 TIA/EIA TSB 67 - Transmission Performance Specification for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems.

06 ISO/IEC 11801 - Generic Cabling Standard

07 EN 50173 - Generic Cabling Standards for Customer Premises

C. Governing Codes and Conflicts: If the requirements of these specifications or the Project Drawings exceed those of the governing codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation requirements, then the requirements of these specifications and the drawings shall govern. However, nothing in the drawings or specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing codes, regulations, and manufacturer installation requirements.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. The video surveillance system installer shall furnish all CCTV system submittals in a single consolidated submittal

B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following items, for Owner review and approval:

01 Samples: Complete manufacturer’s product literature and samples (if requested) for all pre-approved substitutions to the recommended products made during the course of the Project.

02 Permits: The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and provide copies to the Owner/Architect/Engineer

03 Product Literature: Complete manufacturer’s product literature for all electronics, cable, cable supports, cable labels, outlet devices, and other products to be used in the installation. In addition, whenever substitutions for recommended products are made, samples (when requested by the Owner/Architect/Engineer) and the manufacturer’s supporting documentation demonstrating compatibility with other related products shall be included.

04 Testing: Proposed Contractor test result forms, a list of instrumentation to be used for systems testing.

05 A complete point-to-point floor plan diagram indicating camera locations and all required cabling to connect systems.

C. Project Completion: As a condition for project acceptance, the Contractor shall submit the following for review and approval:

01 Inspection and Test Reports: During the course of the Project, the Contractor shall maintain an adequate inspection system to ensure that the materials supplied and the work performed, conform to contract requirements. The Contractor shall provide written documentation that indicates that materials acceptance testing was conducted as specified. The Contractor shall also provide documentation, which indicates that all cable termination testing was completed and that all irregularities were corrected prior to job completion.

02 All training sessions with district staff and training media shall be complete.

03 As-built Drawings shall include cable pathways, camera locations with correct labeling and MDF/IDF locations. The as-built drawings shall be prepared using AutoCad 2000 or later. Provide the Owner with electronic versions of the as-builts on CDs.

04 OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENACE MANUALS: Provide O&M Manuals as outlined in the General Electrical Requirements.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 20 00-4

PART 2 – MATERIALS AND METHODS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The cabling shall be installed per requirements of the manufacturer and the Project Documents Division 26 00 00 and Division 27 00 00, utilizing material meeting all applicable standards. The Contractor is responsible for providing all incidental and/or miscellaneous hardware not explicitly specified below as required for a complete and operational system.

B. Materials shall be as listed or shall be approved equivalent products of other manufacturers meeting the intent and quality level of the specifications. All approved equivalent products shall be published by addendum ten days prior to proposal for Architect/Engineer review.

C. Testing: All installed cabling shall be tested 100% at specified performance after installation by the Contractor.

D. All equipment and materials used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured, regularly utilized in the manufacturer’s system.

E. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.

F. All systems and components shall be provided with the availability of a toll free 24-hour technical support phone number from the manufacturer. The phone number shall allow for immediate technical assistance for either the dealer/installer or the end user at no charge.

G. All systems and components shall be provided with an explicit manufacturer warranty.

2.2 HEAD END EQUIPMENT

A. The existing CCTV head end in Building D shall remain.

01 The existing system is a PELCO DX8000 series DVR.

02 The CCTV Contractor shall connect new cameras where indicated on the drawings to the existing DVR.

03 The CCTV Contractor shall provide additional power supplies and all miscellaneous equipment as required to support the new cameras.

B. The existing CCTV head end in the 2-story building shall be relocated/reinstalled in Building B. Relocate all components of the existing system including but not limited to the DVR, monitor, keyboard, mouse, power strip, etc.

01 The existing system in the 2-story building is a PELCO DS1000 Integral Digital Sentry series DVR.

02 The CCTV Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to remove the existing system prior to demolition of the 2-story building and reinstall in Building B.

03 Provide new 120V UPS for relocated CCTV head end.

04 Provide one (1) 120V rack mounted UPS in each MC and IC.

a. Must be capable of plugging into a standard 20A, 120V receptacle.

b. Minimum capacity of 1500VA.

c. Minimum 5-15R x 6 output receptacles.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 20 00-5

d. Minimum two (2) year warranty.

e. Provide Intellislot Unity Web Card and network drop.

f. Liebert GXT4-1500RT120 or approved equal.

05 Provide additional power supplies and all miscellaneous equipment as required to support the cameras in Building B to be connected to this system.

2.3 CAMERAS

A. Camera Signal: Video cameras attached to the system shall output the NTSC video standard.

B. Camera Types:

01 Tamper resistant with all movable parts enclosed behind a protective cover.

02 Integrated Dome In-Ceiling flush mount

03 Water resistant.

04 3 year warranty on all cameras.

C. Indoor Fixed Color Camera

01 Pelco FD2-DV10-6 flush mounted day/night, indoor camera.

D. Field Of View Determination by the contractor as necessary for fixed camera locations shall be performed at no additional cost to provide the view desired by the owner. Contractor shall coordinate all final camera views and locations with owner for final approval.

E. Provide 20’-0” service loops at all camera locations. Support service loops from proper cable support system.

2.4 HEAD END TERMINATION HARDWARE

A. Security contractor is responsible to coordinate with district security/police department prior to connecting to existing CCTV head end equipment.

B. Structured Cabling Contractor is responsible to provide network cabling connection, either fiber or category 6, to owner provided network equipment. This connection allows DVR to be connected to Owner’s local area network.

2.5 CABLE AND INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall provide and install all low voltage plenum rated power cable to camera locations from a central power supply(s). Field coordinate location requirements with the owner. Each power cable shall be individually fused at the power supply so a short in one power cable will blow that fuse and not affect the other cameras. The power supply will be UL listed in an approved enclosure. It is the responsibly of the Contractor to size the power supply to handle the full load of the cameras.

B. Provide and install all plenum rated coax camera cables from the DVR to each camera location. Field coordinate location requirements with the owner’s representative.

01 Coax shall meet the following minimum criteria:

a. 0-1000 ft shall be RG6 Plenum Rated Cable 95% Copper braid, solid bare 18 AWG copper conductor (RG59 will not be accepted).


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 20 00-6

b. Any runs over 1000 ft. may be installed using RG11 plenum rated coax or fiber with transmitters to support carrying the video signal from the camera to the DVR. Fiber transmitters shall be by Fiber Options.

C. Provide all penetrations and all conduits as necessary for CCTV installation.

D. All exterior penetrations require necessary weatherproofing to avoid moisture penetration.

E. All outdoor cable runs underground shall be rated for underground use.

F. Provide all power circuits required for the DVR’s and camera power supplies.

G. All cabling for entire project shall be installed at 5’-0” intervals in dedicated support system using supports such as j-hooks, d-rings, or u support systems. Cable supports will be securely attached directly to building structure. Do not attach cabling or supports to ductwork, piping, grid hangers, conduit, or equipment.

H. For all fixed cameras, contractor shall install 18/2 for all cameras within 900’ of DVR. Any camera that is installed greater than 900’ of DVR shall use 16/2 conductor for power to camera.

I. For power to all PTZ cameras, contractor shall install 18/2 for all cameras within 600’ of DVR. If distance is greater than 600’, contractor shall install 16/2 up to 900’. Any distance greater than 900’, contractor shall install 14/2 conductor for camera power.

J. For control of all PTZ cameras, contractor shall install (2) shielded twisted pair, 22 AWG to each camera. 4 conductors total to each camera for control operation of camera are required.

K. All camera power and video cabling jacketing shall be lime green in color.

L. Splicing of coax cable is not acceptable unless approved by owner for special applications such as underground runs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Cable Pathway:

01 In suspended ceiling and raised floor areas where duct, cable trays or conduit are not available, the Contractor shall bundle, in bundles of 25 cables or less, with cable ties snug, but not deforming the cable geometry. Cable bundles shall be supported via “J” hooks attached to the existing building structure and framework at a maximum of five (5) foot intervals. Plenum rated cable ties shall be used in all appropriate areas. The Contractor shall adhere to the manufacturer’s requirements for bending radius and pulling tension of all cables.

02 Cables shall not be attached to lift out ceiling grid supports or laid directly on the ceiling grid.

03 Cables shall not be attached to or supported by fire sprinkler heads or delivery systems or any environmental sensor located in the ceiling air space.

B. Fire Wall Penetrations: The Contractor shall avoid penetration of fire rated walls and floors wherever possible. Contractor shall also seal all floor, ceiling and wall penetrations in fire or smoke barriers and in the wiring closet.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 20 00-7

C. Wall Penetrations: Where penetrations are necessary, they shall be sleeved with metallic conduit with protective bushings and sealed around penetration with an Underwriter Laboratories (UL) approved sealant.

D. Install new conduit on portable pipe supports – (low profile type), as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers or Advanced Support Products. Provide roof protection pads under each support. Coordinate location and routing with design engineer prior to rough-in or installation of system.

E. Do not install wall mounted camera’s into metal fascia. Ensure they are mounted into brick, and sealed top and sides (not bottom)

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. General:

01 Cabling between head end and camera locations shall be made as individual home runs. No intermediate splices may be installed or utilized between the wiring closet and the camera location.

02 All cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to change performance specifications.

B. Exposed Cable: All cabling shall be installed inside walls or ceiling spaces whenever possible. Exposed cable shall only be run where indicated on the Drawings. Additional exposed cable runs shall require Owner approval, and shall only be allowed when no other options exist. Cabling shall be installed concealed at all times, except in unfinished mechanical rooms or wiring closets where cable shall be installed exposed and located to avoid conflicts with pass-through cabling, etc. Tie wraps shall be used to provide a neat appearance. Provide “D” rings or the appropriate cable guides to dress the cable. Outdoor exposed cable shall be protected with weatherproof conduit and boxes.

C. Placement: All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to impair the Owner’s efficient use of their full capacity.

D. Cable Routes: All cabling placed in ceiling areas must be in conduit, cable tray, or J-Hooks. Cable supports shall be permanently anchored to building structure or substrates. Provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached and that are suitably sized to carry the weight of the cables to be supported. Attaching cable to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. Use J-Hooks for up to 15 cables (Caddy CAT 21 or CAT 32 hooks with appropriate brackets). All runs of sixteen (16) or more cables, provide cable rings on 36” maximum centers to hang cable. Cable shall be routed so as to provide a minimum of 18” spacing from light fixtures, sources of heat, power feeder conduits and EMI sources. Cabling shall not be attached to ceiling grid support wires. Cable runs shall be parallel or perpendicular to building structure. Multiple cables to be banded together every 6 feet.

3.3 DOCUMENTATION

A. Labels: The Contractor shall label all outlets using permanent machine engraved labels approved by the Owner. Label patch panels in the wiring closet to match those on corresponding camera locations. The font shall be at least one-eighth inch (1/8”) in height, block. All labels shall correspond to as-builts and to final test reports.

B. Contractor shall ensure complete typed labeling of all cameras with numbers that correspond to locations on video server. Labeling system shall correspond to the Owner’s labeling system. Verify with Owner. Provide tags (black letters on white labels, plastic


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 20 00-8

coated) on all cables and outlets.

C. All cables shall be labeled at both ends with a machine label and all terminations shall be stenciled with a typed label for quick circuit identification. Labeling shall conform to TIA/EIA standard 606 and include interconnect cable identification numbers.

D. A floor plan, clearly labeled with all numbered camera locations, shall be included in the as-built plans.

3.4 CABLE TESTING - BY MANUFACTURER’S REQUIREMENTS

A. Notification: The Owner/Architect/Engineer shall be notified one week prior to any testing so that the testing may be witnessed.

B. Final Acceptance: Before requesting a final acceptance, the Contractor shall perform a series of end-to-end installation performance tests. The Contractor shall submit for approval a proposal describing the test procedures, test result forms and time table for all copper and fiber optic cabling.

C. Procedures: Trained personnel shall perform all testing. Acceptance of the test procedures discussed below is predicated on the Contractor’s use of the recommended products and adherence to the inspection requirements and practices set forth. Acceptance of the completed installation shall be evaluated in the context of each of these factors.

D. Errors: When errors are found, the source of each error shall be determined, corrected and the cable retested. All defective components shall be replaced and retested. Retest results must be entered on the test results form. All corrections shall be made prior to final acceptance test.

3.5 INSPECTION

A. Conformance to the installation practices covered above are to be verified when completed. In some cases, the Owner/Architect/Engineer may observe before acceptance.

3.6 WARRANTY

A. Guarantee and warrant all equipment provided for a period of 3 years following date of substantial completion, or a period equal to the stated guaranty/warranty offered by the product manufacturer, whichever is the longest in duration.

B. All such warranties shall include all parts (Cameras, and Power Supplies).

C. Labor and all other costs as necessary to maintain the equipment in operating condition as intended by the product manufacturer after a period of 1 year shall be negotiated with the owner upon project completion.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Aldine Independent School District SECTION 28 31 00 MA No. R305675.01 SEG - #1551

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 31 00-1

SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL








2.1 GENERAL

A. SCOPE: There is an existing Silent Knight fire alarm system installed in the facility. Fire alarm contractor shall relocate and reconnect existing devices based on area renovations, and add devices as necessary to provide a complete system per NFPA Code requirements and as indicated on the drawings.

B. All components of the system shall be standard products of the manufacturer, approved by Factory Mutual and Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

C. After installation and prior to the final inspection, the Contractor must certify in a letter to the Owner that the system is working in accordance with the Contract Documents.

D. Provide two hours of instruction on the operation of the system to the Owner's designated personnel upon completion of the system installation.

E. Provide the Owner with the following:

01 Two composite wiring diagrams of the system indicating point to point connections, one to be placed in the control panel.

02 Two block diagrams of the system indicating conduit and number and size of wires between all devices, one to be placed in the control panel.

03 Three complete instructional/operational maintenance manuals, one to be placed in the control panel.

04 Floor plan of building noting zoning, pull station and detector locations, acceptable to the Fire Marshall. Provide a frame for the floor plan and install where directed by the Fire Marshall.

F. Contractor shall have a representative at the job site during the final inspection by the Engineer to demonstrate system operation and specification compliance.

G. System warranty shall be for one year of complete maintenance coverage after final acceptance of the system and include all material and labor to provide consistent peak


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 31 00-2

performance of the system. Post-warranty maintenance shall be available on contract or call basis.

2.2 SYSTEM LAYOUT

A. Fire alarm supplier shall properly design a system based on his equipment and devices that meets ADA, NFPA and Texas Accessibility requirements and these specifications. Device layout shown on the Drawings shows areas of coverage and to assist the electrical contractor in estimating junction box requirements during bidding. Actual device quantity and location shall be based on the Fire Alarm Contractor’s design to meet code and project requirements.

B. Provide audio and visual alarm coverage of the remodeled area.

C. Refer to Drawings for additional information.

2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION

A. Actuation of any alarm initiating device shall cause the following:

01 Digital readout on the main control panel shall indicate the device in alarm.

02 All horn/flasher alarms shall sound continuously until reset at main panel.

03 De-energize air handling units serving the area in alarm. Also de-energize supply fans, VAV boxes and other air circulating devices if 2000 CFM or over, serving the area in alarm. Exhaust fans to the exterior and devices less than 2000 CFM may be but not required to be shutdown.

04 Interface with the elevators.

05 Release fire doors and smoke dampers.

06 Transmit alarm warning to remote location via telephone line.

B. The actuation of automatic detection devices shall be visually identified by light on device. The light shall remain illuminated until the initiating device has been restored to normal and the Fire Alarm Panel reset. A remote alarm lamp shall light where indicated on drawings.

2.4 EQUIPMENT

A. GENERAL: All equipment shall be manufactured by the same company as the control panel or be a factory authorized compatible device. Devices that may operate but are not factory authorized compatible shall not be used. This includes remote power supplies, horns and strobes.

B. MANUAL PULL STATIONS: Addressable type, red colored, non-coded, dual action type. Provide Stopper II cover with battery powered sounder over all pull stations.

C. AREA SMOKE DETECTORS: Analog addressable, photoelectric type, non-polarized with 360° smoke entry, LED normal/alarm status light and separable base.

D. HEAT DETECTORS: Analog addressable, rate of rise type.

E. HORNS/STROBES: Semi-flush, ADA compatible, electronic horn with high visibility, synchronized strobe and field selectable sound level. Set level based on individual application (hall, classroom, restroom, office, etc.) Audible portion shall sound a three beat temporal tone for alarm signaling as required by NFPA. Strobe intensity shall conform to NFPA requirements and also 75 candelas to meet ADA and TAS requirements. Select strobe intensity to match location and number installed.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 31 00-3

F. STROBE LIGHTS: Semi-flush, ADA compatible, synchronized strobe with intensity suitable for the individual application (hall, classroom, restroom, office, etc.). Strobe intensity shall conform to NFPA requirements and also 75 candelas to meet ADA and TAS requirements. Select strobe intensity to match location and number installed.

G. WEATHERPROOF: Devices located outside, even if sheltered from rain shall be weatherproof and suitable for outdoor installation.

H. GUARDS: Provide wire or lexan guards over detectors, horns or other devices in gyms and locker rooms.

2.5 INSTALLATION

A. WIRING:

01 Fire alarm contractor shall provide and install all wiring for his system.

02 All wiring shall be installed in conduit and concealed in finished spaces. In existing areas not in mechanical rooms, use Wiremold surface raceway where it is impossible to conceal the conduit. Low smoke wiring may be installed without conduit above accessible ceilings if wiring is supported at structure with cable rings approximately 48” on center. Do not support with other systems’ cabling or lay on ceiling structure. All auxiliary control circuits shall be connected to NAC type circuits and be supervised per NFPA. In general wiring shall be installed from device to device without intermediate splices. All splices (when approved) and connections shall be made in junction boxes secured to structure or in junction boxes at devices.



05 Wiring outside or between buildings shall be suitable for and installed properly for this application, and comply with NEC Article 800. Provide isolation and surge suppression for all aerial and inter-building cables.

06 Wire shall be color coded in accordance with IPCEA Standards. Provide numbered labels on all wires entering annunciators, terminal boxes and the main control panel.

07 The minimum wire sizes to be used when not otherwise directed by Codes are as follows:

a. Detector Circuits AWG #18

b. Remote Annunciators and Lamps AWG #18

c. Signal Circuits (Horn or Strobe) AWG #14 (1.1A max) or larger

d. 120 volt or higher AWG #12

08 Limited energy cable for 24 volt, low voltage systems shall be Plastic Wire and Cable Company Low Energy Safety Control Wire, 105° C, solid copper cable.

09 Should 120 volt power be required other than at the main panel to serve distributed devices/controllers, include the cost of these additional circuits.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 31 00-4

B. RACEWAY SYSTEMS

01 RACEWAY CAPACITY: It shall be the contractor's responsibility to determine the correct sizes of all type of raceway, to be installed, as instructed in the NEC and all applicable Codes.

02 MATERIAL: See Specification Section for Electrical Wiring for conduit types and installation requirements.

C. CEILING SUPPORTS: All devices installed in layin ceilings shall have bracket to support device from ceiling tees.

D. MOUNTING HEIGHTS

01 PULL STATIONS: 46" above finished floor to top

02 ALARM HORNS/FLASHERS: 80" or 6" below ceiling (or on ceiling)

E. LABELING: All devices shall be labeled with their system address.

2.6 TESTING

A. GENERAL: Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that the system is operating in accordance with the project requirements. This demonstration shall be performed after system demonstration and acceptance by the Fire Marshall. Prior to this demonstration, contractor shall submit to the Engineer a copy of the Fire Marshall’s acceptance and any corrective actions required by the Fire Marshall. Any discrepancies noted during the demonstration shall be corrected by the Contractor.

B. REQUIREMENTS: All components and circuits of the fire alarm system shall be tested under operating conditions for proper functions. The testing shall demonstrate that all specification requirements have been successfully accomplished, and that the system is fully operational. Testing shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

01 INITIATING DEVICES: Each initiating device shall be activated and proper operation of all visual and audible alarm and auxiliary devices shall be demonstrated.

02 DUCT AND PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTORS: Each detector shall be adjusted with electronic measuring equipment for calibration sensitivity. Each detector shall subsequently be checked for operation.

03 AUDIBLE ALARM DEVICES: Each audible alarm device shall be tested for proper operation and connection to the correct circuit.

C. TEST REPORT: Upon completion of testing, three copies of a report shall be submitted to the Owner containing the following information:

01 Complete as-built wiring diagrams

02 Detailed catalog data on all components of system

03 Ionization detector sensitivity settings

04 Certification of system performance and operation as specified

2.7 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Provide shop drawings as described in Section 26 00 00 to include equipment brochures and building drawing indicated devices and equipment locations.

B. Include the following information:

01 Complete floor plan drawings locating all system devices.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 28 31 00-5

02 Control panel wiring and interconnection schematics.

03 Complete point to point wiring diagrams.

04 Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment proposed.

05 Detailed system operational description.

06 Complete system bill of material.

2.8 WARRANTY

A. System materials and installation shall be warranted for one year following substantial completion. Problem trouble shooting and repair shall begin within 24 hours of notification.

END OF SECTION

Lane School Renovation SITE CLEARING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 311000 MA No. R305675.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0001

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 311000-1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, removing site utilities and abandoning site utilities in

place]. 7. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utility services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities and temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures].

2. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures, and site

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

D. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 311000-2

E. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

F. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and [indicated on Drawings] [defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated] Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plants designated to remain.

B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at 2100 Aldine Bender Rd. Houston, Texas.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 311000-3

C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated

D. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for the area where Project is located before site clearing.

E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and plant-protection measures are in place.

F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

H. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

I. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

B. Antirust Coating: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, self-curing, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79, Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer or SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 zinc-rich coating.

1. Use coating with a VOC content of [420 g/L] or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 311000-4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. Flag each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Division 32 Section "Tree Preservation."

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Contractor shall arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 311000-5

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

C. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.

D. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

E. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches

below exposed subgrade. 3. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. 4. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials in areas to receive paving or structures.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 311000-6

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be

stockpiled or reused. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.

END OF SECTION 311000

Lane School Renovation EARTH MOVING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 312000 MA No. R305675.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0001

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade walks pavements turf and grasses and plants. 2. Subbase course for concrete walks pavements. 3. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. 4. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation Photographic Documentation" for recording preexcavation and earth moving progress.

2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section.

3. Divisions 22, 23, 26, and 33 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures.

4. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 2

E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

H. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

I. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. 2. Warning tapes.

B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Warning Tape: 12 inches long; of each color.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Material Test Reports: For each on-site soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698; ASTM D 1557.

E. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 3


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify Dig-Tess (1-800-DIG-TESS) for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.

D. Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures, specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls," Division 31 Section "Site Clearing," are in place.

E. Do not commence earth moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in Division 32 Section "Tree Preservation" are in place.

F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

H. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487 Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3 according to AASHTO M145, or a


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 4

combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

1. Liquid Limit: 35 2. Plasticity Index: 8 to 35.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups CL, ML, OL, MH and OH according to ASTM D 2487 Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Engineered Fill: Clayey Sand or Inactive lean clay; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

1. Liquid Limit: 35 2. Plasticity Index: 8 to 35.

F. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

B. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 5

3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 6

a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below proposed grade.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 6 inches each side of pipe or conduit As indicated.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.

3. For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

4. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 7

D. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

E. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.7 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices changes in the Work.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 8

3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.10 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

E. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. Compact in maximum 8 inch loose lifts.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 9

G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.12 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.13 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.14 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 ASTM D 1557:

1. Under steps and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 10

3.15 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.

3.16 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Excavate subgrade 6 inches beyond outside lines of pavement and sidewalk. Shape to

line, grade and cross section. Stabilize soil with lime in accordance with H.C.E.D ITEM 220. Compact subgrade to minimum of 95 percent maximum dry density at optimum to ±2 percent above optimum moisture content, as determined by ASTM D 698.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.

2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with

requirements.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 11

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.18 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.19 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.

1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 312000 - 12


Lane School Renovation LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE Aldine Independent School District SECTION 320910 MA No. R305675.01 M2L – MOAC1503

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 320190-1

SECTION 320190 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to provide the complete landscape maintenance program as specified herein and in accordance with the drawings and specifications for the trees, shrubs, groundcovers installed as part of this Contract.

B. Work shall include, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Monitoring and coordination for adjustment of automated irrigation system including adjustment of irrigation clocks.

2. Dewatering of trees.

3. Pruning and trimming of trees, shrubs, and groundcovers

4. Application of fertilizers, soil amendments, insecticides, and herbicides.

5. General site clean up to include removal of trash and products of maintenance on sidewalks, pavement curbs, and other hardscape areas.

6. Mowing, edging and trimming of lawn areas(if applicable)

7. Weeding, cultivating, and cleaning of all planting areas.

8. Mulch top dressing.

9. Deep watering of trees, shrubs, and or ground covers in addition to irrigation system.

1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall examine all related Sections for work related to this section.

1.3 CONTRACT PERIOD AND STANDARDS

A. Contractor shall begin maintenance immediately upon starting any portion of the Work of this Contract.

B. The maintenance period shall continue for one-year (1) after the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion.

1. Maintenance includes work on completed and partially completed project areas.

2. Maintenance shall provide a project site that is neat and attractive in appearance, and keeps all plant materials and lawns in a healthy and vigorous condition.

C. The Contractor's presence on the site shall be as inconspicuous as possible.

1. Personnel employed by the Contractor for maintenance and repairs shall be neatly attired with long pants and shirts at all times.

D. Turf, shrubs, trees or plants that are damaged or killed due to Contractor's operations, negligence, or chemical treatments shall be replaced at no expense to the Owner.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 320190-2

E. Sprinklers or structures that are damaged due to the Contractor's operation must be re-placed by the Contractor promptly.

F. Damage due to thefts or vandalism prior to the date of the certificate of Substantial Completion shall be at the Contractor's expense.

G. All damage to, or thefts of landscape elements not caused or allowed by the Contractor after the issuance of the certificate of Substantial Completion shall be corrected by the Contractor at the Owner's expense, upon receipt of written authorization to proceed.

H . The Contractor shall answer emergency or complaint calls regarding conditions in land-scaped areas regarding fallen trees or branches, or shrubs or trees that obstruct the drive-ways, and shall correct the problem or place warning signs and advise the Owner of the need for major work to be performed.

1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws, codes, and regulations required by authorities having jurisdiction of such work and provide for all permits required by local authorities..

B. The maintenance period shall continue for one-year (1) after the issuance of a certificate

1.5 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Work under this section will be accepted by the Owner upon satisfactory completion of all work, including maintenance, but exclusive of the required replacement of trees, shrubs, and/or groundcovers under the Warranty Period. Upon Final Acceptance, Owner will assume responsibility for coordination the maintenance of the Work.

1.6 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES

A. Refer to the other appropriate Sections.

1.7 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. At the completion of Work, furnish three (3) copies of written maintenance instructions to the Owner for maintenance and care of the trees, shrubs, and groundcovers throughout the year.

B. Contractor shall provide to Owner a Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter propose irrigation schedule based upon the typical weather conditions at the job site for the specific season. The Contractor shall adjust watering cycles to reflect typical, seasonal evaportranspiration rates.

1.8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Stipulated Price(Lump Sum): If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 320190-3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Materials required for installed items shall match those already in use.

B. Samples of all materials not specified under other sections of the Specifications shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative for review by the Owner prior to use.

C. Top Dress Fertilizer: See other related Sections on Turf and Planting.

2.2 MACHINERY

A. Lawn Mowers: Rotary-type

B. Lawn Edgers: Rigid or flexible blade-type, gasoline powered.

C. Lawn Blowers: Rigid or flexible blade-type

D. Fertilizer Spreaders: Cyclone-type spreader, or equal.

E. Pruning Tools: Cutting edges shall be sharp. Disinfect all tools when used for the removal of diseased limbs with Clorox and water, mixed at a 1:5 ratio.

F. Miscellaneous Hand Tools, Rakes, Brooms, Etc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MAINTENANCE OF TREES, SHRUBS, AND GROUND COVERS

A. All weeds within the mulched planting bed areas shall be removed as often as required. Under no circumstance shall weeds within planting bed areas be allowed to attain a height greater than three (3) inches.

B. Contractor shall continuously be alert for signs of insect and/or plant disease presence or damage, especially plant fungi other diseases which would affect the long term health of the plant material. Upon locating such evidence, the Contractor shall report it to the Owner and take action as directed.

C. Prune and trim palm fronds, trees, shrubs, and groundcovers as required to obtain and maintain the specimen growth habit.

D. Maintenance shall be performed by the Contractor's own force, superintended by personnel familiar with the job.

E. Accidental damage to the landscape plantings beyond the control of the Contractor shall be reported immediately to the Owner.

F. Contractor shall adjust and tighten all tree staking and guying as required.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 320190-4

3.2 MAINTENANCE OF IRRIGATION SYSTEM (IF APPLICABLE)

A. The Contractor shall monitor and adjust the irrigation controllers to maintain optimum mois-ture levels in all planted areas.

B. Regular deep watering to all new trees until there are definite signs that the trees have established themselves, new growth is apparent, and no trees are experiencing stress conditions.

C. Contractor shall adjust the heads for coverage and elevation, repair any leaks to main, lateral, or drip lines and all other work required to establish a complete working irrigation system.

B. Regular irrigation cycles shall be set to take place after 11:00 pm and prior to sunrise (4:00 am - 5:00 am), except during visits of grounds maintenance personnel at which the irrigation system may be operated as desired by those personnel for maintenance purposes.

3.3 TREE STAKING

A. Contractor shall maintain staking of trees at all times, and shall be responsible for any damage to trees or plant materials caused by chafing or breaking of foliage or limbs coming in contact with stakes, ties, guys, eye bolts, or bracing materials. Periodically, adjust broken stakes and ties as needed. If ties are too tight, they must be replaced or adjusted.

1. All labor and material costs shall be considered in base bid for the one-year (1) maintenance period.

B. Tees and large shrubs that may require stakes or special care during the winds and rains shall receive the required care prior to and immediately after anticipated and actual occur-rences, to insure that no damage results to the plant material.

3.4 PRUNING

A. Contractor shall prune regularly, as required. Remove dead wood and aesthetically horticulturally balance the planting.

3.5 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Mowing:

1. Cool weather, mow at one and one-half inches (1 1/2")

2. Hot weather not lower than two inches (2") from the soil.

3. Weekly mowing is recommended. Promptly remove excessive clippings.

B. Watering:


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 320190-5

1. Provide a regular, deep watering program for all turf zones. The established turf should be allowed to dry out under regular conditions.

2. Provide a regular, deep watering program for all trees. Water as necessary to maintain trees in thriving condition.

C. In areas of new planting and lawns, allow new lawn to grow over tree ball. Maintain height of grass at tree trunk with hand clippers. Do not use weed whips around tree trunks.

D. top dress fertilize 60 to 90 days after seeding or sodding and prior to end of the one-year (1) maintenance period.

3.6 WATERING

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to assure that the correct watering of trees, shrubs, and ground covers is being accomplished through the irrigation system.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to the irrigation system caused by maintenance operations under this section.

C. Contractor shall water as often and to the amount necessary to establish the trees, shrubs, and ground covers.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for providing water to trees to be preserved on-site as noted in section 329500 – Tree Preservation for the duration of construction and through the one (1) year warranty period.

3.7 DE-WATERING

A. Contractor shall inspect the tree well inspection tubes weekly or as needed for the specific site conditions.

B. The Contractor shall de-water by pumping or siphoning as often as necessary to remove excess moisture from the tree inspection tubes

C. When observed, the Contractor shall report this condition immediately to the Owners Representative.

3.8 MULCHING

A. Tree Rings:

1. Ongoing maintenance of the mulch rings are critical. Contractor shall take care to not disturbed the mulch rings around trees and repair as necessary.

2. Scheduled mulching shall occur as noted in the proposed schedule below

3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the additional mulching as necessary to maintain the mulch rings in addition to the regularly scheduled times.

4. The mulch rings shall be maintained at a minimum mulch depth of 3”

B. Shrubs beds:

1. Scheduled mulching shall occur as noted in the proposed schedule below


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 320190-6

2. Mulch areas shall be maintained at a minimum mulch depth of 3”.

3.9 TRASH COLLECTION AND GENERALCLEAN UP

A. The Contractor shall dispose of all waste materials or refuse from his operations off the prop-erty.

B. Keep all sidewalk expansion and score joints free of any vegetation which may appear.

C. Leaves, litter, grass clippings or other debris shall be removed from all areas at each visit

D. Remove dead animals from the site immediately, as they are encountered.

PART 4 - SCHEDULE

4.01 SCHEDULE

A. This schedule shall be used as a guide for the work specified. Proposed changes to this schedule should be directed to the Landscape Architect or Owner’s Representative.

B. Contractor shall be on-site with a maintenance crew as specified in the chart below to perform maintenance procedures as specified herein.

C. The Contractor shall meet once a month and at the end of the maintenance period with Owner personnel. Contractor shall review pertinent maintenance information at each meeting.

FUNCTIONS FREQUENCY

Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.

Mowing 3 3 4 5 5 5 4 4 5 4 4 4

Edging 1 1 4 5 5 4 4 4 5 4 1 1

Debris Removal 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4

Pruning 1 1

Weed Control Beds 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Clean & Sweep

Curbs & Gutters 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 4

Index Irrigation 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Spray for Borers 1 1 1 1

Mulching 1 1

Dewatering(as necessary)

4.02 JOB SITE MEETINGS


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 320190-7

A. The Contractor shall meet once each month during and at the end of the maintenance period with the Owner’s on-site maintenance personnel. The Contractor shall review the irrigation schedules and operation, plant care, and other pertinent and helpful maintenance information.

B. See Section Division 1 Specifications - Coordination and Meetings END OF SECTION


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 320190-8

This Page Left Blank

(This Page Left Blank)

Lane School Renovation ALPHALT PAVING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 321216 MA No. R305675.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0001

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 321216-1

SECTION 321216 – ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Asphalt surface treatments. 4. Pavement-marking paint.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.

B. TxDOT: Texas Department of Transportation.

C. HCED: Harris County Engineering Department.

D. COH – DPWE: City of Houston Department of Public works and Engineering.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of standard specifications of HCED.

1. Standard Specification: HCED: ITEM 340, TYPE D 2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in

standard specifications do not apply to this Section.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 321216-2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work.

C. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.

D. Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking spaces. Indicate, with international graphics symbol, spaces dedicated to people with disabilities.

E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

F. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

G. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by manufacturers.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer.

1. Manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or TxDOT

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Specification for Construction and maintenance of Roads and Bridges of HCED for asphalt paving work.

D. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AASHTO Guide for design of pavements structures unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.

2. Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work. 3. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during

installation period and for remainder of construction period. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 321216-3


A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910. 3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of

placement.

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 50 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.

B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or properly cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.

C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, properly cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.

1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass.

D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO MP 1.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 321216-4

B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material; ASTM D 946 for penetration-graded material.

C. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt, MC-30 or MC-70

D. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime complying with HCED.

E. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

F. Fog Seal: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

G. Water: Potable.

H. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141 pumping consistency.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

B. Sand: ASTM D 1073 Grade Nos. 2 or 3.

C. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 3405 hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified bituminous sealant.

D. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-115, Type I or AASHTO M 248, Type N.

1. Color: White.

E. Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than 45 minutes.

1. Color: White.

F. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.

G. Wheel Stops: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 2500-psi minimum compressive strength, [4-1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long]. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate.

1. Dowels: Galvanized steel, 3/4-inch diameter, 10-inch minimum length.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 321216-5

2.4 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction; AASHTO Guide for design of pavement structures, 1993, and complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located.

2. Base Course: Crushed Stone Base, HCED Item 230. 3. Surface Course: HMHL Asphalt Surface Course, HCED Item 340, Type D.

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, Type 1, consisting of emulsified asphalt, fine aggregate, and mineral fillers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction or replace with select fill.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement: Break cracked slabs and roll as required to reseat concrete pieces firmly.

1. Pump hot undersealing asphalt under rocking slabs until slab is stabilized or, if necessary, crack slab into pieces and roll to reseat pieces firmly.

2. Remove disintegrated or badly cracked pavement. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 321216-6

2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

D. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

E. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

3.3 REPAIRS

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements.

1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick.

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch.

1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush

with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush

with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.

C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum.

1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 321216-7

D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 3. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of

one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.6 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints as described in AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt

Pavements." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive

displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 321216-8

3.7 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 95 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 698, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.8 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 321216-9

3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.

3.9 SURFACE TREATMENTS

A. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to cure.

1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.

3.10 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.

1. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal.

3.11 WHEEL STOPS

A. Securely attach wheel stops into pavement with not less than two galvanized steel dowels embedded at one-quarter to one-third points. Securely install dowels into pavement and bond to wheel stop. Recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 321216-10

D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.13 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site.


Lane School Renovation CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATESAldine Independent School District SECTION 32 3113MA No. R305675.01SBA-16105

SECTION 32 3113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Product data: Indicate material types, gauges, sizes and finishes, construction anderection details, including spacing of posts and foundation details.

C. Delegated-design submittal: For structural performance of chain-link fence and gateframeworks, including analysis data signed and sealed by the registered professionalengineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Applicable standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM), standards as referenced herein.2. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI), Product Manual and #WLG

2445 Wind Load Guide.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated design: Engage a professional engineer registered in the state Texas to designchain-link fence and gate frameworks.

B. Structural performance: Chain-link fence and gate frameworks shall withstand the designwind loads and stresses for fence height(s) and under exposure conditions indicatedaccording to ASCE/SEI 7.

2.2 STANDARD CHAIN LINK FENCING:

A. Fencing: 1. Reference standards: Fencing shall meet the CLFMI requirements, ASTM F1043

and ASTM F1083.2. Description: Hot dip galvanized chain link fence complete with supports,

bracings, gates and other accessories to complete the work indicated; heights asindicated on the drawings.

B. Chain link fabric: 2" mesh, formed from 9 ga. steel wire; top and bottom selvageknuckled.

C. Posts: Formed of round or square steel sections meeting ASTM F1043 or ASTM F1083.

D. Fences 6'-0" high; component dimensions and weights:1. End, corner and pull posts: 2.875" dia., weighing minimum of 5.79 lbs./l.f., or

2.50" sq., weighing minimum of 5.10 lbs./l.f.2. Line posts: 2.375" dia., weighing minimum of 3.65 lbs./l.f., or 2.25" by 1.70" ‘C’

section, weighing minimum of 2.64 lbs./l.f.3. Top rails and bracing: 1.660" dia., weighing minimum 2.27 lbs./l. f., or 1.500" sq.,

weighing minimum of 1.90 lbs./l. f. Top rails shall be minimum 18'-0" long.

E. Gates 6'-0" high; component dimensions and weights:1. Gate posts for gates less than 6'-0" wide: 2.875" dia., weighing minimum of 4.64

lbs./l. f.2. Gate posts for gates over 6'-0" wide to maximum 12'-0" wide: 4.0" dia., weighing

minimum 8.65 lbs/l.f.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 32 3113-1


3. Gate posts for gates over 12'-0" wide to maximum 18'-0" wide: 6.625" dia.,weighing minimum 18.02 lbs/l.f.

4. Gate frames: 1.900" dia., weighing minimum of 2.28 lbs./l.f., or 2.0" square,weighing 2.53 lbs./l.f.

F. Diagonal truss braces: 3/8" diameter, high carbon steel with turnbuckle.

G. Post tops and fittings: Hot dip galvanized steel or malleable iron. Provide tops withintegral top rail supports.

H. Bands: Pressed steel or malleable iron.

I. Stretcher bars: 3/16" by 3/4" hot dip galvanized steel, 2" less in length than chain linkfabric width. Provide one stretcher bar at each gate and end/terminal post; two at eachcorner and pull post.

J. Swinging gates: Welded construction with adjustable, diagonal cross bracing. Providethe following hardware for gates:1. Hinges: Galvanized steel or malleable iron of size to suit gate size, non-lift-off

type, offset to allow 180 degree operation. Furnish one pair of hinges per leaf.2. Latch for pass leaf gate: Forked type with center drop rod, integral padlock eye

and keeper to receive padlock.3. Stops: Mushroom type at double leaf gates; to engage drop rod.4. Locks: Master Lock, “Security Hasp”. Exact model to be selected by Architect.

K. Sliding gates:1. Type: Roller supported manually-operated sliding gates. Welded construction

with adjustable diagonal cross bracing.2. Hardware and accessories: Provide forked latch for leading edge of each gate,

with integral padlock eye and keeper to receive padlock. Provide center drop rodwith mushroom stop.

L. Finish on all exposed surfaces: Zinc coating, minimum 1.0 oz./sq. ft.; free from

roughness, blisters, ammoniac spots and flaking.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install chain link fence and gates in accord with ASTM F567.

B. Standard fencing: Space posts at equidistant intervals not exceeding 10'-0" o. c.,uniformly between corners and ends.1. Ground-set installation:

a. Foundation hole diameter: Hole diameter shall be four (4) times thediameter of the post for each foundation hole, as follows:1) 1.90" o.d. post: 8" hole diameter.2) 2.375" o.d. post: 9.5" hole diameter.3) 2.875" o.d. post: 11.5" hole diameter.4) 4.00" o.d. gate post: 16" hole diameter.5) 6.625" o.d. gate post: 26.5" hole diameter.

b. Foundation depth: Minimum depth for 4'-0" high fence shall be 2'-0". Forhigher fences, depth shall increase by 3" for each 12" of height above4'-0", as follows:1) 6'-0" high fence: Minimum 30" deep foundation hole.2) 8'-0" high fence: Minimum 36" deep foundation hole.3) 10'-0" high fence: Minimum 42" deep foundation hole.4) Gate posts: Minimum 42" deep foundation hole.

c. Set posts plumb and true in 3000 psi concrete; embed posts 3'-0",minimum. Crown concrete surface to shed water.

2. Slab-set installation: Set sleeves in concrete. Set all posts in sleeves using non-shrink type grout.

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 32 3113-2


C. Brace end, corner and pull posts with horizontal intermediate brace and truss braces.

D. Install top rail continuous with couplings not less than 6" long.

E. Install chain link fabric on exterior of enclosed space. Stretch fabric taut, allowingapproximately 1" clearance at grade. Fasten to line posts and top rail with ties; all otherposts with stretcher bars. Tie fabric to post at 1'-0" o. c.; top rail at 2'-0" o. c. Fabric shallnot bypass end, gate, corner or pull posts.

F. Join chain link fabric lengths by weaving a single strand into roll ends to form acontinuous length.

G. Install gates complete with specified hardware at locations indicated. Adjust and lubricatehardware.

H. Protect surfaces from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. Replacecomponents damaged during installation.

END OF SECTION

Issue for Bid - 04/21/2016 32 3113-3

Lane School Renovation GENERAL USE COMPOST Aldine Independent School District SECTION 329450 MA No. R305675.01 M2L – MOAC1503

Issue For Bid - 04/21/2016 329500-1

Section 329450 - GENERAL USE COMPOST PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section consists of the requirements for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, supplies, supervision, and tools, and performing all work necessary to place erosion control compost as shown on the plans.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 329500 - Tree Preservation B. Section 320190 - Landscape Grounds Maintenance

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Meet, or exceed, the requirements of the United States Composting Council (USCC) Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) program.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. The feedstock by percentage in the final compost product,

B. A statement that the compost meets federal and state health and safety regulations,

C. A statement that the composting process has met time and temperature requirements,

D. A copy of the producer’s STA certification, and

E. A copy of the lab analysis, performed by an STA-certified lab, verifying that the compost meets the requirements of Table 1.

F. When furnishing bio-solids compost, also provide a copy of the current TCEQ compliance

statement signed by the facility manager.

1.5 TESTING A. Testing shall be conducted and prepared by the following testing laboratory or approved equal

testing service: Soil Food Web

35 SW Western Blvd. Corvallis, OR 97333 phone: 541-752-5066 [email protected]

B. Provide Full Food Web including mycorrhizal colonization.

C. Alternative testing services must demonstrate a similar testing process to that provided by the Soil Food Web.

D. Provide a designated project stockpile of unblended compost for sampling and testing at the

producer’s site. The Contractor shall take samples from each stockpile for quality assurance


Issue For Bid - 04/21/2016 329500-2

(QA). Make payment to the STA-certified lab approved by the Authority for the required QA testing. 1) Submit lab invoices for passing QA tests to the Authority for reimbursement unless included

within the project Allowance 2) Maintain compost in designated stockpiles at the producer’s site until accepted by the

Authority’s Representative. The Authority’s Representative reserves the right to sample compost at the jobsite.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Seed Delivery- Each variety of seed shall be delivered in separate bags or containers, labeled to indicate pure live seed, name and type of seed.

B. Fertilizer Delivery- Fertilizer shall be delivered in the manufacturer’s unopened containers,

labeled to indicate the manufacturer’s name and product identification. 1.7 TIMING OF WORK AND STORAGE

A. In general, the work shall proceed as rapidly as the site becomes available, consistent with normal seasonal limitations for planting work.

B. Furnish standard products in manufacturer's standard containers bearing original labels

showing quantity, analysis and name of manufacturer. C. Store products with protection from weather or other conditions which would damage or

impair the effectiveness of the product.

1.8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Stipulated Price(Lump Sum): The Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for labor, materials, and all miscellaneous costs required as part of the work required in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price.

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 MIX

A. Furnish compost that has been produced by aerobic (biological) decomposition of organic matter and meets the requirements of Table 1. Compost feedstock may include, but is not limited to, leaves and yard trimmings, biosolids, food scraps, food-processing residuals, manure or other agricultural residuals, forest residues, bark, and paper. Ensure compost and wood chips do not contain any visible refuse, other physical contaminants, or any substance considered harmful to plant growth. Do not use materials that have been treated with chemical preservatives as a compost feedstock or as wood chips. Do not use mixed municipal solid waste compost. Provide compost meeting all applicable 40 CFR 503 standards for Class A biosolids and TCEQ health and safety regulations as defined in the TAC, Chapter 332, including the time and temperature standards in Subchapter B, Part 23.


Issue For Bid - 04/21/2016 329500-3

Before delivery of the compost, provide quality control (QC) documentation that includes the following:

2.2 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF COMPOST A. Furnish compost that has been produced by aerobic (biological) decomposition of organic

matter and meets the requirements of Table 1. Compost feedstock may include, but is not limited to, leaves and yard trimmings, biosolids, food scraps, food-processing residuals, manure

Table 1

Physical Requirements for Compost Property Test Method Requirement Particle Size TMECC1 02.02-B, “Sample 95% passing 5/8 in. Sieving for Aggregate Size Classification” 70% passing 3/8 in. TMECC 04.06, “Heavy Metals and Hazardous Elements”: 04.06-As, Arsenic Heavy Metals 04.06-Cd, Cadmium Pass

Content 04.06-Cu, Copper 04.06-Pb, Lead 04.06-Hg, Mercury 04.06-Mo, Molybdenum 04.06-Ni, Nickel 04.06-Se, Selenium 04.06-Zn, Zinc Soluble Salts TMECC 04.10-A, “1:5 Slurry 5.0 dS/m maximum2

Method, Mass Basis”

pH TMECC 04.11-A, “1:5 Slurry pH” 5.5–8.5

Maturity TMECC 05.05-A, “Germination > 80% and Root Elongation”

Organic Matter TMECC 05.07-A, “Loss-On- 25–65% (dry mass) Content Ignition Organic Matter Method” Stability TMECC 05.08-B, “Carbon 8 or below

Dioxide Evolution Rate”

Fecal Coliform TMECC 07.01-B, “Fecal Pass Coliforms” 1. “Test Methods for the Examination of Composting and Compost,” published by the United

States Department of Agriculture and the USCC. 2. A soluble salt content up to 10.0 dS/m for compost used in compost manufactured topsoil

will be acceptable.

2.3 COMPOST MIX, DESCRIPTION, AND PRODUCTION REQUIREMENTS


Issue For Bid - 04/21/2016 329500-4

A. General use compost will consist of 100% compost.

B. Prepare the types of compost for use on the project and stockpile at the jobsite.

C. Apply compost in a uniform layer and incorporate into the existing in place topsoil to the depth shown on the plans.

D. Production Requirements: 1. Handcrafted Humus Compost is made from only grass clippings, leaves, very light

branches. 2. Raw Materials aged and composted in the raw form. 3. Raw Materials shall pass through a 1st grind with a 1.5” screen and placed in a

windrow configuration after the first grind. 4. Windrows shall be turned and temps are monitored daily. 5. Screen final product.

2.4 APPROVED SUPPLIER

A. Nature's Way Resources Native (3/8" screened compost) 101 Sherbrook Circle, Conroe, Texas 77385 (936) 321- 6990 Houston Metro

(936) 273-1200 Conroe/Montgomery County (936) 273-1655 Fax B . The Ground Up, Northwest

9945 Windfern Rd. Houston, TX 77064

P: (281) 970-0003 F: (281) 955-1911

C . Landscape Depot

8901 FM 1960 Rd W Houston, TX 77070-5519 P: (281) 890-0365

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. Verify that field measurements, surfaces, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

B. Report in writing to the Landscape Architect the prevailing conditions that will adversely affect

satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting

unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to Authority


Issue For Bid - 04/21/2016 329500-5

3.2 USE OF COMPOST IN MULCH MIX

A. Incorporate compost into required mulch mix at the specified rates. B. Mix thorougly

3.3 FERTILIZATION

A. Apply fertilizer evenly over the site at the specified rate.

B. Incorporate into compost/soil with approved device.

C. Fertilizer prior to drill seeding.

3.4 COMPOST TOP DRESSING OF NEW OR EXISTING TURF

A. All areas within this contract not disturbed by construction or where repair of grade is not required shall be hydromulched or resodded in accordance with the Contract Drawings and other related specification sections.

B. All disturbed areas shall be fine graded prior to hydromulching and solid sodding.

C. Spread 2” of general use compost over area to be sodded or hydromulched. Till into top 6” of existing soil. Remove any debris, gravel, or deleterious material prior to sodding or hydromulching. Water in thoroughly to allow for settling of .

END OF SECTION 32 94 50

(This Page Left Blank)


Issue For Bid - 04/21/2016 329500-6

Lane School Renovation TREE PRESERVATION Aldine Independent School District SECTION 329500 MA No. R305675.01 M2L – MOAC1503

Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-1

SECTION 329500 - TREE PRESERVATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This section specifies the requirements for tree preservation, crown pruning, fertilization, root pruning, and specific tree preservation techniques for those trees indicated on the drawings. Contractor to protect and insure welfare of all existing trees, indicated on the Drawings to remain both within the TPZ, and within all adjacent areas used for access to construction site. Contractor to furnish and supply all equipment and personnel necessary for continued protection of tree and planting areas. Scope to include pruning, protection from physical damage and disease, and irrigation during site work and construction.

B. All trees within the street rights-of-way or immediately adjacent to or overhanging the

construction area shall be preserved, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. C. Construction activities that the trees need to be preserved from include, but are not limited

to, excavation and fill activities, boring and/or trenching, construction equipment, construction materials, and construction spoils.

D. Any construction activities that require use of the Tree Preservation Zone(“TPZ”) shall

require prior written authorization by the Project Arborist. This requirement is inclusive of any those activities described in item A above.

E. The Contractor is responsible for any damages caused by the Contractor to trees either

within, or immediately adjacent to the TPZ penalties for damage caused by the contractor to trees or areas selected by Owner’s representative. Contractor shall be directly responsible for protection and welfare of existing trees within and around the TPZ which are noted to remain. This responsibility shall continue throughout the full construction period until the entire Project is completed and accepted by the Owner and through completion of the guarantee period and shall include but not be limited to providing all barricades as required and providing protection from mechanical damage, soil compaction, pollution from all sources, and disruption of environmental support which would result in the loss of vigor of said plantings. Contractor shall not take any action foreseeable leading to the death of a tree or permanent damage to its health, including but not limited to excessive pruning, cutting, girdling, poisoning, over watering, unauthorized relocation or transportation of a tree, or machine trenching, excavating, altering the grade, or paving within the root zone of a tree. Exceptions deemed necessary shall be done under the guidance and review of a licensed arborist and with approval from the Owner.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. “Tree Pruning Guidelines”, latest edition, International Society of Arboriculture(“ISA”), Texas Chapter, 242 Monkey Road, Elgin, TX 78621, Tel: (512)587-7515, Fax: (512)281-3974.

B. "Guide for Establishing Values of Trees and Other Plants," latest edition, International

Society of Arboriculture, Texas Chapter, 242 Monkey Road, Elgin, TX 78621, Tel: (512)587-7515, Fax: (512)281-3974.

C. Trees shall be pruned in accordance with the American National Standard for tree pruning,

ANSI A300 (Part 1) – 2001 Pruning Revision of ANSI A300-1995 Tree, Shrub and Other


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-2

Woody Plant Maintenance – Standard Practices. Pruning shall be completed by professional, certified arborists who has received training in proper pruning techniques.

1.3 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS

A. Contractor shall employ an experienced Certified Arborist for all specimen tree pruning activities specified herein, with a minimum of five (5) years experience in this type of work. The arborist's qualifications shall be submitted to the Project Arborist for approval, three (3) weeks prior to start of work.

B. All tree trimming and work involving tree roots required to protect trees shall be performed

by or under the supervision of a qualified tree surgeon or urban forester, or certified arborist

1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Tree Preservation Zone(“TPZ”) means the area that is outlined with temporary fencing, or

as identified by the Project Arborist, to identify the critical root zone areas. The extent of the TPZ may extend beyond the trees drip line.

B. Dripline means the area around the tree trunk as measured 4’-0” above ground. The

distance of the dripline from the perimeter of the trunk shall be 1’-0” for every 1” of tree trunk caliper or the vertical distance to the furthermost extent of the tree crown(foliage) whichever is greater. For example, a tree with a 30” caliper shall have a dripline that is 30’-0”(60’-0” diameter) from the trunk perimeter unless the tree crown extends beyond 30’-0” in which case this dimension would be used.

C. Certified Arborist means a person who has successfully completed the International

Society of Arboriculture certification process, or who is a member of the American Society of Consulting Arborists.

D. Root Flare(or collar) is the area at the base of the tree at the ground line which is

noticeable as an increased ‘swelling’ of the tree trunk. E. Injury is defined, without limitation, as any bruising, scarring, tearing, or breaking of roots,

branches, or trunk. F. Root zone is defined as the greater of 5 times the diameter of the trunk as a radius or the

outermost limits of the tree canopy. G. Project Arborist (LA) is a licensed Project Arborist or a representative as designated by the

LA.

1.5 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warrant that all trees covered by the provisions of this Section will be

healthy and in flourishing condition of active growth one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion. Where there has been evidence of neglect or violation of tree protection, the warranty shall extend for another year.

B. During the warranty period the Contractor shall be liable for damages to all trees covered

by the provisions of this Section and shall pay compensation to the Owner. If a tree to remain is destroyed, or damaged so that in the judgment of the Owner’s Representative or the Owner it should be replaced, it shall be removed at Contractor’s expense and shall closely match size, color, and variety of damaged plantings. If replacement plant materials


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-3

are not available or desired by the Owner, liquidated damages will be assessed at the value of the tree as determined by ISA formula.

C. Contractor will not be held responsible for failures due to neglect by the Owner, vandalism,

etc., during the warranty period only if such conditions are reported immediately to the Project Arborist and the damage is documented.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall visit the site and review the site conditions thoroughly

B. The survey information provided is intended to identify the locations and sizes of each tree to be preserved. The Contractor shall verify all existing site conditions prior to initiating work.

C. Preserve and protect existing trees and plants to remain from foliage, branch, trunk, or root damage that could result from construction operations

D. Prevent the following types of damage:

1. Compaction of root zone by foot or vehicular traffic, or material storage. 2. Trunk and branch damage from equipment operations, material storage, or from nailing

or bolting. 3. Trunk and branch damage caused by ropes or guy wires. 4. Root or soil contamination from spilled solvents, gasoline, paint, lime slurry, and other

noxious materials. 5. Branch damage due to improper pruning or trimming. 6. Damage from lack of water due to:

a. Cutting or altering natural water migration patterns near root zones b. Failure to provide adequate watering

7. Damage from alteration of soil pH factor caused by depositing lime, concrete, plaster, or other base materials near roots zones.

8. Cutting of roots larger than one inch in diameter. 1.7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Stipulated Price(Lump Sum): If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract, payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price.

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 MACHINERY

A. Trenchers: Shall be capable of cutting trenches between four and six inches (4-6") in width and to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18"). Trenchers shall be of a kind suitable for root pruning operations and be capable of making clean, surgical cuts of tree roots

B. Chain Saws: Shall be sharp. Guide bars shall be true and straight. Cutting width of chain

saw shall be at least 1/3 greater than branches to be cut, so as to facilitate even, clean cuts.


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-4

C. Shears and Hand Trimming Tools: Shall be sharp and free of rust. All cutting tools shall be double-bladed, shear type. “Anvil” type pruners or loppers will not be an acceptable pruning equipment. The appropriate pruning instrument shall be used for the size of branch being removed.

D. All machinery specified herein shall be in good working order and free of any leaking parts.

2.2 TREE PRESERVATION FENCING A. Materials - The fencing material shall be made out of a high visibility, UV resistant, gridded,

orange plastic. The fencing material shall be a minimum of 4’-0” in height. Poles shall be constructed out of 6’ X 5/8” diameter flexible, fiberglass poles or other approved materials, spaced no more than 6’-0” o.c. Approved fencing shall extend a minimum of 2’-0” into the ground. Attach fencing to poles with plastic strap ties.

B. Signage - A weather resistant sign no larger than 12” X 12” shall be displayed at key

locations that utilizes the words “ Tree Preservation Zone” in bold letter with a subheading indicating “no construction activity within the TPZ unless approved in writing by Construction Manager”

C. Duration - The TPZ warning sign and fencing shall be in place for the duration of

construction activities.

2.3 MULCH A. Top Dressing: Organic hardwood bark mulch free from deleterious materials and suitable

for top dressing of trees pits and planting beds. Mulch shall be composed of well-rotted shredded hardwood mulch, black or dark brown in color. 1. Enriched Hardwood bark mulch. Three(3) parts hardwood bark mulch and one (1) part

General Use Compost(Section 329450) 2. Mulch shall be of a high quality and shall contain less than 10% wood particles 3. Mulch shall have particle sizes ranging from 3/8” to a maximum of 1”.

B. Mulch shall be the product of standard stripping of bark from trees for fiber or pulp

manufacturing. Bark shall be shredded in a manner where large pieces are at a minimum. The mulch shall be free of debris.

C. Manufacturer production requirements

1. Raw Materials & feedstock: Virgin yard trimmings and vegetation – includes grass clippings, leaves, branches, trees, pine needles, native woods.

2. Pallets, Treated lumber, Plastics, Decomposable plastics, dry wall, roof shingles, metal, fencing & construction debris shall not be used in production.

3. Raw materials aged for a minimum of 3 to 6 months in a WINDROW configuration. 4. First Grind: Aged raw materials goes through a 1st grind with a 6”x9” screen then aged

in a Windrow for minimum of 3 months – internal windrow temperatures shall range from 150 to 170 degrees.

5. Second Grind: Aged 1st grind material shall pass through a 2nd grind process with a 1.5” screen.

D. Approved Manufacturers

1. The following manufacturers have been preapproved to provide mulch materials for this Work.


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-5

a). The Ground Up, Northwest 9945 Windfern Rd. Houston, TX 77064

P: (281) 970-0003 F: (281) 955-1911 b). Landscape Depot

8901 FM 1960 Rd W Houston, TX 77070-5519 P: (281) 890-0365

2.4 TOPSOIL

A. Friable, enriched organic, sandy clay loam soil free of clay, rock or gravel larger than ½” in diameter, debris waste, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

2.5 ROOT BARRIER

A. The root control barrier shall be an injection molded or extruded modular component made of high density polypropylene or polyethylene plastic.

B. Panels shall measure 24" inches in depth with a mean thickness of 0.08". C. Plastic shall be recyclable and contain ultra-violet inhibitors. D. Not less than four raised ribs protruding 1/2" from the face of the panel and running from

top to bottom thereof. Each rib or root guide will have an anit-compaction cap at its tip, perpendicular to the rib, parallel to the face of the barrier and running the length of the rib thereby forming root nurturing channels. The distance between the guides shall not exceed 6".

E. Each panel shall have an integral male/female sliding lock, the male down the length of one

side and the female down the length of the other.

Available locally from: San Jacinto Environmental Supplies, or approved equal Attention: Greg Cooper Houston, Texas (713) 957-0909.

2.6 VAPOR BARRIER A. 6 mil. Polyethylene plastic sheething. B. Clear or white sheeting. Black is not allowed.

2.7 INSECTICIDES A. Lawn and Garden Spray with Spinosad as manufacture by Green Lights Products Co., San

Antonio, TX, 78217-0985, Tel(210)494-3481, Fax(210) 494-5224. B. Pine Shoot Moth: "Metasystox" or "Orthene", or approved equal. C. Larvae: "Sevin", or approved equal

2.8 FERTILIZERS A. Mycorrhizal inoculants


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-6

B. Rhizanova as manufactured by Becker Underwood Inc. Ames, Louisiana(515)232-5907

Available locally from: San Jacinto Environmental Supplies, or approved equal Attention: Greg Cooper Houston, Texas (713) 957-0909.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Site preparation work and/or construction work shall not begin in any area where tree preservation measures have not been completed and approved.

B. Protect exposed roots and root zone areas from contamination from stabilization materials

and concrete using polyethylene.. C. Cover exposed roots within 4 hours to reduce damage caused by desiccation. Roots may

be covered with soil, mulch, polyethylene, or wet burlap to help protect them from drying. D. Designate limited areas as concrete washout areas. Locate concrete washout areas away

from root zones..

3.2 EXAMINATION A. The Drawings assume that the provided tree survey information is accurate. Contractor

shall verify and stakeout limits of all construction activity falling within the designated tree preservation areas and notify the Project Arborist or Owner’s Representative of any existing tree that differs from the locations represented on the Drawings.

B. Notify the Project Arborist prior to the commencement of any construction activity within the

preservation areas. C. The use of tree preservation areas for material storage, staging of construction activities, or

by personnel during lunch or work breaks is prohibited. D. No plant removal shall take place without permission of the Project Arborist.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. The following work must be accomplished before any construction activities can occur in or adjacent to the TPZ.

B. Prior to performing any work of this Contract, Contractor shall call for a site meeting with

the Project Arborist and licensed arborist. This meeting shall occur prior to construction of any nature on site. The Purpose of the meeting shall be to establish the work procedures, access and haul routes, and tree preservation measures, conditions and methods for preserving all existing trees and the plant materials to be saved. The site shall be photographed to document the condition of the project area and surrounding site, including lay down area and trailer area, to document existing landscape plantings and irrigation systems. These photographs shall become the basis for future evaluation should damage


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-7

occur to the landscape planting and irrigation system during the construction. An tree preservation report shall also be done and be on file prior to construction.

C. The Contractor shall outline the TPZ under the supervision of the Project Arborist. D. Prior to construction the Contractor shall verify in writing that all preconstruction activities

as they relate to the establishment of the Tree Preservation Zone or any other prescribed methods or techniques have been successfully completed.

E. Sequencing Schedule: Coordinate and cooperate with other trades to enable the work to

proceed as rapidly and efficiently as possible. Protective fencing shall be in place before any other work is begun on site, including materials delivery and storage.

3.4 TPZ FENCING

A. Designation of the TPZ shall be designated by the approved construction fencing. TPZ construction fencing shall remain until all site work has been completed.

B. The extent of the TPZ is generally defined as the back of curb to the right-of-way line for

the entire length of the construction area or as designated by the Project Arborist. Each tree or groups of trees to be preserved shall be enclosed with a physical barrier consisting of a perimeter fence unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The fencing shall be continuous between posts and shall be pulled taut, both vertically and horizontally, prior to fastening to the posts with plastic cable ties.

C. The fencing shall be located three (3) feet outside of the tree, or group of trees, drip line or

as indicated on the drawings. D. The Contractor cannot relocate and/or move the fencing without the written permission of

the Project Arborist. The Contractor, in addition, cannot conduct construction activities within the TPZ without the approval of the Project Arborist.

E. The TPZ shall be marked with a ‘warning sign’ at intervals of not less than 100 feet for a

minmimum of one (1) sign per side of fencing.

F. Damage to the fencing during the progress of the Work shall be immediately repaired at not additional cost to the OWNER. Workmen shall be instructed to exercise caution in performing of work near trees being preserved.

G. Activities within the TPZ shall be closely monitored

3.5 PROHIBITED ACTIVITIES IN TPZ

Construction activities prohibited include, but are not limited to the following item: A. Storage or parking of vehicles and/or construction equipment B. Storage of construction materials of any type including, but not limited to petroleum

products, concrete mixes, dirty water, lime, and gravel. C. Storage of excavation spoils and/or fill materials.


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-8

D. Construction spoils including, but not limited to concrete washout, paint thinners and excess petroleum products, lime, or any other material which may be deleterious to the trees.

E. Cutting of tree roots due to utility trenching, digging, placement of curbs or other

construction activities. F. Any soil disturbance due to stripping existing topsoil or added fill soil G. Use of trees as support posts, anchorage, power poles, or signposts; anchorage for ropes,

guy wires, or power lines; or other similar functions either permanent or temporary. H. Damage to trunk, limbs, or foliage caused by maneuvering vehicles or stacking material or

equipment too close to the tree. I. Excessive water or heat from equipment, utility line construction, or burning of trash under or

near bushes or trees. J. Damage to root system from flooding, erosion, puddling or continuous running water, and

excessive wetting and drying resulting from dewatering and other operations. K. Skinning or bruising of bark.

3.6 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING in TPZ(Use Only If Applicable)

A. Excavation within the dripline of trees or in the TPZ shall be done only where absolutely

necessary and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Utility trenching within the Tree Protection Zone is prohibited unless previously approved in

writing by the Project Arborist. Heavy equipment such as backhoes and steel treaded tractors are prohibited in the TPZ.

C. Where trenching for utilities is required within root zone, tunneling under and around roots

shall be by hand digging, directional drilling that tunnels under protected root structure, or Hydraulic or pneumatic air excavation Main lateral roots and taproots shall not be cut. Smaller roots 1” in diameter or less that interfere with installation of new work may be cut with prior approval. Cut roots with a sharp pruning instrument. Roots 2” and larger must remain injury free.

D. Where excavation for new construction is required within root zone of trees, hand excavation

shall be employed to minimize damage to root system. Existing grade of tree at its crown shall be marked with non-toxic paint before construction begins. Roots shall be relocated in backfill areas wherever possible. If 3” or larger roots are encountered, they shall be exposed beyond excavation limits as required to bend and relocate without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and relocation is not practical, roots shall be hand pruned under direction and approval of a Certified Arborist 6" back from new construction and treated as exposed roots.

E. Exposed, cut or broken roots shall not be allowed to dry out before permanent backfill is

placed. Temporary earth cover shall be provided, or roots shall be packed with wet peat moss or four layers of wet, untreated burlap and temporarily supported and protected from damage until permanently relocated and covered with backfill. The cover over the roots shall be wetted to the point of runoff daily.


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-9

3.7 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF TREES.

A. Dead and damaged trees that are determined by The Project Arborist and /or Certified Arborist to be incapable of restoration to normal growth pattern shall be removed. Perform removal to limits shown on drawings only after fencing and root pruning operations are complete.

3.8 GRADING AND FILLING AROUND TPZ

A. Maintain existing grade within the dripline of trees, unless otherwise indicated. B. Where existing grade around trees is above new finish grade, under supervision of Project

Arborist and/or Owner’s Representative, carefully hand excavate within the dripline to make transition to new finish grade.

C. Where existing grade is below new finish grade, place clean bank sand in a single layer to

make the transition to new grade. Do not compact; hand grade to required elevation. Specifically to areas where proposed curb is higher than existing and backfill will be required.

3.9 DEMOLITION AND PLACEMENT OF SIDEWALKS

When existing pavement is to be removed and/or replaced in the TPZ the following methods shall be employed. A. Removal Of Sidewalk Pavement -

1. Demolition of existing sidewalks, located in or adjacent to the limits of tree protection fencing, shall be completed without disturbing, cutting, or otherwise damaging tree roots and soil located beneath them.

2. Existing sidewalk pavements shall be broken up by hand or with a hand operated jackhammer. Truck and/or backhoe mounted equipment shall not be used.

3. Sidewalk debris shall be removed to a vehicle that is outside of the TPZ. No construction debris shall be stored or placed in the TPZ.

4. If the sidewalk is to be replaced, do not remove any existing base material. If the sidewalk is to be abandoned and converted to a landscape area, existing base material should be removed unless it is interwoven with tree roots then the base material should remain.

5. Four (4) inches of hardwood bark mulch shall be applied to the areas where existing sidewalk pavement has been removed for the duration of construction, or as directed by the Project Arborist. This practice is to prevent inadvertent soil compaction and help in moisture retention.

B. Placement Of Sidewalk Pavement -

1. Existing sidewalk pavements should be relocated to outside of the drip line or active root zone(TPZ) if at all possible. If sidewalk needs to be rebuilt within the TPZ then a flexible paver unit on sand base construction should be utilized and placed on top of the existing grade without any soil excavation.

2. Poured in place concrete sidewalks shall not be used. Sidewalks that are within five (5) feet or adjacent to the root flare shall be relocated as far away from root flare as possible. The root flare is defined as the furthest, measurable extent on natural grade of the tree trunk/root systems.


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-10

3. The new sidewalk shall be formed at or above the elevation of the existing sidewalk, without disturbing, cutting or otherwise damaging tree roots. Every effort has been made to address tree root and sidewalk elevation issues with information available in the field and on plan and profile sheets. The elevation of every tree root was not available, if tree roots are found to be in conflict with proposed sidewalk, Project Arborist and/or Owner’s Representative shall be consulted as to how to install sidewalks with minimal impacts to presreved trees.

3.10 DEMOLITION AND PLACEMENT OF ROADWAY CURBS

At locations where existing roadway curbs are to be removed and/or replaced the following methods shall be employed. A. Removal Of Concrete Curbs and Roadway Debris at Back of Curb -

1. Extreme care should be taken when breaking up existing concrete roadway curbs and roadway subbases. If possible these curbs shall be broken with a hand operated jackhammer. If manual removal is not practical and truck and/or backhoe mounted equipment is used the contractor shall minimize back of curb disruptions.

2. Debris from this demolition shall be removed to a vehicle that is outside of the TPZ. No construction debris shall be stored or placed in the TPZ.

3. The existing base material that is along the back of curb shall only be removed if there are no tree roots. If the base material is intermixed with the roots then the base material should remain.

4. If tree roots are present at the back of curb line then existing roots shall be root pruned according to the recommended root pruning techniques.

B. Placement Of Roadway Curbs and Roadway Sub bases - No excavation behind back of

curb will be allowed for reconstruction of the roadway curb or for stabilization of the proposed roadway base. Further more, the Contractor shall employ the following additional TPZ methods and procedures when reconstructing the roadway curbs. 1. Chemical barrier and trench - An impervious plastic barrier of 6 mil thick polyethylene

plastic shall be utilized along the entire length of the TPZ to a depth of ±12” below the lowest point of the roadway bed excavation at the back of curb and extending to ±12” above top of finished curb. The barrier shall be backfilled with native soil along it’s length. Wooden stakes placed at 4’-0” o.c. intervals and driven a minimum of 12” below the deepest excavation depth. The barrier shall be securely fastened to the stakes.


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-11

3.11 TREE CROWN PRUNING.

A. Tree pruning activities shall be conducted under the supervision of the Contractor’s Certified Arborist. The Contractor shall engage, at his expense, a Certified Arborist to monitor the required pruning activities.

B. Tree pruning activities shall be conducted in accordance with the previously specified

standards.

C. Where pruning activities are required for trees that overhang adjacent properties, the owner shall be notified a minimum of 48 hours prior to initiating work. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damage that may occur to property as a result of this Work.

D. Tree Crown Cleaning – the selective removal of dead, diseased, broken, crowded, weakly

attached, and water sprouts. E. Tree Crown Thinning – the selective removal of branches to decrease the density and

provide for increased light penetration and air movement through the crown. Branches to be removed 1. No more than ¼ of the trees foliage shall be removed. ½ of the foliage shall be on

the lower 2/3 of the crown. 2. Contractor shall use thinning cuts which is removing a branch at it’s point of origin

and/or shortening a branch or leader by cutting to a lateral large enough to assume a terminal role.

3. Thinning shall be performed evenly throughout the crown and care should be taken to retain well-spaced inner lateral branches with foliage.

F. Tree Crown Raising – the selective removal of lower branches to provide vertical

clearance. 1. No more than ¼ of the trees foliage shall be removed. ½ of the foliage shall be on

the lower 2/3 of the crown. 2. Pruning activities shall provide for a uniform, evenly distributed canopy height. 3. See plan drawings for approximate size, canopy height, and location of branches to

be removed.

3.12 HAND DIGGING OF SERVICE TAPS AND LEADS A. Trees called out for Hand dig service tap are located in very close proximity to existing

short side water meters.

B. These short side service taps shall be excavated with manual labor to expose any roots 1” in diameter and larger. The first 24” of excavation shall be completed manually to expose the roots. Any root 1” in diameter and larger shall remain undamaged, the roots shall not be cut , nor shall the bark and cambium layer be scraped or damaged.

C. Once the roots are exposed, if there is adequate room to utilize a mini-excavator without

damaging the roots, the mini-excavator can be utilized to complete the excavation down to the water line. 1” plywood shall be placed on grade to provide root protection in the area of access of the mini-excavator.


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-12

3.13 BORING/AUGERING OF UTILITY LINES

A. Water line or sanitary sewer line shall be bored/augured/ horizontally drilled undercritical root zones areas of trees designated with auger or bore in the tree treatment schedule. The entire area protected with the TPZ shall be bored. No bore pits, come through holes, peep holes, push pits, or long or short side service taps shall be allowed in the areas protected by tree protection fencing.

B. The tree protection plan takes into consideration the limits of augering equipment, there should be room for adequately spaced bore pits, peep holes, come through holes, and push pits.

C. Any changes to the location of the tree protection fencing shall be authorized by the Project Arborist and/or Owner’s Representative

3.14 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Chemically treat tree trunks with evidence of borer activity with the appropriate approved insecticide mixed and applied per the manufacturer’s product application recommendations. Trees shall be sprayed within 24 hours after observance of borer activity.

B. Pesticide applications shall be conducted by a licensed applicator. C. Application of pesticides shall be conducted under the supervisions of the Contractor’s

Certified Arborist. D. If pruning activities occur between May and August, the a treatment of Lawn and Garden

Spray with Spinosad as manufacture by Green Lights Products Co., San Antonio, TX, 78217-0985, Tel(210)494-3481, Fax(210) 494-5224., or approved equal pesticide shall be used to control potential borer insect damage.

E. Trees with evidence of other insect problems shall be treated with Lawn and Garden Spray

with Spinosad as manufacture by Green Lights Products Co., San Antonio, TX, 78217-0985, Tel(210)494-3481, Fax(210) 494-5224. or other approved insecticide.

F. All insecticides shall be applied at the manufacturer’s recommended rate.

3.15 ROOT PRUNING TRENCHING.

A. Root pruning within the TPZ shall only take place with written approval of the Project Arborist. Trench locations shown on tree preservation plan are drawn to scale and should be located in field as drawn on plan. Exact locations shall be approved in the field by engineer and/or project urban forester prior to installation

B. Install root pruning trenching where designated in tree treatment schedule and shown on

the tree protection drawings. Trees scheduled for root pruning are called out specifically in the treatment schedule.

C. Trench shall be located 2 ft. from the edge of proposed waterline or sanitary sewer for trees

called out for root pruning for water or fittings, or sanitary sewer in the treatment schedule,


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-13

2 ft. from edge of proposed storm sewer pipe for trees called out for root pruning for storm in the treatment schedule, 30” back of proposed curb for trees called out for root pruning for street, and at edge of sidewalk for trees called out for root pruning for sidewalk.

D. Root pruning shall not be performed where there is not adequate space to be located

sufficiently away from tree to prevent damage. All pruning must be evaluated by Contractor’s Certified Arborist and reviewed and approved by Project Arborist before being performed.

E. Trenching depth shall be a minimum of 2 ft. deep and a maximum of 6 inches wide for

water, fittings, sanitary sewer, storm, and street. Trenching depth shall be to the anticipated bottom of sidewalk and base material for sidewalk root pruning, roots lower than sidewalk shall not be pruned. All roots shall be cut by trencher, chainsaw, or handsaw to the specified depth. Roots shall be cut cleanly, and or not ripped, torn, or chopped.

F. Trench shall be backfilled and compacted immediately after trenching. Trench shall be

installed prior to any clearing and grubbing, excavation for underground, or any other site work. Provide root pruning trenching as shown in the construction details.

G. The Trenching width shall be a maximum of 6” and the depth shall be 24”. H. Roots ¾” or greater in diameter shall be inspected and if needed, hand pruned to provide a

clean cut. I. Install vapor barrier and TPZ fencing as required. Backfill trench temporarily with native

soil or provide gravel backfill as specified. 3.16 PROTECTION OF EXPOSED ROOTS

A. The Contractor shall immediately apply 3”-4” of hardwood bark mulch on top of soil area where existing pavement is removed and roots are exposed.

B. Cover roots exposed during excavation activities with loose top soil. C. This area should be monitored and periodically watered as required during the construction

period, to compensate for water loss due to natural drought or loss of moisture, caused by adjacent construction activity.

3.17 DAMAGE TO TREE AND/OR TREE ROOT ZONE

A. The Contractor will be assessed for damages to trees designated to be preserved, resulting from the Contractor's negligence or failure to comply with the requirements of this Specifi-cation, in accordance with the criteria established in the latest edition of International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) "Guide for Establishing Values of Trees and Other Plants", prepared by the Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers (CTLA).

B. Damage to existing tree crowns or roots over 2 inches in diameter shall be immediately

reported to the Project Arborist in writing, and at the direction of the Project Arborist and/or Owner’s Representative, repaired immediately at the Contractor's expense.

C. The Contractor’s Certified Arborist shall direct repair of trees damaged by construction

operations. Repairs shall be made promptly after damage occurs to prevent progressive


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-14

deterioration of damaged trees. Repair shall include but not be limited to removal of rough edges and sprung bark, severely injured branches and aeration of the root zone of trees where compaction has occurred as directed by Project Arborist and/or Owner’s Representative. All costs associated with mitigation of damage to trees to be paid by the contractor.

D. Damaged tree limbs or trees which have died as a result of injury during construction shall

remain the property of the Owner and shall remain or be removed by the Contractor as directed by the Owner.

E. The Project Arborist may require additional methods and procedures to reduce the stress of

trees to be preserved 1. Inadvertent Soil Compaction - Depending on the severity of the compaction the

Project Arborist may require additional aeration and/or supplemental watering of the root zone.

2. Construction Work in TPZ - If approved construction activities within the TPZ are allowed, such as removal and/or replacement of sidewalks or utility trenching, the Project Arborist may require mulching, aeration and/or supplemental watering of the root zone during construction.

F. Any tree to remain which is damaged or destroyed owing to the Contractor's negligence or

failure to provide adequate protection shall be compensated for dependent on its caliper and in accordance with the schedule of values most current to ISA guidelines, but not less than:

7” $3,000 8” $3,500 9” $4,000 10” $5,000 11” $6,000 12” $8,000 13” $9,000 14” $10,000 15” $11,000 16” $12,000 17” $13,000 18” and over add$ 2,000 for each caliper inch

3.18 ROOT ZONE AERATION

A. At or near the end of the construction period, TPZ shall be mechanically aerated.

3.19 FERTILIZER APPLICATION

A. At or near the end of the construction period, the Contractor shall apply a deep root fertilizer treatment for all existing trees.

B. Fertilize entire root zone system within the drip line of the tree. C. Fertilizer shall be a liquid commercial fertilizer. Nitrogen shall be organically based and be

of a slow release type.


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-15

1. "Arbor Green 30-10-7" fertilizer as manufactured by Davey Tree, Kent, Ohio. 2. Doggett's Injectofeed "32-12-8" fertilizer as manufactured by A.L. Doggett Inc.,

Lebanon, N.J.

D. Mixture shall be injected with approximately 150 psi pressure into the top 12 inches of the soil.

E. Application rates shall be based upon the required soil test and for the time of year of

application. F. Fertilizer can be combined with Michrorhyzal treatment.

3.20 WATERING OF PRESERVED TREES

A. Regularly water trees which have received root damage, to eliminate additional stress caused by lack of moisture. Water during periods without adequate rainfall. For example, should 1.0” of rain not be received within a week period, the trees should be thoroughly watered.

B. March through September, water once every two weeks. October through February, water

every three weeks. Water thoroughly to saturate the entire root zone area. 3.21 MAINTENANCE

A. During construction: Contractor to monitor and perform maintenance activities as required by the Project Arborist to ensure that all trees to be protected are not negatively impacted by construction activities throughout the duration of the construction project. This may include, but not be limited to deep watering and or installation of temporary irrigation. Quantities of water to be applied and lengths of time are variable and shall depend upon seasonal rainfall. Throughout the duration of the project, as deemed necessary by the Project Arborist and/or Arborist, tree leaves/needles shall be washed down with a hose and water or other means necessary to remove accumulated construction dirt and residues.

B. Trees shall have a maintenance period of one (1) year after final. The Contractor shall

initiate quarterly inspections by the Contractor’s Certified Arborist of existing trees to be preserved and submit written reports to the Project Arborist of the general health and well-being of the trees.

3.22 CLEAN-UP

A. At close of construction in each area, remove all protective barriers and any accumulated debris at the direction of the owner’s representative. Transport all barrier materials off site at no additional expense to Owner.

B. Repair all grades and areas of soil compaction, and restore all damaged plant materials.

END OF SECTION


Issue For Bid – 04/21/2016 329500-16

This Page Left Blank

Lane School Renovation STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING Aldine Independent School District SECTION 334100 MA No. R305675.01 SSH, INC. – 1137-0001

Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 334100-1

SECTION 334100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Pressure pipe couplings. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Drains. 5. Encasement for piping. 6. Manholes. 7. Catch basins. 8. Stormwater inlets. 9. Stormwater detention structures. 10. Pipe outlets. 11. Stormwater disposal systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HDPE: High Dense Polyethylene Pipe .

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers. 2. Stormwater inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, covers, and

grates.

C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of cast-iron soil pipe and fitting, from manufacturer.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 334100-2

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

D. Handle stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than fivedays in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Profile Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM F 794, PVC profile, gravity sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, PVC with bell ends. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

2.2 CONCRETE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76.

1. Bell-and-spigot ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C 443, rubber gaskets. 2. Class III, Wall A Wall B Wall C.

2.3 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE

A. High Density Polyethylene Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 3350

1. Bell-and-spigot ends and gasketed joints meet requirements of ASTM F477


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 334100-3

2.4 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section

as required to prevent flotation. 4. Base Section: 12 inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 8 inch minimum thickness

for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

5. Riser Sections: 8 inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is

indicated, and top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 7. Joint Sealant: Provide epoxy bodied fittings and join pipe to fitting with epoxy adhesive. 8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe

connection. 9. Steps: FRP ladder wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and

designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches .

10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

11. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover, and height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

B. Manhole Frames and Covers:

1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inchID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch- minimum width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."

2. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 gray iron unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 334100-4

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

2.6 STORMWATER INLETS

A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards.

B. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.

C. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.

D. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty, according to utility standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 334100-5

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to City of Houston standards.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: 1. Join corrugated PE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints. 2. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-

seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasketed joints. 3. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal

joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. 4. Join nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 14 and ACPA's

"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.

B. Join force-main pressure piping according to the following:

1. Join ductile-iron pressure piping according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41 for push-on joints.

2. Join ductile-iron special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41 for push-on joints.

3. Join PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23 for gasketed joints. 4. Join PVC water-service piping according to ASTM D 2855 for solvent-cemented joints. 5. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings.

3.4 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe. 1. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 4 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.5 DRAIN INSTALLATION

A. Install type of drains in locations indicated.

1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification drains in earth or unpaved foot-traffic <Insert other> areas.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 334100-6

2. Use Medium-Duty, top-loading classification drains in paved foot-traffic <Insert other> areas.

3. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification drains in vehicle-traffic service <Insert other> areas.

4. Use Extra-Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification drains in roads <Insert area>.

B. Embed drains in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated.

D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface.

E. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints.

F. Embed trench sections in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

3.6 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION

A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.

B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.

C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.

D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.

E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 334100-7

3.9 CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.

B. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer.

C. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

D. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated.

E. Assemble channel sections with flanged or interlocking joints.

F. Embed channel sections in 4-inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides.

3.10 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains.

B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground manholes and structures by cutting into existing unit and creating an opening large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.

a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials.

4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

C. Connect to sediment interceptors specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Interceptors."


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 334100-8

3.11 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch- thick, brick masonry bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable

methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.

B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and use one procedure below:

1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to

within 12 inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.

C. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.12 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.

1. Use detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.


Issue for Bid – 04/21/2016 334100-9

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:

a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924.

C. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.14 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with water.


ALDINE INDEPENDANT SCHOOL DISTRICT AISD LANE …...general description: project name: aisd lane...

Documents

Transcript of ALDINE INDEPENDANT SCHOOL DISTRICT AISD LANE …...general description: project name: aisd lane...